SPRINT42-10linear-FA-BA-v4.0-en

SPRINT 42|10 linear
CNC FANUC 310
User manual
Release date: 10/2014
Gildemeister Italiana S.p.A.

Via Donizetti, 138 I-24030 Brembate di Sopra (BG)
Tel. ++39 035 607111 Fax ++39 035 607222 www.gildemeister.com
Code: SPRINT42|10linear-FA-BA-v4.0-en
Chapter 1
General informations
Chapter 2
Description of the basic machine
Chapter 3
Safety informations
Chapter 4
Technical machine data
Chapter 5
Toolholders and accessories
Chapter 6
Control interfaces
Chapter 7
Starting and using the machine
Chapter 8
Maintenance
Chapter 9
Transport and installation
Chapter 10
Machine programming
Chapter 11
Auxiliary functions
Chapter 12
Alarms and Messages
Version of the manual
Title User manual SPRINT 42|10 linear
Code SPRINT42|10linear-FA-BA-v4.0-en
These instructions contain information about:

transport installation
use tooling and tuning the machine
machine programming activities maintenance
DANGER
Gildemeister Italiana S.p.A. shall not be liable for injury and damage to per-
sons, property or data consequent to installation, use and maintenance other
than that described in this manual or performed without respecting the safety
recommendations included in this manual.
NOTE
This manual must be kept for the entire technical life of the machine to be
easily retrieved in the event of need.
The machine shall be sold complete with this manual if applicable.
Manufacturer’s identification data
Name Gildemeister Italiana S.p.A.

Address Via Donizetti, 138 I-24030 Brembate di Sopra (BG)
The machine identification data are shown on the plate affixed on the electrical enclosure near the master
switch.
Copyright
Delivering to third parties and reproducing this document, using and disclosing its contents without the pre-
vious authorization of the manufacturer, is forbidden.
Any infringement implies the compensation for the damages incurred. All rights arising from the grant of pa-
tents, utility models or decorative models are reserved.
Concerning the technical contents of the manual, the language of the manufacturer (it) prevails.
SPRINT42|10linear-FA-BA-v4.0-en
Always close by! www.dmgmori.com
Headquarters Europe
Germany: DMG MORI Austria DMG MORI Hungary _ Jekaterinburg
DMG MORI Deutschland Oberes Ried 11 · A-6833 Klaus Vegyész u. 17 – 25 · B. Building ul. Sofi Kowalewskoj 4, litera Z
Riedwiesenstraße 19 Tel.: +43 (0) 55 23 / 6 91 41 - 0 H-1116 Budapest RUS-620049 Jekaterinburg
D-71229 Leonberg Fax: +43 (0) 55 23 / 6 91 41 - 100 Tel.: +36 1 430 16 14 Tel.: +7 343 379 04 73
Tel.: +49 (0) 71 52 / 90 90 - 0 Service Hotline: +43 (0) 1 795 76 109 Fax: +36 1 430 16 15 Fax: +7 343 379 04 74
Fax: +49 (0) 71 52 / 90 90 - 22 44 Service Hotline: +36 1 777 90 57
_ Stockerau _ St. Petersburg
Europe: Josef Jessernigg-Str. 16 · A-2000 Stockerau DMG MORI Ibérica pr. Obuhovskoy Oborony 271, litera A
DMG MORI Europe Tel.: +43 (0) 55 23 / 6 91 41 - 0 Pol. Ind. Els Pinetons RUS-192012 St. Petersburg
Lagerstrasse 14 Fax: +43 (0) 55 23 / 6 91 41 - 100 Avda. Torre Mateu 2 – 8 · Nave 1 Tel.: +7 812 313 80 71
CH-8600 Dübendorf E-08291 Ripollet · Barcelona Fax: +7 812 313 80 71
DMG MORI Benelux
Tel.: +41 (0) 44 / 8 01 12 - 40 Tel.: +34 93 586 30 86
_ Nederland DMG MORI Scandinavia
Fax: +41 (0) 44 / 8 01 12 - 31 Fax: +34 93 586 30 91
Wageningselaan 48 _ Danmark
Asia: NL-3903 LA Veenendaal _ Madrid Robert Jacobsens Vej 60 · 2.tv
DMG MORI Asia Tel.: +31 (0) 318 - 55 76 - 11 C / Alcañiz 23 DK-2300 København S
3 Tuas Link 1 Fax: +31 (0) 318 - 52 44 - 29 E-28042 Madrid Tel.: +45 70 21 11 11
Singapore 638584 Service Turning: +31 (0) 318 - 55 76 - 33 Tel.: +34 91 66 99 865 Fax: +45 49 17 77 00
Tel.: +65 66 60 66 88 Service Milling: +31 (0) 318 - 55 76 - 34 Fax: +34 91 66 93 834
_ Sverige
Fax: +65 66 60 66 99 Service Fax: +31 (0) 318 - 55 76 - 10
_ San Sebastián EA Rosengrens gata 5
America: _ Belgium Edificio Igaraburu S-421 31 Västra Frölunda
DMG MORI America Hermesstraat 4B · B-1930 Zaventem Pokopandegi, 11 Oficina 014 Tel.: +46 31 348 98 00
2400 Huntington Blvd. Tel.: +32 (0) 2 / 7 12 10 - 90 E-20018 San Sebastián Fax: +46 31 47 63 51
Hoffman Estates IL 60192 Fax: +32 (0) 2 / 7 12 10 - 99 Tel.: +34 943 100 233
PRO.D5925_0513UK D6138_0414ND5 Subject to modification. Technical update rights reserved. The machines depicted here may include some options, equipment and CNC alternatives.
_ Norge
Tel.: +1 (847) 593 - 5400 Service: +32 (0) 2 / 7 12 10 - 94 Fax: +34 943 226 929
Bergsli Metallmaskiner AS
Fax: +1 (847) 593 - 5433
DMG MORI Czech DMG MORI Italia Gateadresse: Bedriftsveien 64
Kaštanová 8 · CZ-620 00 Brno Via G. Donizetti 138 N-3735 Skien
Tel.: +420 545 426 311 I-24030 Brembate di Sopra (BG) Postadresse: Postboks 2553
Fax: +420 545 426 310 Tel.: +39 035 62 28 201 N-3702 Skien
Service: +420 545 426 320 Fax: +39 035 62 28 210 Tel.: +47 35 50 35 00
Service Fax: +420 545 426 325 Service Fax: +39 035 62 28 250 Fax: +47 35 50 35 70
_ Planá _ Milano _ Finland

Chýnovská 535 · CZ-39111 Planá nad Lužnicí Via Riccardo Lombardi 10 Fastems Oy Ab
Tel.: +420 381 406 914 I-20153 Milano (MI) Tuotekatu 4
Fax: +420 381 406 915 Tel.: +39 02 48 94 921 FIN-33840 Tampere
Fax: +39 02 48 91 44 48 Tel.: +358 (0)3 268 5111
_ Slovensko
Fax: +358 (0)3 268 5000
Brnianska 2 · SK-91105 Trenčín _ Padova
Tel.: +421 326 494 824 Via E. Fermi 7 _ Baltic states
I-35030 Veggiano (PD) Fastems UAB
DMG MORI France
Tel.: +39 049 900 66 11 Kalvarijos str. 38
Parc du Moulin · 1, Rue du Noyer
Fax: +39 049 900 66 99 LT-46346 Kaunas
B.P. 19326 Roissy-en-France
Tel.: +370 37 291567
F-95705 Roissy CDG Cedex DMG MORI Middle East
Fax: +370 37 291589
Tel.: +33 (0) 1 / 39 94 68 00 Jebel Ali Free Zone · JAFZA Towers 18
Fax: +33 (0) 1 / 39 94 68 58 Floor 24 · Office 3 DMG MORI Schweiz
PO Box 262 607 · Dubai, U.A.E. Lagerstrasse 14
_ Lyon
Tel.: +971-4-88 65 740 CH-8600 Dübendorf
Parc des Lumières
Fax: +971-4-88 65 741 Tel.: +41 (0) 44 / 8 24 48 - 48
1205, Rue Nicéphore Niepce
Fax: +41 (0) 44 / 8 24 48 - 24
F-69800 Saint-Priest DMG MORI Polska
Service: +41 (0) 44 / 8 24 48 - 12
Tel.: +33 (0) 4 / 78 90 95 95 ul. Fabryczna 7
Service Fax: +41 (0) 44 / 8 24 48 - 25
Fax: +33 (0) 4 / 78 90 60 00 PL-63-300 Pleszew
Tel.: +48 (0) 62 / 7428 000 DMG MORI South East Europe
_ Toulouse
Fax: +48 (0) 62 / 7428 114 9th km. National Road Thessaloniki –
Futuropolis Bat. 2 · 2, Rue Maryse Hilsz
Service: +48 (0) 62 / 7428 285 Moudanion · PO Box: 60233
F-31500 Toulouse
GR-57001 Thessaloniki
Tel.: +33 (0) 5 / 34 25 29 95 DMG MORI Romania
Tel.: +30 2310 47 44 86
Fax: +33 (0) 5 / 61 20 89 19 Road Bucuresti
Fax: +30 2310 47 44 87
Piteşti, DN7, km 110
_ Haute-Savoie
Platforma IATSA DMG MORI Turkey
Espace Scionzier
RO-117715 Piteşti · Stefanesti Ferhatpaşa Mah. Gazipaşa Cad. NO: 11
520 avenue des Lacs · F-74950 Scionzier
Tel.: +40 2486 10 408 TR-34885 Ataşehir · İstanbul
Tel.: +33 (0) 4 / 50 96 41 62
Fax: +40 2486 10 409 Tel.: +90 216 471 66 36
Fax: +33 (0) 4 / 50 96 41 30
Fax: +90 216 471 80 30
DMG MORI Russia
Nowohohlowskaja-Strasse 23 / 1 DMG MORI UK
RUS-109052 Moscow 4030 Siskin Parkway East
Tel.: +7 495 225 49 60 Middlemarch Business Park
Fax: +7 495 225 49 61 Coventry CV3 4PE · GB
Tel.: +44 (0) 2476 516 120
Fax: +44 (0) 2476 516 136
DMG / MORI SEIKI Europe AG

Lagerstrasse 14, CH-8600 Dübendorf
Tel.: +41 (0) 44 / 8 01 12 - 40, Fax: +41 (0) 44 / 8 01 12 - 31
info@dmgmori.com, www.dmgmori.com
Immer in Ihrer Nähe! www.dmgmori.com
DMG MORI Deutschland
Stuttgart Stollberg
Riedwiesenstraße 19 Auer Straße 48, D-09366 Stollberg
D-71229 Leonberg Tel.: +49 (0) 37 29 6 / 541 - 200
Tel.: +49 (0) 71 52 / 90 90 - 0 Fax: +49 (0) 37 29 6 / 541 - 222
Fax: +49 (0) 71 52 / 90 90 - 20 00
München Berlin
Lausitzer Straße 7 Rudower Chaussee 46
D-82538 Geretsried D-12489 Berlin-Adlershof
Tel.: +49 (0) 81 71 / 817 - 51 50 Tel.: +49 (0) 30 / 35 19 06 - 0
Fax: +49 (0) 81 71 / 817 - 51 59 Fax: +49 (0) 30 / 35 19 06 - 10
Bielefeld Hilden
Gildemeisterstraße 60 Im Hülsenfeld 23
D-33689 Bielefeld D-40721 Hilden
Tel.: +49 (0) 52 05 / 74 - 22 33 Tel.: +49 (0) 21 03 / 57 01 - 0
Fax: +49 (0) 52 05 / 74 - 22 39 Fax: +49 (0) 21 03 / 57 01 - 40
Technische Änderungen vorbehalten. Die hier abgebildeten Maschinen können Optionen, Zubehör und Steuerungsvarianten beinhalten.
Hamburg Frankfurt
Merkurring 63 – 65 Steinmühlstraße 12 d
D-22143 Hamburg D-61352 Bad Homburg
Tel.: +49 (0) 40 69 45 8 - 0 Tel.: +49 (0) 61 72 / 49 557 - 0
Fax: +49 (0) 40 69 45 8 - 200 Fax: +49 (0) 61 72 / 49 557 - 30
DMG MORI Austria DMG MORI Schweiz
Klaus Dübendorf
Oberes Ried 11, A-6833 Klaus Lagerstrasse 14
Tel.: +43 (0) 55 23 / 6 91 41 - 0 CH-8600 Dübendorf
Fax: +43 (0) 55 23 / 6 91 41 - 100 Tel.: +41 (0) 44 / 8 24 48 - 48
Stockerau Fax: +41 (0) 44 / 8 24 48 - 24
PRO.D6271_0514DE
Josef Jessernigg-Straße 16
A-2000 Stockerau
Tel.: +43 (0) 55 23 / 6 91 41 - 0
Fax: +43 (0) 55 23 / 6 91 41 -7100
DMG / MORI SEIKI Deutschland GmbH

Riedwiesenstraße 19, D-71229 Leonberg
Tel.: +49 (0) 71 52 / 90 90 - 0, Fax: +49 (0) 71 52 / 90 90 - 22 44
Cooperation sustains innovation www.dmgmori.com
Worldwide at your service

DMG MORI Deutschland DMG MORI Dalian DMG MORI Xi’an Philippines Representative Office
Riedwiesenstraße 19 Room 2603, Tian An Tower 1st Floor Xi’an BeiDouXing, TECHline Machine Tools, Inc.
D-71229 Leonberg 88 Zhongshan Road, Zhongshan District Numeral Building, Keji Ba Road 100 North Science Avenue
Tel.: +49 (0) 71 52 / 90 90 - 0 Dalian 116001 High-Tech Region, Xi’an Laguna Technopark
Fax: +49 (0) 71 52 / 90 90 - 22 44 Tel.: +86 20 8752 0660 Shaanxi Province 710077 Binan, Laguna, Philippines 4024 034
Fax: +86 20 8752 0655 Tel.: +86 29 8833 5706 Tel.: +63 25 19 77 12
DMG MORI Europe Fax: +86 29 8833 5705 Fax: +63 28 62 68 61
Lagerstrasse 14 DMG MORI Guangdong
CH-8600 Dübendorf 1st Floor, Juhe International Machine Mould DMG MORI India DMG MORI Vietnam
Tel.: +41 (0) 44 / 8 01 12 - 30 Metal Town, Jinxia Yilong Road Bangalore: No.3/1, 3rd Main Road Hanoi: Unit #1704, 17th Floor, Thang Long
Fax: +41 (0) 44 / 8 01 12 - 31 Chang’an Town, Dongguan City K I A D B Peenya 1st Stage, Ward 1, HMT Tower, 98 Nguy Nhu Kon Tum Street
Guangdong Province 523852 Bangalore 560 058, India Thanh Xuan District, Hanoi City, Vietnam
DMG MORI America Tel.: +86 769 8188 5988 Tel.: +91 80 40 89 65 00 Tel.: +84 43 7665 924 / 925
2400 Huntington Blvd. Fax: +86 769 8188 5981 Fax: +91 80 41 13 12 85 Fax: +84 43 7665 926
Hoffman Estates · IL 60192
Tel.: +1 (847) 593 - 5400 DMG MORI Guangzhou Pune: Unit No. 206, 2nd Floor, CTS / Survey Ho Chi Minh City: 6th Floor, Mekong Tower
Fax: +1 (847) 593 - 5433 Room 09-10, 28F No. 5 Regent Plaza, Behind Symantec 235 Cong Hoa St., Ward 13,
Goldlion Digital Network Center Software Baner Pashan Link Road Tan Binh District
DMG MORI Asia 138 Tiyu Road East, Tianhe District Pune 411 045, Maharashtra, India Ho Chi Minh City, Vietnam
3 Tuas Link 1 · Singapore 638584 Guangzhou 510620 Tel.: +84 86 28 16 638
Subject to modification. Technical update rights reserved. The machines depicted here may include some options, equipment and CNC alternatives
Tel.: +65 66 60 66 88 Tel.: +86 20 8752 0660 Ahmedabad: 310, Safal Prelude, Off Corporate Fax: +84 86 28 16 639
Fax: +65 66 60 66 99 Fax: +86 20 8752 0655 Road, Behind Kataria Automobiles,
Prahaladnagar Satellite, Ahmedabad 382 210 DMG MORI Australia
DMG MORI Qingdao Tel.: +91 79 40 32 27 64 Melbourne: Unit 6 / 6 Garden Road,
Asia Room 906, Zhaoyin Building Fax: +91 79 40 32 27 65 Clayton, VIC, 3168, Australia
No. 36 Hongkong Middle Road Tel.: +61 3 8545 0900
Qingdao 266071, Shandong Province New Delhi: 502, 5th Floor, Plot No. D-9, Fax: +61 3 9561 4999
DMG MORI China Tel.: +86 532 8667 8700 Gopal Heights Netaji Subhash Place
DMG MORI Shanghai Fax: +86 532 8667 87 Pitampura, Delhi 110 034 Sydney: Unit 6 / 287 Victoria Road
331 Guangzhong Road Tel.: +91 11 46 46 96 00 AU-2116 Rydalmere, NSW
Shanghai 201108 DMG MORI Shenyang Fax: +91 11 46 46 96 15 Phone +61 2 88 44 97 00
Tel.: +86 21 6764 8876 Block A, No 18 Feiyun Road Fax: +61 2 96 38 61 11
Fax: +86 21 6764 9033 Hunnan New District, Shenyang DMG MORI Taiwan
Liaoning Province 110168 No. 12-3, Industrial 33rd Road, DMG MORI Japan
DMG MORI Beijing Tel.: +86 24 2382 6999 Industrial Park, Taichung City DMG MORI SEIKI CO., LTD.
Room 1605, Tower B Beijing Global Trade Fax: +86 24 2382 6191 407 Taiwan R.O.C. 2-35-16 Meieki, Nakamura-ku, Nagoya City,
Center, No. 36 North Third Ring Road East Tel.: +886 4 23 55 - 64 90 Aichi 450-0002, Japan
Dongcheng District, Beijing 100013 DMG MORI Shenzhen Fax: +886 4 23 55 - 65 05 Tel: +81-52-587-1811
Tel.: +86 10 5825 6006 Room 1710, West Wing Fax: +81-52-587-1818
Fax: +86 10 5825 6007 Great China International Exchange Square DMG MORI Korea
Fuhua Road, Futian District 341, Gongdan1-dzaero, Shiheung-si, DMG MORI Thailand
DMG MORI Chongqing Shenzhen 518048 Gyeonggi-do, 429-932, Korea Ayutthaya: 40 Moo 4 Rojana Industrial Park 2
12F Room C2, Tower B, Langgao Kaiyue Tel.: +86 755 8359 1997 Tel.: (031) 488-0500 Fax: (031) 488-0567 Rojana Road, Tambol U-Thai,
Office Building, No. 2 Nanping West Road Fax: +86 755 8359 1997 info@dmgmori.com, www.dmgmori.com Amphur U-Thai, Ayutthaya 13210
Nan’an District, Chongqing 400060 Tel.: +66-35-746 720
P.R. China DMG MORI Suzhou Fax: +66-35-746 731
Tel.: +86 23 6295 6876 Room 601, Gold River International Center DMG MORI Malaysia
Fax: +86 23 6295 6903 No. 88 Shishan Road No. 19, Jalan Pendidik U1 / 31, Seksyen U1, DMG MORI Indonesia
New District, Suzhou 215011 Hicom-Glen·marie Industrial Park PT. MORI SEIKI Indonesia
Tel.: +86 512 6818 7180 40150 Shah Alam, Selangor, Malaysia Komplek Gading Bukit Indah Blok M/01
Fax: +86 512 6818 7909 Tel.: +603 5569 5282 Jl. Bukit Gading Raya, Kelapa Gading
Fax: +603 5569 5286 Jakarta Utara, 14240, Indonesia
DMG MORI Tianjin Tel.: +62-21-453 1199
Room 17-B Ping’an Mansion DMG MORI South East Asia Fax: +62-21-458 57 414
No. 59 Ma Chang Road 3 Tuas Link 1, Singapore 638584
PRO.D5739_0113KR D5744_0713AD23
Hexi District, Tianjin 300203 Tel.: +65 66 60 66 88

Tel.: +86 22 5819 8188 Fax: +65 66 60 66 99
Fax: +86 22 5819 8189
DMG MORI Korea

!"# $%$ &' 1 () 341*+,-./01II 1 2 110 3, 4563: 429-932
78: (031) 488-0500 9:: (031) 488-0567
Always close by! www.dmgmori.com
DMG MORI USA
DMG MORI CHARLOTTE DMG MORI DALLAS DMG MORI LOS ANGELES
4345 Morris Park Dr. 9001 Currency St. 5740 Warland Dr.
Charlotte, NC 28227 Irving, TX 75063 Cypress, CA 90630
Tel.: (704) 940-3380 Tel.: (972) 929-8321 Tel.: (562) 430-3800
Fax: (704) 840-1101 Fax: (972) 929-8226 Fax: (562) 430-5570
DMG MORI CHICAGO DMG MORI DETROIT DMG MORI SAN FRANCISCO
2400 Huntington Blvd. 29050 Cabot Dr. 2607 7th St., Suite C
Hoffman Estates, IL 60192 Novi, MI 48377 Berkeley, CA 94710
Tel.: (847) 593-5400 Tel.: (248) 324-1928 Tel.: (866) 814-7238
ADVERTISING
Fax: (847) 593-5433 Fax: (248) 324-0710 Fax: (510) 845-4924
DMG MORI CINCINNATI DMG MORI HOUSTON DMG MORI SEATTLE
MONTFORT
5333 Mulhauser Rd. 3403 N. Sam Houston Pkwy. West, Suite 100 19625 62nd Ave. South, Suite A109
Hamilton, OH 45011 Houston, TX 77086 Kent, WA 98032
Tel.: (513) 874-2736 Tel.: (713) 365-9500 Tel.: (253) 872-1661
Fax: (513) 874-3254 Fax: (713) 365-9515 Fax: (253) 872-2188
Technical update rights reserved. The machines depicted here may include some options, equipment and CNC alternatives.
FOR DIRECT SALES, SUPPORT
AND SERVICE CALL
855-DMG-MORI, 855-364-6674
PRO.D6076/0114US D6136/0314AD7 Subject to modification.
DMG MORI USA

2400 Huntington Blvd., Hoffman Estates, IL 60192
Tel.: (847) 593-5400, Fax: (847) 593-5433
Table of contents
1 General informations
1.1 Machine identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.2 EC Declaration of Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.3 Main reference directives and standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.4 Machine equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.5 Property Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.5.1 Customer prohibitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.5.2 Software license . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.5.3 Intellectual property rights and confidentiality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.6 Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.7 After-sale assistance service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
2 Description of the basic machine

2.1 Control axes configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.1.1 Main spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.1.2 Main spindle block with Rotating bush (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.1.3 Slide X2-Z2 and counterspindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.1.4 Cross slide X1-Y1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.1.5 Slide X3-Y3-Z3 and turret . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2.1.6 Block for rear machining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2.1.7 Y2 slide and tools motorisation (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2.2 Main machine parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2.2.1 Workpiece unloading system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2.2.2 Chip extraction system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
2.2.3 Bar loader (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
2.2.4 Lubrication system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
2.2.5 Pneumatic system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
2.2.6 Pneumatic system for optic scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
2.2.7 Lubricating and cooling system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
2.2.8 Electric system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
2.2.9 Master switch panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
2.2.10 Electrical enclosure conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
2.2.11 Cooling system for linear motors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
2.2.12 Oil-air multiplier system for turret . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
2.2.13 Operating panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
2.2.14 SMARTkey® operating mode selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
2.2.15 Beacon indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
SPRINT42|10linear-FA-BA-v4.0-en I
2.2.16 Illuminated LED row . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
3 Safety informations
3.1 Lifecycle of the machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2 Hazardous zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.3 Envisaged use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.4 Non-envisaged use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.5 Personnel qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.6 Safety devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.6.1 Emergency stop button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.6.2 Fixed and mobile guards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.6.3 Door control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.6.4 Lock systems for vertical axes and linear motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.6.5 Operating mode selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.7 Residual risks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.7.1 Risk of fire and explosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
3.7.2 Vertical axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3.7.3 Linear motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3.8 Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.8.1 What to do in an emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
3.9 Laminated safety window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
3.10 Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
4 Technical machine data

4.1 General technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.2 Power-torque diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4.2.1 Main spindle power-torque diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4.2.2 Counterspindle power-torque diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4.2.3 Motorized power-torque diagram on slide 1 - t = 1:1.700. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4.2.4 Motorized power-torque diagram on slide 1 - t = 1:1.133 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4.2.5 Motorized power-torque diagram on turret - t = 1:1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4.2.6 Motorized power-torque diagram on pick-up slide: t = 1:1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
4.3 Working zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4.3.1 View of the work area and kinematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4.3.2 Working area: plane X1-Y1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
4.3.3 Working area: plane X1-Z1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
4.3.4 Working area: plane X2-Z2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
4.3.5 Working area: plane X2-Z2 (N.2 D.25 + N.2 Rotating - Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
4.3.6 Working area: plane X2-Z2 (N.3 D.25 + N.4 Rotating - Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
4.3.7 Working area: plane Y2 (N.3 D.25 + N.4 Rotating - Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
II SPRINT42|10linear-FA-BA-v4.0-en
4.3.8 Working area: plane X3-Z3 - slide 3 revolver turret . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
4.3.9 Working area: plane X3-Y3 - slide 3 revolver turret . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
4.4 Axes reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
4.4.1 Reference distance X1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
4.4.2 Reference distance Y1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
4.4.3 Reference distance Z1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
4.4.4 Reference distance X2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
4.4.5 Reference distance Z2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
4.4.6 Reference distance Y2 (option). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
4.4.7 Reference angle A3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
4.4.8 Reference distance X3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
4.4.9 Reference distance Y3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
4.4.10 Reference distance Z3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
4.5 End of bar scrap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
4.5.1 Scrap with pince Schaublin 76-81 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
4.5.2 Scrap with bush Duenner B236 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
4.5.3 Scrap with pneumatic recovery bush Duenner B236 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
4.5.4 Scrap with pneumatic recovery bush double cone GILDEMEISTER IT . . . . . . . . . 4-36
5 Toolholders and accessories

5.1 Collet application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.1.1 Main spindle and counterspindle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.1.2 Rotating bush (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5.2 Bushing for rotating bush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5.3 Toolholder and accessories table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
6 Control interfaces
6.1 Operating panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.2 Functional structure of the CNC keyboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
6.2.1 Area 1: CNC mode selection, axis selection and management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6.2.2 Area 2: Spindle management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
6.2.3 Area 3: Part program management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
6.2.4 Area 4: Coolant and chip extractor management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
6.2.5 Area 5: Other functional buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
6.3 Windows icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
6.4 User page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
6.4.1 “Saddle management” page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
6.4.2 “Manufacturing data” page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
6.4.3 “Machine management” page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
6.4.4 “Extractor and conveyor belt” page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
6.4.5 “Spindle angular timing” page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
SPRINT42|10linear-FA-BA-v4.0-en III
6.4.6 “Automatic shutdown” page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
6.4.7 “Loader management” page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
6.4.8 “Maintenance” page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
6.4.9 “Axis stroke restriction” page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
6.4.10 “Data input/output” page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
6.4.11 “Machine configuration” page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
6.4.12 “Wear and geometry setting” page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
6.4.13 “GITAL options enabling” page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
6.4.14 “Axis reference” page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
6.4.15 “Axis reversion clearance” page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
6.4.16 “Warranty” page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
6.4.17 “Software versions” page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
6.4.18 “Cds settings”page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
6.4.19 “CDS diagnosis”page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47
6.4.20 “Heat compensation”page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
7 Starting and using the machine

7.1 Place of work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.2 Turning the machine on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7.2.1 Safety test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.3 Shutting the machine down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
7.4 Preliminary production operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7.5 Use procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
7.5.1 Axis movement with sliding guard open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
7.5.2 Switch over from standard configuration to Swiss Type configuration
(optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
7.5.3 Switch over from Swiss Type configuration to standard configuration
(optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
7.5.4 Main spindle collet replacement (without rotating bush) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
7.5.5 Main spindle collet replacement
(with rotating bush - Swiss type configuration). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
7.5.6 Counterspindle collet replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
7.5.7 Replacement of the ejector head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
7.5.8 Rotating bush guide bushing replacement (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
7.5.9 Main spindle collet opening/closing system adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
7.5.10 Counterspindle collet opening/closing system adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
7.5.11 Rotating bush adjustment (optional). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
7.5.12 Saving CNC parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
7.5.13 Saving geometries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
7.5.14 Saving macro variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
7.5.15 Saving parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
7.5.16 Saving software versions and keep-relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
7.5.17 Saving machine logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
IV SPRINT42|10linear-FA-BA-v4.0-en
7.6 Part program management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
7.7 Optional device operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
8 Maintenance
8.1 Maintenance operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.1.1 CNC maintenance warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8.1.2 Preliminary inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8.1.3 Final inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8.2 Routine (scheduled) maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
8.2.1 Check wear on main spindle collet open/close cam/snugs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8.2.2 Check wear on cam/snugs open/close counterspindle collet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
8.2.3 Lubrication system maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
8.2.4 Pneumatic system maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
8.2.5 Lubricating and cooling system maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
8.2.6 Refrigerating system maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
8.2.7 Electrical enclosure maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
8.3 Metalworking fluids and lubricants for machine tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
9 Transport and installation

9.1 Qualification of the operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9.2 Operation sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.3 Assembly of locking brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
9.4 Packing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
9.5 Lifting of the machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
9.5.1 Lifting of the machine with forklift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
9.5.2 Lifting of the machine with crane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
9.6 Unloading from the transport vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
9.7 Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
9.8 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
9.8.1 Machine placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
9.8.2 Quality of foundations and resting surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
9.8.3 Positioning and Levelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
9.9 Removal of locking brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
9.10 Machine cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
9.11 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
9.11.1 Electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
9.11.2 Power supply tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
9.11.3 Pneumatic connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
9.11.4 Fluid filling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
9.11.5 Adaptation of the interface to the bar loaders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
SPRINT42|10linear-FA-BA-v4.0-en V
9.12 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
9.13 Scrapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
10 Machine programming
10.1 Introduction to programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
10.1.1 Constructive elements of the program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
10.1.2 Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
10.1.3 Main program and subprogram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
10.1.4 Main program structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
10.1.5 Subprograms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
10.1.6 Optional block skip: / . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
10.1.7 Program comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
10.2 Basic programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
10.2.1 List of G functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
10.2.2 Spindle rotation management functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
10.2.3 Tool call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
10.2.4 Coordinate systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
10.2.5 Incremental and absolute programming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
10.2.6 Tool feed programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
10.2.7 Rapid G0 positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
10.2.8 Linear interpolation: G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
10.2.9 Circular interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
10.2.10 G4 X/U/P pause time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
10.2.11 Precise global and local stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
10.2.12 Tool radius compensation: G42/G41/G40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
10.2.13 Axis thrust torque reduction: G300. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
10.2.14 Axis position control: G301 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
10.2.15 Axis C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
10.2.16 Threading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51
10.3 Specific programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
10.3.1 Assigning names to a program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
10.3.2 Spindle management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66
10.3.3 Rigid tapping (G84 axial, G88 radial) 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70
10.3.4 Characteristic machine points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72
10.3.5 Tool description - slide 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77
10.3.6 Tools slide 3 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-82
10.3.7 Slide 2 tools description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89
10.3.8 Three channels pause functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-96
10.3.9 Torque redaction G300 and position control G301. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-97
10.3.10 Workpiece clamping with counterspindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-99
10.3.11 Program example for part unloading device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-100
10.3.12 Revolver slow rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-101
10.3.13 Revolver locking and unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-101
VI SPRINT42|10linear-FA-BA-v4.0-en
10.3.14 Axes Z2 - Z1 - Z3 tracking function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-102
10.3.15 Automatic origin management for machining on main spindle (G306) . . . . . . . . 10-104
10.3.16 Bar change and loader thrust management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-106
10.3.17 Bush-spindle synchronising and G320. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-108
10.3.18 Machining with driven tools on slide 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-112
10.3.19 Machining with driven tools slide 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-118
10.3.20 Machining with driven tools slide 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-123
10.3.21 Circular interpolation with driven tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-127
10.3.22 Helical interpolation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-132
11 Auxiliary functions
11.1 M functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
11.2 G macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-165
12 Alarms and Messages
SPRINT42|10linear-FA-BA-v4.0-en VII
VIII SPRINT42|10linear-FA-BA-v4.0-en
1 General informations
1.1 Machine identification data
Name CNC turning centre
Model SPRINT 42|10 linear
Serial Number see plate on board machine

Manufacturing year see plate on board machine
General view of the lathe
Identification plate example
SPRINT42|10linear-FA-BA-v4.0-en Page 1-1

1.2 EC Declaration of Conformity
Declaration of Conformity example
le
i
im
s
c
a
F
1.3 Main reference directives and standards
Directive Title
Directive 2006/42/CE Machinery directive - Standards for design and construction of machines
Directive 2006/95/CE Low Voltage Directive
Directive 2004/108/CE Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive
EN ISO 12100:2010 Safety of machinery - General principles for desig - Assessment of risk and
reduction of risk
EN ISO 23125:2010 Machine tools - Safety - Lathes

EN 61000-6-2:2005 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
Part 6-2: General standards – Immunity for industrial environments
EN 61000-6-4:2007 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)

Part 6-4: General standards – Emission for industrial environments
EN 60204-1: 2006 Safety of machinery - Electrical equipment of machines - Part 1: General

requirements
Page 1-2 SPRINT42|10linear-FA-BA-v4.0-en

1.4 Machine equipment
The machine is provided with:

Document set (see "Document set supplied with the machine")
The manuals supplied by Gildemeister Italiana S.p.A.are an integral part of the machine to which they refer.
These manuals must be kept in an easily accessible place known by personnel responsible for using, tooling
and maintaining the machine.
Read the information contained in this introductory part before using, tooling and maintaining the machine.
Set of service keys for routine and supplementary maintenance.
1.5 Property Information
This manual contains copyrighted information
All rights reserved. This manual may not be copied or photocopied, in whole or in part, without the written con-
sent of Gildemeister Italiana S.p.A.
Gildemeister Italiana S.p.A. declares that the information contained in this manual complies with technical and
safety specifications of the machine to which it corresponds.
Gildemeister Italiana S.p.A. is not liable for direct or indirect injury or damage to persons, property or data con-
sequent to the use of the documentation or the machine in conditions other than those envisaged and docu-
mented.
Ask your GILDEMEISTER agent for more information or for how to deal with particular situations that are not
described in detail.
Contents of this handbook may undergo any modification without any updating commitment towards users.
Some pictures, photographs and drawings in this manual may not accurately depict your lathe. This will not
affect the validity of the information herein contained.
NOTE
The information contained in this section applies to all the documentation
supplied to the customer and listed in the “Document set supplied” list.
1.5.1 Customer prohibitions
The customer is expressly prohibited to change, alter or intervene on the software and hardware in any way,
except for the cases expressly stated in this manual, delivered by Gildemeister Italiana S.p.A.

1.5.2 Software license
The software provided with the machine consists of the following parts:
CNC configuration and respective configuration data/ PLC operating logic (executables)
parameters
operator interface software (executables) part programs, subroutines and cycles supplied by
Gildemeister Italiana S.p.A.
routines, interface software for external devices programming and instruction manuals
The customer agrees to use the software and all the documents and information received from Gildemeister
Italiana S.p.A. with the machine, in electronic form and/or on paper only on their own premises and only for
the correct operation of the machine and for troubleshooting procedures.
1.5.3 Intellectual property rights and confidentiality
The software, procedures, methods, techniques and in general all the contents and information received from
Gildemeister Italiana S.p.A. with the machine, in electronic form or on paper, are and will remain the exclusive
property of Gildemeister Italiana S.p.A. who will remain the sole and exclusive owner of the intellectual pro-
perty rights.
The customer recognises that the software and all the information and documents received with the machine
contain industrial secrets and confidential information which are the property of Gildemeister Italiana S.p.A.
As a consequence, the customer shall take all the reasonable precautions to ensure and integrally protect
their secrecy.
1.6 Warranty
Gildemeister Italiana S.p.A. supplies by means of local DMG MORI companies a warranty period of 18 mon-
ths (max. 5000 working hours) from the end of test acceptance date at the customer’s plant.
Refer to the order confirmation sent to you by the Sales Office for extension of warranty terms and conditions,
if any.
During the warranty period, Gildemeister Italiana S.p.A. by means of local DMG MORI companies provides
supplementary assistance and maintenance services on demand and free of charge (terms and conditions to
be checked).
Excluded from the warranty Parts subject to wear
Early cancellation of the warranty The warranty will be cancelled if the machine is used in other way than
that described in the "Intended Use " paragraph.
1.7 After-sale assistance service
Contact your local DMG MORI for special intervention requests, purchasing of accessories and spare parts
after the warranty period (www.dmgmori.com).

2 Description of the basic machine

The automatic lathe SPRINT 42|10 linear is an NC lathe to process metal bars with
maximum diameter 42 mm for parts of high complexity.

2.1 Control axes configuration

Axis Unit
C1 e Z1 main spindle
C2, X2 and Z2 counterspindle
X1, Y1 cross slide with fixed tools and driven toolholders
X3, Y3 and Z3 a revolver tool holder turret with 16 positions
Y2 block with fixed toolholder for rear machining (optionally is provided the handling along the
axis Y2 and the tools motorization)
Fig. 2-1 Lathe SPRINT 42|10 linear - Work zone and control axes

2.1.1 Main spindle

This block consists of an electric spindle mounted on a slide Z1 and axis C1.
The electric spindle supplies the bar rotation by the clamping element located on the
front end.
The slide allows the electric spindle a linear degree of freedom Z1 parallel to the
workpiece rotation axis.
Fig. 2-2 Main spindle
Z1
C1
NOTE
Is optionally available to buy the kit to switch from:
1 - Standard (turning short pieces) to the configuration
2 - Swiss Type (turning long pieces)

2.1.2 Main spindle block with Rotating bush (optional)

The rotating bush (A), that guides the bar, is moved by its own control by means of a
belt (B).
This control rotates the bush in synchronisation with the spindle by means of an
electronic control.
Without Rotating bush Standard configuration Turning short pieces

With Rotating bush Swiss-type configuration Turning long pieces
Fig. 2-3 Main spindle and rotating bush
C A
C
E
A
C - Rotating Bush Pressurisation Inlet
D - Rotating Bush Air-oil Lubrification Inlet
E - Oil excess drainage
NOTE
When Rotating bush is installed, always connect the two pipes for pressurisa-
tion and Air-Oil lubrification ! .
Run the rotating bush for at least 10 minutes at low speed (200 rpm / min) to
allow for a proper distribution of the oil.
Refer to Chapter 7 of this manual for the Switch over from standard configura-
tion to Swiss Type configuration.

2.1.3 Slide X2-Z2 and counterspindle

This block has two slides:
• The first slide X2 provides the block horizontal motion perpendicular to the
workpice rotation axis.
• second slide Z2 provides horizontal motion, parallel to the workpiece rotation axis.
Electric spindle C2 is mounted on these slides and can clamp the semi-worked
workpiece on the main spindle, then machine the rear section using tools located on
the revolver and on the block for reworking operations.
The clamping element is mounted at the end of the electric spindle and blocks the
workpiece during chip extraction.
Fig. 2-4 Slide X2 - Z2 and counterspindle
X2
C2
Z2

2.1.4 Cross slide X1-Y1

This block consists of two slides sliding one above the other.
The first slide X1 provides the block with horizontal motion, whereas the second slide
Y1 is for vertical motion.
On second slide Y1 either fixed tools (for lathing) or rotating tools (for drilling, milling
and tapping) can be mounted.
Fig. 2-5 Cross slide X1 - Y1
Y1
X1

2.1.5 Slide X3-Y3-Z3 and turret

This block has three slides:
• The first slide Z3 is for block horizontal movement parallel to axis Z1;
• Second slide X3 provides horizontal movement orthogonal to the spindle axis;
• Third slide Y3 provides vertical movement orthogonal to the spindle axis.
Slide X3-Y3-Z3 moves an 8-position revolver turret.
The turret body is integrated into axis Y3 slide.
Tools on the turret can work alternately or simultaneously on the main spindle or frontal
spindle.
Two tools can be driven on each turret face.
Fig. 2-6 Slide X3-Y3-Z3 and turret
Y3
X3
Z3
NOTE
Refer to Chapter 10:
“Revolver slow rotation”
“Revolver locking and unlocking”.

2.1.6 Block for rear machining

This block (5) consists of a fixed tool holder for operations with the reworking spindle.
Fig. 2-7 Block for rear machining
2.1.7 Y2 slide and tools motorisation (option)

Optionally are available the handling along the axis Y2 (6) and the tools motorization
(7).
• the slide Y2 allows vertical movement, perpendicular to the axis of rotation of the
counterspindle.
Fig. 2-8 Y2 slide and tools motorisation
Y2
7

2.2 Main machine parts

Fig. 2-9 Front view
9 8 13
11
3
1
2
5 10 4 7
Fig. 2-10 View from above
6
7
9 8 1
2
3 11
5 10 4
12
Pos Unit Pos Unit

1 Workpiece unloading system 7 Lubrificating and cooling system
2 Chip extraction system 8 Electrical cabinet
3 Bar loader (option) 9 Conditioning system
4 Lubrication system 10 Cooling system
5 Pneumatic system 11 Working zone
6 Pneumatic system for optical line 12 Operating panel
13 Oil-air multiplier system for turret

2.2.1 Workpiece unloading system

The workpiece unloading system receives the machined workpieces from the counter-
spindle and takes them outside in the collection area.
Fig. 2-11 Workpiece unloading system
A B
The workpiece unloading system consists of the following:

• A part pick-up device (A) (collet open/closed) that takes the machined part from the
frontal spindle and transfers it to the relevant chute (B).
• The chute takes it out of the working area, to the collection zone (C)
Description of Operation
The “Workpiece unloading system” has two degrees of translation freedom (ZA, XA)
and one degree of rotation freedom(UA).
The axes are driven by a pneumatic device.
• Slide (1) parallel to axis ZA;
• Arm (2) with rotary motion (UA) along a circle arc and translatory motion (XA) that
allows the arm to reach the part pick-up position;
• Pneumatic piston (3) for arm rotation (2);
• Box located at end of arm (4) to collect the part from frontal spindle.

Fig. 2-12 Parts Automatic Unloading device components
ZA
3
UA
XA
Device movement to reach position to collect part from frontal spindle
1) The device in home position, during part processing, is at the extreme right of guide ZA with arm rotated outward as
shown in the next figure.
35°

2) When the device receives the move instruction from the control, it moves along axis ZA toward the work zone.
3 The arm then rotates to approach the frontal spindle.
35°

4) The arm lowers and frontal spindle moves horizontally to position in front of the box.
5) Part ejection by frontal spindle into box.

Device movements to bring part from frontal spindle to part outlet chute and then out of machine
1) After part ejection, the arm raises the box with the part.
2) The arm now rotates parallel to axis XA to bring the part out of the work area.

3) The arm moves along axis ZA to the position to place part on outlet chute.
4) The arm lowers to the height of outlet chute, the box opens and part drops onto chute.

5) The outlet chute takes the part outside the machine.
6) After part release, home position is resumed.
Technical data
Description Unit of measure Value
Stroke axis ZA mm 1000
Rotation of arm UA ° 35
Arm lowering XA mm 250
Maximum diameter of part to be unloaded mm 42

Maximum length of part to be unloaded mm 150
Maximum weight of part to be unloaded kg 1,5
NOTE
Refer to Chapter 10:
“Program example for part unloading device”.

2.2.2 Chip extraction system

The chip extraction system takes the chip from the bar machining outside.
Fig. 2-13 Chip extraction system
A Tank containing the oil based coolant liquid;

B A hinged belt that rotates to extract the chips from the working zone and outside the machine.
In automatic mode the rotation can be timed (from user page) so as to separate the
emulsion from the chips.
An overload microswitch, under the unload hood, checks that the belt rotates when
controlled.
DANGER
The chip unloading hood must be provided with a jet director (whose slant must
be determined by the end user) if the gap between the lower part of the chip jet
and the upper part of the container does not prevent access of limbs to the
dangerous zone. Refer to the chip evacuator instruction manual for details.
Technical data
Refer to the chip extraction system manifacturer documentation.

2.2.3 Bar loader (option)

The Bar loader (A) allows the continuous and automatic bar feeding to execute the
machining operations.
Fig. 2-14 Bar loader example
The machine has an interface that allows the bar loader connection.
The Bar loader selection is done in the order phase of the machine.
Technical data
Refer to the bar loader manufacturer documentation.

2.2.4 Lubrication system

The lubrication system keeps lubricated different components of the machine such as:
• Screws and ball screw guides;
• Main spindle and Counterspindle collet opening/closing systems;
• Slides 1 and 2 rotating devices;
• Revolver rotating devices.
Fig. 2-15 Lubrication system
C
D
The system consists of a control unit (A) that, with a defined frequency, lubricates the devices described abo-
ve. A pressure switch (B) placed on the line checks the pressure level necessary for the lubrication.
A level switch, inside the control unit, checks the lubricant level (C) inside the tank (D)
Level switch management A message appears on the monitor if there is no liquid. The
system will be stopped (at end of cycle) if the lubricant level is
not topped up after 25 pumping actions.
Pressure switch management This device stops the machine if the required pressure is not rea-
ched for three times in a row. The re-lubrication time is reduced
from 7 minutes to 30 seconds if the pressure is not reached.
The machine will be stopped at end of cycle if the no pressure signal remains also after three re-lubrication
attempts.
Technical data
Refer to Chapter 4 of this Manual “Technical machine data”.

2.2.5 Pneumatic system

The pneumatic system functions include:
• Pressurising of main spindle, frontal spindle, turret, rotating bush (optional) and
rotating tools of slides 1 and 2;
• Collets opening/closing of the main spindle;
• Collets opening/closing of the counterspindle;
• Movement of workpice unloading device;
• Frontal spindle collets cleaning;
• Workpiece extraction from frontal spindle;
• Linear motors brake release;
• Turret revolver disk clamping and unclamping.
Fig. 2-16 Pneumatic system Filter-Reduction unit
1
3
5
4
The system has the group FR (filter-reducer) for the air treatment consisting of:
1 Three-way solenoid valve for unloading residual pressure;
2 Line pressure regulator;
3 Digital manometr;
4 Dehumidifier filter;
5 Deoiling filter.
Downstream of the unit there are solenoid valves to manage the devices listed above
Technical data

2.2.6 Pneumatic system for optic scale

This pneumatic system pressurises the optic scale on slide 1, 2 and 3.
Fig. 2-17 Pneumatic system for optic scale
2 4 6
optic scale on slide 1

5
1
The pneumatic system for the optic scale (6) consists of:
1 Compressed air input from the customer pneumatic system;
2 2 micro deoiling filters for a first air filtering;
3 Super micro deoiling filter;
4 Manometer displayng the working pressure;
5 Compressed air output and distribution to the optic scale.
NOTE
The optical rule pressurising system is active also when the machine is off.

2.2.7 Lubricating and cooling system

The Lubricating and cooling system is used to cool the part and tools surfaces during
machining.
Fig. 2-18 Lubricating and cooling system
D A
B
B
The oil based coolant system consists of a pump (A) that sucks up the coolant from
the tank (B) and sends it to the nozzles (C) that cool the workpiece and the tools.
The liquid coming from the machining zone is filtered by the frame (D) then sent into
the tank (B).
A flow meter on the line checks the flow of the oil-based coolant.
Technical data

2.2.8 Electric system

The electric system supplies all the circuits and the corresponding cabling necessary
to the proper operation of the machine.
Fig. 2-19 Electrical enclosure
7 8
12 10
9 4 2
9 13 1
11
1. Master switch 8. CNC

2. Power circuit 9. Magneto-thermal automatic switches
3. Transformer 10. Air conditioning system
4. 24V power unit 11. EMC filters
5. 24V control circuit 12. Electric cabinet thermostat
6. I/O CNC 13. Connection point for electrical supply
7. CNC Driver
Technical data
Refer to the electric diagram provided with the machine and to Chapter 4 of this ma-
nual “Machine Technical Data”.

2.2.9 Master switch panel
Description
The “circuit breaker” panel on the electrical cabinet groups the RJ-45 ETHERNET port, the machine master
switch and a one-phase socket.
A
A - Identification plate
See “Machine identification” in chapter 1.
B - Machine master switch

• Position 0: machine off, power line cut off
• Position 1: machine powered
C - Machine hour counter

B
• Number of hours for which the machine is powered
• Number of hours of operation of the machine in
automatic mode
D - Ethernet RJ-45 port
C E - Single-phase EEC 7/4 220 V Schuko power socket
F - 30 mA ground fault circuit breaker
E F

2.2.10 Electrical enclosure conditioning system

The conditioning system is used to control the temperature inside the electrical cabi-
net.
All components are closed inside a container installed by the side of the electrical
enclosure.
Fig. 2-20 Conditioning system
C B
The conditioning system consists of the following parts:

1 Compressor
2 Heat exchanger
3 Expander
4 Evaporator
The outer part presents a metallic grid (A) which must be subjected to maintenance.
The part in communication with the inside of the electrical enclosure (B) presents suc-
tion and delivery conduits.
NOTE
Under the grid is positioned a control panel (C) for displaying and adjusting the
conditioner parameters: do not change the manufacturer's settings.

2.2.11 Cooling system for linear motors

The cooling system is used to control the temperature of the following machine parts:
1) Linear motor for axis X1;
2) Linear motor for axis X3.
Fig. 2-21 Cooling system for linear motors
The cooling system consists of a control unit with digital temperature indicator (A).
Technical data
Refer to the cooling system manufacturer documentation.

2.2.12 Oil-air multiplier system for turret

The air-oil multiplier system is used to drive the turrets and allows to obtain, with a ratio
of 1:25 a working pressure of 50 bar.
Oil-air multiplier drives the turret with 16 positions on slide 3.
Fig. 2-22 Oil-air multiplier system for turret

2.2.13 Operating panel
Description
The lathe is controlled by a CNC FANUC 310.

The operator operates the machine from the operating panel which groups all the instruments needed to
interact with the CNC.
1. Video 2. Control panel 3. Operating mode switch SMARTkey®
Using the operator panel
Refer to Chapter 6 of this Manual “Control interfaces”.

2.2.14 SMARTkey® operating mode selector
Operating mode and access level selector: Automatic/Tooling
The operating mode electronic switch is formed by two components: 1. SMARTkey®
The machine is designed to operate in two modes only: a two-position switch

is present on the operating panel. The selector can be locked by means of a
SMARTkey (which can be inserted and extracted manually) which is made
available to the machine tool fitter in charge of the machining process.
Insert the SMARTkey® (1) in the reading station. The data stored on the key
(operative modes) are transferred to the control system. A
The active operating mode is displayed by the selection button which lights up.
The light buttons (2) allow to select the operating mode:
B
• button with 1 bar = automatic mode selection
• button with 2 bars = tooling mode selection
2. Operative mode
• buttons with 3 and 4 bars = not used selection buttons
SMARTkey®: Key and flash drive for machine authorisations
The operating mode of the SMARTkey® is shown on side (A) of the key itself
by means of a series of white bars.
• 1 bar = SMARTkey enabled for automatic operating mode
• 2 bars = SMARTkey enabled for tooling mode
Password policy
All operators who may use the machine have a SMARTkey storing the access
level for which they are enabled.
The access level is given by the combination of a serial number (B) shown on
the back of the SMARTkey and a Licence Key released by Gildemeister.
The two selectable positions each correspond to one of the following two operating modes:
“Automatic” operation (one bar) for normal production of the machine controlled by the CNC with the mobile
guards closed (active part program step). In this operating mode, with movements stopped and front mobile
guard open, the part can be manually replaced and the tools fitted and removed.
“Tooling” operation (two bars), not in automatic cycle, for tooling (calibration, adjustments of mechanical
working parts) with mobile guards open and activation of movements with controls held pressed. The safety
devices needed to prepare the machine for turning a new part totally safely for the operator are activated in
tooling mode. CNC operating modes only can be used in this mode: JOG and INC.
DANGER
Do not tamper with, bypass or remove the safety devices fitted aboard the
machine.

Smart Key, operating modes and access level
The SMART keys replace the keys and passwords previously used to select the operative mode (“OM“) and
the access level (“AL”) on the CNC.
The operating modes which can be selected and access levels can be configured for each operator using the
SMART keys.
SMART key data shown on the display
SMARTkey Id (A)
LEVEL (access level)
Current access level
Maximum operating mode
A Selected operating mode
Current operating mode
Smart Key Manager page
This page is used to register the Smart keys used on the machine.
Registering a Smart key means associating the respective release code to the ID number, which in turn allows
to select the access level to be associated to the Smart key itself.
Access level User Permitted activities
1 Semi-trained user Use of console, start/stop cycle
Trained user This user can view programs, select programs and enter tool
2
corrections
Qualified user This user can enter tool correction, tool geometries and tool
3
who cannot program consumption data, adjust the time/part counter
Programmer, tooler This user can enter tool correction, tool geometries and tool
4
consumption data, adjust the time/part counter

2.2.15 Beacon indicator light
Colour State Signal Application
RED General Fixed Emergency stop

fault Alarm (FAST STOP or CYCLE END ALARM).
Priority 1 Side protection/guard open.
YELLOW Intervention Low priority error message or pre-alarm.

Fixed
needed NOTE: when the alarm is generated and the
machine is stopped, the yellow and green lights
Priority 2
are switched off and the red light comes on.
Flashing No bar in loader.
Priority 1
GREEN Machine Machine in automatic mode (AUTO), with

in standard operating cycle in normal conditions (with or
Fixed
conditions without automatic switch-off).
NOTE: the green light goes out when the
Priority 1
program stops in M00, M01, Program Stop,
Feed Hold or Feederate=0.
BLUE Machine Machine in tooling mode
conditions Machine in automatic operating mode (AUTO)
Fixed
requiring with active cycle and
intervention
Priority 1
by the - axis feedrate less than 75%
operator - spindle override less than 90%
Flashing Used by DMG for special tool modes.
Priority 1
2.2.16 Illuminated LED row

LED position Colour Meaning
RED General malfunction
YELLOW Intervention request
GREEN Machine in standard conditions
BLUE Machine conditions requiring operator intervention


Safety informations
3 Safety informations
Introduction
Measures for preventing risks for operators during the envisaged technical life of the machine have been in-
tegrated during machine design and construction, specifically for the following operations:
Lifting and transporting Installation Tooling

Use Maintenance Scrapping the machine
3.1 Lifecycle of the machine
The technical lifecycle of the machine, operated and maintained by the user according to the uses specified
by Gildemeister Italiana S.p.A. in manuals, is 7 years.
Such duration refers to the machine specified in the order confirmation and may change following changes
and technical updates.
Gildemeister Italiana S.p.A. declares that the machine must be subjected to a general inspection to guarantee
top quality production after 20,000 hours of operation. Some functional assemblies may need to be maintai-
ned/overhauled.
3.2 Hazardous zones
Hazardous zones: any zone inside and near the machine in which the presence of an exposed person con-
stitutes a risk for health and for safety of that person.
Working zones where there could be risks for operator and equipment
1 zone for manual loading and unloading of the workpiece
2 tools manual assembly and replacement zone
3 zone surrounding reject material unloading (chips conveyor)
4 zone surrounding produced material unloading
5 tooling zone inside working zone
Working zones where there could be risks for the maintenance operator
maintenance zone around motors, actuators and related kinematics transmission chains of machine mo-
1
vements
2 zones around fixed and moving guards
3 maintenance zone for electrical, pneumatic and hydraulic oil based cooling and cooling equipment
4 routine and special maintenance zone

Safety informations
3.3 Envisaged use
Envisaged use of the machine is use:

For turning, drilling, boring, threading, milling, shearing and similar operations on all metallic materials in ge-
neral
With the functions and procedure illustrated in manuals supplied with the machine or shown to the customers
during training courses supplied by the manufacturer
With electrical and pneumatic power (where applicable) as specified in this manual
With CNC parameters, PLC program and hardware configuration as delivered
In the environmental conditions specified in this manual
Respecting the cautions and danger warnings shown in this manual

By authorised personnel trained for the operations specified in this manual
For normal operation activities indicated in the technical specification (price list data and contract specifica-
tions)
With the use of materials and substances listed in the technical specification (materials for normal operation)
and not for other materials and substances
Residual risks may be eliminated by carefully following the procedures shown in this manual and by using the
personal protection equipment shown (PPE)
3.4 Non-envisaged use
NOTE
Contact Gildemeister Italiana S.p.A. before machining material not mentio-
ned in drawings or with parameters not comprised in drawings
Gildemeister Italiana S.p.A. cannot be liable for injury and damage to persons and propriety deriving from:
Disrespect of safety rules

Disrespect of instructions and indications contained in the supplied documentation
Tampering, bypassing or removal of safety devices installed aboard the machine
Changes or addition of accessories not approved in writing by Gildemeister Italiana S.p.A.

Changes to CNC parameters and PLC program made by the customer
Replacement of parts with others not approved by Gildemeister Italiana S.p.A.
The machine is not to be used with parameters that differ from those specified and/or with materials having
dimensions and weight that exceed the machine capacity

Safety informations
3.5 Personnel qualification

The machine is designed to be run by competent operators aware of residual risks, having knowledge re-
garding safety and who have understood the contents of this handbook.
A maximum safety level must be attributed to each operator enabled to use the machine for which the person
receives appropriate training and within which the person is authorised to work on the machine. Each operator
may perform only the operations whose safety level is lower than or equal to that for which he or she is au-
thorised.
Technical life Responsible operator What
phase of the qualification
machine
Sling, lift and transfer the machine to the installa-
Trasportation Qualified Transporter
tion site.
Qualified Electrician and Secure the machine to the floor
Installation
Qualified Mechanic Make connection and test the machine.
Changing the production.
Programming Qualified programmer Modifying the part program.
Loading the part program.
Production change
Change collets, loader variation (diameter),
workpiece loading/unloading mode, part program
test.
Tuning Qualified Fitter
Axes and spindle movement in tooling with door
open and two-hands control.
Run part touching with door open.
Part program modification.
Runs the machine under normal conditions and
stops the machine in an emergency situation.
With guards closed, moves axes/spindles, turret.
Tool change with guards open, opens self-cen-
Use Trained Operator tring chucks/collets.
Other operations. open access sliding guards, bar
change (facing).
Supervises correct machine functioning and if
necessary notifies of any anomalies.
Qualified Maintenance Electri- Carries out machine routine and special mainte-
Maintenance
cian and Qualified Mechanic nance.
Deactivates and dismantles the machine.
Qualified Electrician and Collects and hands over to the authorised dispo-
Scrapping
Qualified Mechanic sal bodies materials harmful for persons and envi-
ronment..
NOTE
Gildemeister Italiana S.p.A. shall not be liable for injury or damage to persons
or property deriving from the employment of non-qualified operators.

Safety informations
3.6 Safety devices
Machine safety devices
A. Emergency button D. Axes motor brakes

B. Fixed guards E. Operating mode selector
C. moving doors and guards with electric lock
3.6.1 Emergency stop button
The operator can stop the machine safely in an emergency situation pressing the emergency
stop button.
It is recommended to press the emergency button once a day (with machine stationary) so
that the system can check all the safety circuits.
3.6.2 Fixed and mobile guards
The machine is provided with fixed guards (closed with bolts, Allen screws, etc.) and mobile guards (closed
with encoded key or electro-mechanical bolt) allowing work in total safety.
Mobile guards closed with encoded key can only be opened by maintenance personnel with the machine se-
cured in emergency mode (“Emergency button” pressed).
Opening will trip the safety devices and all machine movements will be stopped.
Mobile guards closed with interlock bolts (sliding door to access working area) can be opened only when all
the machine movements are stopped. This safety condition is governed by the machine control system.
DANGER
It is forbidden to remove fixed and mobile guards. It is forbidden to
remove or tamper with interlock devices.

Safety informations
3.6.3 Door control
The door to the working area is interlocked to prevent opening in certain conditions (turning spindles, moving
axes).
A button will light up to indicate when it is safe to open the door. Press the button to release the interlock and
open the door.
3.6.4 Lock systems for vertical axes and linear motors
The vertical axes driven by traditional motors have electromagnetically released spring brakes located inside the motors
themselves.
Whereas for linear motors spring brakes are installed with pneumatic release outside the motor that brake on the axis
guides.
It is extremely important never to cut off the power voltage to the machine without having pressed the EMERGENCY
STOP button first: the sudden electrical power blackout will not give the axis time to apply the brakes and will make the
axis drop.
3.6.5 Operating mode selector
SMARTkey® operating mode selector

See Chapter 2 “Description of the basic machine” in this manual.
DANGER
Do not tamper with, bypass or remove the safety devices fitted aboard
the machine.
NOTE
On the electrical equipment, the tests concerning the continuity of the protec-
tion unipotential circuit and the insulation resistance measurement have been
executed, according to indications in standard EN 60204-1.

Safety informations
3.7 Residual risks
In this manual all the residual risks are listed and described that has been not possible to eliminate during
design and that still remain in the machine (the uttered noise).
For each residual risk, instructions and prescriptions are given, they are to be followed by the operator, tool-
maker and maintenance men.
The customer safety manager shall provide the following services for personnel responsible for operating the
lathe:
Indicate the presence of residual risks
Take actions to eliminate residual risks

Train on the use of necessary PPE (personal protection equipment)
WARNING
In all cases, the machine operator and/or tool operator must NEVER attempt
either to open a fixed guard nor to start the machine if a guard is open.
After an electrical power blackout with machine stopped, residual pressurised air in the system (residual risks
caused by the corresponding low pressure).
Following an electrical power blackout, accumulation of mechanical energy in the preloaded springs and
energy due to gravity caused by the vertical axis movement of the working unit.
In the case of an unexpected electrical black-out, spindles and rotating bush (where installed) stop in an un-
controlled manner , with very long stoppage times (even a few minutes); therefore in such situations , before
opening any moving or fixed guard of the machine, to avoid possible accidents the operator must make sure
that the spindles have stopped.
NOTE
If the customer wishes to prevent this potential hazard situation, the custo-
mer can contact the Gildemeister Italiana commercial office or DMG MORI
after-sales service who shall draw up a quotation for an adequate system to
compensate the electrical black-out and obtain a controlled machine stop.
Falling parts and tools.

Breakage of pipes during maintenance operations in dangerous zones.
Knocks, cuts and scratches in contact with materials, with parts, with inserts or tool parts during part
assembly-disassembly operations, loading-unloading tools and tooling.
Movement (however slow) of the chip conveyor chain.

Presence of static electricity in the electrical cabinet for five minutes after opening the master switch.

Safety informations
DANGER
Access to the electrical system can only be effected with the machine
switched off and after having removed the power supply. Never tamper
with the release switches and/or any other electric safety device.
DANGER
The condensers maintain the charge for over 20 minutes after the sup-
ply has been removed from the circuit. Caution! Residual risk of electro-
cution.
DANGER
The electric panel may contain live parts, even after switching off the
switch located on the panel. Take care of the circuits upstream the main
switch or of external devices.
For safe access to the electric equipment, switch off the main switch.
Contact with dust and hazardous substances remaining in suspension after opening the mobile guards by
operator or tooling operator.
Slipping and fall of operator, tooling operator and maintenance personnel in part/tool loading-unloading zone
and tool zone due to dispersion of drops of oil-based coolant outside the machine.
Risk of fire.
Risk of explosion.
NOTE
Specific warning plates containing a warning message are affixed either on
the machine or near the risk area for the most important or least evident
residual risks related to working, tooling and maintenance operations.

Safety informations
3.7.1 Risk of fire and explosion
As concerns issues related to fire or explosion, Gildemeister Italiana S.p.A. recommends the use of adequate
protection system at all times on its machine tools.
Risk Precautions for the installer

It is noticed that due to accidental events / wrong pro- To prevent these dangers Gildemeister Italiana
gramming of the lathe and however due to situations S.p.A. so requests the installation on its lathes of
not preventively checked during the production (non suitable protection systems (fire-fighting and anti-ex-
detected breakage of the tool), depending on the ma- plosion systems).
terials machined by the lathe (particularly leagues of
To guarantee the best process capability during the
titanium or leagues with high content of magnesium)
production, particularly during the working process
and of the used cooling and lubricating fluids (whole
with whole oil, Gildemeister Italiana S.p.A. requests
oil and emulsions with a percentage of oil greater
the integration with cooling systems to control the
than 15 %) could create in the areas of the lathe pe-
coolant temperature.
rimeter situations of danger for the conductor of the
machine (fire or explosion).

Safety informations
3.7.2 Vertical axes
A vertical axis is an axis whose direction of movement has a zero component in the vertical direction.
The vertical axes, subject to gravity when the machine is off, are maintained in position by means of brakes.
The brakes are released during lathe operation because the governing motors are capable of supporting the
axes.
DANGER
IT IS FORBIDDEN TO STAY UNDER THE VERTICAL AXES
Vertical axis may drop if the controlling component fails or following
breakage of mechanical parts of the axis (e.g. breakage of the brake or
belt).
DANGER
IT IS FORBIDDEN TO REMAIN WITH PARTS OF THE BODY (ARMS,
LEGS, ETC.) UNDER THE VERTICAL AXES
to eliminate the risk of injury, only qualified and trained personnel may
perform interventions in the open working area.
Take the necessary safety measures when working underneath vertical
axes; e.g. support the suspended part or move it to a safe position to
protect personnel and others from danger.
3.7.3 Linear motors
If the machine is equipped with linear motors, observe the additional safety precautions.
The powerful magnetic fields and the high ferromagnetic attraction forces can be a direct health hazard (e.g.
caused by rapid drive movements).
DANGER
Pacemaker and prosthesis wears must pay particular attention and may
not perform maintenance operations.
DANGER
Keep watches, keys, magnetic media (e.g. credit cards, diskettes, etc.)
and metallic tools away from the linear motors (>100 mm).
WARNING
Keep at least two pointed wedges made of solid, antimagnetic material, e.g.
bronze (wedge angle approximately 10°-15°) ready for emergencies when
working on linear motors. Also keep a hammer (approximately 3 kg) to
remove objects or parts of the body which may remain entangled at hand.

Safety informations
3.8 Safety precautions
DANGER
Before intervening on the machine in all situations in which residual
risks are present, check for the presence in the immediate vicinity of
personnel capable of provided first aid rescue.
In any event:
- the operator shall never attempt to open a moving guard for the tooling operator when the machine is
working
or a fixed guard provided for maintenance service.
- the tooling operator shall never attempt to open a fixed guard provided for maintenance service.
It is the responsibility of the user to instruct the operator and tooling operator regarding these requirements
and to make sure that the instructions given have been fully understood.
To avoid tripping, slipping and falling hazards on the reference plane (walkway) where the operators move
the tooling and maintenance operators are to wear slip-proof safety shoes, especially during all manual
operations that involve residual risks.
The user is to keep the surface clean and free of substances that could cause slipping where the
operator, tooling operator and maintenance operator move.
The user is to keep the environment around the machine well ventilated and provided with apertures and
safety devices.
The values of continuous acoustic pressure levels equivalent to weighted A measured with the machine
running empty at maximum speed and when working in automatic cycle , are contained in the “Technical
data” table in this handbook.
Lifting and transport of the machine and its parts are manual operations that always incur a residual risk,
mainly caused by impacs and/or crushing.
These operations require careful attention on the part of the workers.
The person in charge of transport operations shall appropriately inform the workers of these risks and supply
adequate personal protection devices, in particular: hard hat and protective gloves
Follow the operating cycle start-up sequence in the recommended manner:
Never insert the hands or anything else near to or inside moving parts or parts with live voltage.
Inform the maintenance managers of any functioning irregularity.
Before starting the machine, make sure there is nobody carrying out maintenance or cleaning operations.
Do not manually lift loads having a weight that exceeds the current standards in force.
Technical sheets are attached for the hydraulic fluids used (oil-based coolant fluid and cooling-lubrication
fluid).

Safety informations
Installation specifications
During installation the area where the machine is installed and the aisle where the machine parts pass during
transport to the installation site are to be considered hazardous areas
Risk Precautions for the installer
Risk, for the operators involved, of being knocked Fence off the installation area to prevent access of
by the machine while being handled for installation. unauthorised persons.
Provide the operators with the following personal pro-
tection devices:
• Industrial safety shoes;
• Industrial protective overalls;
• Industrial protective gloves;
• Industrial hard hat.
Regulations during functioning and maintenenace
Wear approved protective clothing (hard hat, goggles, gloves and shoes)
Do not wear clothing items (e.g. ties, bracelets or necklaces) that could become entangled in machine moving
parts
Do not use the machine under the influence of medications or beverages that could reduce mental and/or
physical reflexes
Always keep the working area clean
Do not lean on the machine and do not climb on it

Handle working tools with caution and always wearing protective gloves: the tools are sharp and after ma-
chining could be very hot
For safety reasons, in the area surrounding the machine no persons shall be present, other than the operator
and the tooling operator. As an exception to this rule, maintenance engineers may be present, if specifically
authorised by the production manager
Hazardous zone Risk Precautions for the operator/tooling ope-

rator
Bars loading zone Crushing, cutting, abrasion hazards. Wear: hard hat, safety shoes, protective glo-
ves and clothing;
Move heavier bars using a crane.
Spindles area with Knocking against mechanical parts ha- Wear: hard hat, goggles, protective gloves
door open zard and clothing.
Burning hazard: tools can reach very
high temperatures
Adjustment and Cutting hazard from contact with tools Wear: hard hat, goggles, protective gloves
maintenance area and clothing.
Burning hazard: tools can reach very
with door and
high temperatures
guards open

Safety informations
Hazardous zone Risk Precautions for the operator/tooling ope-

rator
Chips unloading Dragging, crushing and abrasion of ope- Wear: hard hat, goggles, protective gloves
zone rator limbs hazard. and clothing.
Moving parts during machine operation.
Never insert hands or tools under the
chips unloading hood.
Never approach the chips conveyor belt
when machine is running.
Electrical sy- Electric shocks risk; ALWAYS make sure, before working on the
stems zone electric system, that the machine is shut
Risk of burns from electrical parts, for
down and the supply line is isolated .
example power transformers, that can
reach high temperatures during opera- If the lathe is fitted with optional accessories
tion: allow equipment to cool; (high pressure systems, handling units, ro-
bots...) supplied by control panels outside
Electrocution risk, also caused by con-
the actual lathe, make sure that these devi-
tact with cooling liquids and lubricants;
ces are off. See the handbook of the relevant
device.
Wear: safety shoes, protective gloves and
clothing.
3.8.1 What to do in an emergency
In an emergency situation, press the emergency stop button to cut off electrical power to all
moving parts and override the CNC to emergency stop mode thus preventing all machine func-
tions.
Refer to the procedures shown in Company instructions and Instructions for use in the event
of an emergency.
NOTE
An "EMERGENCY" is any event or situation which cannot be controlled with
ordinary measures and which compromises the safety of persons and may
cause damage to the machine.
3.9 Laminated safety window
1) Scratchproof polycarbonate
2) Room with duct
3) Safety glass

Safety informations
3.10 Plates
On the machine, near the major residual risk areas for working and maintenance operations, near the poten-
tially dangerous points, plates are installed with danger warnings for the residual risks.
Plates are also placed with obligations and prohibitions. When the plates are not standardized, they are writ-
ten in the user language.
The plates types is summarized in the following table
Type Colour
Danger BLACK colour on a YELLOW background colour
Obligation They prescribe the use of protection means and are BLU on a WHITE background
Prohibition RED colour on a WHITE background
Example of text for a plate with a danger notice

Warning: Electrical danger
to be placed in the areas prescribed by the EN 60204-1 and outside the boxes in which it is
not clear they have inside electrical components
Example of text for a standardized plate with obligation
Obligation to wear the safety helmet
Obligation to wear safety shoes
Obligation to wear safety gloves
Example of text for a prohibition plate
Access to this area is allowed for maintenance operations only

to be placed in areas or on the fixed guards to protect the machine or other
Removal of these fixed repair ia allowed for maintenance operations onlyand must be done
with machine stopped
to be placed, for example, on guards fixed with bolts or in a position visible to the mainte-
nance men
Closing of the electrical input device with doors of the electrical cabinet open is allowed only
to trained or advised (in the electrical area) personnel belonging to the maintenance service
to be placed inside the doors of the electrical cabinet
Access to this area is forbidden for a pacemaker

Safety informations

4 Technical machine data

4.1 General technical data
Unit of
Technical data Value
measure
CNC NUMERIC CONTROL

CNC type - Fanuc 310is
Operator panel - SlimLine
Screen - Color TFT 15"
Number of controlled axes
- 2
(C axes)
Number of controlled axes (option) - 10
Number of channels - 3
MAIN SPINDLE DATA

Maximum bar capacity mm 42
Tie-rod inner hole mm 46
-1
Maximum rpm min 6.500
Nominal torque (S1) Nm 37,5
Nominal power (S1) kW 5,5
COUNTER SPINDLE DATA
Maximum turning diameter mm 42

-1
COUNTER SPINDLE DATA (Ø 42 mm option)
Maximum turning diameter mm 42

-1

Unit of
measure
X1 AXIS DATA
Stroke mm 50
Maximum speed m/min 40
2
Maximum acceleration m/s 10
Nominal thrust (S1) N 1.200
Y1 AXIS DATA
Stroke mm 350
2
Z1 AXIS DATA
Stroke mm 120
Maximum acceleration m/s2 5
X2 AXIS DATA
Stroke mm 310
2
Z2 AXIS DATA
Stroke mm 320
2
Y2 AXIS DATA (Option)

Stroke mm 120
2

Unit of
measure
X3 AXIS DATA
Stroke mm 80
2
Y3 AXIS DATA
Stroke mm 60 (± 30)
2
Z3 AXIS DATA
Stroke mm 150
2
TOOL HOLDER DATA - SLIDE 1

Total number of stations - 10
Number of fixed tools for external - 6
Toolholder section mm 16x16
Number of driven tools - 4
Collet type - ESX/ER 20
Maximum rpm -1
min 6.800
(motorised GEO 7-9)
Nominal power (S1)
kW 1,5
n = 2000 min-1
Maximum rpm -1
min 4.533
(motorised GEO 8-10)
Nominal power (S1)
kW 1,5
n = 2000 min-1

Unit of
measure
REVOLVER DATA
Number of driven tools - (16)
-1
Maximum rpm (motorised ) min 5.000
TOOL HOLDER DATA FOR REAR OPERATIONS

Number of fixed tools for internal - 3
Tool holder diameter mm 25
Number of fixed tools for external - 1

Number of driven tools - (2)
Maximum rpm
min-1 6.000
(motorised GEO 14-15)
Nominal power (S1)
kW 0,55
n = 2000 min-1

Unit of
measure
LUBRICATION SYSTEM DATA
Unit capacity L 2,9

Working pressure bar 30
Stopping time min 7
Working time s 30
Type of lubricant - ENI EXIDIA HG 68
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM DATA
Minimum working pressure bar 5
Maximum working pressure bar 6

Consumption NL/min 240
LUBRIFICATING AND COOLING SYSTEM DATA
Tank capacity L 400

Usable liquid - Water emulsified
Entire mineral oil with viscosity max

Alternatively usable liquid -
32cSt 40°C
Flow rate of each pump L/min 40
Liquid flow pressure bar 4
ELECTRIC SYSTEM DATA

Total installed power kVA 57
Power wire mm2 5 x 35
Working voltage V 3 x 400
Admitted working voltage variation % ± 10
Frequency Hz 50
Frequency (option) Hz 60
Nominal frequency admitted variation % ±1
In-line fuses A 100
Maximum load current A 82
Control/lighting voltage V 24 DC

Unit of
measure
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
Ambient temperature °C +10… +35
Maximum altitude m s.l.m. 1.000
Maximum relative humidity % 75
BASIC MACHINE DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS (WITHOUT PERIPHERALS)
Machine centre height mm 1.100
Weight kg 6.000
Dimensions mm mm
4.750 x 1.680 x 1.960
(length x width x height) mm
PERIPHERAL DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
Evacuator weight kg 540

Evacuator dimensions mm mm
2.400 x 1.265 x 935
(length x width x height) mm
ACOUSTIC PRESSURE DATA
Acoustic pressure level

(measured according to standards dBA 75
ISO 230-5, ISO 3746 and ISO 11202)
ATTENTION !
When using an emulsifying coolant, the mixing water must have the following features:
1 Total hardness between 15°F and 35°F

2 Conductivity : < 1000mS/cm at 20°C
The used fluids as well as their concentrations are to be considered at the supplier's charge
In case of use of whole oil is necessary:

1 Integration of cooling systems for temperature control of oil-based coolant
2 The installation of antifire system to prevent fire or explosion dangers

4.2 Power-torque diagrams

4.2.1 Main spindle power-torque diagram
Fig. 4-1 Main spindle power-torque diagram
80 8
[Nm] [kW]
2
60 6
40 4
4
20 2
0 0
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 6500
[min-1]
N. Description Service Unit of measure
1 Power S1 - 100K kW
2 Power S2 - 30 min kW
3 Torque S1 - 100K Nm
4 Torque S2 - 30 min Nm

4.2.2 Counterspindle power-torque diagram
Fig. 4-2 Counterspindle power-torque diagram
60 6
[Nm] [kW]
2
50 5
40 4
1
30 3
20 2
4
10 1
3
0 0
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 6500
[min-1]
2 Power S2 - 30 min kW
4 Torque S2 - 30 min Nm

4.2.3 Motorized power-torque diagram on slide 1 - t = 1:1.700
Fig. 4-3 Motorized power-torque diagram on slide 1 - t = 1:1.700
9 6
[Nm]
[kW]
7,5 5
6 4
2
4,5 3
3
3 2
1,5 1
0 0
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 6800
[min-1]
t = n motorized / n motor
2 Power S3 - 40% kW
4 Torque S3 - 40% Nm

4.2.4 Motorized power-torque diagram on slide 1 - t = 1:1.133
Fig. 4-4 Motorized power-torque diagram on slide 1 - t = 1:1.133
12 6
[Nm]
[kW]
10 5
4
8 4
3
6 3
4 2
2 1
2 1
0 0
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 4533
[min-1]
2 Power S3 - 40% kW
4 Torque S3 - 40% Nm

4.2.5 Motorized power-torque diagram on turret - t = 1:1
Fig. 4-5 Motorized power-torque diagram on turret - t = 1:1
10 2,5
[Nm]
[kW]
2
8 2
1
6 1,5
4 1
2 0,5
0 0
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000
[min-1]
2 Power S3 - 60% 15 min kW
4 Torque S3 - 60% 15 min Nm

4.2.6 Motorized power-torque diagram on pick-up slide: t = 1:1
Fig. 4-6 Motorized power-torque diagram on pick-up slide - t = 1:1
6 1,2
[Nm]
[kW]
2 1
4 0,8
4
0,6
1
2 3 0,4
0,2
0 0
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000
[min-1]
2 Power S3 - 40% 15 min kW
4 Torque S3 - 40% 15 min Nm

4.3 Working zones

4.3.1 View of the work area and kinematics
Fig. 4-7 Working zone and control axes
X1 Cross slide horizontal axis X3 Revolver turret horizontal axis

Y1 Cross slide vertical axis Y3 Revolver turret vertical axis
Z1 Main spindle horizontal axis Z3 Revolver turret horizontal axis
X2 Frontal spindle horizontal axis C1 Spindle rotation
Z2 Frontal spindle horizontal axis C2 Frontal spindle rotation
Y2 Vertical axis for rear operations slide (option)

4.3.2 Working area: plane X1-Y1

4.3.3 Working area: plane X1-Z1

4.3.4 Working area: plane X2-Z2

4.3.5 Working area: plane X2-Z2 (N.2 D.25 + N.2 Rotating - Option)

4.3.6 Working area: plane X2-Z2 (N.3 D.25 + N.4 Rotating - Option)

4.3.7 Working area: plane Y2 (N.3 D.25 + N.4 Rotating - Option)

CORSA Y2= 120

4.3.8 Working area: plane X3-Z3 - slide 3 revolver turret

4.3.9 Working area: plane X3-Y3 - slide 3 revolver turret

4.4 Axes reference
Introduction
Each machine axis is referenced to a Cartesian axes system that has been located in a specific point of the machine called
Machine Zero, set by the manufacturer (it cannot be modified).
To reference the separate machine axes to the Machine Zero, Gital suggests the use of a gauge and a location dowel.
The gauge is fastened like a normal tool in the position indicated on the following drawings so as to be able to reference
some machine axes, the other machine axes require the use of a specifically constructed dowel , and where indicated,
also a bimillesimal dial gauge.
The insertion of machine axis reference is only necessary in two cases:
1 when the machine is assembled, no axis has defined origins, the manufacturer applies the procedure to insert the
reference for all the axes.
2 when an axis has lost its assigned reference.
The procedure to insert the axis reference is the same for any machine axis
Fit the gauge in the machine and/or the dowels indicated in the following drawings:
Cancel the lost reference
A Access the GITAL pages, pressing CUSTOM2 from the operator panel keyboard
B on the user page, select PASSWORD level 3
C on the user page, select from AXIS REFERENCES the required axis and press the EDIT button to enter EDIT
mode
D press the EMERGENCY button
E check that the current Path is that which governs the required axis
F on the user page, select from AXIS REFERENCES the required axis and press the INPUT button to pass from
ON to OFF
G the CNC activates the alarm “000 SHUT DOWN SYSTEM”
H switch off the machine (the CNC cancels the reference)
I restart the machine (there will be an alarm message “300APC ALARM DS0300< axis name> APC alarm”, this
alarm allows axes movements in “JOG” mode
Insert the missing reference
A in TOOLING mode and with door open, very carefully bring the axis to the position indicated on the attached draw-
ing “REFERENCE DISTANCE <axis concerned>”
B on the user page, select PASSWORD level 3
C on the user page, select from AXIS REFERENCES the required axis and press the EDIT button to enter EDIT
mode
D select the required axis and press the INPUT button to pass from OFF to ON
E press the EMERGENCY button
F the CNC activates the alarm “000 SHUT DOWN SYSTEM”
G switch off the machine (the CNC acquires the reference)
H restart the machine and make sure the reference is correct

4.4.1 Reference distance X1
REFERENCE DISTANCE X1= +56.000

END OF STROKE X1= +56.000 X1=+156.000

4.4.2 Reference distance Y1
REFERENCE DISTANCE Y1= +0.000

END OF STROKE Y1= +0.500 Y1=-349.500

4.4.3 Reference distance Z1
REFERENCE DISTANCE Z1= +138.000

END OF STROKE Z1= +138.000 Z1=+458.000


END OF STROKE X2= +158.000 X2= -462.000


END OF STROKE Z2= +33.500 Z2= +353.500

4.4.6 Reference distance Y2 (option)

END OF STROKE Y2= +119.500 Y2= -0.500
AXE FOR MAIN SPINDLE

AND COUNTERSPINDLE

4.4.7 Reference angle A3
REFERENCE ANGLE A3= 0.0°


END OF STROKE X3= +200.000 X3= +360.000

4.4.9 Reference distance Y3

END OF STROKE Y3= +30.000 Y3= -30.000


END OF STROKE Z3= +11.000 Z3= +161.000

4.5 End of bar scrap

4.5.1 Scrap with pince Schaublin 76-81

4.5.2 Scrap with bush Duenner B236

4.5.3 Scrap with pneumatic recovery bush Duenner B236

4.5.4 Scrap with pneumatic recovery bush double cone GILDEMEISTER IT

5 Toolholders and accessories

5.1 Collet application
Fig. 5-1 Main spindle, rotating bush and counterspindle
Main spindle Rotating bush (optional) Counterspindle
5.1.1 Main spindle and counterspindle
Description Drawing List code List code Max

42|10 42|8 value
Compression collet application 0B2610002 50006 I-Q0135 42
for collets type SCHAUBLIN 76-81
for main spindle
Compression collet application 0B2613002 50009 I-Q0140 42
for collets type SCHAUBLIN 76-81
for counterspindle
Clamping collet for round bar - 50101 mm 42
type SCHAUBLIN 76-81
Clamping collet for hexagonal bar - 50105 mm 36
Clamping collet for square bar - 50108 mm 30

Collet application Ø42
Bush application Ø42 (Option)

5.1.2 Rotating bush (optional)
Description Drawing List code List code Max

42|10 42|8 value
Rotating bush DÜNNER B236 (optional) 0B2404022 50212 I-C1030 42
Bush with silicone type DÜNNER B236 - 50215 mm 42
for round section bar
for hexagonal section bar
for square section bar
5.2 Bushing for rotating bush

Fig. 5-2 Bushing
Bushing dimensions
Type L1 D1 D2 D3 α P1 P2
DÜNNER B236 81 56 48 M48x1,25 30° 6 1.64
5.3 Toolholder and accessories table
NOTE
Asl to GILDEMEISTER Italiana S.p.A. Technical Department to have more
details about the toolholders and accessories.

Description Drawing List code List code

42|10 42|8
Toolholder for pick-up support with N° 3 cylindrical --- I-P1200 ---
coupling D. 25 mm and N° 1 for 16x16
(N°1 already in basic machine)
Axial drilling driven unit for pick-up support (slide 2) with --- I-K60021 ---
n°2 rotating spindles with coupling for collets ESX/ER 20
and n°2 cylindrical coupling D.25 mm
Tool holder plate for slide 1 with 6 positions --- I-K60030 I-P1060
for rod 16x16 (N°1 already in basic machine)
One-position bit holder with cylindrical coupling D. 20 --- I-K60110 I-P1080
for slide 1, rod 16x16
Two-position bit holder with cylindrical coupling D.20 --- I-K60115 I-P1100
Three-position bit holder with cylindrical coupling D.20 --- I-K60117 I-P1120
Three-position bit holder with cylindrical coupling D.20 --- I-K60120 I-P1140
for slide 1, to be fastened on motor drives
Three-position bit holder with cylindrical coupling D.32 --- --- I-P1170
for slide 2 (N°1 already in basic machine)
Radial drilling driven unit, angularly adjustable --- I-K60135 ---
for slide 1 with coupling for collets ER11
Radial drilling driven unit, angularly adjustable --- --- I-N0100
for slide Y2 with coupling for collets ER11
Radial drilling and milling driven unit for slide 1 --- I-K60137 ---
with coupling for collets ESX/ER 20
(N° 4 already in basic machine)
Radial drilling and milling driven unit for slide 1 and 2 --- --- I-N0010
Driven unit for slide 2 consisting of: --- --- I-N0220
N°1 coupling for polygon
N°2 rotating spindles with coupling for collets ESX/ER20
Driven unit for slide 2 consisting of: --- --- I-N0230
N°2 rotating spindles with coupling for collets ESX/ER20
N°1 cylindrical coupling D.32 mm
Radial drilling and milling driven unit for slide 1 --- I-K60139 I-N0040
with cylindrical coupling D.16
Double toolholder for external turning from turret --- I-K60141 ---
for rod 16x16
Double bit holder from turret with cylindrical coupling --- I-K60150 ---
D.25 mm
Radial drilling and milling driven unit from turret with --- I-K60152 ---
coupling for pince ESX/ER 20
Double radial drilling and milling driven unit from turret --- I-K60153 ---
Traversing rotating unit for revolver with sleeve coupling --- I-K60155 ---
D.16 (without traversing disk)
Traversing disk D.90 mm with shaft and N° 10 inserts --- I-K60156 I-N3000
Double axial drilling and milling driven unit from turret --- I-K60157 ---
with coupling for pince ESX/ER 20
Drilling and milling driven unit, angularly adjustable from --- I-K60158 ---
60° to 90°, from turret with coupling for pince ESX/ER 20
Drilling and milling driven unit, angularly adjustable from --- I-K60159 ---
0° to 60°, from turret with coupling for pince ESX/ER 20

Description Drawing List code List code

42|10 42|8
Collet holder spindle for collet ESX/ER16 --- I-K60160 I-I2005
with cylindrical coupling D.20 mm
Collet holder spindle for collet ESX/ER25 --- I-K60165 ---
Double collet holder spindle for collet ESX/ER16 --- I-K60167 ---
Collet holder spindle for collet ESX/ER25 --- --- I-I2020
Driven toothing unit for not oriented toothing with --- I-K60175 ---
sleeve coupling D.10,13,16,22 mm for turret
Collet ER11 --- I-K60245 I-I2100
Min diameter 0,5 mm
Max diameter 7 mm
Collet ESX/ER16 --- I-K60250 I-I2105
Min diameter 0,5 mm
Max diameter 10 mm
Min diameter 1 mm
Max diameter 13 mm
Min diameter 1 mm
Max diameter 16 mm
Reduction bush --- I-K60241 I-I2200
Outer diameter 20 mm
Inner diameter, min 4 mm, max 16 mm
Reduction bush --- I-K60240 ---
Reduction bush --- --- I-I2210

Toolholder for pick-up support with N° 3 cylindrical

coupling D. 25 mm and N° 1 for 16x16
(N°1 already in basic machine)
I-P1200
I-K60240

Axial drilling driven unit for pick-up support (slide 2) with

n°2 rotating spindles with coupling for collets ESX/ER 20 and
n°2 cylindrical coupling D.25 mm
I-K60021
I-K60255
I-K60240

SPRINT42|10 linear SPRINT42|8 linear

Tool holder plate for slide 1 with 6 positions
for rod 16x16 (N°1 already in basic machine)
I-K60030
IP060


One-position bit holder with cylindrical coupling
D. 20 for slide 1, rod 16x16
I-K60110
I-P1080
I-K60241
I-I2200


Two-position bit holder with cylindrical coupling
D.20 for slide 1, rod 16x16
I-K60115
I-P1100
I-K60241
I-I2200


Three-position bit holder with cylindrical coupling
D.20 for slide 1, rod 16x16
I-K60117
I-P1120
I-K60241
I-I2200


Radial drilling driven unit, angularly adjustable for slide 1 / slide Y2
with coupling for collets ER11
I-K60135
I-N0100
I-K60245
I-I2100


Radial drilling and milling driven unit for slide 1 / slide 2
I-K60137
I-N0010
SPRINT 42|10 linear

I-K60255 SPRINT 42|8 linear
I-I2110
Radial drilling and milling driven unit for slide 1

with cylindrical coupling D.16
I-K60139
I-N0040

Double toolholder for external turning from turret

for rod 16x16
I-K60141

Double bit holder from turret with cylindrical coupling D.25 mm
I-K60150
I-K60240

Radial drilling and milling driven unit from turret with

I-K60152
I-K60255

Double radial drilling and milling driven unit from turret
I-K60245
I-K60153

Traversing rotating unit for revolver

with sleeve coupling D.16 (without traversing disk)
I-K60155
42|10
I-K60156 Traversing disk D.90 mm with shaft and N° 10 inserts
42|8
I-N3000

Double axial drilling and milling driven unit from turret

I-K60157
I-K60255

Drilling and milling driven unit,

angularly adjustable from 60° to 90°, from turret
I-K60158
I-K60255

Drilling and milling driven unit,

angularly adjustable from 0° to 60°, from turret
I-K60159
I-K60255


Collet holder spindle
for collet ESX/ER16
I-K60160
I-I2005
I-K60250
I-I2105
Collet holder spindle

for collet ESX/ER25
with cylindrical coupling D.20/32 mm
I-K60165
I-I2020
I-K60260
I-I2115

Driven toothing unit

for not oriented toothing
with sleeve coupling D.10,13,16,22 mm

for turret
I-K60175


Control interfaces
6 Control interfaces
6.1 Operating panel
7
1
6 5
4
3
1. CNC programming keyboard • To edit programs

• To enter data for the CNC
• In MS-Windows environment it is used as a PC keyboard for using the va-
rious applications (Calculator, Wordpad, etc.).
2. Smart key, operating modes Smart key

and access level
Magnetic key allowing users to use the machine.
Fare riferimento al capitolo 2 “Descrizione della macchina base” di questo ma-
nuale.

Control interfaces
3. Panel Sliding door opening button

This button unlocks the sliding guard by operating the electric bolt.
The guard can only be opened when the coolant is off and the au-
tomatic cycle and all axes/spindles are stopped.
No movements or operations (except for opening and closing the spindle col-
lets) is allowed when the door is open if automatic mode is selected.
Manual movement of the chip extractor forwards and backwards
The chip extractor may be moved manually when the
machine is on (not in emergency mode) in any CNC
operating mode other than automatic and with the mo-
bile guards closed.
Manual main spindle collet opening/closing.
Manual frontal spindle collet opening/closing.
The collets can be manually opened/closed also with
the sliding door open (main spindle and frontal spind-
le).
The collets can only be closed in automatic CNC mode

with no program running.

Control interfaces
4. Control devices Open guard axis enabling device (A)

This is a retained button needed for moving the axes and turning the spindles.
It can be used in tooling mode only with the working door open by the machine
C tool fitter. The maximum axis speed is 2 m/min and the maximum rotation
speed of the spindles is 50 rpm.
D Mouse (B)
This has the same function as a computer mouse for selecting and entering on
the screen.
E
Machine on (C)
Press this button to restore working conditions after an emergency stop and
B prepare the electrical devices to receive controls and operate. The CNC will be-
come operational again.
Emergency stop (D)
A Press this button to cut off electrical power to all moving parts and override the
F CNC to emergency alarm conditions preventing all machine functions.
In this condition, the axes and spindles will stop as quickly as possibly. The sup-
ply of coolant will be cut off. Power will be cut off from the compressed air and
hydraulic circuit solenoid valves.
Override drives (E)
This is a selector on a graduated scale.
It is used to increase or decrease the axis feed from 0% to 120% with respect
to the CNC operating mode.
Knob for incremental axis movement (F)
Graduated knob used for moving the axes in steps (each notch corresponds to
a selected increment, which may be 1, 10, 100 microns).
In CNC HANDLE mode, after axis under movement selection using the buttons
for movement in JOG mode, clockwise knob operating causes movement in
positive axis direction, while anticlockwise causes movement in negative direc-
tion.
5. CNC control keyboard See the “Functional structure of the CNC keyboard” paragraph below.
6. USB interface Two USB ports are located on the left of the operating panel to upload and
download data and programs.
7. Video and softkeys High-resolution screen for viewing all information on machine operation.
The softkeys are arranged around the video. Some assume functions defined
by the page which is active at the time.

Control interfaces
6.2 Functional structure of the CNC keyboard
2
1
1
3
5
4 2
3
5 1 1
Area Description
1 CNC mode selection, axis selection and management
2 Spindle management
3 Part program management
4 Coolant and chip extractor management
5 Other functional buttons

Control interfaces
6.2.1 Area 1: CNC mode selection, axis selection and management
Button Icon Meaning
Selects AUTOMATIC mode (shown on the top of the screen).

This is the normal operating mode of the machine in which a complete program
is automatically run to make the part. The operator simply supervises correct
machine operation.
Selects EDIT mode.

The corresponding yellow icon appears on the screen.
Selects MDI mode (shown on the top of the screen).

In this mode, one or more commands can be run automatically (said program
blocks) without having a complete program.
The programming instructions run in MDI mode are the same as those forming
a program which can be run in AUTOMATIC mode.
Selects REF mode.

The corresponding yellow icon is displayed on the screen.
In this mode, each of the axes can be controlled on its reference point by pres-
sing the REF button and moving the required axis using the directional buttons
and modulating the speed with the override selector.
Selects JOG mode (shown on the top of the screen).

Axes and spindles can be moved in JOG mode by using the control panel but-
tons. The buttons are retained, i.e. the movement stops as soon as the pres-
sure ceases on the button.
Activates JOG INC mode (incremental manual feed mode):

select one of the axes using buttons X, Y, Z or C and the entity of the
shift with buttons “X 1”, “X 10”, “X 100”. Press “+” or “-“ to move the axis
in the specified direction.
Selects HANDLE mode.

When this mode is activated, using one of the direction buttons of each axis of
the channel (indicated by a corresponding yellow icon on the screen) will select
the axis to control with the flywheel.
Turn the handwheel clockwise to move the axis in the positive direction. Turn
anticlockwise to move it in the negative direction.
Channel or CNC module selection, where only one part program may be run.
According to the machine structure, machine axes (geometric axes) and spind-
les are assigned to each channel.
Each channel runs its own machining program independently controlled by the
CNC.
Press the button repeatedly to reach the required channel on saddles 1, 2 and 3.
The selected channel is displayed with a blue icon with the number of the chan-
nel inside.
Selects INC X1 mode.

This button sets the amount of the incremental displacement to 1 micron
(0.0001 inch) in JOG mode.
In HANDLE mode it sets the speed to 1% of the maximum speed.

Control interfaces
Button Icon Meaning



Commands the axis of the selected channel in the indicated direction.

The concerned axis is X.

The concerned axis is Y.

The concerned axis is Z.
Press this button for rapid continuous movement of the axis.

Control interfaces
6.2.2 Area 2: Spindle management
Button Icon Meaning
SPINDLE CW
In tooling mode, turns the selected spindle clockwise at a speed of 20
rpm. The spindle stops when the button is released.
SPINDLE CCW
In tooling mode, turns the selected spindle anticlockwise at a speed of
20 rpm. The spindle stops when the button is released.
SPINDLE STOP
Stops rotation of the selected spindle.
SPINDLE SELECT
In tooling mode, alternatively selects the main spindle and the
concerned path driven tool.
Clockwise and anticlockwise controls using the direction button will be
addressed only to the selected spindle.
Use of this button prepares for clockwise movement of axis “C”.
Use of this button prepares for anticlockwise movement of axis “C”.
Reduces rotation speed of the spindle in 5% steps.
Spindles override. It restores the speed to 100%
Increases spindle rotation speed in 5% steps (to 100% set value).

Control interfaces
6.2.3 Area 3: Part program management
Button Icon Meaning
SINGLE BLOCK
In MEM or MDI mode, causes the program blocks to be run one at a
time.
Grey icon: single block not active.
Yellow icon: single block active.
BLOCK SKIP
In MEM or MDI mode, the blocks proceeded by “/” are skipped.
Grey icon: skip block not active.
Yellow icon: skip block active.
Grey icon: M00 function reached in part program, not active.

No associated Yellow icon: M00 function reached in part program. Blinks when only one
button path reaches the M00 function and lights up steady when all paths reach
the M00 function.
OPT STOP
Stops automatic program running when M01 function is run.
Grey icon: M01 function stop (optional end of cycle) not required.
Yellow icon: M01 function stop (optional end of cycle) active; the part
program will stop when the M01 function is reached.
GO
Activates rapid OVERRIDE limitation to % specified by user.
Grey icon: rapid speed limit NOT active.

Yellow icon: rapid speed limit active (speed limit active for G0 blocks
only).
AUTOMATIC program management via knob
Light grey icon: programming via knob is OFF.

Grey icon: programming via knob is ON but not active. Automatic mode
is required.
Yellow icon: programming via knob is ON and active because system is
in Automatic mode.
CYCLE STOP
Stops the automatic cycle of part program.
Grey icon: Automatic lather mode is OFF.

Red icon: machine cycle in HOLD; this state is reached when the cycle
is ON and CYCLE STOP button is pressed.
Starts lathe in Automatic mode.

Control interfaces
Button Icon Meaning
RESET
Stops the lathe and restarts the program. This button is also used to
recognise operator alarms and messages.

Control interfaces
6.2.4 Area 4: Coolant and chip extractor management
Button Icon Meaning
Coolant enabled: in JOG, JOG INC, HANDLE, JOG REF operating modes the
coolant is issued if the button is pressed for at least 3 seconds. Issuance stops
when released.
In AUTO or MDI operating modes, M functions related to coolant are needed to
activate the coolant.
The coolant is activated only when the doors are closed.
Green icon: coolant is active.

Grey icon: coolant is enabled only with M function.
Coolant disenabled: coolant is stopped when this button is pressed and all res-
pective M functions are ignored.
Red icon: coolant is off.
Enables operation of the chip extractor in automatic mode.
Green icon: the chip extractor moves forward.

Yellow icon: chip extractor moves backward.
Green icon with red belt: the belt is overloaded.
Disables operation of the chip extractor in automatic mode.
Red icon: chip extractor is disenabled.

Control interfaces
6.2.5 Area 5: Other functional buttons
Button Icon Meaning
This button is used to turn the tool monitor function on/off using the monitoring sy-
stem installed on the machine if the option is enabled.
Grey icon: tool monitor off.
Yellow icon: tool monitor on.
Green icon: tool monitoring in progress.
If the sister tools option is enabled, this button is used to turn the tool life monitoring
system on and off.
Grey icon: tool life monitor off.
Yellow icon: tool life monitor on.
Green icon: tool life monitoring in progress.
Tool decrease: allows, using the revolver rotation of the selected channel, to posi-
tion a tool identified with a number (from 1 to 12) less than the current one. It can
be used in JOG and INC modes.
Tool increase: it allows, using the revolver rotation of the selected channel, to posi-
tion a tool identified with a number (from 1 to 12) higher than the current one. It
can be used in JOG and INC modes.
This button runs the Safety Integrated Test phases.
This button activates timing between bush and spindle.
Scrolls the PATH number in sequence.

Path indication: the blue icon corresponding to the selected path number
appears on the right.
e.g. Path 1 selected.

Control interfaces
6.3 Windows icons

The Windows icon structure and hierarchy is shown in the following table.
Main menu Submenu Description
Windows tool Link to Windows NOTEPAD.
Link to Windows WORDPAD.

This contains links to MS-
Windows applications.
Link to Windows CALCULATOR.
Screen Display Function

Restores the view on the CNC interface.
Runs “PRINT ACTIVE SCREEN”.

Saves the screen snapshot in the directory selected using “Directory
Selection”.
Next Page
Shows the next page of the active submenu.
Back to the main menu

Recalls the main menu window.
Data Directory selection

Communication Selects the directory where the files will be written and read, such as
programs, geometries or screenshots.
USB Peripheral deactivation

Deactivates the USB peripheral (operation needed before extracting
For managing and the USB peripheral).
exchanging data between
the CNC and the con-
IP address setting
nected peripherals (PC,
USB pen, etc.). Allows PC IP address management.



Control interfaces
Documentation FANUC Manuals

Shows installed GE FANUC documentation (where applicable).
MANUALS
For recalling on-line docu- FANUC Maintenance

mentation. Shows dedicated GE FANUC maintenance activities (where applica-
ble).
MAINTENANCE
DMG Manuals
Shows installed DMG documentation (where applicable).
MANUALS
DMG Maintenance
Shows dedicated DMG maintenance activities (where applicable).
MAINTENANCE

Next Page


Control interfaces
DMG Power Tools Service Agent

Optional software for managing machine maintenance.
DMG Messenger
(optional) Optional software for sending SMS messages and/or e-mails related
to the state of the machine.
Net Service
Optional software for remote machine assistance.

Keyboard to Netservice (Netservice software function)
Keyboard to Operator (Netservice software function)

Machine Function 1 In Jog mode (incremental or using the knob), with the collet open,
press this softkey to feed the automatic bar loader in the JOG mode.
The icon will turn yellow if the button is not pressed.
The icon will turn green if feed conditions are satisfied when the sof-
tkey is pressed.
Menu
customisable The icon may turn red when the softkey is pressed if not all bar fee-
by the manufacturer ding conditions are satisfied (e.g. if the bar loader interface is not ac-
tive).
Next Page


Control interfaces
Machine Function 2
Menu
customisable
by the manufacturer
MTB/Service menu Screen Display Function

MTB =
Machine Tool Builder.
Menu
customisable
by the manufacturer
PC System Power off Allows to turn the PC off.

(This operation is mandatory before opening the master switch of the machine)

Control interfaces
6.4 User page

The user pages are designed to facilitate lathe operation.
Fig. 6-1 General structure of user page
The INDEX page will appear when the machine is switched on.
Press the “GITAL” softkey if the machine is on and any page is displayed on the screen. The softkey is found either on
the axis coordinate page (press POS on the Fanuc keyboard) or directly by pressing CUSTOM2 on the programming key-
board.
Read/write use of these pages depends on the operator’s qualification (some are reserved for GITAL personnel only).
2
1 3
4
Area Function
This area contains the list of functions which can be selected on
1 Function index area
the pages.
2 Operative area This area shows the data to be edited and the conditions requi-
red.
This area shows brief information on the functions managed by
3 Supplementary information area
the selected field.
4 Data entry area This area allows to edit operating data.
Editing is allowed if two conditions are satisfied:
• Compatibility of the required change and the working mode: (e.g.: it is not possible to switch from radial to diametrical
corrections when the machine is in automatic mode).
• The person making the changes must be adequately skilled (see PASSWORD PROTECTION).
The conditions to be met are shown by the side of the INPUT field and highlighted in red.
Data can be entered in two different ways:
• Data selectable from a list : a restricted range of reciprocally alternative options is given (for example: ON, OFF;
ITALIAN, GERMAN, ENGLISH, etc.).
• Free numeric data within a defined range: this is used for all cases in which various numeric values are possible.
The system will check the data entered by the operator to ensure that they are consistent with the context and within
the limits set by GITAL.

Control interfaces
User page navigation
User page can be navigated using the arrows located on the CNC
programming keyboard:
Active area Button functions

The “UP” and “DOWN” arrows select the page to be viewed in the operative area.
Index area
The “RIGHT” arrows activates the selected page.
The “UP” and “DOWN” arrows select the field to be edited. The value of the field is shown in the
data entry area.
The “LEFT” arrow activates the index area.
Operative area The “RIGHT” arrow is used to scroll the list of available values if the selected field is a list of va-
lues.
The “INPUT” button confirms editing in the selected field. This button must be pressed to save
the edited fields.
User page description tables

The fields contained on user pages will be described in the following para-
graphs by means of a table in which the following fields are described:
Name Description
N. Field type Data type Default setting Allowed values
Notes Access level Operating mode
N. indicates the field number identified on the user page.

Name contains the field name
Description contains a short description of the field meaning
specifies the nature of the data, namely: ON/OFF, integer, real, binary, value list with
Field type
possible indication of unit of measure
Data type indicates the field number identified on the user page
Default setting the predetermined active value
Allowed values the list of admitted values
Access level level required for editing defined in the password policy
Operating mode shows the CNC operating mode needed to make the change
Notes contains notes and comments

Control interfaces
6.4.1 “Saddle management” page

This page is used to activate/deactivate saddle operation and to define operation in AUTOMATIC mode.
Fig. 6-2 “Saddle management” page
1
2
3
4
Name Description
ENABLE SADDLE 1 Activates program path 1 in “Automatic” mode
1 Entry ON/OFF OFF ON/OFF
1 EDIT
1 EDIT
1 EDIT
SINGLE BLOCK SADDLE SYNCHRO Activates path synchronism during single block programming
running. The first path which ends the block (in single block) also
4 stops machining of the other path.
Entry ON/OFF OFF ON/OFF
1 EDIT
FAST SPEED LIMITATION (%) When selected, reduces rapid movement speed according to the
percentage specified in this field.
Entry Integer 100 from 10 to 100
5 Override equal to the programmed percentage is applied for axis 1 MDI
override values higher than specified when reduction is activated by
pressing “Lim G0” on the CNC control pad and the CNC is running a
rapid movement block.

Control interfaces
Name Description
ENABLE PART UNLOADING If set to ON, the part unloaded runs the release cycle and ena-
bles the M functions on the part program when the machine is
6 turned on.
/ 1 EDIT

Control interfaces
6.4.2 “Manufacturing data” page

This page shows the cycle time and is used to program the amount of parts to be manufactured. Data include
manufactured parts, part to be manufactured and estimated time remaining to complete production according
to production rate.
Fig. 6-3 “Manufacturing data” page
1
2
3
4
5
6
Name Description
ENABLE PART COUNTER Activates/deactivates the part counter.
1
The part counter is increased whenever the M18 function is read in 1 EDIT
path 1.
REQUIRED PARTS Allows to set the number of parts to be manufactured.
2 Entry Integer 0 from 1 to 99999999
1 EDIT
MANUFACTURED PARTS Shows the number of manufactured parts.
3
The manufactured part counter is increased whenever the M18 1 EDIT
function is read in path 1. This value can be edited by the user.
REMAINING PARTS This shows the number of parts remaining to complete the plan-
ned production.
4
Display Integer 0 --
- -

Control interfaces
Name Description
ESTIMATED RATE IN % Used to set production rate.
Entry Integer -- from 1 to 99
5 The rate percentage of the machine is estimated by the tooling 1 EDIT
operator considering the time for which cycle is suspended for
various operations (bar change, working area cleaning, tool
replacement, etc.) during production.
CYCLE TIME IN SECONDS This shows the cycle time needed to manufacture the part
expressed in seconds and hundredth of a second.
6 Display Real -- --
The machine must complete at least two consecutive cycles in order -- --
to calculate the cycle time correctly.
TIME REMAINING BEFORE END OF This shows the time (hh:mm:ss format) remaining to complete
PRODUCTION production considering the set production rate percentage.
Display Real -- --
7
The time remaining to complete production is calculated using the -- --
following formula:
(n. of residual parts) x (cycle time) /(production rate)

Control interfaces
6.4.3 “Machine management” page

This page is used to activate and deactivate the machine accessory devices.
Fig. 6-4 “Machine management” page
2
3
4
Name Description
WORKING AREA LAMP This selects the operating mode of the lamp in the working area.
Entry List of values ALWAYS ON ALWAYS ON; ALWAYS OFF;
1
SCREENSAVER 1H
Switched off after one hour without any button being pressed. None Any
PART EJECTION CONTROL This activates part ejection control.
2 Entry ON/OFF ON ON/OFF
Select ON to actual part ejection control. 1 EDIT
FRONTAL SPINDLE COLLET CLEANING This defines the cleaning time of the frontal spindle collet when
IN SECONDS the part is ejected.
3 Entry Integer (seconds) 0 from 0 to 60
This time is ignored if the frontal spindle is cleaned with the M502 1 EDIT
function. The air jet must be stopped with M503.
ENABLE AUTOMATIC SWITCH Defines the method for stopping the machine.
OPENING
4 Entry Binary 0 0.1
By selecting 1, the machine master switch is opened automatically at 1 EDIT
the end of the PC and CNC stop procedure.

Control interfaces
Name Description
OVERRIDE SPINDLES This activates or deactivates the possibility of varying the speci-
fic rpm. The speed percentage of each single spindle is shown
by the side.
percentage from 5 to 100%
Use the dedicated -/+ buttons to vary the percentage value (see zone 1 EDIT
4 on the control panel keyboard)
CLEAN OUTSIDE OF PART FOR This defines the time for which the pump for the external work
SECONDS area and part cleaning gun is activated.
6
Entry Integer (seconds) 0 from 0 to 60
1 EDIT

Control interfaces
6.4.4 “Extractor and conveyor belt” page

This page allows to:
1. time part conveyor belt operation;
2. configure chip extractor movement according to whether a belt or auger device is used.
Fig. 6-5 “Extractor and conveyor belt” page
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Name Description
BELT OPERATING TIME 1 SEC. The first conveyor belt is started with the M500 function. The belt
stops automatically after the time set in this field. The belt must
1 be stopped with the M501 function if the value is equal to 0.
None Any
BELT OPERATING TIME 2 SEC. The second belt (where fitted) is operated for the time shown in
the field after the movement of the first belt ends.
2
Select ON to actual part ejection control. 1 EDIT
EXTRACTOR TYPE This is used to define whether the device uses a belt or a scroll
to convey chips.
3 Entry Extractor type list Defined during instal- BELT, AUGER
lation
3 Any
FORWARD TIME This is the forward operation time in seconds.
None Any

Control interfaces
Name Description
BACKWARD TIME This is the backward operation time in seconds.
Entry Integer 0 for belt extractor from 0 to 999
5 5 for auger extractor
Normally used for scroll extractors to reverse direction of rotation and None Any
help flattening the chip.
PAUSE TIME Stop time in seconds.
None Any
FORCED BACKWARD TIME Forced backward movement time of operation in seconds.
7
The extractor performs the “forced backward” movement for the None Any
programmed time when the overload signal is tripped.
NUMBER OF CONSECUTIVE This sets the number of consecutive overloads tripped before
OVERLOADS the 2023 CHIP EXTRACTOR JAMMED message is generated
8 and the extractor movement is stopped.
None Any
ENABLE OVERLOAD DEVICE This activates or deactivates the chip extractor overload detec-
tion device.
9 Entry ON/OFF ON ON, OFF
By selecting OFF, the device will be either ignored or no alarm will be None Any
generated.
MESSAGE 2023 This activates end of cycle stop for the message:
STOP AT END OF CYCLE 2023 CHIP EXTRACTOR JAMMED
10
Entry ON/OFF OFF ON, OFF
This allows production also in unmanned conditions. None Any
MESSAGE 2024 This activates end of cycle stop for the message:
STOP AT END OF CYCLE 2024 EXTRACTOR OVERLOAD CONTROL DEVICE FAILURE
11
This allows production also in unmanned conditions. None Any
MESSAGE 2022 2022 CHIP EXTRACTOR OVERLOAD during automatic
DISPLAYED extractor release attempts.
12 Entry ON/OFF OFF ON, OFF
Message 2022 (extractor overload) is a read-only message and does None Any
not cause the machine to stop.

Control interfaces
6.4.5 “Spindle angular timing” page

This page is used to reference the front spindle angle with respect to the main spindles. This function is useful
when machining hexagonal or square bars and both are closed on the shaped profile.
Fig. 6-6 “Spindle angular timing” page
2
3
4
5
Name Description
SYNCHRONISM TIMING This sets the frontal spindle timing for synchronised rework. It is
used when the profile of the part to be reworked is not circular
(e.g. hexagonal).
When switched on, the machine does not know the position of
the two spindles. Therefore, during tool, the spindles must be
1 positioned at least once with angular indication. In order to do
so, reset the positioning controls, fit the front spindle part and
close the collet. Press INPUT after this.
M19 B0 does not need to be reset when the machine is switched 1 MDI
back on after tooling.
SPINDLE POSITION This is used to shift the main spindle angular orientation zero.
TIMING Proceed as follows:
1 - Program the angular value in MDI, e.g. M19 B22.6 P11 (the
spindle orients at 22.6).
2 - Press INPUT (start timing M19).
2 3 - Press RESET after timing.
4 - Program in MDI: M19B0 P11 (angle B0 now coincides with
angle B22.6 before timing).
The spindle must be oriented at least once with M19 B0 before timing 1 MDI
as soon as the machine is switched on during tooling only.

Control interfaces
Name Description
FRONTAL SPINDLE POSITION This is used to shift the frontal spindle angular orientation zero.
TIMING Proceed as follows:
1 - Program the angular value in MDI, e.g. M19 B33.1 P21 (the
spindle orients at 33.1).
2 - Press INPUT (start timing M19).
3 3 - Press RESET after timing.
4 - Program in MDI: M19B0 P21 (angle B0 now coincides with
angle B33.1 before timing).
The spindle must be oriented at least once with M19 B0 before timing 1 MDI
as soon as the machine is switched on during tooling only.
BUSH POSITION In the ON position, this resets the angular differences (present
TIMING only in CNC) present in main spindle motor and rotating bush
motor encoder readings.
4 This timing does not work on the bush torque value.
/ 3 MDI
PROFILED BAR CHECK In the ON position, this activates the angular difference check
between the main spindle motor and rotating bush motor enco-
der readings. The machine is stopped in an alarm if the diffe-
5 rence exceeds a predetermined limit value.
/ 3 MDI

Control interfaces
6.4.6 “Automatic shutdown” page

This page allows activation/deactivation and setting of machine automatic shutdown.
The lathe will stop at end of cycle when the programmed time is reached if the automatic power-off option is
selected. The “Delay master switch opening sec.” field can be used to delay power-off.
Fig. 6-7 “Automatic shutdown” page
1
2
3
4
Name Description
ENABLE This activates/deactivate automatic shutdown function.
None Any
STOP WORK HOURS This is used to set the automatic shutdown time (hours).
2 Entry Integer (hour) 0 from 0 to 23
None Any
STOP WORK MINUTES This is used to set the automatic shutdown time (minutes).
3
Entry Integer (minutes) 0 from 0 to 59
None Any
MASTER SWITCH OPENING The automatic shutdown delay counter starts when the machine
DELAY IN SECONDS stops. The automatic shutdown of the PC and the machine can-
4 not be stopped when the counter is complete.
Entry Integer (seconds) 60 from 60 to 240
None Any

Control interfaces
6.4.7 “Loader management” page

This page enables bar loader operation and is used to define the main spindle operation during bar change.
Fig. 6-8 “Loader management” page
1
2
3
4
Name Description
ENABLE This is used to activate the bar loader.
1 EDIT
REVOLUTION SPEED IN RPM This defines the swinging speed during bar change.
Entry integer 0 from 0 to 60
2
rpm
1 EDIT
REVERSION TIME IN SECONDS Waiting time to reverse spindle rotation from clockwise to anti-
clockwise and vice versa to perform swinging.
3 Entry integer 0 from 0 to 999
(seconds)
1 EDIT
WAIT FOR SYNCHO RELEASE Waiting time of the machine after collet opening for bar advance-
MS ment.
4 Entry integer 500 from 0 to 500
(seconds)
1 EDIT

Control interfaces
6.4.8 “Maintenance” page

This page is used according to the machining working time counter to activate maintenance operations for
the concerned devices.
Fig. 6-9 “Maintenance” page
1
2
3
4
5
Name Description
HYDRAULIC UNIT OIL AND FILTER This indicates the hours before needing to add oil and clean the
hydraulic unit filter.
1
Entry Integer (hour) 4.000 --
3 MDI
REFRIGERATOR FILTER This indicates the number of automatic running hours before
needing to clean the filter in the refrigerator.
2 Entry Integer (automatic 100 --
cycle hours)
3 EDIT
COOLANT This indicates the number of running hours before needing to
change the coolant.
3
Entry Integer 2.000 --
3 EDIT
CONDITIONER This indicates the number of running hours before needing to
AIR FILTER change the air conditioner filter.
4
Entry Integer 500 --
3 EDIT

Control interfaces
Name Description
ENCODER/CNC BATTERIES This indicates the number of running hours before needing to
change the encoder and CNC batteries.
5
Entry Integer 5.000 --
3 EDIT
FREE FIELD 1 First free user field. The user can associate a device to a
machine operation counter for scheduled maintenance.
6 Entry Integer (machine -- --
running hours)
3 MDI
FREE FIELD 2 Second free user field. The user can associate a device to a
machine operation counter for scheduled maintenance.
7 Entry Integer (machine -- --
running hours)
3 MDI

Control interfaces
6.4.9 “Axis stroke restriction” page

This page allows to enable and disenable axis stroke limitations for the various paths in axis fields.
This allows the user to reduce the standard axis strokes according to particular needs.
Fig. 6-10 “Axis stroke restriction” page
Name Description
Allowed
N. Field type Data type Default setting
values
AXIS LIMIT PATH 1 This enables and disenables stroke limit of axes X1, Z1 and A1
in the following lines for path 1.
1
1 EDIT
AXIS LIMIT PATH 2 This enables and disenables stroke limit of axes X2, Z2, W2 and
A2 in the following lines for path 2.
2
1 EDIT
AXIS LIMIT PATH 3 This enables and disenables stroke limit of axes X3, Z3, Y3 and
A3 in the following lines for path 3.
3
1 EDIT

Control interfaces
6.4.10 “Data input/output” page

This page is used to select the hardware port physically located on the electrical cabinet master switch panel
where to direct the data to be downloaded from the machine.
Fig. 6-11 “Data input/output” page
1
2
3
Name Description
TYPE This selects the data input/output device.
Entry List of values STD.OUT STD.OUT; RS232C
STD.OUT (standard output) uses the path selected on the windows 1 EDIT
1 page recalled by the vertical softkey.
C:\ (I/O on machine PC hard drive)
D:\ (I/O on USB memory stick)
RS232C (serial transmission port via external PC)
BAUDRATE Serial transmission speed (bytes per second).
2 Entry List of values 9.600 600; 1200; 2400; 4800; 9600; 19200
Valid only if “RS232C” is selected in the “Type” field. 1 EDIT
STOP BIT Defines end of serial transmission.
3 Entry List of values 2 bits 1 Bit; 2 Bit
Valid only if “RS232C” is selected in the “Type” field. 1 EDIT

Control interfaces
6.4.11 “Machine configuration” page

This page is used to configure the machine as required.
Fig. 6-12 “Machine configuration” page
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Name Description
SERIAL NUMBER This is the serial number of the machine.
1 Entry Real -- Eight digits
This setting is for qualified GILDEMEISTER Italiana personnel only. MACHINE MDI
MODEL The machine model.
Entry List of values -- SPRINT 65; SPEED 12; SPRINT 20;
2 SPRINT 32; SPRINT 42; SPRINT 42-
10; SPEED20-11L; ...
SELECT LANGUAGE This selects the machine language (CNC pages, operator
pages, PLC alarms).
Entry Integer (automatic 100 ENGLISH, GERMAN, FRENCH, ITA-
3 cycle hours) LIAN, SPANISH, DUTCH, POLISH,
CZECH, DANISH, CHINESE, PORTU-
GUESE; ..
The CNC must be rebooted after changing the language. 3 MDI
MEASURING SYSTEM Defines the measuring system: millimetres or inches
(0: MM, 1: INCH)
4 Entry Binary 0 0; 1
Switch the machine off and back on after changing the measuring 3 MDI
system.

Control interfaces
Name Description
COLLET CONTROL TYPE Selects the collet closing type.
Entry List of values HYDRAULIC HYDRAULIC; PNEUMATIC; BETA
5
MOTOR; PNEUMATIC + BRAKE
3 MDI
DCS MODEL This indicates which type of dual check the machine has for
(DUAL CHECK SAFETY) safety signal purposes.
Entry List of values 3 PATHS WITH NEW NO DCS; 2 PATHS WITH CON-
6 BOARDS TACTORS; 2 PATHS WITH NEW
BOARDS; 3 PATHS WITH NEW
BOARDS
CDS SYSTEM This enables/disables the CDS interface (high pressure)
(COOLANT DELIVERY SYSTEM)
(0: NO, 1: YES)
7
Entry Binary 0 0 = CDS not installed; 1 = CDS instal-
led
3 MDI
LAMP TYPE This defines the installed lamp type.
8 Entry List of values STD GITAL STD GITAL; STD DMG; CUSTOMER
3 MDI
CONTROL PANEL TYPE This defines the installed control panel type.
9 Entry List of values SLIM PANEL STD DMG; SLIM PANEL; FANUC
(0 = LATHE 1=SWISS TYPE) This enables use of the rotating bush (OPTIONAL) when set to
1.
10
Entry 0/1 0 0/1
/ 3 MDI
Z1 STROKE FOR SPECIAL BUSHING This enables stroke limiting of axis Z1 when a special rotating
bush is used when set to ON.
11
/ 3 MDI
Z1 STROKE REDUCTION VALUE This indicates the axis Z1 axis stroke reduction value of software
limit switch with respect to preset value for standard bushing.
Entry Number 55 0 - 99
12
For example, if a pneumatic recovery bush is used (clearance 3 MDI
L=193mm), with respect to standard bush (clearance L=138mm), Z1
stroke reduction value is: 193-138=55mm

Control interfaces
6.4.12 “Wear and geometry setting” page

This page is used to edit the machine X axis correction criteria. Gildemeister Italiana sets axis X correct using
DIAMETRICAL values. Based on prior experience or for practical reasons, some users prefer to used RA-
DIAL wear corrections. This page is used to switch from one setting to the other with ease.
Fig. 6-13 “Wear and geometry setting” page
Name Description
CURRENT SETTING Setting of X axis as radial or diametrical.
1 Entry List of values DIAMETRICAL DIAMETRICAL; RADIAL
Switch the machine off and back on after changing the setting. 3 EDIT

Control interfaces
6.4.13 “GITAL options enabling” page

This page is used to activate optional functions and user software packages developed to make manned and
unmanned production safer.
Fig. 6-14 “GITAL options enabling” page
1
2
3
4
5
Name Description
LOAD MONITOR Gital LOAD MONITOR option (tool monitoring).
1 Entry ON/OFF OFF ON; OFF
Refer to the LOAD MONITOR manual for a detailed description. OPTION MDI
SISTER TOOLS Gital SISTER TOOLS option.
MANAGEMENT
2
Entry ON/OFF OFF ON; OFF
Refer to the SISTER TOOLS manual for a detailed description. OPTION MDI
AXIS C This enables axes C1 and C2.
Entry Binary -- 0= no axes C;
3
1= both axes C are present
MACHINE MDI
TURBO THREADED Select NO encoder to enable the sensorless turbo threader.
Select YES to enable the turbo threader with encoder.
Select TFDDOFF to deactivate the turbo threader.
4
Entry Alphabetic TFDDOFF TFDDOFF
/NO encoder/YES encoder
/ 1 MDI

Control interfaces
Name Description
SERIAL PORT USED Select one of the three possible cases to enable/disable the
communication port between turbo threader and CNC.
5
Entry Alphabetic NoRS232 RS232C1/RS232C2/NoRS232
/ 1 MDI

Control interfaces
6.4.14 “Axis reference” page

This page is used to reference the axes of the three paths.
Fig. 6-15 “Axis reference” page
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Name Description
X1 Enables and disenables axis X1 referencing in path 1.
Entry Binary 1 1; 0
• Check that the concerned axis corresponds to the displayed path. 3 MDI
1 • Take the axis to the reference point defined by the manufacturer.
• Open the door.
• Press the EMERGENCY STOP button.
• Confirm the new reference point.
Z1 Enables and disenables axis Z1 referencing in path 1.
• See field note 1. 3 MDI
Y1 Enables and disenables axis Y1 referencing in path 1.

Control interfaces
Name Description
Y3 Enables and disenables axis Y3 referencing in path 3.
A3 Enables and disenables axis A3 referencing in path 3.

Control interfaces
6.4.15 “Axis reversion clearance” page

This page is used to enter the axis reversion clearance for the three paths.
Fig. 6-16 “Axis reversion clearance” page
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Name Description
X1 This is used to enter the value for axis X1 in microns for path 1.
Entry Integer Measured by the from 0 to 20 microns
manufacturer
1
• Check that the concerned axis corresponds to the displayed path. 3 MDI
• Measure the reversion clearance with a 1/1000th dial gauge.
• Enter the result in millimetres.
Z1 This is used to enter the value for axis Z1 in microns for path 1.
2
manufacturer
Y1 This is used to enter the value for axis Y1 in microns for path 1.
3
manufacturer
4
manufacturer

Control interfaces
Name Description
5
manufacturer
6
manufacturer
7
manufacturer
Y3 This is used to enter the value for axis Y3 in microns for path 3.
8
manufacturer
A3 This is used to enter the value for axis A3 in microns for path 3.
9
manufacturer

Control interfaces
6.4.16 “Warranty” page

This page is used to provide data related to the machine use time by the user.
Fig. 6-17 “Warranty” page
Name Description
MACHINE ON (HOURS) This counts the hours for which the machine has being running.
1 Display Integer (hour) -- --
-- --
MACHINE CYCLE (HOURS) This counts the hours for which the machine has being produ-
cing.
2
Display Integer (hour) -- --
-- --

Control interfaces
6.4.17 “Software versions” page

This page summarises all the software versions loaded on the machine.
Fig. 6-18 “Software versions” page
1
2
3
4
Name Description
SW PLC PLC software version.
1 Display Alphanumeric -- --
-- --
SW MEX MACRO-EXECUTER software version.
-- --
SW CEX C-EXECUTOR software version.
-- --
PARAMETERS CNC parameter version
4 SW CEX C-EXECUTOR software version.
Display Alphanumeric -- --
SAVE TO SELECTED DRIVE Insert memory card in USB port, press INPUT on CNC to save
the following two files:
1) matricola_macchina.VER (contains Gital and Fanuc SW ver-
5 sions);
2) matricola_macchina.KEP (contains Keep-Relay backup).
Entry YES/NO NO YES; NO
None MDI

Control interfaces
6.4.18 “Cds settings”page

By means of this page it is possible to configure the software, which manages a generic CDS system to make
it suitable to the one connected to the machine.CDS = Coolant Delivery System or rather External cooling
systems.
Fig. 6-19 “Cds settings”Page

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
12
14
16 11 13 15 17
Name Description
START PUMP 1 Selection of the start-up method for pump 1
DISABLED; CYCLE START; WITH
1 Entry Value list DISABLED
EVn REQUESTn
3 MDI
SWITCH OFF DELAY (SEC) Switch off delay time of pump if not in use
2 Entry Integer (sec.) 0 da 0 a 999
3 MDI
AXES STOP DELAY (SEC) Axes feed-hold delay time due to coolant absence e
3 MDI
EVn REQUEST
3 MDI
3 MDI

Control interfaces
Name Description
AXES FEED-HOLD DELAY TIME DUE TO Delay time for the axes feed-hold due to coolant absence
ABSENCE OF COOLANT)
6
Entry Integer (sec.) 0 da 0 a 999
3 MDI
EVn REQUEST
3 MDI
3 MDI
AXES DELAY TIME (SEC) Delay time of the axes feed-hold due to coolant absence
3 MDI
ENABLE (CIRCUIT 1) Definition of which pump circuit 1 is connected to
10 Entry Value list DISABLED DISABLED; PUMP1; PUMP2; PUMP3
3 MDI
CONTROL (CIRCUIT 1) Enabling of the coolant control device for circuit 1
3 MDI
12 Entry Value list DISABLED DISABLED; PUMP1; PUMP2; PUMP3
3 MDI
3 MDI
Entry Value list DISABLE DISABLE; POMPA1; POMPA2;
14
POMPA3
3 MDI
3 MDI
Entry Value list DISABLE DISABLE; POMPA1; POMPA2;
16
POMPA33
3 MDI
3 MDI

Control interfaces
6.4.19 “CDS diagnosis”page

By means of this page it is possible to configure the software, which manages a generic CDS system to make
it suitable to the one connected to the machine.CDS = Coolant Delivery System or rather External cooling
systems.
Fig. 6-20 “CDS diagnosis”page

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13 14 15
Name Description
PUMP 1 Pump 1 diagnosis
1 display List of values
DUMP VALVE 1 Pump 1 dump valve diagnosis

PUMP 2 Pump 2 diagnosis


PUMP 3 Pump.3 diagnosis


Control interfaces
Name Description
MINIMUM LEVEL Minimum level warning

MAXIMUM LEVEL Maximum level warning

FAULT PRIORITY 1 Fault priority 1 from the CDS system with immediate machine
stop
9
display
FAULT PRIORITY 2 Fault priority 2 from the CDS system with immediate machine
stop
10
display On/Off
MESSAGE Reporting of a message from the CDS system

11 display
CIRCUIT 1 Circuit 1 diagnosis

12 display Value list


CIRCUIT 4 Circuit4 diagnosis

15 display Value lis

Control interfaces
6.4.20 “Heat compensation”page

This application is used to compensate for changes of part dimensions caused by structural distortion of the machine
structure due to heating (from the machining process and from the external environment).
The page shown is used to activate/deactivate this function and setup the various parameters
Fig. 6-21 “Heat compensation”page
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Description of operation
The application principle is based on the fact that the machine heats up in a known time frame (de-
termined by the operator) after which the dimensional changes are negligible for machining purpo-
ses and are therefore ignored (the machine is thermally stabilised).
The factors which concur to modifying the temperature of the lathe are essentially due to the ma-
chining job in process and the external environment.
Tooling operators shall evaluate these conditions on a case-by-case basis and accordingly define
the times of significant variations ("warm-up stage" and "cooling stage").
For the sake of simplicity, the graph representing the temperature trend in time consists of two lines
each with a different gradient.
These gradients can be changed by adjusting the times on the dedicated user page.
The error found on parts during the established heating up time can be compensated using the
G309 function continuously recalled at the beginning of each working cycle.
This application considers the time elapsed during the machine stop: the compensation coefficient
to the applied when machining is resumed is applied when the lathe is switched off and back on.

Control interfaces
Cnc program interaction

After programming the times by which it is assumed that the machine will reach thermal stability,
simply recall the G309 function at the beginning of each cycle in the part cycle accompanied by the
axis or axes to be corrected and the entity of the correction to be applied.
Example: G309 X0,040 Z0,002
This instruction moves the origins of the axes according to the maximum correction and the com-
pensation coefficient
Fig. 6-22 Generic heating/cooling curve
Thermal stability
T1 T2 T3 Sec.
Warm-up stage Cooling down stage
Time definition method

To define T1 and T2 times, measure the part dimensions during production at regular intervals and
note the measurements down in a table without changing the correctors until thermal stability is rea-
ched, i.e. until the part dimensions do longer change.
The same method applies to defining T3 and T4 (cooling curve). In this case, manufacture parts at
regular intervals and mark the dimensions obtained in a table until the starting dimension is rea-
ched.
By plotting the two curves in a graph, it is possible to determine with good approximation the points
in which significant variations occur and to identify the required time values (T1, T2, T3, T4).

Control interfaces
Description of fields
Name Description
STATE Activates heat compensation
display ON/OFF OFF ON/OFF
1
The part counter is increased whenever the M18 function is read in
Operator EDIT
path 1
T1 Time in seconds defining the point in which the heat curvechan-
ges gradient while heating upo
Numeric expres-
2 Entry sed 100 da 0 a 9999
in seconds
T1 must ALWAYS BE LESS than T2. Otherwise the following mes-
Operator EDIT
sage will appear: WRONG DATA SETTINGS
T2 Time in seconds defining the point in which the heat curve rea-
ches stability while heating up.
Numeric expres-
in seconds
Operator EDIT
sage will appear: WRONG DATA SETTINGS
T3 Time in seconds defining the point in which the cooling curve-
changes gradient.
Numeric expres-
in seconds
Operator EDIT
sage will appear WRONG DATA SETTINGS
T4 Time in seconds defining the point in which the cooling curve
down stage
5
Display Value list
SET 100% Returns "Heat compensation coefficient" to maximum valuei.e.

to 1,000,000.
6
By overriding the "Heat compensation coefficient" to maximum value
it is established that the machine is cold and that the maximum value Operator EDIT
must be compensated
SET 0% Returns "Heat compensation coefficient" to 0.
7
By overriding the "Heat compensation coefficient" to zero it is defined
Operator EDIT
that the machine temperature is stabilised
COMPENSATION This shows the current value of the coefficient applied to thermal
COEFFICIENT compensation when the G309 function is recalled.
8
Dispay Numeric 1.000.000 da 0 a 1.000.000
- Operator EDIT

Control interfaces

7 Starting and using the machine
WARNING
Read the safety information chapter carefully before starting any of the
operations described in this chapter.
The machine must be used by trained, qualified, authorised personnel only who have
read this manual and have acquired the information it contains.
7.1 Place of work

The figure shows the working areas where the operator can use the machine safely.
Fig. 7-1 Operator working zones

7.2 Turning the machine on
Step Description
1 Turn the master switch (1) on the electrical cabinet to position 1.
2 Wait for MS-Windows to boot up on the operating panel.
3 Release the emergency stop button (2) by turning it anticlockwise.
4 Close the side guards and accesses to the working zone.
5 Press the machine start button (4).
6 Press the reset button (3) and check that only the "machine off" and "emergency on" alarms
are present.
7 Wait the end of SAFETY INTEGRATED tests execution.
NOTE
If external devices are connected, such as the automatic bar loader or external
chiller, check the state of the emergency stop buttons of these devices and
close any guards before turning the machine on.

7.2.1 Safety test
For personnel safety purposes, the “SAFETY INTEGRATED TEST” function provides the correct operation
control of some system circuits.
Running the safety test

The test execution requires the following conditions: working cycle stopped, all axes and spindles stopped,
working guards closed, side guards closed.
The test consists in activating some system functions that control the correct operation of the following parts
or circuits.
• The MCC (main circuit contactor) that supplies the power supply module for drive motors.
• enabling impulses circuit on axis modules
• secure stops as reaction to malfunctions
• emergency circuit
• motor brakes
The test (which lasts for approximately 40 seconds) starts:
• automatically at the first machine power on
• automatically on opening working guards request if 8 hours after the last test execution are elapsed
• manually by pressing the corresponding button.
The machine will ignore any operations required by the operator during the test and the working zone guard
cannot be opened.
During the execution of the test messages and system information are displayed. Do not attempt to clear the-
se messages and wait for the test to end.
For the time the test is executed, the message “700062 SAFETY INTEGRATED - TEST PHASES RUNNING”
is displayed and the column of lighting signals lights with all the lamps on at the same time.
To access the page containing the alarms and messages list only, press the “ALARM” button.
The time elapsed from the latest test is displayed (1) on the “DIAGNOSIS”
sector page, in addition to the various integrated safety function variables.
1
The test state is indicated by 1 in the field (2).
2
Brake test
All vertical axes are locked by a braking system (either integrated in the motor or external) when they are not
powered or in the event of a control system alarm.
To guarantee a suitable safety level, the brakes are controlled electrically with PLC safe outputs and mecha-
nical efficiency is periodically monitored.
Mechanical efficiency test is executed applying a movement command to the motor with an established tor-
que value, if executing this command the axis moves more than that established in a tolerance window, this
means that the brake tightness is compromised.
Using the GITAL “Axes settings” page described in this chapter it is possible to run manually and singularly
the test on one brake.
Successful test result

If the tests ends with no anomalies or malfunctions, all the messages and system in-
formation regarding the safety disappear; now it is possible to use the machine.

Failed test result

An alarm of those described below will appear.
Alarm Description
700011 Safety integrated test - Brake X1 check failed

700015 Safety integrated test - Brake UB check failed
700016 Safety integrated test - Brake Y3 check failed

700017 Safety integrated test - impulses cancellation error
700018 Safety integrated test - (stop D/C/A) error
700022 Safety integrated test - not executed: close the machine guards
700023 Safety integrated test - MCC supervision
Proceed as follows:
1 Select JOG mode.

2 Move all axes in safety position.
The safety positions are:
- axis X1: positive software limit switch
- axis X2: positive software limit switch
- axis X3: negative software limit switch
- axis UB: negative software limit switch
- axis Y3: negative software limit switch
3 Press the emergency stop button.
4 Clear all alarms with the proper button; at this point is possible to open the guard using the proper button.
Alarm Description
700030 Safety integrated test - interrupted: switch off and on the electrical cabinet
Proceed as follows:
This alarm is treated in a different way because it is a malfunction that involves internal system operation.
Unlike other alarms, it does not allow the machine use in any way.
The only remedy is to switch off and on the machine electrical cabinet.
In addition to the hardware and internal software malfunction, the cause of the alarm can be the interruption
of the test phase due to the opening of a machine side guard.
NOTE
Clearing these alarms will allow to release the working guard.

7.3 Shutting the machine down

Follow the instructions to shut down the machine considering that it must be switched
off with the axes and spindles stationary.
3
1
Step Description
1 If a production cycle is running, press the STOP OPTIONAL PROGRAM button (1) on the
panel.
Wait for the PART PROGRAM to stop for all CNC channels and then stop all movements and
the rotation of the spindles.
The M1 function must always be present at the end of the part program of each channel
(optional program stop).
2 Press the emergency stop button (2) and make sure it remains in pressed position.
2 Shut the machine down by pressing the corresponding softkey.
3 Turn the master switch (3) on the electrical cabinet anticlockwise to position 0.
DANGER
Always press the emergency stop button when the machine stops for any rea-
son and make sure that it remains in pressed position. This will prevent the
machine from being accidentally restarted from the control panel: this could
damage the machine or cause injuries.

7.4 Preliminary production operations
Description
Chip removal
Particular care must be devoted to preventing the accumulation of chips in the machine working area and in the external
collection bin.
Cleaning and checking the oil-based coolant system

Generally fine and occasionally powdery chips are produced when machining aluminium and brass. This may obstruct
the filters and prevent the perfect flow of oil-based on the workpiece. Particular care must be devoted for this reason to
maintenance and cleaning the oil-based coolant system filters.
Checking systems and devices

The correct operation of lubrication, pneumatic, cooling and electric cabinet conditioning systems must be checked in ge-
neral.
Check the following before each work shift with the machine off:
• check for leakage in the oil-based coolant system zones
• check the tank level using the gauges
• check that there is nothing in the chip evacuator tank which may damage the device
• check that there are no damaged wires
• check the bar loading device.
Alarm check
Always check machine alarms carefully and follow the operations described in the manual.
WARNING
If an irregularity or damage is found during the checks
CUT OUT THE MACHINE.
Call Technical Service.

7.5 Use procedures
Mechanical procedures
Axis movement with sliding guard open.
Switch over from standard configuration to Swiss Type configuration (optional)

Switch over from Swiss Type configuration to standard configuration (optional)
Main spindle collet replacement (without rotating bush)
Main spindle collet replacement (with rotating bush - Swiss type configuration)
Counterspindle collet replacement
Ejector head replacement
Rotating bush guide bush replacement (option)
Adjustment procedure
Main spindle collet opening/closing system adjustment
Counterspindle collet opening/closing system adjustment
Rotating bush adjustment (option)
Software procedures
Smart Key, operating modes and access level

Saving CNC parameters
Saving geometries
Saving macro variables

Saving parameters
Saving software versions and keep-relay
Saving machine logic

7.5.1 Axis movement with sliding guard open

Prolonged access to the working area may be needed during tooling and tool setup
requiring the sliding guard to be kept open.
To protect the operator from injury, the work area axes can only be moved using two
hands at the same time. This prevents the operator for working inside the area itself.
Step Description
1 Check the following initial conditions:

• cycle stopped
• axes and spindle stopped
• coolant off.
2 Press the sliding guard opening button (1) on the control panel.
3 Open the sliding guard.
4 Holding the open guard axis enabling device (2) with the left hand, use the right hand to move
the required axis by continuously pressing and releasing the corresponding button on the
operator panel.
DANGER
This operation must be carried out by only one operator. Access of other people
to the work area is not allowed during this procedure.

7.5.2 Switch over from standard configuration to Swiss Type configuration

(optional)
WARNING
This procedure may be applied if the lathe is connected to a bar loader which
respects the electric, mechanical and software interface defined by Gildemeister
Italiana S.p.A.
It could be necessary to redefine the bar loader configuration
(Refer to the instructions provided by the loader manufacturer for this operation)
Qualification of person in charge Maintenance technician

Time required for the operation 30’
Equipment needed
Code Description Qty U.M.

2950784 or 2957521 Rotating bush (x DUNNER B236) or (x DUNNER J9) 1 nr
0B104225 Sinchroflex 16AT5/710 GEN III belt 1 nr
0B2610033 Adapter flange 1 nr
0B075163 RILSAN PA11 4X2 DIN 74324 tube 0.5 m
0B086331 Regulator SMC AR20K-F02 E-1 1 nr
2662375 Plastic pipe *2, 3* 4* SPIRALE 2,5 <-> 3 m
Procedure
1 Press CUSTOM2 on the operator panel to go to the GITAL page.
2 Select the MACHINE CONFIGURATION menu.

Go to step 3 of this procedure if axis Z1 stroke restriction is not necessary.
If the stroke of axis Z1 must be restricted (check drawing of purchased bush), select Axis Z1 stroke
restriction (A) and press INPUT on the operator panel to change the value to ON.
Enter how much you want to restrict the stroke in the Decrease axis Z1 stroke field (B)
A
B
3 Press the EMERGENCY STOP button to proceed

Procedure
4 Select the 0=Lathe 1=Swiss Type field to go from Standard configuration to Swiss Type
configuration.
Press the INPUT button. The value of the field passes from 0 to 1.
Press Y to confirm when the Confirm with Y message appears.

5 If the configuration changeover was completed successfully, the following messages will alternatively
appear in the ALARM MESSAGE list:
MC3095 CONFIGURATION DONE WITH SUCCESS and MC3096 SWITCH THE MACHINE OFF
The following message will appear if the configuration changeover fails:
MC3094 CONFIGURATION FAILED or SP9066 (S)COM. ERROR BETWEEN SP AMPS
6 Release the EMERGENCY STOP button
7 Switch off the lathe

8 Turn on the lathe
9 The message OT0501(Z1) – OVERTRAVEL ( SOFT 1 ) should appear now
10
To cancel this message, press JOG on the operator panel and select PATH 1 by pressing
11
Press the left arrow button to select axis Z and set the value to the 458 mm and 138 mm
(see the MACHINE menu in the figure below)
Asse Z
12
Press the Reset button on the operator panel to cancel the alarm

Procedure
13 Retract saddle Z1 until the scraper on the spindle is released from the flange
Press the EMERGENCY STOP button to proceed
Loosen the connection screws between adapter flange and upright and remove the flange
cod.0B2610213 (A)
Loosen the connection screws between scraper and spindle and remove the scraper (B)
14 Fit the adapted flange cod.0B2610033 on the rotating bush and fasten it using the two screws
Fit the rotating bush onto the upright
Tighten two screws (C) slightly
15 Install the belt cod.0B104225 inserting it on the upper part of the motor support and position it on the
motor pulley.
Fit the belt on the bush pulley (the operation is facilitated by turning the pulley slightly)

Procedure
16 When the belt is on the pulleys, insert the two centring pins
Tighten the four screws
17 Connection of the pressurisation of the rotating bush to the derivation block
NOTE
When Rotating bush is installed, always connect the pressurisation
pipes to the inlets A and B !
Oil Drain
B

Procedure
18 Connection of the Air-Oil lubrification system to the rotating bush lubrification inlet:
NOTE
When Rotating bush is installed, always connect the Air-Oil Lubrifica-
tion pipe to the inlet C !
Oil Drain
19 Running and lubrication of rotating bush bearing
NOTE
Run the rotating bush for at least 10 minutes at low speed (200 rpm /
min) to allow for a proper distribution of the oil, following the procedure
in detail
Since you previously selected configuration 1=Swiss Type, the message (MG2027) appears with the
request to schedule the rotation of the spindle at 200 rev / min for the execution of the running of the
bearing.
In this phase forced lubrication is active for the filling of the Pipe 3 with oil mist.
The running takes 10 minutes, and during this phase the message (MG2028) notifies the remaining se-
conds
"(NNN/600) sec"
When the running of the rotating bush is completed appears the (AL1129) alarm and the spindle stops.
All times the rotating bush mode will be disabled and re-enabled, you will need to repeat the
Running and lubrication of rotating bush bearing.

7.5.3 Switch over from Swiss Type configuration to standard configuration

(optional)
WARNING
Do not disconnect the rotating bush motor connectors.
Qualification of person in charge Maintenance technician

Equipment needed
Code Description Qty U.M.
0B2610205 Adapter flange 1 nr
0B2610213 Scraper 1 nr
2693839 Pneumatic system plug 1 nr
Procedure
1 Exclusion of the rotating bush pressurisation system

Disconnect the pipe from the outlet of the derivation block (D)
Close the outlet (D) of the derivation block with the supplied plug
Disconnect the other side of the pipe from the pressurisation inlets (A) and (B)
D
C A
2 Exclusion of the rotating bush lubrification system

Disconnect the pipe from the outlet of the Air-Oil mixer block
Close the outlet of the Air-Oil mixer block with the supplied plug
Disconnect the other side of the pipe from the lubrification inlet (C)

Procedure
3 Remove the rotating bush and the control belt
Remove the 2 centring pins and leave the two screws loosely tightened
4 Remove the belt from the bush pulley;

The operation is facilitated by turning the pulley slightly.
Remove the belt from the upper part of the motor support
5 Remove the screws and remove the Rotating bush - Adapter flange assembly from the upright
6 Press CUSTOM2 on the operator panel to go to the GITAL page

Procedure
7 Select the MACHINE CONFIGURATION menu.

Select the 0=Lathe 1=Swiss Type field to go from Swiss Type configuration to Standard configura-
tion.
Press the INPUT button. The value goes from 1 to 0.
Press Y to confirm when the Confirm with Y message appears

8 If the configuration changeover is successfully completed in the ALARM MESSAGE list
the following alarm messages will appear alternately:
MC3095 CONFIGURATION DONE WITH SUCCESS and MC3096 SWITCH THE MACHINE OFF
If the configuration changeover fails the following messages will appear
MC3094 CONFIGURATION FAILED or SP9066 (S)COM. ERROR BETWEEN SP AMPS
9 Switch off the lathe
10 Turn on the lathe
11 The message OT0501(Z1) + OVERTRAVEL ( SOFT 1 ) should appear now.
12
To cancel this message, press JOG and select PATH 1 by pressing
13
Press the right arrow button to select axis Z and set the value to the 132,5 mm and 12,5 mm
range .
(see the MACHINE menu in the figure below)
Asse Z
14
Press the Reset button to cancel the alarm
15 Fit the adapter flange in the hole in the upright cod.0B2610205,

leaving the fastening screws loose

Procedure
16 Fit the scraper cod.0B2610213 on the main spindle, leaving the fastening
screws loose
17 Liberally lubricate scraper and flange

18 Slowly advance saddle Z1 making the scraper slide in the adapter flange
19 Check that scraper and flange are in contact along
the entire length of the flange, checking that there
is no air between the two elements
Tighten the fastening screws of scraper and adap-
ter flange

7.5.4 Main spindle collet replacement (without rotating bush)

1) Turn the machine to tooling mode with door open (axes and spindles stop-
ped, coolant off).
2) Advance the spindle to all forward position, approximately Z1 = 12.5.
3) Press the open spindle collet button on the control panel.
4) Block the idle spindle with the stop provided and loosen the collet
locking ring (follow the operations shown in the photos below using
the tools provided).

5) Remove ring, collet, spring and cup and clean them carefully.
6) Carefully clear the spindle sleeve.
7) Lubricate spindle speed, cup and new collet.
8) Refit cup and spring.
9) Insert the collet and fasten the collet locking ring again.
10) Remove pin and stop.

7.5.5 Main spindle collet replacement

(with rotating bush - Swiss type configuration)
1) Set the machine in tooling mode, with oper door (idle axes and spindles,
coolant flow deactivated).
2) Move the spindle backwards, at approximately Z1 = 458.
3) Press the spindle open collet button on the control panel.
4) Keep the spindle still with pin wrench B58-62.
5) Unscrew the ring nut with pin wrench A80-90.
6) After removing the ring nut, clamp, spring and cup, clean them thoroughly.
7) Carefully clean the protective tube of the spindle.
8) Lubricate the protective tube of the spindle, the cup and the new clamp.
9) Reassemble the cup and spring.
10) Insert the clamp and retighten the ring nut that fixes the clamp in place.

7.5.6 Counterspindle collet replacement

1) Set the machine in tooling mode, with oper door (idle axes and spindles,
coolant flow deactivated).
2) Bring the frontal spindle to the door.
3) Press the frontal spindle open collet button on the control panel.
4) Keep the frontal spindle still with pin wrench B58-62.
5) Unscrew the ring nut with pin wrench A80-90.
6) After removing the ring nut, clamp, spring and cup, clean them thoroughly.
7) Carefully clean the protective tube of the counter spindle.
8) Lubricate the protective tube of the counter spindle, the cup and the new
clamp.
9) Reassemble the cup and spring.
10)Insert the clamp and retighten the ring nut that fixes the clamp in place.

7.5.7 Replacement of the ejector head

Depending on the type of piece to produce (diameter and length), it may be necessary
to replace the head.
1 Disassemble the clamp fixture (clamp, cup and spring).
2 Move the ejector forward.
3) Unscrew the extraction head with two wrenches, replace it and tighten the
head again.
4 Move the ejector backwards.
5 Reassemble the clamp fixture.

7.5.8 Rotating bush guide bushing replacement (option)
DANGER
Carry out the described operations with the machine STOPPED.
Procedure type Guide bush replacement
Performed by Operator

Frequency whenever the bush is replaced
Equipment needed Special tool (included in the tool set provided with the machine)
Machine state Manual machining mode
1 Block the bushing holder cup with the relevant pin wrench (A), fixed with a screw (B).
Loosen the screws of the flange (C) and unscrew the ring nut (D) (right-handed thread) with appropriate
2
wrench (E)
3 Insert a new bush (F) in the specific housing.
4 Insert a bar piece with the same diameter as the bush in the bush (F)
5 Tighten the ring nut (D) until there is friction between cut down bar and bushing
6 Block the screws (C)
7 Remove the spanner
Fig. 7-2 Guide bushing replacement
F A B
E
D

7.5.9 Main spindle collet opening/closing system adjustment
DANGER
Procedure type Main spindle collet opening/closing system adjustment

Frequency whenever the collet is changed
Equipment needed Set of Allen wrenches and spanners
Manual machining mode

Machine state
Main spindle collet open
1) Unmount the protection (3) on collets opening/closing device.

2) Loosen the screw (1).
3) Unscrew the ring nut (2) by a few turns to obtain sufficient collet opening.
4) Press the close collect button from the control panel.
5) Insert a cut-down bar with the same diameter as the bar wrench clamp in
the bar wrench clamp.
6) Tighten the ring nut (2) until there is friction between bar and clamp.
7) Press the open collet button.
8) Tighten the ring nut (2) by another 1/4 - 1/2 turn.
9) Block the screw (1).
10)Press the close collet button and make sure that the bar is clamped.
11)Check position of the snugs. the contact point with the cam is to be on the
cylindrical surface after the radius and before the cam shoulder.

Fig. 7-3 Collets opening/closing for the main spindle

7.5.10 Counterspindle collet opening/closing system adjustment
DANGER
Procedure type Counterspindle collet opening/closing system adjustment

Frequency whenever the collet is changed
Equipment needed Set of Allen wrenches and spanners
Manual machining mode

Machine state
Frontal spindle collet open.
1) Unscrew the two screws (2).

2) Raise the guard (1).
3) Loosen the screw (7).
4) Unscrew the ring nut (8) by a few turns to obtain sufficient collet opening.
5) Press the close collect button from the control panel.
6) Insert a cut-down bar with the same diameter as the bar wrench clamp in
the bar wrench clamp.
7) Tighten the ring nut (8) until there is friction between bar and clamp.
8) Press the open collet button.
9) Tighten the ring nut (8) by another 1/4 - 1/2 turn.
10)Block the screw (7).
11)Press the close collet button and make sure that the bar is clamped.
12)Check position of the snugs: the contact point with the cam is to be on the
cylindrical surface after the radius and before the cam shoulder.

Fig. 7-4 Collets opening/closing for the counterspindle
9 5 6
14 13
11
10
12
8

7.5.11 Rotating bush adjustment (optional)
DANGER
Procedure type Rotating bush adjustment
Qualification of person in charge Operator

Frequency of the operation whenever the collet is changed
Equipment needed Special tool (included in the tool set provided with the machine)
Machine state Manual machining mode
1 If a bush (F) is already fitted, remove it by loosening the screws of the flange
(C) and loosening the ring (D) (right-handed thread) with specific tool (E)
until the bush (F) can be removed after locking the cup with the specific tool
(A), fixed with a screw (B).
2 Insert a new bush (F) in the specific housing.
3 Insert a bar piece with the same diameter as the bush in the bush (F).
4 Turn the ring (D) clockwise until the bush rubs on the piece.
5 Block the screws (C).
6 Remove the spanner.
Fig. 7-5 Rotating bush adjustment
F A B
E
D

7.5.12 Saving CNC parameters

This procedure is used to save CNC parameters.
Take the following aspects into consideration for this procedure:
• before backing up the machine, insert the memory stick and select it using the
specific vertical softkey.
• Only path 1 must be saved for CNC parameters.
Procedure
1) Open the operator menu of the parameter menu.
Operation Reference
• Press the function button
• Press the “PARAM” softkey and then

“(OPRT)”.
2) Select the parameter writing operation.
Operation Reference
• Press the softkey

“SCRIVI”
3) Writing operation execution

Operation Reference

“ESEC”
The message “OUTPUT” will start blinking.

7.5.13 Saving geometries

This procedure is used to save machine geometries.
• all paths must be saved for geometries.
Procedure
1) Select path 1.
2) Open the machine OFFSET menu.
Operation Reference

repeatedly
until “CORR./GEOMETRIA” or “CORR./USURA”

appears
3) Open the operator menu.
Operation Reference

“OPRT”

4) Writing operation execution
Operation Reference
• Select machine geometry writing by pressing

the softkey
“SCRIVI”
5) Assign the file name according to the selected path and start writing.
Operation Reference
• Enter the file name according to the following

rule:
PATH 1: TOOLOFST.P-1
• Press the “ESEC” softkey. The page
described in the step above will appear at the
end of the writing process.
6) Repeat the previous operations for all other paths.

7.5.14 Saving macro variables

This procedure is used to save macro variables.
• all paths must be saved for macro variables.
Procedure
1) Select path 1.
2) Open the OFFSET menu of the machine and view the macro variable page.
Operation Reference
and the “+” softkey repeatedly until the message:

MACRO
appears. Press the corresponding softkey at this
point.

3) Open the “CUSTOM MACRO” page and open the operator menu.
Operation Reference

“CUSTOM MACRO”
and then “OPRT” to open the operator menu.
4) Open the second page of the operator menu.
Operation Reference
• Press the “+” softkey to make the following

softkey appear:
LEGGI
SCRIVI

5) Select the custom macro variable writing operation.
Operation Reference

“SCRIVI”
6) Assign the file name according to the selected path and start writing.
Operation Reference
• Enter the name of the file according to the

following rule:
PATH 1: MACROVAR.P-1
• Press the “ESEC” softkey. The page described

in the step above will appear at the end of the
writing process.
7) Repeat the previous operations for all other paths.

7.5.15 Saving parameters

This procedure is used to save programs.
• All folders must be saved for programs.
Procedure
1) Open the PROGRAMS menu of the machine and the saved programs di-
rectory.
Operation Reference
• Select “EDIT” mode and press the PROG

function button.
“LISTA”

2) Select the program folder.
Operation Reference
• Select the folder containing the programs to be

saved (“PEZZI” in our case) and press INPUT.
3) Open the second page of the operator menu and declare the background
and foreground folders.
Operation Reference
• Press the “+” softkey
• Press the following softkeys:

“DIR FOREGR.”
and then
“DIR BACKGR.”

4) View the programs list and name the file containing the programs.
Operation Reference
• Select
“RITORNO ALLA CARTELLA SUPERIORE”
and press INPUT
• Select the folder in step 2
5) Open the second page of the operator menu and select the writing opera-
tion.
Operation Reference
• Press the “+” softkey

“SCRIVI”

6) Save the program folder name.
Operation Reference
• Use the “P GET” function to acquire the

program folder name.
“P GET”
and check the folder name in the “A>” field.
7) Name the file to be saved.
Operation Reference
• Use the “SETT F” function to name the file to

be saved.
“SETT F”
and check the folder name in the “/F” field.

8) Carry out the previously selected operations.
Operation Reference

“ESEC”;
The following softkey will appear at the end of wri-

ting:
“SCRIVI”
9) Save all programs.
Operation Reference
• Repeat steps from 2 to 9 to save all programs

present in the CNC memory.

7.5.16 Saving software versions and keep-relay

This procedure is used to save the software and keep-relay versions.
• Saving must be made for path 1 for software and keep-relay versions.
Procedure
1) Open the user page menu of the machine.
Operation Reference
• Press button
“CUSTOM2”
to enter the user page.
2) Enter the “versioni software” submenu.
Operation Reference
• Move with the arrows to the following field:

VERSIONI SOFTWARE
• Press
INPUT
to confirm saving operation.

3) Save the files containing the software and keep-relay versions loaded on
the machine to the selected drive.
Operation Reference
• Press
• INPUT

7.5.17 Saving machine logic

This procedure is used to save machine logic.
Procedure
1) Switch the machine off.
2) Change the CNC mode selector state to save the machine logic.
Operation Reference
• Open the electric cabinet and turn the CNC

mode selector to the “F” position.
• Turn the master switch to the “1” position to

turn the machine on.

3) Select USB memory as saving device.
Operation Reference
• Press
SETTING
• Select Hard Disk
• Press “OK” twice.
4) Activate “service mode” to save data contained in FROM.
Operation Reference
• Press
ABOUT

5) Save CEX to the selected drive.
Operation Reference
• Select the FROM tab

• Select the following items:
CEX 2.0M
CEX0FROM
• Press
SAVE
OK
6) Save MEX to the selected drive.
Operation Reference

PD01T256K
PD02T256K
PD03T256K
PD04T256K
• Press
SAVE
OK

7) Save PLC to the selected drive.
Operation Reference

PMC1
PMCS
• Press
SAVE
OK
8) Save all the remaining files in the window to the drive selecting them one
by one and repeat the saving operation described above.
9) Save the SRAM ghost onto the selected drive.
Operation Reference
• Select the following tab

SRAM
• Press
BACKUP
YES

10)Close “service mode”.
Operation Reference
• Press
ABOUT
S
OK
11)Change CNC mode selector state.
Operation Reference

turn the machine off.
• Open the electric cabinet and turn the CNC
mode selector to position

turn the machine on.

7.6 Part program management

All part program handing operations are performed in EDIT mode.
Refer to the instruction manual supplied by FANUC for more detailed information.
7.7 Optional device operation
Item Description
This device is used to automatically bring the material to be processed to
the machine.
Loader
Refer to the specific documentation provided by the loader manufacturer
for further information.
Device capable of increasing the coolant pressure so to reach and cool

High pressure the tool blade during particular jobs in which normal cooling is not
(CDS - Cooling Delivery sufficient.
System) Refer to the specific documentation provided by the CDS manufacturer for
further information.
Software installed in the CNC for monitoring working tools by constantly
comparing the current drawn by the axis motors against the stored values
Load Monitor referring to new tools.
Refer to the specific documentation provided by the software
manufacturer for further information.
Software for fully automatically swapping a tool after turning a predefined
number of parts with an identical tool.
Sister Tools
Refer to the specific documentation provided by the software
manufacturer for further information.

Maintenance
8 Maintenance
WARNING
The residual risks that maintenance personnel may encounter are listed in
"Safety information" chapter.
Foreword
Before performing any maintenance operation in the work zone with the guards open and to prevent the risk
of accidental start-up
1 Switch the machine off.
2 Make sure that the emergency stop buttons are locked in the stop position.
3 If necessary, block the master switch in the "0" position using the hole provided for the padlock.
8.1 Maintenance operations
This chapter contains a number of sections which describe the maintenance activities needed to ensure
perfect efficiency of the machine itself.
MACHINE CUT-OUT The machine master switch on the electric cabinet is turned to "0" position.
MACHINE ON/OFF This machine state is obtained by operating the button on the operating panel.
Maintenance operations
STOPPING The stopping interventions will cause machine downtime if not performed at the
scheduled deadline. To restore operation, perform the required intervention and
confirm on the specific CNC page.
NOT STOPPING The interventions classified as not stopping operations are indicated by the
appearance of a maintenance message. This message can be cancelled but will
appear again whenever the machine is started until the intervention is performed.
Maintenance
Routine (scheduled) Routine maintenance operations are the scheduled maintenance operations (i.e.
maintenance those defined on the basis of a time schedule) that users must respect to ensure
perfectly efficient and safe use of the machine.
Supplementary Supplementary maintenance is an activity that machine users must perform when
maintenance faults, decreased performance or general ageing of the machine occurs.

Maintenance
8.1.1 CNC maintenance warning messages
Some ordinary maintenance operations are directly called up by the CNC at the deadline as shown on the
routine maintenance table which lists all the scheduled operations.
Three "CUSTOM" maintenance operations which can be freely customised by the user are also available.
Example: The following message will appear when cleaning the coolant filter on the
operating panel: 700048 Maintenance required
The maintenance request is proceeded by a notice message and followed by an alarm when the deadline is
reached.
WARNING
Machine users may carry out a number of maintenance interventions but they
must call the after-sales service for more complex interventions and for
replacing worn or damaged parts.
8.1.2 Preliminary inspections
Before each shift and with the machine off:
1 Check that there are not leakages in the oil-based coolant zones.
2 Check that the fluid level in the tanks is above the minimum level shown by the respective indicators.
3 Check that there are bars in the bar loading device.
4 Check that there is nothing in the chip evacuator tank which may damage the device.
5 Check that the sliding door safety glass is not damaged.
6 Check that the operating panel is not damaged.
7 Check that there are no damaged wires.
WARNING
CUT THE MACHINE OUT! If problems or damage is found during preliminary
inspections. Call Technical Service.
8.1.3 Final inspections
Carefully clean the machine at the end of each working day.

Perform cleaning operations with the machine OFF and CUT OFF from the power network.
1 Clean the finished part unloading zone.
2 Clean the floor in the working zone.
3 Clean the chip collection bin.

Maintenance
8.2 Routine (scheduled) maintenance
Part of the machine Frequency CNC Time Performed Procedure

controlled require- by description
ment
Main spindle
Check wear on main spindle 500h Yes 10’ Operator (see Card 1.1)
collet open/close cam/snugs
Counterpindle
Check wear on main spindle 500h Yes 10’ Operator (see Card 2.1)
collet open/close cam/snugs
Lubrication system
Lubricant top-up 40h Yes 5’ Operator (see Card 3.1)

Pneumatic system
Condensation drainage 40h Yes 1’ Operator (see Card 4.1)
Filtering frame cleaning 2 year Yes 10’ Operator (see Card 4.2)
Filter replacement for pneumatic as needed No 10’ Operator (see Card 4.3)
system for optical line
Oil top-up for Oil-air multiplier No 5’ Operator (see Card 4.4)

as needed
system for turret
Lubricating and cooling system
Filter basket cleaning 40h no 5’ Operator (see Card 5.1)
Pump cleaning 1000h no 10’ Operator (see Card 5.2)
Cooling system
Sostituzione liquido 1 year Yes 1h Maintenance

technicians
Electrical enclosure
1 year Yes 5’ for Maintenance (see Card 7.1)

Encoder buffer battery
each technicians
replacement
battery
CNC buffer battery replacement 1 year Yes 5’ Maintenance (see Card 7.2)
technicians
Air conditioner metal filter 500h no 5’ Operator (see Card 7.3)

cleaning

Maintenance
8.2.1 Check wear on main spindle collet open/close cam/snugs
DANGER
Perform the following operations with the machine OFF and disconnected from
the power supply.
Card 1.1
Cycle type Check wear on main spindle collet open/close cam/snugs
Person in charge Operator
Time required 10’

Frequency 500 h
- Hexagonal setscrew wrench 2.5-4mm

Equipment needed - Sector key with cylindrical tooth nr. 30
- Plier for safety rings for shafts i gr. 0
Machine status Switched off
Preliminary activities
Step Action
1 Unscrew the screw (1) and remove the protective casing (2)
2 Check that the lubrication oil tube (3) is correctly directed on the cam surface (4)
3 Visually check the surface condition of the cam (4) and the snugs (11) in contact points and
decide if it is necessary:
- to rotate the cam
- to replace the cam
- to replace the snugs
4 Follow the instructions given below, if the wear does not jeopardise correct functioning of the
device, refit the casing (2) and tighten the screw (1).

Maintenance
Fig. 8-1 Main spindle collet open/close system
! #
*
"
!*
!$
!# !"
' !)
& !!
!%

Maintenance
Main spindle cam (4) rotation
NOTE
Perform this operation with the collet open
Step Action
2 Unscrew two + two screws (5) and withdraw two rollers (6)
3 Shift the cam (4) in the direction of the arrow to pass over the pin (7) to allow cam rotation
4 Rotate and reposition the cam in the next slot (8) (the cam has four slots to allow three rota-
tions)
5 Refit the two rollers (6) and tighten the two + two screws (5)
6 Refit the protective casing (2) and tighten the screw (1)
7 Note the date of cam rotation in the following table
Date Cam Cam Cam

Replacement xxxxxxxxxxxxx
Rotation 1
Rotation 2
Rotation 3

Maintenance
Main spindle cam (4) replacement
NOTE
2 Unscrew the two screws (12) with a 2.5 mm wrench
3 Remove the ring nut (13) using the pin wrench

4 Unscrew the screw (14) with a 4 mm wrench
6 Unscrew the M8 lock nuts (9), withdraw the pins (10), remove the snugs (11)
7 Take out the snug holder (16) from the pipe section
9 Take out the worn cam (4) from the pipe section
10 Insert the new cam on the pipe section aligning one of the four slots (8) to the pin (7)
12 Insert the snug holder (16) on the pipe section
13 Refit the snugs (11), refit the pins (10), tighten new M8 lock nuts (9)
14 Refit the ring nut (15).
15 Tighten the two screws (14) with 4mm wrench
17 Tighten the two screws (12) with 2.5mm wrench
18 Adjust the collet open/close system following the “adjustment procedure” described in chapter
7
20 Note the date of new cam assembly in the previous table

Maintenance
Main spindle snugs (11) replacement
NOTE
2 Unscrew the M8 lock nuts (9), withdraw the pins (10), remove the snugs (11)
3 Assemble the new snugs

4 Refit the pins (10).
5 Tighten new lock nuts M8 (9)
7

Maintenance
8.2.2 Check wear on cam/snugs open/close counterspindle collet
DANGER
Perform the following operations with the machine OFF and disconnected from
the power supply.
Card 2.1
Check wear on cam/snugs open/close
Cycle type
counterspindle collet
Time required 10’

Frequency 500 h
- Hexagonal setscrew wrench 2.5-4mm

- Sector key with cylindrical tooth nr. 30
Equipment needed
- Plier for safety rings for shafts i gr. 0
- Screwdriver for snap ring exstraction
Preliminary activities
Step Action
1 Unscrew the two screws (2)
2 Raise the guard (1)
3 Check that the lubrication oil tube works correctly on the cam surface (3)
4 Visually check the surface condition of the cam (3) and the snugs (4) in contact points and
decide if it is necessary:
- to rotate the cam
- to replace the cam
- to replace the snugs
5 Follow the instructions given below, if the wear does not jeopardise correct functioning of the
device, close the guard (1) and tighten the screws (2).

Maintenance
Fig. 8-2 Counterspindle collet open/close system
9 5 6
14 13
11
10
12
8

Maintenance
Counterspindle cam (3) rotation
NOTE
Step Action
1 Unscrew the two screws (2) and raise the protection guard (1)
3 Shift the cam in the direction of the arrow to pass over the pin (15) to allow cam rotation
15
4 Rotate and reposition the cam in the next slot (the cam has four slots to allow three rotations)
6 Lower the protective guard (1) and tighten the two screws (2)
7 Note the date of cam rotation in the following table
Date Cam Cam Cam

Replacement xxxxxxxxxxxxx
Rotation 1
Rotation 2
Rotation 3

Maintenance
Counterspindle cam (3) replacement
NOTE
Step Action
2 Unscrew the two screws (5) with a 2.5 mm wrench

4 Unscrew the screw (7) with a 3 mm wrench
5 Remove the adjustment ring nut (8)
6 Remove the retaining rings (12) using the special screwdriver , take out the pins (9), remove
the snugs (4)
7 Take out the snug holder (10) from the pipe section;
9 Take out the worn cam (3) from the pipe section
10 Insert the new cam on the pipe section aligning one of the four slots to the pin (15)
12 Insert the snug holder (10) on the pipe section

13 Refit the snugs (4), refit the pins (9), refit the retaining rings (12)
15 Tighten the two screws (7) with 3 mm wrench

17 Tighten the two screws (5) with 2.5 mm wrench
7
20 Note the date of new cam assembly in the previous table

Maintenance
Counterspindle snugs (11) replacement
NOTE
2 Remove the retaining rings (12) using the special screwdriver , take out the pins (9), remove
the snugs (4)
3 Assemble the new snugs

4 Refit the pins (9), refit the retaining rings (12)
7

Maintenance
8.2.3 Lubrication system maintenance
Card 3.1
Cycle type Oil top-up

Time required 5’
Frequency 40h
Equipment needed Oil Type: Refer to Chapter 4 of this Manual “Technical machine data”.
Machine status Manual machining mode
• Remove fill cap (1);

• Pour the oil until the level has been restored;
• Refasten fill cap (1).
The following figure shows and identifies the components for lubrication system main-
tenance.
Fig. 8-3 Lubrification system oil top-up

Maintenance
8.2.4 Pneumatic system maintenance

Pneumatic system maintenance requires cleaning and replacement of filters.
Fig. 8-4 Pneumatic system components
2
1
3
5
1 Valve for residual pressure blowdown;

2 Line pressure regulator;
3 Digital manometer;
4 Dehumidifier filter;
5 Deoiling filter.

Maintenance
8.2.4.1 Condensation drainage
Card 4.1
Cycle type Condensation drainage

Time required 1’
Frequency 40h
Equipment needed
Machine status Any
Fig. 8-5 Condensation dreinage
• Place a container under the cap to collect the condensation.

• Press the amber button (1) to drain off the condensation.

Maintenance
8.2.4.2 Filters replacement
Card 4.2
Cycle type Filters replacement

Time required 10’
Frequency 2 year
Equipment needed
• Blowdown the air in the circuit acting on the adjustment valve (7).
Check that the manometer (8) shows no pressure valuein the unit.
Fig. 8-6 Filters replacement

7
6
3
5
2
4
1
3 Unscrew and remove the glass of the dehumidification filter (1) lowering the
black lever (2).
4 Remove the filter (3) and replace it;
5 Refit the glass of the dehumidification filter (1);
6 Unscrew and remove the glass of the oil removal filter (4) lowering the black
lever (5).
7 Remove the filter (6) and replace it;
8 Refit the glass of the oil removal filter (4);

Maintenance
8.2.4.3 Pneumatic system for optical line

The pneumatic system maintenance for the optical line consists of replacement of the
deoiling super micro filter.
Card 4.3
Cycle type Filter replacement

Time required 10’
Frequency When the colour changes from white to red
Equipment needed
Fig. 8-7 Pneumatic system for optical line
The filtering element duration (2) inside the deoiling super micro filter (1) is determined
by the colour change, so the moment when replacing the filter can evaluated visually.
When the filtering element (2) is full of oil, its surface changes from white to red and
so must be replaced.

Maintenance
8.2.4.4 Oil top-up for revolver air-oil multiplier system
Card 4.4
Cycle type Oil top-up

Time required 5’
Frequency As needed
Equipment needed Oil type: ENI ACER MV 10
• Remove the nut (1);

• Fill the oil in up to the level (2) in the cylinder;
• Screw the nut (1).
Fig. 8-8 Oil top-up for revolver air-oil multiplier system

Maintenance
8.2.5 Lubricating and cooling system maintenance
• Filter basket cleaning (A)

• Pump cleaning (B)
NOTE
For the chips conveyor specific maintenace, refer to the conveyor manufacturer
documentation delivered with the machine.

Maintenance
8.2.5.1 Filter basket cleaning
DANGER
Carry out the operations described with machine STOPPED.
Card 5.1
Cycle type Filter basket cleaning

Time required 5’
Frequency 40h
Equipment needed Compressed air
Machine status Manual machining mode, cooling pumps switched off
Fig. 8-9 Chip conveyor filter basket removal
• Remove the cover by unscrewing the screws;

• Remove the basket filter;
• Clean the basket filter;
• Reposition the basket;
• Close the cover and tighten the screws.
NOTE
Perform the cleaning operations in a suitable place. Operator must wear the cor-
rect protection personal devices.

Maintenance
8.2.5.2 Pump cleaning
DANGER
Perform the following operations with the machine off and disconnected from
the power supply.
Card 5.2
Cycle type Pump cleaning

Time required 10’
Frequency 1000h
Equipment needed Compressed air

Fig. 8-10 Pump cleaning
• Unscrew the screws (A) and extract the pump;

• Clean the zone (B);
• Reinstall the pump and refasten the screws (A).
NOTE
Execute the cleaning operations in a suitable place.
The operator shall wear the proper individual protection devices.

Maintenance
8.2.6 Refrigerating system maintenance
NOTE
The refrigerator temperature must be set at 25 C.
Gildemeister Italiana presets the themperature
Refer to the documentation of the manufacturer for the corresponding maintenance

tasks.
Fig. 8-11 Refrigerating system

Maintenance
8.2.7 Electrical enclosure maintenance

Electrical enclosure maintenance consists of three procedures:
1) Axis motor encoder buffer battery replacement (Card 7.1);
2) CNC buffer battery replacement (Card 7.2);
3) Electrical enclosure conditioning system metallic filter cleaning (Card 7.3).
The following figure identities the buffer batteries inside the electrical enclosure:
1 Axis motor encoder battery set;
2 CNC battery.
Fig. 8-12 Buffer batteries inside electrical enclosure
The CNC and its devices require backup batteries for keeping certain data stored also
during a mains power blackout.
These batteries have a minimum lifespan, which corresponds to one year in average,
after which they must be replaced to prevent sudden loss of data especially during
prolonged machine stoppage (generally during holidays).
The CNC informs the operator when the battery voltage drops. The battery should be
replaced within approximately ten days of the warning.
It is advisable to replace also the PC battery once a year. Follow the procedure
described for replacing the other batteries.

Maintenance
8.2.7.1 Axis motor encoder buffer battery replacement procedure
Card 7.1
Cycle type Encoder buffer battery replacement
Person in charge Maintenance technicians

Time required 5’ for each battery
1 year
Frequency
(before summer holidays)
Equipment needed
Machine status Machine powered and secured in emergency mode
Fig. 8-13 Axis motor encoder buffer battery

Maintenance
A message (1) will appear on the operating panel when the axis motor encoder battery
level is low. The APC (2) box will blink at the same frequency as the alarm rectangle
on the CNC.
Fig. 8-14 Battery low voltage message
The following message will appear on the operating panel if the battery is not replaced
(following the procedure illustrated below) after approximately 10 days.
Fig. 8-15 Battery flat messagei
WARNING
DO NOT switch the machine off when this alarm appears.

Maintenance
Fig. 8-16 Axis motor encoder buffer battery
1
11
22
Maintenance procedure description: axis motor encoder battery replacement

1 Press the two tabs (1) by the sides of the battery holder (2) inwards with your
fingers.
2 Pull the battery holder (2) outwards turning it downwards.
3 Press the tab on the left side of the connector (3) and extract the connector by
pulling it outwards.
4 Take a new battery holder with battery and insert the connector (3) in its seat.
Consider that it can only be fit one way.
5 Insert the new battery holder (2) on the lower side turning it upwards and pushing
it into its seat until it locks.
6 Repeat the operations from 1 to 5 for the remaining batteries of the axis motor
encoder.

Maintenance
8.2.7.2 CNC buffer battery replacement procedure
Card 7.2
Cycle type CNC buffer battery replacement
Person in charge Maintenance technicians

Time required 5’
1 year
Frequency
(before summer holidays)
Equipment needed
Machine status Machine powered and secured in emergency mode
Fig. 8-17 Buffer batteries inside electrical enclosure

Maintenance
A message will appear on the operating panel when the CNC battery level is low. The
BAT box will blink at the same frequency as the alarm rectangle on the CNC.
The message (1) will appear on the operating panel if the battery is not replaced (fol-
lowing the procedure illustrated below) after approximately 10 days
Fig. 8-18 CNC flat battery message
WARNING
DO NOT switch the machine off when this alarm appears.

Maintenance
Fig. 8-19 CNC Batterie
3
1
CNC buffer battery replacement

1 Extract the connector (1) pulling it outwards.
2 Press the tab (2) rightwards (2) lightly with your fingers.
3 Extract the battery (3) using the connected wire.
4 Insert a new battery (3) being careful to keep the resistor welded onto the battery
upwards so it fits into the groove.
WARNING
The positive battery terminal (+) must remain out.
5 Insert the connector considering that it can only be inserted one way.

Maintenance
8.2.7.3 Conditioner metallic filter cleaning procedure
Card 7.3
Cycle type Metallic filter cleaning
Person in charge Operatore

Time required 5’
Frequency 500 h
Equipment needed
Machine status Any
Fig. 8-20 Panel and metallic filter
2
1
• Remove the panel (1) from the electric panel raising it to release it from the
fastening hooks;
• Separate the panel (1) from the metallic filter (2).
• Clean the metallic filter (2) with compressed air.
• Refit the clean metallic filter (2) on the inside of the panel (1).
• Reposition the panel (1) onto the electrical enclosure.

Maintenance
8.3 Metalworking fluids and lubricants for machine tool

9 Transport and installation
WARNING
Before performing any of the operations described in this chapter, carefully
read Chapter 3, covering safety information.
Introduction
This document is reserved for the managers and their collaborators in charge of machine transportation, as-
sembly and installation in the Company.
The user personnel must be able to prepare the installation area, as well as the relevant connections and fil-
lings, to ensure that the machine can be installed and connected immediately after the delivery.
All tanks containing oils must be emptied before lifting and transporting the machine.
During transport, make sure there is enough space around the machine for handling, and that there are no
electrical wires, plumbing conduits, tires, chains, hoists, etc. that may become caught in the machine and cau-
se damage to persons or property, or to the machine itself.
Information, specifications and warnings related to transport and installation of the peripheral equipment (e.g.
bar pushers) can be found in the manuals of their manufacturers.
NOTE
For a detailed description of the technical features of the machine, please
refer to Chapter 4 of this manual.
9.1 Qualification of the operator
Installation and testing are generally performed by qualified personnel Gildemeister Italiana S.p.A.
Alternatively, such operations must be performed by qualified personnel.
NOTE
Gildemeister Italiana S.p.A. undertakes no responsibility for any damages to
people or objects arising from failure to follow the instructions contained in
this manual.

9.2 Operation sequence
Assembly of locking brackets.
NO YES
Packing
LIFTING AND TRANSPORT
Packing operations
Lifting of the machine
Lifting with packing
Loading and unloading the tran-

sport vehicle
NO YES
Unpacking
Unpacking operations
Lifting of the machine
Machine placement
and levelling
INSTALLATION
Removal of locking brackets
Cleaning
COMMISSIONING
Commissioning
Machine ready for use

9.3 Assembly of locking brackets
During handling and transport of the machine, to avoid unwanted movements, the mobile parts (doors, sli-
des...) must be fastened with specific brackets.
WARNING
Use these brackets each time it is necessary to transport the machine.
NOTE
The bracket is painted in orange for easy identification.
During transport, the slides are kept in position by fastening brackets, which shall be removed before opera-
ting the machine.
The bracket (1) blocks the axes X3, Y3 and Z3

The bracket (2) blocks the axes X2 and Z2
Bracket (3) blocks the Z1 axis

During transport, the sliding guard (1) shall be fastened with the fastening brackets (2) and (3).

9.4 Packing
For transportation by truck, the machine is placed and fixed on a pallet, large and strong enough to bear the
mass of the machine and of its accessories.
For shipping, the machine is closed into a container/case.
For transportation by air, the machine is packaged in a light cage.
The pallet and the packaging crates are built in accordance with general strength and structure standards,
according to the weight of the machine.
A plate on the packaging lists the indications for lifting and transportation. Also marked are the barycentre and
the clamping points when using a bridge crane or forklifts.
In case of lifting with ropes or chains, use the special metal angles to avoid damaging the packaging wood.
Machines are protected against corrosion and oxidation by special greases and/or protective films; they are
also coated with a polyester film and an appropriate amount of hygroscopic salts is placed inside the packa-
ging to remove any residual humidity.
All electrical and electronic components are also protected individually with both polyester films and hygro-
scopic salts against humidity.
NOTE
Gildemeister Italiana S.p.A. undertakes no responsibility for any damages to
people or to the machine arising from failure to follow the supplied instruc-
tions.
9.5 Lifting of the machine
For transportation and handling, the machinery is divided into several parts:
Machine Bar loader Chips conveyor
Machine body handling is described below. To handle the bar loader and the chips conveyor, refer to the spe-
cific manuals.
Table of SPRINT 42|10 linear machine weights

Type of shipping Pack weight Net weight Gross weight
By truck Pallet 6840 Kg 7340 Kg
By air Cage
By sea Crate 6840 Kg 8190 Kg

9.5.1 Lifting of the machine with forklift
DANGER
Make sure that:
- the capacity of the carriage is suitable for the load to be lifted

- Fully introduce the forks into the pallet, making sure that the barycentre of the load is centred
with relation to the forks
- Lift the load as little as required, operating the carriage at minimum speed to avoid jerks or knocks
Machine without packing
Machine with packing - Machine onto the pallet

9.5.2 Lifting of the machine with crane
DANGER
Make sure that the capacity of the crane is suitable for the load to be
lifted.
THE CHAINS ARE NOT DELIVERED BY US AND THEY HAVE TO BE PROVIDED BY YOUR COMPANY.
Needed equipment:
1 Lift beam complete with tie rods 2 4 eyebolts
Machine without packing
Machine with packing - Machine onto the pallet

9.6 Unloading from the transport vehicle
WARNING
All lifting, transport, and installation operations must always be performed by
qualified personnel.
DANGER
When handling the machine, people and/or equipment in the installation
area might get hit or crushed. All the personnel in charge of the installa-
tion must wear gloves, helmet, shoes and protective clothes.
DANGER
To avoid the risk of machine fall and tipping, pay special attention to the
distribution of the mobile masses and to their fasteners.
Before unloading - Verify that the following items do not feature external damages:
• the machine • the chips conveyor
• the bar loader • peripheral accessories and devices
Remove the fastening devices which fasten the accessories, the peripheral devices and the machine to the
transport vehicle.
During unloading, unload the accessories and then the machine.
9.7 Unpacking
To unpack the machine, proceed as follows:
1) Place the pallet and the crates in an area large enough to allow the machine and the operators
to move easily.
2) Open the packaging, extract the various machine parts and remove the plastic sheets wrapping
it.
WARNING
During unpacking operations handle with care the crate opening tools, to
avoid damaging the machine.
3) After removing the machine packaging, perform a thorough check for any damages suffered du-
ring transportation.
4) Visually check the machine status both externally and internally. Any deformations of the visible
parts are indicative of shocks suffered by the machine during transportation, that might affect nor-
mal operation. In particular, check for the good condition of the hoses of the hydraulic system, of
the electric cables, and of the valves.
5) Check the correct tightening of screws, bolts and fittings.

To unpack the machine, proceed as follows:
NOTE
Gildemeister Italiana S.p.A. undertakes no responsibility for any damages
suffered by the machine during transport.
Damages that have occurred during transportation must be ascribed to the
carrier, and immediately notified to the manufacturer or to its representative.
9.8 Installation
9.8.1 Machine placement
The machine must be placed in an area large enough to allow the execution of all the operations required
during installation, operation and maintenance. The following figure shows the maximum machine dimen-
sions in the standard configuration.
NOTE
For the overall dimensions refer to the Technical Data table in Chapter 4 of
this documentation.
All cabinets must always be accessible and the doors must open fully without any obstacles.

Page 9-10
Machine Layout
SPRINT42|10linear-FA-BA-v4.0-en
Il presente disegno e' di Tolleranza generali : Spigoli secondo :
Numero articolo: GILDEMEISTER Italiana ISO 2768 ISO 13715 Scala : 1:20 Massa : - kg
S.p.A che si riserva ogni - 0.3
2648420 diritto a termine di legge. +0.8 - 0.5 Materiale :
>> Copyright according to
ISO 16016 consider << Numero grezzo :
Data Nome Denominazione :
Dis. 28/06/2010 ChiappaC
Ver. 28/06/2010 RORE
Appr. 28/06/2010 RORE
Numero Disegno : Vers. Foglio

GILDEMEISTER 0bF24026
Italiana S.p.A. 0 1 1
Memo Modificato Data Nome 0bF24026_0 Origine :
9.8.2 Quality of foundations and resting surface
For the correct support of the machine, it is necessary to prepare a foundation (concrete slab) featuring:
• minimum thickness 300 mm

• recommended resistance to compression of the concrete Rck = 250 kg/cm2
• planarity ± 5 mm/m
• the plan dimensions of the floor (2) equal to the distance of the fastening holes (1) of the machine shown
in the following figure increased by a side margin of 400 mm
NOTE
The foundation resistance check is responsibility of the customer.

9.8.3 Positioning and Levelling
To obtain optimum stability conditions, the machine's surface plate must be levelled lengthways and transver-
sally with a maximum tolerance of ± 5 mm/m. For the final machine levelling, use the levelling screws situated
in the machine pallet.
NOTE
On the flooring, underneath the machine there are the plates on which the
levelling screws are rested.
To anchor the machine to the floor, insert the tie-rods in the special holes situated on the machine pallet alon-
gside the levelling screws.

9.9 Removal of locking brackets
With the machine positioned, remove the fastening brackets of the slides and of the sliding guards, removing
the fastening screws.
WARNING
Do not move the slides before removing the slide fastening brackets.
NOTE
The bracket is painted in orange for easy identification.
9.10 Machine cleaning
DANGER
Perform cleaning with the machine off and isolated.
During transportation the non-painted parts of the machine are protected against corrosion by a coating of
antirust oil.
After removing the packaging:

• Carefully remove antirust oil from all the surfaces, using soft clothes soaked with petroleum or alkaline
detergents;
• Brush the sliding surfaces with lubricating oil, of the type used in the lubrication power unit, to protect them
from humidity and corrosive agents.
To clean the glass of the sliding guard, use soft rags soaked with alkaline detergents.
WARNING
Do not move the slides before removing the antirust oil.
NOTE
Any presence of chips is due to turning tests.

9.11 Commissioning
9.11.1 Electrical connection
The following figure shows the point where the machine is connected (1) to the electric power grid.
Connection to the electric system: TN-S grid with 3 cables (L1, L2, L3) + neutral cable (N) + ground cable (PE)
NOTE
The machine must be connected only to a TN-S type electric system. In all
other types of electric system, it is necessary to add a transformer with star
centre of the secondary connected to ground.
The connection with the neutral cable is required according to the electric configuration of the lathe.
It is necessary to respect the section of the grounding cable as indicated in the electric layout.
If you want to connect the lathe to a differential switch, it is necessary to install a selective differential switch
of type “B” or “C”, with variable current adjustment (minimum value 300 mA) and variable intervention time.
We recommend to connect a single lathe to the differential switch.
DANGER
It is possible to connect to the lathe external excluded circuits (e.g.
additional high pressure systems).
Opening the machine main switch does not remove voltage from the
entire external electric equipment. Refer to the electric layouts.
DANGER
Check that the electrical distribution line size is appropriate for the
machine power. Refer to the technical data (Chapter 4) to identify the
power required by the machine.
DANGER
Perform the earthing installation connection before any other connec-
tion to the electric distribution line.

To connect the machinery to the electrical system, follow these instructions:
1) Apply a disconnecting switch upstream to the machine's connection cable with the factory's
power mains. The disconnecting switch must have its handle at a height from the flooring, inclu-
ded between the range of 0.6 - 1.9m. A maximum height of 1.7m is preferred. The handle must
be red, on a yellow background.
2) Ensure that the external power mains supply is sectioned.
3) Check that the main switch on the electric control board is in position "0", and open the electric
control board door.
4) Introduce the current supply cable through the clearance hole, and connect it to the terminals of
the phases and the neutral inside the electrical cabinet;
5) Check the correct sequence of phases.

9.11.2 Power supply tolerances
The electric network the machine is connected to must meet the tolerances listed in this paragraph.
Voltage
Allowed voltage variations must not exceed 10% of the rated voltage.
Frequency
On a continuous basis, or for a prolonged time, allowed variations must not exceed 1% of the electric network
frequency, with reference to the rated value.
Variations of 2% from the rated frequency are acceptable for a short period.
Harmonics
The harmonic distortion due to the sum of the second to fifth harmonics must not exceed 10% of the total
voltage, in effective value, between wires under voltage. A further distortion, due to the sum of the sixth to
thirtieth harmonics, is allowed provided it doesn't exceed 2% of the total voltage, in effective value, between
wires under voltage.
3-phase supply voltage unbalance
Neither the negative sequence component nor the zero sequence component must exceed 2% of the direct
sequence component of the voltage.
Voltage pulses
They must last no more than 1.5 ms with an ascent/descent time between 500 ns and 500 µs, and their peak
value must not exceed 200% of the effective value of the rated supply voltage.
Voltage cut-off
Voltage must not be cut off, or drop to zero for over 3 ms, irrespective of the supply wave point where the cut-
off occurs. At least 1 s must elapse between two subsequent cut offs.
Voltage drops
Voltage drops must not exceed 20 % of the rated peak supply voltage, and must not last for more than one
cycle. At least 1 s must elapse between two subsequent voltage drops.
NOTE
Gildemeister Italiana S.p.A. undertakes no responsibility for any faults, failu-
res or malfunctions that should occur as a consequence of the failure to meet
the supply values specified in this manual.

9.11.3 Pneumatic connection
The connection to the pneumatic circuit (1) of the machine is performed at the point indicated in the following
figure. The required operating pressure is described in chapter 4 of this manual.
9.11.4 Fluid filling
Usually the machine is supplied without fluids.

We recommend that the fluids used for first filling are used as well in the future.
The required fluids are described in chapter 4 of this manual.
NOTE
The choice of lubro-coolant depends on the material being machined and the
operation cycle that the machine must perform. For further information con-
sult the Gildemeister Italiana S.p.A. Technical Office.

9.11.5 Adaptation of the interface to the bar loaders
1 The panel is ready to realize the holes indicated in the figure
5
R5
14.5
23
31.5
11.5
R6
8
267
50
R16
158.5
85
176.5 160.5
398
2 Determine, according to the type of bar loader, which hole to realize

3 Break down the diaphragm by means of hammer and punch (figure 2)
4 Refit the panel to the machine
NOTE
To ease assembly, it is possible to split the panel, following the prelasered
shape, and fit the two parts separately.

9.12 Storage
If it becomes necessary to store the machine, the layer of protective antioxidant lubricant will need to be re-
stored on all specific parts (chucks, cams, wheels, chains, etc.).
The machine must be stored and transported in the following safety conditions:
• Removal of all the fluids from the machine;
• Removal of the chips from the machine and conveyor.
Storage room requirements
• Temperature during storage: -25°C ... +55°C

• Relative humidity during storage: 10% ... 90%
• Appropriate protection against atmospheric agents
• Horizontal rest plane capacity exceeding the machine mass.
NOTE
Don't climb on the machine and don't place any object onto the machine.
9.13 Scrapping
The machine must be decommissioned at the end of its technical and operative life.
Decommissioning must allow to reuse the raw materials used to make it.
NOTE
Gildemeister Italiana S.p.A. will not be liable for injury to personnel or
damage to property caused by recycling of individual machine parts in situa-
tions other than their original ones.
Decommissioning procedure
DANGER
The decommissioning and scrapping operations of the machine must
be carried out by suitably trained and equipped personnel who have
learnt the instructions contained in this chapter and in the “Safety Infor-
mation" chapter of this manual.
DANGER
Before removing the electric motors on the slides arranged vertically or
obliquely, they must be fixed so as to prevent them from unexpectedly
slipping downwards as soon as the electric motor which is supporting
them is released.

1) Switch the machine off.

2) Disconnect the external power supplies (electrical and pneumatic).
3) Cut-off the electrical current from the electrical substation upstream of the electric cabinet.
4) Discharge any residual pressure from the pneumatic system by disconnecting the quick con-
nector.
5) Remove the electric cabinet:
• Disconnect the power cable from the electric cabinet terminal board.
• Disconnect all the devices from their sockets connecting the electric cabinet to the machine.
• Remove and disconnect the cable duct connecting the electric cabinet to the machine.
• Fasten the cables in the specific ducts on the machine.
• Remove all electrical parts.
6) Disconnect the lubrication system and the hydraulic system :

• Empty the oil from the tank using the drain plug positioned in the lower part of the tank.
• Disconnect all delivery and return attachments from the system.
• Empty the accumulators by opening the valve.
• Open the tank flanges and clean inside carefully to eliminate oil residues.
7) Disconnect the oil-based coolant system:

• Remove the coolant contained in the waste coolant tank and clean coolant tank with a pump.
• Disconnect all delivery and return attachments from the system.
WARNING
Send the oil and coolant to the respective consortiums for proper disposal.
8) Remove the bar loader and chip evacuator:

• Refer to the specific manuals for moving the bar loader and the chip evacuator.
WARNING
The machine is made of non-biodegradable materials.
Take the machine to an authorised centre for disposal.

Machine programming
10 Machine programming
10.1 Introduction to programming
This chapter contains specific information on programming the machine. Some of the
most common standard FANUC functions are explained.
Refer to the FANUC programming language for using other standard functions and
FANUC fixed cycles not included in this chapter. See type ‘B’ function encoding.
10.1.1 Constructive elements of the program

A PROGRAM consists of a sequence of instructions needed for mechanical
machining.
Each line is called a BLOCK.
Each BLOCK contains a certain number of WORDS.
Each WORD consists of a literal part followed by a numeric part.
The literal part of the WORD is the ADDRESS.
The numeric part of the WORD assumes different values (FORMAT) according to the
ADDRESS.
Fig. 10-1 General structure of the program
PROGRAM=MAIN PROGRAM (B) = BLOCK

(B) i = INITIAL BLOCK (P) = WORD
(B) f = FINAL BLOCK (I) = ADDRESS

Machine programming
10.1.2 Addresses
10.1.2.1 Meaning
The following table shows the meaning of the addresses.
Function Address Meaning

Program number : (ISO) /O (EIA) Program number
Sequence number N Sequence number
G Operating mode (e.g.: linear
Preparatory function
interpolation)
X, Y, Z, A, B, C Movement controls
Dimensional words R Circular interpolation radius or union
I, J, K Arc centre coordinates, chamfer
Feed function F Feed speed - Threading step
Spindle speed function S Spindle speed
T Specifies tool number - Specifies tool
Tool function
corrector number
M Machine function activation/
Miscellaneous functions
deactivation control
Pause P, U, X Specifies pause time
Program number P Specifies subprogram number
P, Q Specifies the sequence number of
Sequence number
program portions to be repeated
P Number of repetitions of a
Number of repetitions
subprogram
NOTE
The WORDS with "G" ADDRESS identify PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS.
PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS must be performed by other instructions.
An ADDRESS may assume different meanings according to the activated PRE-
PARATORY FUNCTION.

Machine programming
10.1.2.2 Format
The following table shows the extension field for the possible values given to
addresses.
Function Address Input in mm Input in inches

: (ISO) 1-9999 1-9999
Program number
O (EIA)
Sequence number N 1-9999 1-9999
Prepairing functions G 0-99 0-99
X, Z, U ±99999.999 mm ±9999.9999 inch
Step value 1/10 W, R, C ±9999.9999 mm ±999.99999 inch
A, I, K
Feeding/min F 1-100000 mm/min 0.01-4000.00 inch/min
Step 1/10 1-12000 mm/min 0.01-480.00 inchi/min
F 0.0001-500.0000 0.0001-9.9999 inchi/
threading pitch
mm/giro giro
Spindle function S 0-9999 0-9999
Tools functions T 0-99 0-99
Miscellaneous functions M 0-999 0-999
Wait X, U, P 0-99999.999 sec. 0-99999.999 s
Steps 1/10 0-9999.9999 sec. 0-9999.9999 s
It specifies the subpro- P 1-9999999 1-9999999
gram, repetitions numberi
It specifies the sequence P, Q 1-999999 1-999999
number

Machine programming
10.1.3 Main program and subprogram

A mechanical machining PROGRAM may consist of a MAIN PROGRAM and one or
more SUBPROGRAMS.
The subprograms are normal programs which can be invoked by the main program or
by another subprogram.
Subprograms are useful for programming common parts required several times during
a job.
The CNC is normally controlled by the MAIN PROGRAM. When a SUBPROGRAM is
encountered, the CNC runs the instructions contained in the SUBPROGRAM.
When a return command is found in the SUBPROGRAM, control is resumed by the
main program from the instruction following the one where it was left off.
Fig. 10-2 Main program and subprogram structure
MAIN PROGRAM SUBPROGRAM
ISTRUCTION 1 ISTRUCTION 1
ISTRUCTION 2 ISTRUCTION 2
RUN SUBPROGRAM
INSTRUCTIONS
ISTRUCTION n RUN MAIN PROGRAM
INSTRUCTIONS
ISTRUCTION n+1

Machine programming
10.1.4 Main program structure

The main program essentially consists of:
• name
• body
• end.
The name of a program is indicated by letter 'O' followed by a numeric value (maxi-
mum four digits).
The body of a program consists of the blocks containing the operating instructions.
Each block must be ended with a 'semicolon' by pressing EOB (End Of Block).
The end of a program is different according to the envisaged cycle type as described
below:
• M1 is an optional stop. The machine stops when the function is read only if the
cycle stop button on the operator panel is pressed.
• M30 is a cycle stop functions. The machine stops and the program is rewound. The
machine stops at end of cycle and starts again from the beginning when the Cycle
Start button is pressed.
• M99 means end of program, rewind and restart without waiting for the Cycle Start
button to be pressed. This is used for continuous machine production. M99 is used
also with letter P or as end of subprogram.
The following table shows an example of main program structure:
Tabella 1: Example of main program structure
Notes
Mame Oxxxx; values from 0 to 7999
...;
...;
...;
body
...;
...;
...;
End M1 or M30; or M99.

Machine programming
10.1.4.1 Unconditioned skip function in main program: M99

The M99 unconditioned skip function can be used in the main program to run
instructions not in sequence.
The block to skip to is selected by means of the M99 P---- function, where “---- “ cor-
responds to the main program block identification number for the return.
Fig. 10-3 Example of unconditioned skip
O 0001;
N30
MAIN PROGRAM
M99 P30
10.1.5 Subprograms
10.1.5.1 Subprogram structure

Exactly like the main program, a subprogram consists of:
• name
• body
• end.
The name of a program is indicated by letter 'O' followed by a numeric value
(maximum four digits).
The name of the subprogram is invoked by the M98 function in the main program.
The profile or operation to be performed is described in the body.
The end of a subprogram must include return to the main program and the M99 func-
tion is therefore used.

Machine programming
10.1.5.2 Subprogram call function: M98

A subprogram can be activated by a main program or by another subprogram.
The call function is: M98 Pxxxx.
Symbol “xxxx” corresponds to the identification number of the subprogram to be ac-
tivated.
Fig. 10-4 Subprogram invoke function

O0001; O1000;
M98 P1000;
M99;
M30 (M99)

Machine programming
10.1.5.3 Subprogram repetition

A subprogram can be repeated a certain number of times before returning to the
invoking structure.
The invoke function is: M98 P ooo xxxx.
Symbol “ooo” corresponds to the required number of repeats.
Symbol “xxxx” corresponds to the identification number of the subprogram to be
activated.
The subprogram is run only once if the number of repeats is omitted.
The following figure shows a repeated subprogram operating diagram.
Fig. 10-5 Subprogram repetition
O0001; O1000;
(R) (S) 2nd run

1st run
M98 P 002 1000;
M99
(R) = N. OF REPEATS
M30 (M99) (S) = SUBPROGRAM N.

Machine programming
10.1.5.4 Return to invoking program function: M99

The M99 function returns control to the invoking structure, which may be the main
program or a subprogram.
The return block is that immediately following the invoking block, as shown in the fol-
lowing figure.
Fig. 10-6 Return to invoking program function
O0001; O1000;
M98 P1000;
M99;
M30 (M99);
It is possible to return to the invoking program at a different block from that following
the M98 function.
The return block can be selected using the M99 P---- function.
Symbol “----” corresponds to the invoking structure block identification number where
to return to.
Fig. 10-7 Return function to a specific block in the invoking program
O0001; O1000;
M98 P1000;
M99 P10;
N10 M30 (M99);

Machine programming
10.1.5.5 Nesting
A nested structure occurs when a subprogram is invoked by a another subprogram.
Each subprogram invoking by another subprogram increases the nesting level by one
unit.
The CNC can interpret up to four nesting levels as shown in the following figure.
Fig. 10-8 Nesting levels
P.P. PR IFIRST
M O L I VLEVEL
ELLO
S.P.1 P.P.:
P.P.: Main program
programma principale
S.P.n: Subprogram n-th
S.P.n: sottoprogramma n---esimo
(n = 1, 2, 3, 4)
P.P. SE C O ND O L I V E L L O
SECOND LEVEL
S.P.1 S.P.2
P.P. TE R ZO LIV E LLO

THIRD LEVEL
S.P.1 S.P.2 S.P.3
P.P. Q UA R T O L I VLEVEL
FOURTH ELLO
S.P.1 S.P.2 S.P.3 S.P.4
10.1.6 Optional block skip: /

Press BLOCK SKIP on the CNC control panel to skip the blocks indicated by symbol
" / ".

Machine programming
Symbol “ / “ must always be the first element in the block and must proceed the block
number.
EXAMPLE
N2;
/M36 ;
G4 X0.2 ;
G1 G94 F 5000 Z0 ;
.......................... ;
.......................... ;
/M18
Tabella 2: Optional block skip
The BARRED BLOCK is run if the operator turns the skip block switch to the off
position (indicator off).
The BARRED BLOCK is not run if the operator turns the skip block switch to the on
position (indicator on).
10.1.7 Program comments

Notes for the operator and information describing the jobs performed by the CNC can
be introduced in the PROGRAM.
Comments can be entered at any point of the program and must be enclosed in round
brackets.
NOTE
Comments cannot contain code %. There are not limits of length.
EXAMPLE
.......................... ;
T0101 G0 Y0 (CUTTING TOOL) ;
G0 X22 ;
.......................... ;
Tabella 3: Example of program comment

Machine programming
10.2 Basic programming

10.2.1 List of G functions
The following table contains the G functions mentioned in this chapter, the Fanuc
cycles and the macros in sequential order.
TYPE column content key:
F = function
C = Fanuc cycle
M = macro
TYPE FUNCTION DESCRIPTION

F G00 Rapid positioning
F G01 Work linear interpolation
F G02 Clockwise circular interpolation.
F G03 Clockwise circular interpolation
F G04 Pause time
F G07.1 Activate axis Z-C combination
F G08 High speed interpolation
F G12.1 Activate axis X-C combination (polar coordinates)

F G13.1 Deactivate axis X-C combination (polar coordinates)
F G17 Select plane X-Y

F G18 Select plane X-Z
F G19 Select plane Y-Z
F G20 Program in inches

F G21 Program in mm
F G25 Deactivate spindle float control

F G26 Activate spindle float control
F G28 Return to axis C reference point
F G33 Constant threading pitch

F G34 Variable threading pitch
F G40 Deactivate tool radius compensation
F G41 Activates LH tool radius compensation

F G42 Activates RH tool radius compensation
F G50.1 Activate mirroring

Machine programming
F G51.1 Deactivate mirroring
F G52 Origin offset in steps

F G54 Select zero offset from stored table
F G65 Macroinstruction invoke
C G70 Finishing cycle

C G71 Material removal by turning
C G72 Material removal by turning
C G73 Profile repetition
C G74 Frontal drilling in segments
C G75 Outer/inner diameter drilling
C G76 Thread cutting cycle in several cuts
C G77 Rough cycle
C G78 Threading cycle
C G79 Rough cycle
C G80 Deactivate rigid tapping fixed cycles

C G83 Axial drilling cycle
C G84 Rigid tapping fixed cycle with axis Z
C G87 Radial drilling cycle
C G88 Rigid tapping fixed cycle with axis X
F G90 Absolute programming

F G91 Incremental programming
Main spindle and back spindle speed limit (G96 constant
F G92
cutting speed only)
F G94 Feed in mm/min

F G95 Feed in mm/rev
F G96 Constant cutting speed
F G97 Deactivate constant cutting speed
M G300 Reduce and/or restore axis torque

M G301 Axis position error control

Machine programming
10.2.2 Spindle rotation management functions

Spindle rotation is managed by technological functions governing:
• speed
• constant cutting speed
• spindle speed limitation
• spindle direction of rotation.
10.2.2.1 Constant speed setting function: G97

Function G97 (constant speed) is used when the part diameters do not change. This
function is used for drilling, threading and tapping.
The numeric value associated to the “S” address shows the rpm of the selected spin-
dle.
EXAMPLE
.......................... ;
G97 S2500 ; the spindle turns at 2500 rpm
;
.......................... ;
NOTE
G97 is a function active when the CNC is switched on.
10.2.2.2 Constant cutting speed function: G96

The G96 function (constant cutting speed) is used for machining parts with a large
difference of diameters. Indeed, the spindle speed will be automatically varied by the
constant cutting speed function according to the diameter reached by the tool in the
specific instant.
The value associated to the “S” address is the cutting speed (m/min) of the material
being machined.
If G97 without S address is programmed after the G96 function, the last speed proc-
essed by the G96 according to the diametrical position of the tool is frozen.
EXAMPLE
.......................... ;
; the spindle works at constant
G96 S150 cutting speed equal to 150 m/min
;
.......................... ;
10.2.2.3 Spindle speed limiting function: G92

When working at constant cutting speed (G96 S...), it is often needed to ensure that
the maximum spindle speed does not exceed certain values.

Machine programming
For example, if the bars of material being machined are not perfectly straight, vibra-
tions may occur when a certain speed is threshold is exceeded.
EXAMPLE
.......................... ;
; spindle speed is limited to 2000
G92 S2000 rpm
;
.......................... ;
10.2.2.4 Spindle direction of rotation function: M3, M4, M5

The direction of rotation of the spindle must be defined after programming the spindle
rotation function.
• M3: clockwise
• M4: anticlockwise
• M5: stop
NOTE
How to associated the direction of rotation to the selected spindle is presented
in the specific programming section.

Machine programming
10.2.3 Tool call

The address used to call a tool is Txxxx followed by two pairs of numbers.
Thefirst pair indicates the physical tool position.
NOTE
The tool numbers used by the manufacturer for each slide are shown in the
specific programming section.
The second pair of numbers indicates the position inside the table related to
tool geometry and wear.
The geometry values are the distances between the tool tip and the reference
point on the slide for all the axes along which the slide moves.
The tool knows the reference point position of the slide and by reading the
geometry values is capable of moving the tool tip directly.
The wear values are small position corrections.
Fig. 10-9 Axis X and Z geometry, insert radius value (R) and tool orientation
quadrant code (T) table.

Machine programming
Fig. 10-10 Y Axis geometry table
Fig. 10-11 Axis X and Z wear correction and insert radius value table

Machine programming
Fig. 10-12 Axis Y wear correction table
NOTE
It is important to remember that the machine does not shift the axis when the
Txxxx function is programmed but is only informed on the position of the tool tip.
It is therefore fundamental to program the next axis positioning for turning after
invoking the tool. Example: T0101 G0 Y0 .
Wear and geometry of Y axis

Follow this procedure to display the tool wear:
1) Activate the MDI mode;
2) Press the push-button “Offset/Setting”;

Machine programming
3) From the main menu [COMP/PREPARE/JOB] press the sofkey [higher A];
4) Press the softkey [CORET2] to access the wear of Y axis;

Machine programming
Proceed as follow to display the wear:

5) Press the softkey [CAHANGE] to access the Y axis geometry;

Machine programming
10.2.4 Coordinate systems

The CNC moves the tool, taking it to the concerned position when a point to be
reached is specified. The position to be reached is provided by means of coordinates
referred to a Cartesian axis system.
The coordinate system assumed different values according to where the axis origin is
located.
10.2.4.1 Machine coordinates: G53

The machine zero is a standard machine position which is established by the
manufacturer according to the features of the machine itself.
The machine coordinate system is a Cartesian system whose origin corresponds to
the machine zero point.
G53 selects the machine coordinate system. It is a self-deleting function, i.e. it is only
valid in the block where it was programmed.
G53 must be used only for absolute programming. It is ignored when used in combi-
nation with incremental values.
Fig. 10-13 Machine zero

Machine programming
10.2.4.2 Part coordinates: G52, G54, G55, G56, G57, G58, G59
The part coordinate system is obtained by offsetting the Cartesian axis origin to a
characteristic point of the part to be machined. All program positions refer to this point.
For greater programming simplicity, the position of this point is always on the axis of
rotation of the part and exactly on its front face.
This operation creates the part zero
Fig. 10-14 Part zero point
There are various ways to create the part zero point.

a) G52 origin offset with programmable values within the program
This function offsets the machine zero position along a specific axis in the direction
shown by the sign of the value itself.
G52 is a modal function, i.e. it remains active for all blocks following the one where it
was programmed.
Possible values followed by G52 write over the origin offset.
Use G53 to cancel this function in a specific block.
Program G52 with zero value (G52 Z0) to cancel it entirely.
b) G54-G55-G56-G57-G58-G59 origin offset with programmable values in
a table external to the program .

Machine programming
These functions will each write over the invoking of another.

Use G53 to cancel in a specific block only.
Invoke one of these functions with values equal to zero to definitive return to the
machine coordinate system. The G54 function is the only one in the group to be read
automatically when the machine is switched on.
c) Origin offset using EXT zero
A partition where to enter specific offset values is present in table where the function
from G54 to G59 are entered.
Values automatically read and loaded when the machine is started can be added by
the side of the EXT message. This partition cannot be cancelled or invoked.
The figure shows the CNC page where to enter and display EXT offset data and G54
group functions.
Fig. 10-15 Offset data entry page
Briefly:
When the machine is switched on, the zero position is automatically offset by the val-
ues in EXT zero and in G54. The programmer will then offset further using the G52
function and the G55 group functions within the program.
.EXAMPLE
......................... (EXT zero and G54 are read and loaded at switch-on)
.........................
G52 Z45 (part zero is created)

Machine programming
T0101 G0 Y0 (tool geometry is invoked and positioned)

G0 Z0 X22 (positions)
G1 X-1 G95 F0.1 (facing)
G0 X30 Z1 (moves away)
G53 G0 Z100 (tool tip moves away to absolute coordinates)
G0 Z1 X18 (returns to part coordinate)
.........................
Fig. 10-16 Origin shift

Machine programming
10.2.5 Incremental and absolute programming
10.2.5.1 ABSOLUTE programming: G90

In ABSOLUTE programming all coordinates refer to the part zero.
The addresses to be used are X, Z, Y, C.
Fig. 10-17 Absolute programming example
pio:
. . . . . .EXAMPLE
...;
0 G00 X 40 Z - 20 ;
.............;
.........;
G90;
rte numerica di Z-20;
G00 X40 X
lenza diametrale.
.............;
zero pezzo (sl. 1)

ZP1: part zero
unto diPS: starting point
partenza
unto diPA:
arrivo
arrival point Z P1
---20
NOTE
G90 is a function active when the CNC is switched on.

Machine programming
10.2.5.2 Incremental programming: G91

In INCREMENTAL programming all coordinates refer to the point before the
programmed one.
The addresses to be used are still X, Z, Y, C.
Fig. 10-18 Incremental programming example
EXAMPLE
.............;
mpio:
. . . . . . . . .G0
. ; X40 Z10;
20 G 00 XG91; 40 Z 10 ;
30 U ---5 X-10 W ---40 ;
Z-40;
..........;
.............;
parte numerica di X e U
no valenzaNumeric part of X
diametrale
has diametrical value
: zero pezzo (sl. 1)
ZP1: part zero
: punto di partenza Z P1
: punto diPS: starting point
arrivo 1
: punto diPA1: arrival
arrivo 2 point 1
PA2: arrival point 2

Machine programming
10.2.6 Tool feed programming

The working functions are presented in the following paragraphs.
Set the tool feed speed to express working movement.
The tool feed can be expressed in two ways:
10.2.6.1 mm/rev programming: G95

The numeric value associated to the F ADDRESS shows the tool advancement
expressed in mm/rev.
G95 is automatically active when the CNC is switched on and therefore only F needs
to be programmed at the beginning of the program to imply that the associated
numeric value is expressed in mm/rev.
The numeric value associated to F is modal.
The spindle must be revolving for G95 to be active.
10.2.6.2 mm/min programming: G94

The numeric value associated to the F ADDRESS shows the tool advancement
expressed in mm/min.
G94 must be invoked expressly by a program.
10.2.7 Rapid G0 positioning

This function is used for idle tool movements to minimise approach time to the
machined part.
X, Y and Z are the coordinates of the point to be reached.
G0 positioning is not performed along the line from PS (starting point) to PA (arrival
point) but each axis moves independently (see figure).
Fig. 10-19 Rapid positioning
EXAMPLE
......;
G0 X22 Z0 ;
...... ;

Machine programming
10.2.8 Linear interpolation: G1

This function is used for tool working movements for reaching the arrival point from the
current position in a straight line.
G1 requires tool feed G95 (G94) F to be programmed in the same BLOCK or in the
previous BLOCKS. .
G01 requires spindle rotation if G95 F.. is present (normal turning conditions). G1
does not require spindle rotation if G94 F.. is present (rotating tools).
The tool will not move if F0 is programmed.
Fig. 10-20 Linear interpolation
EXAMPLE
......;
G0 X22 Z0 ;
G1 X-1 G95 F0.1
...... ;

Machine programming
Profile programming
The PA of a G1 is normally identified by a pair of coordinates (X/U) (Z/W).
The profile may be described by the inclination angle of the line joining the starting
point to the arrival point.
Angle A definition conventions
NOTE
Address A must be proceeded by a comma (,A)
Angle A is defined as follows as shown in the figure:

• position origin of axis Z1 at PS;
• measure A between Z1 and the segment representing linear interpolation;
• assign to A sign (+) if the measurement was anticlockwise (ccw);
• assign to A sign (-) if the measurement was clockwise (ccw);
• value A is expressed in degrees and decimal factions of a degree.
Fig. 10-21 Definition of angle A
One decimal digit after zero is allowed for the angle A value.
Decimal values are not accepted for values 0°, 90°, 180° , 270° but only for values ± 1°
Automatic chamfering (C) or a union (R) at PA is also possible.

Machine programming
10.2.8.1 Radius R or chamfer C calculated by CNC
NOTE
Address C must be proceeded by a comma (,C) to differentiate it from the 'C'
address identifying the C axis.
Values following 'R' or ',C' express the union or chamfer dimension.

Practically, the machine traces the angle bisector, and
• for radius positions the centre on the bisector at a distance from the tangent point
equal to the radius.
Fig. 10-22 Radius calculation
EXAMPLE
......;
G1 X20 ,A150 R13 G95 F0.2
...... ;

Machine programming
• for chamfers traces a line perpendicular to the bisector.
Fig. 10-23 Chamfer calculation
EXAMPLE
......;
G1 X20 ,A150 ,C5 G95 F0.2
...... ;

Machine programming
Fig. 10-24 Programming example
EXAMPLE
01001
N0010 G52Z10
0
N0020 T0101 G00 Y0
N0030 G97 S3000 M03
N0040 G95 F0.15
N0050 G00 X0 Z2
N0060 G01 Z0
N0070 X6 ,C0.5
N0080 Z-10 R4
N0090 X12
N0100 ,A177
N0110 X20 Z-45 ,A142 R3
N0120 Z-50
...............................................

Machine programming
10.2.9 Circular interpolation
Command Description
G17 Specifies an arc on the X, Y plane
G18 Specifies an arc on the Z, X plane
G19 Specifies an arc on the Y, Z plane
G02 Clockwise circular interpolation
G03 Anticlockwise circular interpolation
X_ Movement command of axis X or parallel axis
Y_ Movement command of axis Y or parallel axis
Z_ Movement command of axis Z or parallel axis
I_ Distance from initial point to centre of arc along axis X, radius
J_ Distance from initial point to centre of arc along axis Y, radius
K_ Distance from initial point to centre of arc along axis Z, radius
R_ Arc radius
F_ Advancement speed along the arc
10.2.9.1 Clockwise: G2
An arc is defined by describing:
The arrival point coordinates and the clockwise circle radius.
Fig. 10-25 Clockwise circular interpolation
The coordinates of the arrival point and the circle centre coordinates with respect to
the starting point are expressed with letters:
• I on X axis (radial values)
• K on Z axis
• J on Y axis.
The IKJ axis system origin coincides with PS

Machine programming
Fig. 10-26 Definition of the axis I and K system origin.
previous BLOCKS.
G2 requires spindle rotation if G95 F.. is present (normal turning conditions).
Fig. 10-27 Clockwise circular interpolation example
...... ..............;
N 0010 G 54 ;
N 0020 T 0303 (G 00) Y 0 ;
N 0030 G 95 F 0.2 ;
N 0040 G 97 S2500 M 03
N 0050 G 00 X 20 Z 2 ;
N 0060 G 01 Z --- 20 ;
(1) N 0070 G 02 X 20 Z --- 4
(2) N 0070 G 02 U 0 W --- 2
(3) N 0070 G 02 X 20 Z --- 4
EXAMPLE
01001
T0303 G0 Y0;
G95 F0.2;
G97 S2500 M3;
G0 X20 Z2;
G1 Z-20;
G2 X20 Z-40 R15; (case 1)
G2 X20 Z-40 I11.18 K-10; (case 2)

Machine programming
10.2.9.2 Anticlockwise: G3
A arc is defined by describing:
The arrival point coordinates and the anticlockwise circle radius.
Fig. 10-28 Anticlockwise circular interpolation
The coordinates of the arrival point and the circle centre coordinates with respect to
the starting point are expressed with letters:
• I on X axis (radial values)
• K on Z axis
• J on Y axis.

Machine programming
Fig. 10-29 Definition of the axis I and K system origin
EXAMPLE
01001
T0303 G0 Y0;
G95 F0.2;
G97 S2500 M3;
G0 X20 Z2;
G1 Z-20;
G3 X20 Z-40 R15; (case 1)
G3 X20 Z-40 I-11.18 K-10; (case 2)
previous BLOCKS. .
G3 requires spindle rotation if G95 F.. is present (normal turning conditions)
Fig. 10-30 Anticlockwise circular interpolation example
..
;N 00
N
N
N
N
N
( 1) N
( 2) N
( 3) N

Machine programming
10.2.10 G4 X/U/P pause time

The pause time is expressed using the following ADDRESSES:
X: time expressed in seconds and decimal fractions of a second
U: time expressed in seconds and decimal fractions of a second
P: time expressed in milliseconds
EXAMPLE
.......................
(1) G4 X2.5 pause time: 2,5sec
(2) G4 U2.5 pause time: 2,5sec
(3) G4 P2500 pause time: 2500 millisec
NOTE
The G4 function must be programmed in a block by itself.

Machine programming
10.2.11 Precise global and local stop
10.2.11.1 Precise local stop: G4

Simply program G4 without specifying a pause time after the block in which the
coordinates of the point are described to reach the point more accurately.
G4 fractions the sequence of blocks describing the profile, thus allowing sharp instead
of rounded edges.
Fig. 10-31 Sharp and rounded edge
programmed profile
profile described by the tool
In order to obtain sharp edge(s), G4 function is programmed by itself in the block fol-
lowing that containing the sharp edge as arrival point.
Fig. 10-32 Precise local stop programming example
EXAMPLE
....................;
G0 X0 Z2 ;
G1 Z0 ;
X12
G4;
Z-15
................
10.2.11.2 Precise global stop: M46 - M47

The M46 function precisely stops on all points of the profile until M47 which deacti-
vates the function is reached.
EXAMPLE
M46;
G0 X12 Z2 ;
G1 ; Z-15 G95 F0.1 ;
X18 Z-25 ;
Z-35 ;
M47 ;
....................;

Machine programming
10.2.12 Tool radius compensation: G42/G41/G40

Profile errors caused by tool radius
The tool for reasons of strength always presents a circular union corresponding to the
tip.
The X Z coordinates which define the tool dimensions are referred to point " P "
obtained on the intersection between the lines tangent to the union circle and parallel
to the main axes.
The main axes related to the X Z working plane.
"P" is an imaginary point driven by the program on the profile of the part being
machined.
If the profile presence conical or circular segments, the profile traced by the tool will
be different from that programmed and the variation will increase proportionally to the
tool union radius.
Fig. 10-33 ifferent between real profile and programmed profile
part
pezzo
error
errore
real profile
programmed profile

Machine programming
10.2.12.1 Tool radius compensation to right of path direction (G42)
Fig. 10-34 Movement without tool radius compensation
error
errore
mo
ve movement without tool radius
me
nt compensation
movimento s enza compens a-
dir
ect zione
i on
raggio utens ile
part profile
profilo pezzo
The G42 function is used to eliminate all errors between real profile and programmed
profile caused by presence of R radius.
G42 must be activated when the tool is on the right on the part profile referred to the
direction of movement.
The meaning of "on the right with respect to the part profile" is only defined after
identifying the part profile direction.
Fig. 10-35 Movement with tool radius compensation

errore error
movimento con compensazione

raggio utens ile
movement without tool radius
compensation
part profile
profilo pezzo
The value of (R) is contained in the COMPENSATION/GEOMETRY or COMPENSA-

TION/WEAR tables.

Machine programming
10.2.12.2 Tool radius compensation to left of path direction (G41)
Fig. 10-36 Movement without tool radius compensation
profilopart
pezzoprofile
movement without tool radius

movimento s enza compensazione
compensation
raggio utens ile
error
errore
The G41 function is used to eliminate all errors between real profile and programmed
profile caused by presence of R radius.
G41 must be activated when the tool is on the left on the part profile referred to the
direction of movement.
The meaning of "on the left with respect to the part profile" is only defined after
identifying the part profile direction.
Fig. 10-37 Movement with tool radius compensation
profilo pezzo
part profile
movement without
movimento tool radius
con compensazione
raggio utens ile
compensation
The value of (R) is contained in the COMPENSATION/GEOMETRY or COMPENSA-

TION/WEAR tables.

Machine programming
10.2.12.3 Tool radius compensation use method

Activation
Program tool radius compensation with G41 (left) or G42 (right) of the block proceed-
ing the profile to be compensated.
Fig. 10-38 Example
... ....................;
N 0050 G 00 G 42 X 10 Z 2
N0050 G00 G42 X 10 Z2
N 0060 G 01 X 20 Z --- 5
N0060. .G01
.....X
. . .20
. . .Z
. . -5
.....;
...
N0050 : B LOC C O attivazione (C R U)
Once activated, CRU is kept for the entire part profile.

CRU repeats already active are not allowed in the profile description because the
cause undesired tool movements and may damage the part.
Switch from G41 to G42
The compensation direction can be changed (e.g. from G41 to G42) without needing
to deactivate CRU with G40 beforehand.
The compensation direction cannot be changed in ACTIVATION BLOCK or in the one
immediately after.
Tool radius compensation deactivation (G40)
G41 - G42 functions can be deactivated by the G40 function.
The G40 function must be programmed at the end of a profile and before the tool
change instruction.
The switching BLOCK from G41 or G42 to G40 is the CRU DEACTIVATION BLOCK.
The CRU DEACTIVATION BLOCK is a movement function G00 or G01 combined with
G40.

Machine programming
10.2.12.4 Notes on compensation

Compensation is also active with G77 and G79 cycles.
• Compensation is not active in MDI.
• When the union radius of a inner angle is smaller than the tool radius (R) overcut
followed by tool stop and error message occurs.
Fig. 10-39 Overcut conditions
union smaller
raccordo minorethan
del
tool radius
raggio dell’utensile
overcut
sovrataglio
• Overcut followed by tool stop and P/S41 error message occurs when the CRU
overrides the tool centre movement in direction opposite to that programmed.
Fig. 10-40 Other overcut condition
tool direction
direzione utensile opposite
contraria
alla direzione programmata
to programmed direction
overcut
sovrataglio
• When a line segment smaller than (R) is machined, compensation occurs as

normal without generating an alarm of any kind. Some parts may remain not
machined.
Fig. 10-41 Parts not machined
10.2.13 Axis thrust torque reduction: G300

• The G300 function is used to reduce or restore the thrust force of an axis.

Machine programming
• Normally used during the part gripping stage.

• The G300 function programmed without argument restores the axis torque to
100%.
10.2.14 Axis position control: G301

• The G301 function activates the axis position control with torque reduction.
• This function is used to check that the reduced axis has reached the programmed
position with a tolerance of 20 microns.
Example
G300 W10 TORQUE REDUCTION - axis Z * 10%
G1W-...G94F1000 TRANSFER POSITION
G301 W CHECK POSITION
M237 FS COLLET CLOSE
G300 TORQUE 100

Machine programming
10.2.15 Axis C
Use of axis C is linked to activation of motorized tools (radial or axial with respect to
the axis of rotation of the part).
Axis has different meanings:
a) The axis which controls the angular position of the spindle
b) The axis which controls the rotational movement of the spindle: Z-C
interpolation
c) As virtual axis for frontal milling off-axis: X-C interpolation
If useful, time the angular position of axis C jobs with other previously performed jobs
(drilling or radial milling), use the G52 C... function, where C expresses the offset angle
expressed in degrees.
10.2.15.1 Angular position of the spindle

This is used to direct the spindle to a certain angular position, the code used to
express the angle is C. This method of use of axis 'C' has no particular advantages
with respect to the 'M19 B...' function which remains the simplest and the fastest to
program.
NOTE
Function G0 can be programmed for....G52 C...angular zero offset on axis C.
...
M14 (activate axis C)
G91 (solo FANUC 310) (incremental programmation)
G28 C0 (solo FANUC 310 (axis C angular referencing)
G90 (solo FANUC 310) (absolut programmation)
G28 H0 (FANUC 160 only) (axis C angular referencing)
G52 C...... .(offset origin).
G0/C0 (position to 0° and block spindle)
Machining
M15 (deactivate axis C)

Machine programming
10.2.15.2 Skirt machining: Z-C interpolation

For milling operations programmed on the skirt, active axis 'C' so that this can manage
the rotary feed of the spindle.
The concerned axes are therefore:
• C for rotation
• Z for shifts on lengths
• X for skirt machining depth
Linear segment milling programming on Z-C plane
NOTE
The G0 function can be programmed only using C and X codes (not Z). Use
G94 function with F feed expressed in mm/min for rapid axis Z positioning. G94
feed is expressed in degrees/min on C axis and in mm/min on Z axis. If G95 is
programmed, millimetres and degrees refer to the revolution.
The direction of the axis C and Z shown in the figure expresses the direction of
revolution of the axis as if the tool were moving on the part (in actual fact the
directions of movement are opposite each other).
T0808 G0 Y0 S3600
(activate driven tool)
M...
M14 P... (activate axis C)
(return to reference position,
G28 H0
FANUC 160 only)
G91 (FANUC 310 only)
G28 C0 (FANUC 310 only)
G90 (FANUC 310 only)
G52 C... (offset angular zero)
G0 C0
G1 Z-4 X14 G94 F2000 (rapid positioning, F in mm/min)
X10 F200 (enter X, F in mm/min)
Z-14 F200 (machine Z, F in mm/min)
C-60 X12 F360 (machine C, F in degrees/min)
...
M15

Machine programming
Linear segment milling programming example on Z-C plane
Fig. 10-42 Milling programming example
T0808 G0 Y0 S3600 M... (activate driven tool)

G0 X30 Z0
M14 P11 (activate axis C)
G91 (incremental programmation)
G28 C0 (C axis reference point)
G18 Z0 C0 (Z C plane selection)
(activation interpolation B = radial position in X, or the radius of
G7.1 B12
interpolation cylinder)
G90 (absolute programming)
(position with feed expressed in mm/minute calculated on inter-
G1 C90 G94 F2000
polation diameter)
G1 Z-10 G42
G1 X24 (point 1)
G1 Z-50 (point 2)
G2 Z-50 C137.4 R5 (point 3)
G1 Z-10 (point 4)
G2 Z-10 C90 R5 (point 1)
G1 X30
G0 Z5 G40
G91
G7.1 B0 cylindrical interpolation deactivation
G18 Z0 X0 back to Z-X plane
G90 (absolute programming)
M15 P11 (deactivate axis C)
NOTE
Feed programmed with G94 is expressed in millimetres per minute and calcu-
lated on the interpolation radius declared with function G7.1.

Machine programming
10.2.15.3 Frontal machining: X and C axis interpolation

Activation of axis C and X creates a virtual system of frontal Cartesian coordinates.
The concerned axes are:
• C as virtual Cartesian axis with radial values in mm
• X as Cartesian axis with diametrical values in mm
• Z for shifts on lengths
Fig. 10-43 Frontal machining
The profile is programmed by positioning the Cartesian axis system on the face of the
part and making zero reference coincide with the part axis as shown in the drawing.

Machine programming
Fig. 10-44 Profile programming

Machine programming
T0808 G0 Y0 G95 F0,1 S3600 M... (activates driven tool)

G0 X35
Z-10
M14 P11 (activates axis C)
(FANUC 160 only)
G28 H0
(return to reference position)
G91 (FANUC 310 only) (incremental programming)
G28 C0 (FANUC 310 only) ((return to reference position)
G90 (FANUC 310 only) (absolute programming)
G12.1 (activates frontal interpolation)
G1 C0 X20 G42 (P0 and activate tool radius compensation)
C5 (P1)
G3 X10 C10 R5 (P2)
G1 X-10 (P3)
X-20 C5 (P4)
C-5 (P5)
G3 X-10 C-10 R5 (P6)
G1 X10 (P7)
X20 C-5 (P8)
C0 (P0)
X35 G40 (moves away and deactivate compensation)
G13.1 (deactivates cylindrical interpolation)
M15 P11 (deactivates axis C)
NOTE
Axis C may also be activated in MDI operative mode.
In addition to the RESET button, it may be deactivated by programming specific
functions. The machine will generate alarms if deactivation does not take place
in the latter case.

Machine programming
10.2.16 Threading
10.2.16.1 G33 Z F one-run cylindrical threading

G33 activates threading tool start-up when the rotating spindle is in a certain angular
position.
The value associated to the F ADDRESS is the threading pitch.
The value associated to the Z ADDRESS is the arrival point coordinate (PA).
The spindle rotation speed must be constant (G97 S).
The initial threading point (PS) must be at the beginning of the thread at a distance
equal to 1-2 times the pitch.
Choice of the position (PS) is directly proportional to the spindle speed (G97 S), i.e. is
higher (G97 S) proportionally to the distance between (PS) and the beginning of the
threading.
The end (PA) of the threading must be approximately 0.3 times the end of threading
pitch.
A normal thread is normally made in several runs.
The following sequence is required for each run:
• approach G00 to (PS);
• activate G33 Z F;
• release long part X;
• return (PS) to Z coordinate.
It is important for points (PS) and (PA) to have the same Z coordinates for each run.
Fig. 10-45 Cylindrical threading example
....................;
G97 S1500 M03 ;
G0 X11.6 Z2 ;
G33 Z-15 F1 ;
G00 X14 ;
Z2 ;
G0 X11.3 Z2 ;
G33 Z-15 F1 ;
G0 X14 ;
Z2 ;
....................;

Machine programming
Example of G33 use in a subprogram
%
O3000
T0404G0Y0 (invokes tool position)
M3G97S500 (turns main spindle to fixed speed)
X40Z5
X11.6
M98P4000 (invokes threading subprogram)
X11.2
X...
X40
M1
M99
%
%
O4000 (THREADING SUBPROGRAM WITH G33
G95
G33Z-11F1.25
G33Z-13X22
G0Z5
M99

Machine programming
10.2.16.2 G33 X Z F one-run conical threading

The same consideration made for cylindrical threading apply concerning:
• spindle speed setup (G97 S)
• (PS) offset from start of threading
• (PS) offset from end of threading
The F value is equal to the projection of the pitch on axis Z if the semi angle at the
cone vertex (Alfa) is in the range from 0° to 45°.
The F value is equal to the projection of the pitch on axis X if the semi angle at the
cone vertex (Alfa) is in the range from 45° to 90°.
Fig. 10-46 Conical threading example
EXAMPLE
....................;
G97 S700 M03 ;
G0 X9.294 Z2 ;
G33 X20 Z-28.356 F1.477 ;
G0 Z2 ;
X8.9 ;
G33 X19.606Z-28.356 F1.477 ;
G0 Z2 ;
....................;

Machine programming
10.2.16.3 Variable threading pitch

Variable pitch threading is either increased or decreased at each spindle revolution.
Fig. 10-47 Variable threading pitch
• Spindle speed setup (G97 S)

The function syntax is: G34 Z F K
• Z: (PA) final point coordinate.
• K: pitch increase or decrease per revolution.
• F: initial pitch in the longitudinal axis direction.
Value range for K:
• from +0.0001 to +500.000 (mm);
• from +0.0001 to -500.000 (mm).
Alarm 014 is generated if K is programmed with a value off of the ranges above or if
the pitch exceeds the max. value or becomes negative by effect of K.

Machine programming
10.2.16.4 Main spindle tapping with G33 function

Function G33 can be used to thread with fixed tap fitted on tool holder with axis com-
pensation and main spindle rotating.
Fig. 10-48 Main spindle tapping
EXAMPLE
G97 M3 S1000 (main spindle revs limitation)
T1212 (M5 tap pitch 0.8 mm)
G0 X0 Y0 Z3 (approach)
G33 Z-10 F0.75 (input threading function nominal pitch 0.8 mm)
M4 S2000 (reverse spindle)
G33 Z3 F0.75 (output threading function nominal pitch 0.8 mm)
G0 Z20 (moves away)
NOTE
A main spindle speed increase may be programmed during the return stage.

Machine programming
10.2.16.5 Activated threading conditions

The following are not active during threading:
FEED OVERDRIVE
FEED HOLD
SPEED HOLD stop both spindle rotation and threading run at the same time (check).
Threading BLOCKS written in sequence immediately activate angular synchronism
when switching from one threading to another.
The BLOCK before the threading cannot contain either chamfers or union instructions.
The threading BLOCK cannot contain either chamfers or union instructions.
Avoid the use of constant cutting speed (G96 S) because during conical or spiral
threading the spindle speed changes causing pitch errors.

Machine programming
10.2.16.6 G78 threading cycle

G78 automatically activates rapid movement (G0) and threading instructions which
generate a rectangle.
The opposite vertexes of the rectangle are identified by:
(PS): position of the BLOCK tool before the BLOCK containing
G78.
(PA) : point identified by X/U Z/W coordinates.
A side of the rectangle houses a G33 function.
G33 can end the thread by exiting:
at 90° (terminal groove) by programming M44;
at 45° (jerk) by programming M45.
The rectangle may be transformed into a trapezium by adding R(+/-) to the G78
definition.
The value of R is equal to half the different between the initial crest diameter and the
final crest diameter of the threading.
For cylindrical threading R = 0.
G78 makes only one threading run. Several G78 functions are therefore needed for a
complete threading.
Cylindrical threading (rectangular movement
Fig. 10-49 Cylindrical threading
Outer threading Inner threading

...................; ..................;
N0020 G 00 X21 Z2 ; N0030 G 00 X10 Z2 ;
..................................................;
N0030 M44 (M45) ; ...................................................;
N0040 M44 (M45)
N0020 N0050G00GX21 78 X18
Z2;Z --- 15 F1 R 0 ; N0030N0050 G00 X10 G 78Z2;X14 Z --- 10 F1 R 0
;
N0030 . . .M44
. . . . (M45);
............; N0040
. . . . M44
. . . . .(M45);
....... ..;
N0050 G78 X18 Z-15 F1 R0; N0050 G78 X14 Z-10 F1 R0;
...................................................; ...................................................;

Machine programming
Fig. 10-50 Conical threading
.Internal
. . . . . . . .conical
. . . . . . . .threading
..; External conical threading
N0020 G 00 X21 Z2 ; ...................;
N0030 M44 (M45) ; N0030 G 00 X9 Z2 ;
..................................................; N0040 G 78 X15 Z ---15 R 1
N0030 G 78 X15 Z ---15 R ---1 F1.497 ; ...................................................;
F1.497 ;
...................;
N0020 G00 X21 Z2; N0030. . . . . G00
. . . . . X9
. . . .Z2;
.....;
N0030 M44 (M45); N0040 G78 X15 Z-15 R-1 F1,497;

N0030 G78 X15 Z-15 R-1 F1,497; ...................................................;
...................................................;

Machine programming
Threading examples with G78

EXTERNAL CYLINDRICAL THREADING
Threading M18 pitch 1
....................;
N0100 G97 S1000 M03
N0110 T0303 Y0 Z2 M08
N0120 G00 X21
N0130 M44
N0140 G78 X18 Z-15 R0 F1
N0150 X17,62
N0160 X17,3
N0170 X17,04
N0180 X16,82
N0190 X16,66
N0200 X16,66
N0220 M09
N0230 G00 X50
....................;
INTERNAL CYLINDRICAL THREADING

Threading M18 pitch 1
....................;
N0100 G97 S1000 M03
N0110 T0303 Y0
N0120 G00 X14 Z2 M08
N0130 M44
N0140 G78 X16,75 Z-10 R0 F1
N0150 X17,13
N0160 X17,45
N0170 X17,67
N0180 X17,85
N0190 X18,01
N0200 X18,01
N0220 M09
N0230 G00 X50
....................;

Machine programming
Fig. 10-51 External conical threading - GAS DIN 2999 R ¼ threading
Taper 1:16
conicitá 1:16
....................;
N0100 G97 S1000 M03
N0110 T0404 Y0
N0120 G00 X18 Z2 M08
N0130 M44
N0140 G78 X15 Z-20.744 R-1.421 F1.337
N0150 X14,158
N0160 X14,2
N0170 X13,86
N0180 X13,58
N0190 X13,36
N0200 X13,288
N0210 X13,288
N0220 M09
N0230 G00 X50
....................;

Machine programming
10.2.16.7 G76 threading cycle

Description:
• The G76 cycle is used for cylindrical or conical threading.
• Either dive penetration (radial incremental) or
penetration along a tool side may be used.
In this way, the tool works only on one side allowing to reduce cutting load. The
result is better thread finish and less effort on the tool tip
Threading with penetration along the side Threading with radial penetration
Programming sequence
T0303 G0Y0 M3 S1000 P11 Tool invoke and speed
G0 X... Z... Program start point
G76 P(nf)(c)(a) Q(p min) R(d); Threading cycle
G76 X(u) Z(w) R(i) P(k) Q(d) F(f)
G0 X... Z... Separation

Machine programming
Address description according to first line

G76 Threading function
Six digits must be written after letter 'P' described here and associated to
letters nf, c, a.
nf: number of finishing runs (from 01 to 99)

example: 02 two finishing runs without removal of material
c: chamfer entity at threading outlet in relation to pitch

(from 01 to 99)
example: 10 threading chamfer is equal to
P(nf)(c)(a)
one pitch
example: 12 chamfer equal to 1.2 times the pitch
n.b.: usually set to 10
a: tool angle,
for side penetration increases
example: 60 for metric thread cutting
example: 55 for Whitworth thread cutting
for radial penetration
example: 0 cut along both sides
Value associated to letter Q:
p min: minimum cutting depth expressed in microns
when the cutting depth of one run is lower than
Q(p min)
this limit, it is fixed to this value
example: 100 minimum run depth equal to 0.1 mm
Value associated to letter R:

d: diameter of finishing machining allowance expressed in millimetres
R(d);
example: 0,05this value is removed in the number of runs
programmed under 'nf'
Address description according to second line

G76 Threading function
Value associated to letter X:
X(u)
u: internal diameter expressed in millimetres
Value associated to letter Z:
Z(w) w: absolute arrival point of threading referred to part zero
and expressed in millimetres
Value associated to letter R:
i: expressed in millimetres indicates the radius variation between the
starting and arrival point of the tool. This
corresponds to the starting diameter minus the arrival diameter,
R(i);
divided by two.
n.b.: The sign is negative for outer threading is negative and
positive
for inner threading.

Machine programming
Address description according to second line

Value associated to letter P:
P(k); k: height of threading. This value is specified as radial
and expressed in microns (sign always positive).
Value associated to letter Q:
Q(d); d: cutting depth of the first run expressed in microns (sign
always positive)
Value associated to letter F:
F(f); f: expressed in millimetres indicates the pitch value (sign always
positive).
Threading example with G76

Tabella 4: Threading example with G76
Example: M20x1 outer cylindrical threading

T0303 G0 Y0 Tool invoke
G97 M3S1600 P11 rpm
G0 X21 Z4 Approach
G76 P021060 Q100 R0,05 Threading cycle
G76 X18.7 Z-32 R0 P615 Q150 F1
G0 X40 Separation

Machine programming
10.2.16.8 Multiple lead threading

Proceed as follows for multiple lead threading with G33:
Specify offset angle of the lead using the Q address.
The value following Q is expressed in thousandths of a degree.
The Q code is not a modal value and must be specified in each block.
Example:
G33 Z-20 F1 Q120000 (this threading starts 120 degrees after the zero
reference)
There is another way of creating a multiple lead threading for independent use with
G33, G78 or G76 functions.
First, we need to introduce the concept of real pitch and apparent pitch.
A real pitch of a lead is the distance between a crest and the one immediate following
it belonging to the same threading.
The apparent pitch of a multiple lead threading is the distance between two crests in
sequence.
Program a lead without additional codes and make it start from a position established
on axis Z.
Then program the other leads simply by anticipating the starting position of axis Z by
an amount equal to the apparent pitch.
The apparent pitch value is: lead real pitch divided by the number of leads to be made.
Example of threading with pitch equal to 3 mm and three equally spaced leads:
apparent pitch is = 3 / 3 = 1mm
Firstly create a lead to make this threading.
Then shift on Z by one millimetre forward and make the second lead.
Then shift on Z by one millimetre before the second lead and make the third lead 134.Z
un millimetro prima del secondo principio e realizzare il terzo principio 134.

Machine programming
10.3 Specific programming

10.3.1 Assigning names to a program
Assigning a filename to a program

A name can be assigned to a program instead of a number.
In this case, enter the filename between "<" and ">" at the beginning of the program.
EXAMPLE
%;
<PARTS_1>;
N1 ...
N2
N3
..........................
..........................
M30;
%
Assigning a file name to a subprogram

A name can be assigned to a subprogram instead of a number.
In this case, enter the filename between "<" and ">" at the beginning of the program,
the end of the subprogram is M99 as shown in the following example..
EXAMPLE
%;
<PARTS_2>;
N1 ...
N2
N3
..........................
..........................
M99;
%
10.3.1.1 Calling a subprogram with filename

When the invoking structure invokes a subprogram with filename, after the invoking
function M98 enter the filename between "<" and ">" and in the address “Lxx” enter
the repeats, where applicable, as shown in the following example.
EXAMPLE
..........................

Machine programming
M98 <PARTS_2> L02

..........................
10.3.2 Spindle management
Direction of rotation
Define the spindle to be activated after programming the direction of rotation with the
M3, M4, M5 functions explained in the basic programming section.
Spindle selection
Program 'Pxx' followed by two digits to define after spindle:
• the first indicates the path number (path 1, 2 or 3)
• the second is the index defining the spindle on that path.
More than one spindle can be controlled on each path. Each spindle is identified by a
sequential number, called index (1, 2)
Tabella degli indici
path 1 path 2 path 3

Main spindle 1
Motorized tools 2 2 2
Counterspindle 1
Spindle identification code summary table

Main spindle P11
Motorized tools P12 P22 P32
Counterspindle P21

Machine programming
Examples of fixed speed spindle rotation programming on each path

Main spindle PATH1 G97 S500 M3 P11 G97 S500 M3 P11 G97 S500 M3 P11
Motorized tools PATH1 G97 S500 M3 P12 G97 S500 M3 P12 G97 S500 M3 P12
Frontal spindle PATH2 G97 S500 M3 P21 G97 S500 M3 P21 G97 S500 M3 P21
10.3.2.1 Angular orientation

The M19 function followed by letter B and the orientation angular value with respect
to the zero reference is used to orient the spindles.
Pxx spindle identification address must be associated also to this function.
Examples of spindle orientation programming

Main spindle PATH1 M19 B120 P11 M19 B120 P11 M19 B120 P11
Motorized tools PATH1 Non programmabile Non programmabile Non programmabile
Frontal spindle PATH2 M19 B120 P21 M19 B120 P21 M19 B120 P21
NOTE
M19 orients the spindle and keeps it locked using the motor brake.

Machine programming
10.3.2.2 Specific notes on the use of axis C on different channels

Activation and deactivation of axis C can be programmed in path 1 and 2 as in the fol-
lowing table.
Functions table
Asse 'C’ axis path 1 path 2 path 3

Activation M14P11 M14 P21 Not programmable
Deactivation M15P11 M15 P21 Not programmable
There is the possibility to work with the motorized tools on the main spindle activating
the ‘C? axis in path 1 and connecting it to path 3 using the G51.5 P104 Q304 function.
Asse 'C’ axis path 1 path 2 path 3

M101 P5
M14 P11
Activation G51.5 P104 Q304
M101 P5
....
.......
G50.5 P104 Q304
Deactivation M199 P5 M15 P11
M199 P5
....
G308 P.....
Reference spindle declaration for feeds expressed in mm/rev.
When feed is expressed in millimetres per revolution (G95), the spindle from which to
take the rpm needed to calculate the axis speed must be declared.
G308 followed by the index identifying the spindle is used for this purpose.
The axes of the different channels are referenced by default to the following spindles
when the machine is switched on.
Main spindle Counterspindle Motorized tools

Path 1 X
Path 2 X
Path 3 X
To link the axis feed controlled by a path to the rpm of spindle other than the default
one, program G308 function associated to the spindle identification index within the
same path as shown in the following table:
Main spindle Counterspindle

Path 1 G308 P11
Path 2 G308 P11 G308 P21
Path 3 G308 P11 G308 P21

Machine programming
Motorized tools 1 Motorized tools 2 Motorized tools 3

Path 1 G308 P12
Path 2 G308 P22
Path 3 G308 P32
Example
The axes belonging to path 1 are referred by default to the main spindle rpm.
Program path 1: G308 P12 for radial drilling with motorized tools and programming
feed in mm/rev.

Machine programming
10.3.3 Rigid tapping (G84 axial, G88 radial) 8

Rigid tapping allows to fit tap on non-compensated tool holders.
• Be sure that the feed expressed in G95 is tied to the correct spindle or programm
thre G308 function.
• M29P...., followed by the the spindle address, is used to program the spindle rpm
(the spindle must be programmed in G97).
• Program tapping destination point and pitch associated to G84-G88. The spindle
will start, make the threading, automatically reverse the direction of rotation and
return the tool to the starting point. The spindle will then stop.
• Program G80 to stop rigid tapping
Functions table

G97 M3 S400 P11
Axial tapping on Z in path 1
M29 S400 P11
Fixed tool fitted on axial support
G84 Z-16 F1
slide 1
G80
Tapping on Z in path1 M29 S400 P12
(motorized tools) G84 Z-16 F1
Rotating tool on slide 1 G80
Tapping on X in path1 M29 S400 P12
(motorized tools) G88 X10 F1
Radial tool on rotating toolholder G80
of slide 1
G97 M3 S400 P21
Tapping on Z in path 2 M29 S400 P21
Radial tool on slide 2 G84 Z-16 F1
G80
Tapping on Z in path 2 M29 S400 P22
of slide 2
Tapping on X in path 2 M29 S400 P22
of slide 2
G97 M3 S400 P11
Tapping on Z in path 3 on MS M29 S400 P11
Fixed tool on turret slide 3 G84 Z-16 F1
G80
Tapping on Z in path3 on MS M29 S400 P32
Rotating tool on turret slide 3 G80
Tapping on X in path 3 on MS M29 S400 P32
slide 3

Machine programming

G97 M3 S400 P21
Tapping on Z in path 3 on FS M29 S400 P21
Tool on turret slide 3 G84 Z-16 F1
G80
Tapping on Z in path 3 on FS M29 S400 P32
Rotating tool on turret slide 3 G80
Tapping on X in path 3 on FS M29 S400 P32
slide 3

Machine programming
10.3.4 Characteristic machine points
10.3.4.1 Machine zero point

• The machine is calibrated at the manufacturer’s plant to position the Cartesian axis
system on a characteristic machine point (MACHINE ZERO).
In lack of other instructions, this is the only point recognised by the CNC.
• The MACHINE ZERO can be shifted from its initial position to a position in which
is more accessible for inspections.
• The permanent shift of MACHINE ZERO is called ZERO EXT.
The value of the ZERO EXT is loaded in a suitable memory location and is added
automatically to the MACHINE ZERO at each CNC power on.
NOTE
The values contained in N0 (EXT) of the origins table are not to be modified
because they are machine dimensions inserted by the manufacturer.

Machine programming
Origins table for Work zero offset slide 1 (without rotating bush)
N0 EXT N1 G54 N2 G55 N3 G56

X1 0 X1 0 X1 0 X1 0
Z1 0 Z1 12,5 Z1 0 Z1 0
Y1 0 Y1 0 Y1 0 Y1 0
Origins table for Work zero offset slide 1 (with rotating bush)
N0 EXT N1 G54 N2 G55 N3 G56

X1 0 X1 0 X1 0 X1 0
Z1 0 Z1 138 Z1 0 Z1 0
Y1 0 Y1 0 Y1 0 Y1 0
Fig. 10-52 Plane X1-Z1

Machine programming
10.3.4.2 Origins table (slide 2)

Origins table for Work zero offset slide 2 (item 2666857 in basic machine)
N0 EXT N1 G54 N2 G55 N3 G56

X2 0 X2 0 X2 -280 X2 0
Z2 0 Z2 0 Z2 199 Z2 0
Y2 0 Y2 0 Y2 0 Y2 0

Machine programming
Origins table for Work zero offset slide 2 (option item)
N0 EXT N1 G54 N2 G55 N3 G56

X2 0 X2 0 X2 -281 X2 0
Z2 0 Z2 0 Z2 200 Z2 0
Y2 0 Y2 0 Y2 0 Y2 0

Machine programming
10.3.4.3 Origins table (slide 3)
Origins table for Work zero offset slide 3
N0 EXT N1 G54 N2 G55 N3 G56

X3 0 X3 0 X3 0 X3 0
Z3 0 Z3 0 Z3 0 Z3 0
Y3 0 Y3 0 Y3 0 Y3 0
Fig. 10-55 Plane X3-Y3

Machine programming
10.3.5 Tool description - slide 1
10.3.5.1 Tool geometric description
Fig. 10-56 Tools geometry, plane X1-Y1

Machine programming
10.3.5.2 COMPENSATION/GEOMETRY [Y] tables

• The COMPENSATION/GEOMETRY contain dimensional information (Y) on the
tools fitted on slide 1.
• The values associated to the ADDRESSES (Y) are in the range from -99999.999
to +99999.999 mm.
• Each tool data is identified by a G ADDRESS followed by a numeric code (integers)
from 01 to 32.
• TheCOMPENSAT/GEOMETRY [Y] tables are 4.
The first contains the ADDRESSES from G01 to G08.
The following pages contain the addresses from G09 to G32.
Geometry table
Tools geometries axis Y slide 1

Geometry1 0
Geometry 2 -38
Geometry 3 -76
Geometry 4 -114
Geometry 5 -152
Geometry 6 -190
Geometry 7 -235.5
Geometry 8 -273
Geometry 9 -310.5
Geometry 10 -348

Machine programming
10.3.5.3 Tool tip orientation code

• The direction of tool tip, viewed from the centre of the tool radius depends on the
direction in which the tool moves during machining.
• Direction “T” may be chosen from 8 possible alternatively shown in the figure (top
view)
Fig. 10-57 Tool holder orientation code
• To choose one of the various alternatively, shift the X Z system making the origin
coincide with the tool radius centre and then check in which quadrant point “T” falls
(see top view figure above).

Machine programming
10.3.5.4 Example of tools call in different positions
Fig. 10-58 Example of tool call
38
Compensaz/Geometry SLIT1 :01111 N0055 Compensaz/Geometry SLIT1 :01111 N0056
X Z R T Y
1 50 0 0.8 3 1 0
... ... ... ... ... ... ...
2 56 -8 0.4 3 2 -38
... ... ... ... ... ... ...

Machine programming
10.3.5.5 Example of tools call with double corrector

The assignation of more dimensins to the same tool is obtained leaving unchanged
the first digit couple and changing the second the second couple (from10 to 32) of “T”.
Fig. 10-59 Example of tools call with double corrector
38
16
Compensaz/Geometry SLIT1 :01111 N0055 Compensaz/Geometry SLIT1 :01111 N0056
X Z R T Y
1 50 -14 1 0
2 2
........ ........ ........ ........
21 50 -12 ........ ........ 21 0

Machine programming
10.3.6 Tools slide 3 description
Fig. 10-60 Tools geometry, plane X3-Z3

Machine programming
Fig. 10-61 Tools geometry, plane X3-Y3

Machine programming
10.3.6.1 Turning tools geometry on slide 3 of main spindle

Tool geometry management on slide 3 with turning tools on main spindle:
• The tool numbering is as follows:
T01xx - T08xx
where the first two figures correspond to the physical position of the tool for the
reolver rotation, the second two figures (xx) are the number of the geometry and
tool wear.;
• The 2-position toolholder for external machining has its reference with respect to
Ts3 point;
• The geometric values for Y axis are fixed, the X and Z axes values are to be imput
according to the mounted tool.
Fig. 10-62 Tool geometry - slide 3
Geo B
Geo A
Y
X
X
Tools geometry on main spindle - slide 3

Geometry number X Y Z
Geometry “A” To be measured -19.5 To be measured
Geometry “B” To be measured +19.5 To be measured

Machine programming
10.3.6.2 Tools geometry for frontal machining on slide 3 of main spindle

Tool geometry management on slide 3 with tools for frontal machining on main spin-
dle:
• The tool numbering is as follows:
T01xx - T08xx
where the first two figures correspond to the physical position of the tool for the
reolver rotation, the second two figures (xx) are the number of the geometry and
tool wear.;
• The 2-position toolholder for external machining has its reference with respect to
Ts3 point;
• The geometric values for Y axis are fixed, the X and Z axes values are to be imput
according to the mounted tool.
Fig. 10-63 Tools geometry for frontal machining
Ts3
X
Geo D Geo C
Frontal tools geometry slide 3

Geometry number X Y Z
Geometry “C” 107 -29 To be measured
Geometry “D” 107 +29 To be measured
NOTE
All the values in the table are indicative.

Machine programming

• The direction of the tool tip viewed from the centre of the tool radius is determined
by the direction which the tool moves during machining.
• Direction “T” may be chosen from 8 possible alternatively shown in the figure.
Fig. 10-64 Tool tip orientation code

Machine programming
10.3.6.4 Machining on counterspindle - slide 3: function G307

It is necessary to follow a use logic for programming when working on the counterspin-
dle with the slide 3:
• Fix in the origin G56 (slide 2) an absolute value of the working field where to place
the counterspindle that will will remain stopped (example X2=60 Z2=270);
• Input the same origin G56 on slide 3 only as X value, while the Z value must be
zero (example X3=60 Z3=0 );
• In the function G307 Zc the projection of the part from the counterspindle is in put.
In the function G307 the revolver zero poit is shifted of 84mm toward the
counterspindle;
• The specularity function is used to use the machining values with the negative “Z”:
G51.1 Z0 specularity activation
G50.1 Z0 specularity deactivation
• The origin G56 must be cleaned from the orgin G54 on slide 2 and slide 3.
Fig. 10-65 Machining on counterspindle - slide 3
Slide 3
Counterspindle
at a fixed value G56
(input X and Z value)
Slide 2
Program function 56
(input the X value equal
to slide 3 and Z=0) G307 Z (workpiece protrusion from CM)

Machine programming
Programming example
Programming example to make two radial drillings out of axis on the counterspindle
using the motorized tools of slide 3.

% % %
O G56
c G0X0Z0
c M131P32 M131P32
c G56
c G0X60Z270
c
M130P32 M130P32
G307Z30
T1515(PUNTA)
G0Y5
M19B0P21
G51.1Z0
G0Z-27.5
G0X22
G97M4S2000P32
G308P32
G1G94X17F150
G0X22
G0Y-5
G1X17
G0X28
G0Z140
G0X278
M5P32
M160P23 M160P23
G50.1Z0
G54
T0
G0Z40
G0Y0
M161P23 M161P23
G54
T0
G52Z0
G0Z350
G0X-10
M162P23 M162P23

Machine programming
10.3.7 Slide 2 tools description
Fig. 10-66 Working zone, plane X2-Z2

Machine programming
10.3.7.1 Geometry table
Management of origin G55

This function defines the reference point for management of the tools on slide 2.
This point is identified by the intersection between the axis of the first hole and the
plane of support tip.
Origin for machining on the counterspindle

Value of piece projection from the counter spindle collet with function G52 Z....
Work coordinates
Machining is performed with Z- , and the approaches and retractions with Z +
Tools geometriy slide 2
Tools geometries on slide 2 (fixed tools support)

Geometry number X Z
(to input with respect to (to input with respect to
Fixed tools
G55) G55)
T2 Xc Z...
T3 Xc Z...
T4 Xc Z...
T5 X... Z...
Counterspindle
T1 X=0 Z=+32
NOTE
- All the coordinates of the tool geometries are approximate.
- The geometries x are diametral.

Machine programming

• The direction of the tool tip viewed from the centre of the tool radius is determined
by the direction which the tool moves during machining.
• Direction “T” may be chosen from 8 possible alternatively shown in the figure.
Fig. 10-67 Tool tip orientation code

Machine programming
10.3.7.3 Management of circular interpolation and tool radius compensation
(A) angle reading management

As shown in the diagram below, the frontal spindle angle is read anticlockwise and is
positive.
Fig. 10-68 Angle reading

Machine programming
Circular interpolation and tool radius compensation management
Circular interpolation and TRC have to be programmed (as the whole

machining) using the tool in the X+/Z+ plan.
Fig. 10-69 Circular interpolation
mounted in machine
real tool
unreal tool
for programig
Programmng example on slide 2:
G55
G52 Z30 (frontal spindle origin offset)
T0202
M3 S2000 P21
G0 X14 Z1 G42
G1 Z0 G95 F0.1 Point 1
G1 X16 A135 Point 2
G1 Z -5 Point 3
G3 X16 Z-12 R6 Point 4
G1 Z-15
G0 X30 G40

Machine programming
10.3.7.4 External machining on frontal spindle
Fig. 10-70 External machining on frontal spindle
G55
G52 Z 35 ((frontal spindle origin offset)
T0202 (Tool call toward frontal spindle) tool tip code T3C
M3 S3500 P21 (Frontal spindle rotation)
G0 X18 Z1 G42 (Approaching and CRU activation) )
G1 Z0.25 F0.1
G 1 X20 A135
G1 Z-10
G1 X25 A135
G1 Z-30
G0 X40 Z20 G 40 (Leaving and CRU deactivation)

Machine programming
10.3.7.5 Internal machining on frontal spindle
Fig. 10-71 Internal machining on frontal spindle
G55
G52 Z35 (frontal spindle origin offset)
T1414 (tool call to frontal spindle) tool tip code T 2
M3 S3500 P21 (Frontal spindle rotation)
G0 X22 Z2 (approaching)
G1 Z0.25 G41 F0.1 (CRU activation)
G1 X20 Z-1
G1 Z-6
G1 X17 A225
G1 Z-15
G0 X15 Z20 G40 (Leaving and CRU deactivation)

Machine programming
10.3.8 Three channels pause functions

The movements of the three slides are coordinated by programming M functions from
M100 and M199 followed by a P address which specifies which channels are
concerned by the pause on the channels to be synchronised.
The first program reading these functions waits for the same function to be read also
by the path with which it synchronises. At this point, the programs will resume and be
run until the next synchronisation block is reached.
Address Path 1 Path 2 Path 3

P 1 2 3
Tabella 5: Addresses summary table
Slide 1 Slide 2 Slide 3

% % %
O0003 O0003 O0003
c c c
G52 Z0 G52 Z0 G52 Z0
T0 T0 T0
M3 G96 S150 P11 G0 Z330 c
c c G0 Z3
G0 Z2 c
M110 P13 M110 P13
c c
G1 Z-14.9 G1 Z-15
c c
M120 P13 M120 P13
c c
G0 Z-42 G0 Z120
M130 P23 M130 P23
c
G0 Z5
G1 Z-30
c
M140 P23 M140 P23
c c
G52 Z42
G0 Z5
M150 P12 M150 P12
G1 Z-20
c
M160 P12 M160 P12 %

c c
c c
M190 P123 M190 P123 M190 P123
M1 M1 M1
M30 M30 M30
% % %

Machine programming
10.3.9 Torque redaction G300 and position control G301
G300 description
• The function G300 has the job of reducing and restoring the counter spindle
clamping force (slide 2) in the workpiece transfer phase.
• The function G300 programmed without any further specification restores the axis
torque to 100%.
G301 description
• The function G301 activates the position control for the axis with torque reduction.
• This function is used to check that the axis in reduction has reached the
programmed position, with a tolerance of 20 microns.
Summary of used functions

G300 Z... Reduction in percentage 0 >>100% of Z axis torque
G301 Z axis in position control
G300 Z axis torque restore to 100%
Fig. 10-72 Torque reduction

Machine programming
Example of use
M237 (frontal spindle collet opening)

G306 (automatic program zero for piece clamping)
T0101 (counter spindle)
G0X0
M104 P12 (synchronisation with slide 1)
G0 Z1 M50 (spindles approach and synchro)
G300 Z10 (torque reduction axis Z *10%)
G1 G94 F800 Z-41.5 (piece clamping position)
G301 (axis in position control)
M236 (spindle collet closing)
M105 P12 (synchronisation with slide 1 parting wait)
G 1W1 (parting control)
G 301 (axis in position control)
G 300 (torque axis Z * 100%)
G0 Z150 M51 (spindle synchro retraction and stop)

Machine programming
10.3.10 Workpiece clamping with counterspindle

Workpiece clamping with the counter spindle requires two essential elements:
• Recall of the counter spindle geometry with T0101.
• Recall of the program zero shift with function G306 which considers the actual
projection of the workpiece from the bush.
Fig. 10-73 Workpiece clamping with counterspindle
Example of use
G54
T0101 (counter spindle)
G306 (automatic program zero shift)
G0 X0 (rapid positioning)
Z10
M50 (spindles synchronisation)
G0 Z-60 (clamping position)
M237 (counter spindle collet closing)
M160 P12 (parting wait synchronisation)
M51 (spindles synchronism disable)

Machine programming
10.3.11 Program example for part unloading device
O0001 (Main program)

......
...... ; initial phase
......
N10 ; (part program start label)
......
...... ; processing
......
N20 ; (part pick-up start label)
M208 ; stop cooling
M865 ; (unloader in part pick-up position instruction)
G4 Xc ; ; (unloader in position standby)
M861 ; (arm rotation in part pick-up position instruction)
M863 ; (arm lowering to part pick-up position instruction)
G0 Zc ; ; (frontal spindle approach)
M236 ; (gripper opening)
M510 ; (part ejection)
N30 ; (part evacuation start label)
G0 Zc ; ; (frontal spindle disengagement)
M864 ; (arm return to disengagement position instruction)
M862 ; (arm rotation to part evacuation position instruction)
M866 ; (unloader in part evacuation position instruction)
M863 ; (arm lowering to part evacuation position instruction)
M867 ; (part unloader box opening)
G4 Xc ; ; (part evacuation standby)
M868 ; (part unloader box closure)
M864 ; (arm return to disengagement position instruction)
......
...... ; final phase
......
M99P10; ; skip beginning part program
M30 ; end of main program

Machine programming
10.3.12 Revolver slow rotation

To allow the revolver rotation even when this is equipped with heavy devices or un-
balanced weights, the "slow rotation" function is provided.
This consists in the programming, in the same block and after the tool call, of an ad-
dress (for instance E...) that displays the rotation speed in % of the revolver with res-
pect to the normal speed.
Example:
T0101 E30
in this example the T0101 tool is called and the revolver rotation speed is equal to 30%
of the nominal value.
The address E allows values between 15% and 100% and it is self-deleting, so it is
active only in the block in which it has been called.
10.3.13 Revolver locking and unlocking

It is possible to program the revolver lock and unlock using the following M functions:
M370: revolver 3 mechanical unlock;
M371: revolver 3 mechanical lock.
These functions are programmable in every block, even with a rapid movement.
These functions are not programmable as working movements, in this case an alarm
message is generated.

Machine programming
10.3.14 Axes Z2 - Z1 - Z3 tracking function

This function allows the machining with slide 2 and 3, with independent feed F, while
slide 1 with has its own feed , so the moving partexecutes its machining.
G51.6 P] Q] : tracking activation
P : code for master slide
Q : code for slaver slide
G50.6 Q] : tracking deactivation
Q : code for slaver slide
Slide 1 Slide 2 Slide 3

Codice asse Z 102 202 302
Summary of used functions

G51.6 P102 Q202 Tracking function enable Z1 > Z2
G50.6 Q202 Tracking function disable Z1 > Z2


Notes for a correct use of activation functions

• Programm the activation deactivation function between two synchronization
functions on slides 2 and 3.
• On slides 2 and 3 the shift origin declaration G 306 (effective offset of the bar from
the bush).

Machine programming
Use example: 4 axes machining between slide 1 and slide 3
Fig. 10-74 Use example
G306 automatic origin

Slide 3
Slide
Slide 1 1
Slide 1 Slide3
T0303G0Y0Z1(EXTERNAL ROUGHING)
G97M3S3500P11
G0X14
G306 (AUTOMATIC ORIGIN)
M101P5 (SLIDE SYNCHRONIZATION 1-3) M101P5 (SLIDE SYNCHRONIZATION 1-3)
G51.6P102Q302 (TRACKING ACTIVATION
Z1>Z3)
M102P5 (SLIDE SYNCHRONIZATION 1-3) M102P5 (SINCRONIZZAZIONE SLITTA1-3)
G1Z-11.96G95F0.21 T1111Y0X0Z1 (CENTRINO)

G0X60Z0 G0Y0
G1Z-2.5G95F0.08
T0202G0Y0Z0M3G97S3500P11 G4
(EXTERNAL FINISHING) G0Z20
G0X15
G1X4G95F0.15
G0X9.4W0.1
T1515G0X0Y0 (HOLE D5)
G1X11A135G95F0.1 G0Z1
G1Z-12F0.16 G1Z-12G95F0.11
G1X14.5A135F0.13 G0Z30
G1X20.1Z-15F0.23 G0X80
G0X60
G50.6Q302

Machine programming
10.3.15 Automatic origin management for machining on main spindle (G306)

The function G306 allows the automatic calculation of the origin in the machining ope-
rations on the main spindle.
This function must be used on slides 2 and 3 replacing the origin G53Z ... that deter-
mines the bar offset from the tools plane.
This function must be programmed according to the following conditions:
• Before the tracking function, on slide 3 when contemporary operations must be
done with 4 axes and with tracking.
• Before the tracking function when a part clamping operation with the
counterspindle of slide 2.
• When slide 3 must work alone on main spindle.
Fig. 10-75 Automatic origin management

Machine programming
Use example: machining with 4 axes, slide 1 and slide 3
Slide 1 Slide 3
T0202 G0 Y0 (external turning)
M3 S2000 P11
G0 X14 Z1 G95 F0.1
G1 Z0
G3 X20 Z-3 R3
G1 Z-20
G1 X26 A150
G0 Z-30 T1111 (Drilling on main spindle
G306 (the origin should be G52 Z30)
M140 P13 M140 P13

G51.6 P102 Q302
(waiting for tracking)
(tracking activation)
M150 P13 M150 P13
Machining goes on
External turning G0 X0 Z2
G1 Z-50 F0.08
Canalini G0 Z30
G0 X35
M160 P13 M160 P13
G50.6 Q302
(waiting for tracking deactivation)
(tracking deactivation)
M170 P13 M170 P13
Machining goes on Machining goes on

Machine programming
10.3.16 Bar change and loader thrust management
Description
The loader informs the machine of the presence of material by means of a signal which
the machine receives and stores in the variable #1000.
Value of variable
0: presence of material
1: end of bar
IEMCA version with DMG standard interface

In the main program the function M69 is programmed after opening of the collet M36
to push the loader during feed-in of the piece length.
M65 is programmed in the bar changeover subprogram before opening of the collet
to enable the bar changeover phase if the material runs out.
Subsequent presence of the function M69 after opening of the collet causes the ma-
chine to go to data lock-out, allowing the loader to replace the bar. At the end of the
cycle, program reading is resumed.

Machine programming
Example:
Main program
Subprogram
%O1234 %
... O0099
T0101 G0 Y0 (parting tool) M9
... G94 G1 W50
safety parting F2000
... M33
N1 G0 X50 W0.5
(if material is present it goes G97 S100 M3
IF[#1000EQ0]GOTO3
to block n°3) G94 F10000
(bar changeover
M65
M98 P99 (facing subprogram recall) enable)
M36
N3 (bar changeover
M69
phase start)
M33
M37
/ M36
G1 W-50
M69 (loader thrust)
M8
G4 U0,2
G0 Y0 W-0.5
G0 Z0
G96 S90 M3
M37
G0 X44
...
G1 X3 G95 F0.08
working
G1 X-1 F0.02
...
M99
M99P1
%

Machine programming
10.3.17 Bush-spindle synchronising and G320
Synchronising between spindle and bush

The bush-spindle synchronising function does not provide absolute phase
synchronising; the current phasing when the function is activated is considered valid.
This synchronising function is activated simultaneously with a spindle command
(M3,M4,M19, M14) and is deactivated when power is removed from the spindle (M5).
Spindle and bush phase displacement supervision

To monitor phase displacement between bush and spindle, a further function is used
that requires the reading of the 2 motor encoders.
After CNC power-on, to have an effective encoder reading of spindle and bush motors,
a procedure is requested that searches for the zero notch of the 2 encoders.
The procedure is started by pressing a specific button
on the operator panel and rotates the 2 motors for 2/3 turns ;
for execution, the following conditions are necessary:
• CNC Channel 1 selected;
• CNC JOG mode;
• main spindle collet closed;
• no alarms.
The message 2009 BUSH REFERENCE EXECUTION REQUEST indicates that the
procedure has to be run to have effective encoder reading.
The reference point for the supervision system, where the bush is perfectly in phase
with the spindle, is defined during bars machining preliminary operations on the
“BUSH PHASING” line on GITAL page “SPINDLES ANGULAR PHASING”
During production, since the bars are not perfectly linear, the phase realignment is
necessary for both synchronising and supervision functions.
Synchronising realignment can only be carried out by deactivating then reactivating it;
usually at each cycle, after workpiece reloading, function M5 is called before resuming
machining.
Supervision realignment is carried out by means of function G320, to be called when
the spindle is not powered (usually after M5 that follows workpiece reloading)
G320
Function G320 is for bush phasing, that takes place during bar machining preliminary
operations from GITAL page “SPINDLES ANGULAR PHASING”.
G320 function can be programmed in MDI mode or in AUTOMATIC mode and requires
the following conditions:

Machine programming
• after CNC power-on and execution of the search for encoder zeroes using the
specific button (message 2009 BUSH REFERENCE EXECUTION REQUEST);
• from GITAL page the SECTION BARS MACHINING is activated (ON);
• there is no message 2017 BAR-BUSH COLLISION HAZARD;
• the difference as to the old supervision reference point is less than 1.75 degrees.
If any of these conditions are missing, the function is executed without effect.
Bar change
Special exception for programming of function G320 is in the bar change phase.
Programming of function G320 after a new bar has been inserted in the bush, leaving
the spindle powered, helps to avoid (at next programming of function M5) that the
supervision function reads an excessive phase displacement causing the generation
of message 2017 BAR-BUSH COLLISION HAZARD. The bar change operation is
especially critical since the new bar could be twisted in the opposite direction to the
previous bar.
In brief:
• The bush-spindle phase displacement supervision function is not related to the
synchronising function.
• The bush and spindle phase synchronising (by the synchronising function) is nor
associated with the phase displacement read by the function supervising bush and
spindle motor encoder positions.
• After CNC power-on, a search for zero for the bush and spindle motor encoders is
necessary, to have an effective reading of the encoders by the bush phase
displacement supervision function.
• When tooling, the encoders phase displacement supervision control centre has to
be defined.
• During machining the synchronism function phase has to be re-defined. This is
obtained by switching off power to the spindle (M5) then switching it on again (e.g.
M3).
• During machining, the supervision control centre has to be corrected using function
G320.
• At the end of bar change, after a new bar has been inserted in the bush, it is
advisable to start supervision control centre correction using function G320.
Programming example - Main program

c
M5 P11 synchronism deactivation
G91 (incremental mode for axes control)
M36 (collet opening)
Z1.... (workpiece loading)
G90 (absolute mode for axes control)
M37 collet closure

Machine programming
G4 P300 pause for 300 ms

/G320 phase control centre correction is not executed with slashed block active
because there is no material reload, and in any case it would be run with no physical
spindle-bush link
G4 P300 pause for 300 ms
c
M3S... P11 synchronism reactivation
Programming example – bar change sub-program

M3 S50 P11 (power to spindle)
c
M69 (waiting for new bar insertion)
M37 (collet closure)
G91 (incremental mode for axes control)
#3003=1 (single block disable)
Z... new bar insertion in bush
G90 (absolute mode for axes control)
G4P300 pause of 300 ms
G320 phase control centre correction
G4P300 pause of 300 ms
M5 P11 (spindle power disable)
#3003=0 (single block enable)
supervision function in MDI or AUTOMATIC mode

The supervision function checks that the bush-spindle alignment error is within +/- 1.3
degrees; when this condition is not observed, the behaviour changes according to the
CNC mode as described below.
In CNC AUTOMATIC mode:
• if spindle is powered the anomaly is ignored.
• if the spindle is not powered (M5) the machine software tries to align the bush to
the spindle and axes Z1 moves are blocked. If the alignment is successful, work
continues, otherwise ( bar preventing realignment) that machine stops and
message 2017 BAR-BUSH COLLISION HAZARD message is generated.
In CNC mode different to AUTOMATIC mode:
• the machine is stopped immediately and the message 2017 BAR COLLISION
HAZARD is generated.
message 2017
Message 2017 BAR COLLISION HAZARD causes an immediate machine stop and
blocks movements of axis Z1.
This message is generated by the spindle-bush phase displacement supervision
function when there are all the following conditions:

Machine programming
• The supervision function is activated by the line “SECTION BARS MACHINING"

on GITAL page “SPINDLES ANGULAR PHASING”
• alignment error found by supervision function is more than 1.3 degrees.
To reset the message, first realign the bush to the spindle, for example by pressing the
specific operator panel button in Channel 1 selected, CNC JOG mode and no alarms.
If the bar does not allow realignment using the JOG button (bush moves but bar and
spindle move with it) the spindle-bush phase displacement supervision control centre
has to be redefined on the “BUSH PHASING” line of GITAL page “SPINDLES
ANGULAR PHASING".
message 2009
The message 2009 “BUSH REFERENCE EXECUTION REQUEST” is displayed at
CNC power-on when the bush-spindle phase displacement supervision function is
activated (through line "SECTION BARS MACHINING" on GITAL page "SPINDLES
ANGULAR PHASING”).
The presence of this message prevents running of part-program blocks in either
AUTOMATIC or MDI mode.
To reset the message, first run the spindle and bush motor encoders zero point search
following these steps:
• reset all alarms;
• close main spindle collet;
• select CNC Channel 1 (Path 1);
• select CNC JOG mode;
• press the relevant operator panel button.
The encoder zero point search causes the following events:
• main spindle rotation by 3 turns;
• pause of 2 seconds;
• bush rotation by 3 turns;
When the main spindle collet is closed, message 2009 blocks axis Z1 movement in
negative direction.

Machine programming
10.3.18 Machining with driven tools on slide 1
Fig. 10-76 Working area X1-Y1 Driven tools

Machine programming
Fig. 10-77 Working area X1-Y1

Machine programming
Foreword
• The fitting positions are identified by the numbering T7-T8-T9-T10.
• The value of the geometry in Y and Z is the fixed distance of the 4 positions with
respect to the reference point T of the rack. The value of the geometry in X should
be measured on the machine.
• Programming of the driven tools automatically takes account of the number of
revolutions (transmission ratio) and rotation direction of the spindles. This occurs
upon recall of the tool position with the code Txxxx.
• The feed programmed is in mm/rev.

For programming, the rules given in the following table must be observed for each driv-
en tool:
Programming rules
Tool Slide Geometries Driven tool rev. n. actual

Y axis Z axis limit
T7 1 -235.5 -14 6800

T8 1 -273.0 -14 4533
T9 1 -310.5 -14 6800
T10 1 -348.0 -14 4533
Example
If you wish to program rotation of the driven tool T07 of slide 1 at the rotation speed
of 1000 r.p.m., the CNC command code of the driven tool is the following:
c
T0707 G0 Y0
M3 S1000 P12
c
Clockwise 1000 r.p.m

Machine programming
10.3.18.2 Example of radial drilling
Fig. 10-78 Radial drilling
Example of use:
(Bar diameter 20 mm / tip diameter 4.2 mm)
O1000 (slide 1 program)

¦
M19 B0 P11 (angular positioning)
T0707 G0Y0 (driven tool tip)
M3 S2000 P12 (driven tool rotation)
G308 P12
G0 X22 Z-15 (first drilling)
G1 X1 G95 F0.1
G0 X22 (angular positioning)
M19 B0 P12 (second drilling)
G1 X1 (slide 1 program)
G0 X22
M5 P12 (rotating tools stop)

Machine programming
10.3.18.3 Example of milling for execution of parallel planes
Fig. 10-79 Example of milling
Example of use:
(Bar diameter 20 mm / milling cutter diameter 8mm)

¦
(cutter tool 8 mm, in geometry enter R 4
T0606
[milling cutter radius] and T0 [tool tip position])
G308 P12 (feeding activation mm/rev)
G 0 X 14 Z-15 Y-14
G1 Y14 G95 F0.08 (first milling)
M19 B180 P11
G 1 Y-14 (first milling)
G0 X30
M5 P12 (rotating tools stop)

Machine programming
10.3.18.4 Example of radal rigid tapping
Fig. 10-80 Radial rigid tapping
Example of use:
(Bar diameter 20 mm / tip diameter 4.2 mm / tap M5 pitch 0.8 mm)
O1000
¦
T0808 G0 Y0 (M5 rotating tap)
G0 X 22 Z-15 (positioning on Z axis)
M3 S1500 P12 (tool rotation and work surface selection)
G308 P12 (feed mm/rev)
M29 S1500 P12
G88 X3 F0.8 (first tapping )
G88 X3 F0.8 (second tapping)
G80 (cycle end)
G0 X30 (retraction)
M5 P12 (driven tool disable)

Machine programming
10.3.19 Machining with driven tools slide 3
Fig. 10-81 Working area X3-Y3 Driven tools
T
X
Z Example of tools geometry

Machine programming
Foreword
• The fitting positions are identified by the numbering T1-T8 for main spindle
machining and T11-T18 for counterspindle machining.
• The value of Z is the distance geometry in fixed positions with respect to the
reference point T of the rack. The value of the geometry in X it is convenient to
detect it in the machine, the value of Y is 0.
• The programmed feed is in mm/rev.

en tool:
Tabella 6: Programming rules
Tool Geometrie Driven tool rev. n.

Main Frontal Y axis Z axis Z axis actual limit
spindle spindle Main spindle Frontal spindle
T01 T11 0 0 84 5000
T02 T12 0 0 84 5000
T03 T13 0 0 84 5000
T04 T14 0 0 84 5000
T05 T15 0 0 84 5000
T06 T16 0 0 84 5000
T07 T17 0 0 84 5000
T08 T18 0 0 84 5000
Example
If you wish to program rotation of the driven tool T07 of slide 1 at the speed of 1000
r.p.m., the CNC command code of the driven tool is the following:
c
T0707 G0 Y0
M3 S1000 P32
c
Clockwise 1000 r.p.m.

Machine programming
10.3.19.2 Example of radial drilling on main spindle
Fig. 10-82 Radial drilling example
Use example:
(Bar diameter 20mm / tip diameter 4.2 mm)
O1000 (Program slide 3)

¦
T0606 G0Y0 (driven ool tip)
G308 P32 (feeding mm/rev)
G0 X22 Z-15
G1 X1 G95 F0.1 (first drilling)
G0 X22
G1 X1 (second drilling)
G0 X22
M5 P32 (driven tools stop)

Machine programming
10.3.19.3 Example of milling for execution of parallel planes on main spindles
Fig. 10-83 Milling example
Use example:
(Bar diameter 20 mm/ milling cutter diameter 8 mm)
O1000
¦
(cutter tool 8 mm, in geometry enter R 4
T0606
[milling cutter radius] and T0 [tool tip position])
G0 X14 Z-15 Y-14
G1 Y14 G95 F0.08 (first milling)
M19 B180 P11
G 1 Y-14 (second milling)
G0 X30

Machine programming
10.3.19.4 Example of radial rigid tapping on main spindle
Fig. 10-84 Example of radial rigid tapping
Example of use:
(Bar diameter 20 mm / tip diameter 4.2 mm / Tap M5 pitch 0.8 mm)
O1000
¦
T0808 G0 Y0 (M5 rotating tap)
G0 X 22 Z-15 (positioning on Z axis)
M3 S1500 P32 (tool rotation and work surface selection)
G308 P32 (feed mm/rev
M29 S1500 P32
G88X3 F0.8 (first tapping )
G88X3 F0.8 (second tapping)
G80 (cycle end)
G0 X30 (retraction)
M5 P32 (driven tools disable)

Machine programming
10.3.20 Machining with driven tools slide 2
Fig. 10-85 Working area X2-Y2 driven tools

Machine programming
Foreword
The fitting positions are identified by the numbering 7-8-9-10.
• The value of the geometry in X is the fixed distance of the 2 positions with respect
to the reference point G55 located on the first hole of the drill plate. The value of
the geometry in Z is always the distance compared to G55.
• Programming of the driven tools occurs with the code Txxxx.
• The programmed feed is in mm/rev.

en tool:
Tabella 7: Programming rules
Tool Slide Geometries Driven tool rev. n.

X axis Z axis actual limit
(to input with res-
pect to G55)
T14 2 X... Z... 6000
T15 2 X... Z... 6000
Example
If you wish to program rotation of the driven tool T07 of slide 1 at the speed of 1000
r.p.m., the CNC command code of the driven tool is the following::
c
T0707
M3 S1000 P21
c
Clockwise 1000 r.p.m.

Machine programming
10.3.20.2 Example of radial drilling
Fig. 10-86 Radial drilling
30
Esempio di utilizzo:
(Bar diameter 30mm / tip diameter 4mm)

G55 (origin)
G52 Z30 (part offset counterspindle)
T1414 (driven tool tip)
G0 X20 Z1
G1G95 F0.1 Z-10 (first drilling)
G0 Z2
G1 Z-10 (second drilling)
G0 Z5

Machine programming
10.3.20.3 Example of radial rigid tapping
Fig. 10-87 Example of tapping
30
Esempio di utilizzo:
(Bar diameter 30 mm / tip diameter 4.2 mm / Tap M5 pitch 0.8 mm)
O1000
G55 (origin)
G52 Z30 (part offset counterspindle)
T1515 (M5 rotating tap)
G0 X 20 Z2 (positioning on Z axis)
M3 S1500 P22 (tool rotation and work plane selection)
M29 S1500 P22
G84 Z-8 F0.8 (first tapping )
G84 Z-8 F0.8 (second tapping)
G80 (cycle end)
G0 Z10 (retraction)
M5 P22 (driven tools disable)

Machine programming
10.3.21 Circular interpolation with driven tools
10.3.21.1 Circular interpolation on plane Z-Y
Description
Circular interpolation on the plane Z-Y consists in the execution of profiles on the outer
surface of the workpiece using the milling cutter.
A circular interpolation is programmed by programming the axes Z-Y and the radius
to be described.
The functions G2 and G3 can be programmed as follows:
• G2/G3 Y... Z... with code R... (radius value) for circle arcs up to 180°
• G2/G3 Y... Z... with code J... K... (distances of the centre of the radius from the
starting point) for complete circles

Machine programming
Programming examples for slide 1

Programming example n.1:
• Fit the tool on a rotating tool holder
Milling cutter diameter: 4mm
Bar: 20 mm
Fig. 10-88 Programming example 1
The path of the milling cutter is as follows:

• from the centre the milling cutter moves to point 1 skimming the head of the
workpiece and enabling the tool radius compensation
• describing a counter-clockwise circle, it arrives at point 2
Slide 1 program
M19 B0 P11 spindle angular positioning
G19 selection of plane Y-Z
T0808 G0 Y0 M3 S2000 P12 tool selection, Y0 positioning, driven tool enable
G0 X0 workpiece axis approach
G1 G42 Z0 G94 F200 point 1 approach and C.R.U. enable
G3 Y-10 Z-10 R10 circular interpolation as far as point 2
G0 Y-15Z-5 G40 CRU retraction and disable
G0 X40 X axis retraction
G18 selection of plane X-Z
M5 P12 driven tools stop

Machine programming
Programming example n.2

• Milling cutter diameter: 8 mm
• Bar diameter: 16 mm
view from A
Slide 1 program
M19 B0 P11
(milling tool 8 mm, in geometry enter R 4 [milling cutter
T0606
radius] and T 0 [tool tip position])
M3 S2000 P12
G0 X18 Z15 Y-12
G1 X0 G94 F300
G19 (selection of plane Y-Z)
G1 G42 Y 0 Z0
G3 Z-7 Y-7 R 7
G1 Z-10
G1 Z-5 Y-20 G40
G18 (selection of plane X-Z)
M5 P12

Machine programming
Programming examples for slide 3
Programming example n.1:

• Fit the tool on a rotating tool holder
Milling cutter diameter: 4 mm
Bar diameter: 20 mm
Fig. 10-89 Programming example 1 for slide 3
The path of the milling cutter is the following:

• from the centre the milling cutter moves to point 1 skimming the head of the
workpiece and enabling tool radius compensation with a counter-clockwise circle,
it arrives at point 2.
Slide 3 program
G0 X0 workpiece axis approach
G1 G42 Z0 G94 F200 point 1 approach and C.R.U. enable
G3 Y10 Z-10 R10 circular interpolation as far as point 2
G0 Y15Z-5 G40 CRU retraction and disable
G0 X40 X axis retraction
M5 P32 driven tools stop

Machine programming
Programming example n. 2
• Milling cutter diameter: 8 mm
• Bar diameter: 16 mm
Fig. 10-90 Programming example 2 for slide 3
Slide 3 program
M19 B0 P11
(milling tool 8 mm, in geometry enter R 4
T0606
[milling cutter radius] and T 0 [tool tip position])
M3 S2000 P32
G0 X18 Z15 Y12
G1 X0 G94 F300
G19 (selection of plane Y-Z)
G1 G42 Y0 Z0
G3 Z-7 Y7 R 7
G1 Z-10
G1 Z-5 Y20 G40
G18 (selection of plane X-Z)
M5 P32

Machine programming
10.3.22 Helical interpolation
Description
Helical interpolation consists in circular movement of the tool
combined with feed on the axis perpendicular to the circle
described.
It is used for widening holes by means of milling cutter, milling
of spot-facings and cutting of threads by means of thread
cutter.
A circular interpolation is programmed by programming
circular movements and adding to the same block the
penetration movement.
The functions G2 and G3 can be programmed as follows: X1 axis
• G2/G3 Y... Z... X... with code R... (radius value) for circle
arcs up to 180°
• G2/G3 Y... Z... X... with code J... K... (distances of the centre of the radius from the
starting point) for complete circles.
Fig. 10-91 Helical interpolation
Examples of helical interpolation

Machine programming
Example of drilling from solid piece by means of milling cutter
Hole diam.: 18 mm
Milling cutter
10 mm
diam.:
Pre-hole diam.: 0 mm
Hole depth: from diam. 20 to diam. -8
No. revs: 5000 rev/min
Feed: 5000 x 0.08= 400 mm/min.
Slide 1 program
G0 X22 Z-17 approach above and in centre of hole
G1 Z-26 G42 G94 F400 C.R.U. approach and enable
complete circle, radius 9 mm decreasing by 4 mm
G3 X18 K9
on diameter
complete circle, radius 9 mm decreasing by 4 mm
G3 X14 K9
on diameter
complete circle, radius 9 mm decreasing by c
G3 X.... K9
mm on diameter
....
complete circle radius 9 mm decreasing by 4 mm
G3 X-8 K9
on diameter
G1 Z-17 G40 return to centre of hole and C.R.U. disable
G0 X40 exit from hole
M5 P12 driven tool stop

Machine programming
10.3.22.1 Machining with thread cutter
Programming example for thread cutter

• Fit the tool on a non-compensated rotating tool holder.
Threading type: M14 x 2

Thread cutter to be identified
diam.:
Pre-hole diam.: 12 mm
Thread depth: 2 x 0.613 = 1.22 mm
No. revs: 2000 r.p.m.
Feed: 200 mm/min.
Fig. 10-92 Programming example for thread cutter
The path of the milling cutter is the following:

• from the centre the milling cutter moves to point 1 skimming the wall of the hole and
enabling tool radius compensation
• with a circle arc of 180 degrees it gradually enters and goes right to the bottom of
the thread in point 2 incrementing in X by half a step (diametrally corresponds to
one step)
describing a complete circle, it returns to starting point 2 cutting the whole thread,
entering X by one step (diametrally corresponds to twice the step)
Slide 1 program

Machine programming
Slide 1 program
G0 X22 Z-10 approach above and in centre of hole
G0 X5 positioning in X inside hole
G1 G42 Z-16 G94 F200 point 1 approach and C.R.U. enable
helical interp. ½ circle as far as point 2, decre-
G3 Z-3 X3 R6.5 menting radially by ½ step, or one step on diame-
ter
helical interp. 1 circle radius 7 mm, decrement.
G3 X-1 K-7
radially by 1 step, or twice step on diameter
G0 Z-10 G40 CRU retraction and disable
G0 X40 X axis exit from hole
M5 P12 driven tool stop

Machine programming

Auxiliary functions
11 Auxiliary functions
11.1 M functions
This section describes the detailed specifications of use of the machine tool M
functions.
For reasons of completeness, the description of the standardised M functions
has been included in the list (see Introduction).
These functions are indicated as "ISO-standard" functions.
Type ISO-code
Description from to
General functions M00 M99
PATH 1 functions M00 M99
PATH synchronisation functions M100 M199
Basic machine functionality M500 M599
Basic option functions M600 M699
CUSTOM functions M700 M799
M-function availability
S Standard
O Optional
Funzioni M e Macro G Fanuc 310 en rev.2012-06 Page 11-1

Auxiliary functions
M-Functions
SPRINT 42|10 linear

Arguments
Function
Description
General functions (from M00 to M99)

PATH 1 functions (from M00 to M99)
M00 Program stop S
M01 Optional program stop S
M03 S Main spindle slide 1 - CW rotation
M03 S P Spindle selected by means of P address - CW rotation S
M04 S Main spindle slide 1 - CCW rotation
M04 S P Spindle selected by means of P address - CCW rotation S
M05 Main spindle slide 1 - STOP rotation
M05 P Spindle selected by means of P address - STOP rotation S
M08 Start standard coolant S
M09 Stop standard coolant S
M11 Stop supplementary optional program S
M14 Enable slide 1 "C" axis
M14 P Spindle selected by means of P address - Enable C-axis
M15 Disable slide 1 "C" axis
M15 P Spindle selected by means of P address - Disable C-axis
M18 Parts counter and cycle time
M19 B Main spindle slide 1 - angular displacement
M19 B P Spindle selected by means of P address - angular position S
M24 Bar change allowed
M25 Bar feed stop
M29 Rigid tapping slide 1 (spindles/axes in the same path)
M29 S P Spindle selected by means of P address - Rigid tapping mode S
M30 Part program end and return to start S
M33 Enable main spindle rotation with collet open slide 1 S
M34 Blocks axes override value at 100% for the feed in progress (G1) S
M35 Cancel M34 S
M36 Collet opening of main spindle slide 1 S
M37 Collet closing of main spindle slide 1 S
M37 B Collet closing of main spindle path 1 during learning phase
M44 Threading with unloading chute
M45 Threading without unloading chute
M46 Axes accurate stop
Page 11-2 Funzioni M e Macro G Fanuc 310 en rev.2012-06

Auxiliary functions
M-Functions
SPRINT 42|10 linear

Arguments
Function
Description
M47 Cancel M46

M50 Start spindles synchronism S
M51 Stop spindles synchronism S
M56 Reserved for future flow controls (additional flow switch)
M57 Reserved for future flow controls (additional flow switch)
M58 Disable standard coolant flow control S
M58 P Deactivates/reactivates control of configurable flowmeters
M59 Enable standard coolant flow control S
M60 Wait for set spindle/s speed S
M61 Cancel M60 S
M62 Bush controls with automatic recovery S
M65 Request bar change (loader with DMG interface) S
M69 Bar feed (loader with DMG interface) S
M73 S Rotating tools path 1 - CW rotation
M74 S Rotating tools path 1 - CCW rotation
M75 Rotating tools slide 1 - STOP rotation
M80 The slide feed, in G95 mode, refers to the master spindle in actual path
M81 The slide feed, in G95 mode, refers to the master spindle in path 1
M89 B Slide 1 rotating bush motor - angular positioning S
M90 Part Program: activation of immediate stop with corresponding alarm S
M91 Part Program: end of cycle stop with corresponding alarm S
M92 Part Program: activation of messages/indication S
M95 Part Program: stop buffering of next blocks S
M98 Subprogram call
M99 Subprogram end / unconditional jump to block N specified by P
PATH synchronisation functions (from M100 to M199)
M100 Functions for synchronisation of paths S
..to.. .................... S
M199 Functions for synchronisation of paths S

Auxiliary functions
M-Functions
SPRINT 42|10 linear

Arguments
Function
Description

M203 S Main spindles slide 2 - CW rotation
M208 Start additional coolant path 2 S
M209 Stop additional coolant paht 2 S
M214 Enable C-axis slide 2
M215 Disable C-axis slide 2
M219 B Main spindle slide 2 - Angular displacement
M229 Rigid tapping slide 2 (spindles/axes in the same path)
M233 Enable main spindle rotation with collet open slide 2 S
M236 Open clamp main spindle saddle 2 S
M237 Close clamp main spindle saddle 2 S
M238 Control inhibition of part ejected from main spindle path 2
M256 Reserved for future flow controls (additional flow switch path 2)
M257 Reserved for future flow controls (additional flow switch path 2)
M258 Flow control inhibition for additional coolant path 2
M259 Flow control activation for additional coolant path 2
M273 S Rotating tools slide 2 - CW rotation
M274 S Rotating tools slide 2 - CCW rotation
M308 Start coolant on slide 3 O
M309 Stop coolant on slide 3 O
M329 Rigid tapping slide 3 (spindle/axes in the same path)
M333 Enable main spindle rotation with collet open slide 3
M336 Collet opening of main spindle slide 3
M337 Collet closing of main spindle slide 3

Auxiliary functions
M-Functions
SPRINT 42|10 linear

Arguments
Function
Description

M356 Reserved for future flos controls (additional flos switch path 3)
M359 Flow control abilitation for additional coolant path 3
M396 Enables rotation of the revolver with hidden time on path 3 S
M397 Disable rotation of the revolver with hidden time on path 3 S
M408 Start additional coolant (3) on slide 4
M409 Stop additional coolant (3) on slide 4
M429 Rigid tapping slide 4 (spindle/axes in the same path)
M433 Enable main spindle rotation with collet open slide 4
M436 Collet opening of main spindle slide 4
M437 Collet closing of main spindle slide 4
M459 Flow control abilitation for additional coolant path 4
Basic machine functions (from M500 to M599)
M500 Start part conveyor belt O
M501 Stop part conveyor belt O

Auxiliary functions
M-Functions
SPRINT 42|10 linear

Arguments
Function
Description
M502 Path 1 main spindle collet cleaning activation

M503 Path 1 main spindle collet cleaning deactivation
M504 Path 2 main spindle collet cleaning activation S
M505 Path 2 main spindle collet cleaning deactivation S
M506 Path 2 main spindle collet 2nd cleaning activation
M507 Path 2 main spindle collet 2nd cleaning deactivation
M508 Start coolant from outlets over spindles
M509 Stop coolant from outlets above spindles
M510 Part ejector forward command S
M511 Part ejector backward command S
M512 Reversing the direction of the pieces conveyor belt O
M513 Restoring the direction of the pieces conveyor belt O
M514 Reserved for part unloader
M519 Data block during part unloading O
M520 Part unloader forward command O
M521 Part unloader backward command O
M522 Part unloader arm forward command
M523 Part unloader arm backward command
M524 Part collector collet opening command
M525 Part collector collet closing command
M530 Enable machining with differential feeding between Z1 and Z2
M531 Disable M530
M533 Disable M532
M535 Disable M534

Auxiliary functions
M-Functions
SPRINT 42|10 linear

Arguments
Function
Description
M536 Enable machining with differential feed between Z2 and Z3

M537 Disable M536
M538 Reserved for machining with differential feed
M539 Reserved for machining with differential feed
M540 Enable synchronisation between Z1 and Z2
M541 Disable M540
M542 Reserved for synchronized axis machining
M550 spare
...to... ............
M557 spare
M558 Start coolant from outlets over spindles
M559 Stop coolant from outlets over spindles
M560 ... Axis migration function
M561 Reserved fo axis migration

Auxiliary functions
M-Functions
SPRINT 42|10 linear

Arguments
Function
Description

M580 Revolver hydraulic lock off
M581 Revolver reference cycle
M582 Reserved for revolver
M584 Revolver on in indexing mode (slide 2 and 3)
M585 Revolver on in interpolating mode (slide 2 and 3)
M590 spare
...to... ........
M594 spare
M595 Immediate stop due to standard coolant filter obstruction on
M596 Immediate stop due to standard coolant filter obstruction off
M597 spare
...to... ........
M599 spare
Basic option functions (from M600 to M699)
M600 Supplementary output 01 - ON S
M601 Supplementary output 01 - OFF S
M602 Supplementary output 02 - ON S
M603 Supplementary output 02 - OFF S
M604 Supplementary output 03 - ON O
M605 Supplementary output 03 - OFF O

Auxiliary functions
M-Functions
SPRINT 42|10 linear

Arguments
Function
Description

M620 spare
M621 Centre control 1 O
M625 Reserved for centre control 5
M630 Pneumatic spindle 1 - ON O
M631 Pneumatic spindle 1 - OFF O
M638 Pneumatic spindle 5 - ON
M639 Pneumatic spindle 5 - OFF
M650 Load Monitor - ON O
M651 Load Monitor - OFF O
M654 Device 1 Marposs - ON O
M655 Device 1 Marposs - OFF O

Auxiliary functions
M-Functions
SPRINT 42|10 linear

Arguments
Function
Description
Customer special functions (from M700 to M799)

M700 spare for customer functions
...to... ...............
M799 spare for customer functions
Part unloader functions (from M800 to M899)
M861 Arm rotation to part pick-up position instruction S
M862 Arm rotation in part evacuation position S
M863 Arm lowering in part pick-up or evacuation position instruction S
M864 Arm return to disengagement position instruction S
M865 Unloader in part pick-up position instruction S
M866 Unloader in part evacuation position instruction S
M867 Parts unloader box opening instruction S
M868 Parts unloader box closing instruction S
M869 Data block during part unloading functions S
M870 Part evacuation cycle S

Auxiliary functions
Denomination: M00 d
c ISO code
Functionality: Program stop
Arguments:
Allowed values:
Programmable from: c d path 1 d path 2
c d
c path 3
path 4
d
c c all paths
a
d
Referred to: cd path 1 d path 2
c d
c path 3
path 4
d
c c path where programmed
a
d a
d
c concerned device
Operative Programmable Operation Hold & Restart
k at block start
j c at CNC start-up
d j alone in the block
k d modal
c d suspended by cycle stop
c
h at block end
k
j d upon pressing RESET button
c h also with other instr.
k
j d self-cancelling
c d reactivated by cycle stop
c
Cancelled by: c
d reset d emergency
c d alarm
c and a cycle start
d
c
Also suspended by:
Also reactivated by:
Detailed description:
The M00 auxiliary function, besides carrying out the synchronisation of programs as the functions
from (M100 to M199) it has the characteristic of stopping the cycle when synchronisation is comple-
ted.
If the machine operates with only one program enabled the M00 function stops the cycle as soon as the
block is completed (there is no reason to wait for the synchronisation with the other paths).
The cycle stop sequence is as follows:The cycle restart sequence is as follows:

1) Stop all feeds 1) Reset all coolants
2) Stop all spindles 2) Rest all spindle enabled modes
3) Stop all coolants 3) Reset all feeds
When M00 is completed and the cycle is stopped it's possible to unlock the sliding door.
To continue with program execution simply press the CYCLE START push button. If the safety conditions
are not observed the cycle will not restart.
NB: If the function is programmed in the block together with axes movement, the cycle stop function
is only carried out when the movement is completed.
Programming examples:
PATH 1 PATH 2 PATH 3 PATH 4 DESCRIPTION
1 M03 S1000; M203 S500;
2 M04 S3000; M204 S3000;
3 M8;
4 G4 X5;
5
6
7
8 M00; M00;
9 G01 Z-30 F0 3; G01 Z-30 F0 3;
10 M05; M205;
11 M101; M101;
12 M99; M99;
ALARMS
N° Text Description

Auxiliary functions
Denomination: M01 d
c ISO code
Functionality: Optional program stop
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d
c path 3 path 4
d
c a all paths
d
c
Referred to: c
d path 1 d path 2
c d
c path 3 path 4
d
c a path where programmed
d
c d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
h
k d modal
c
k at block end
c k also with other instr.
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
d reset d emergency
c c alarm
d and a cycle start
d
c
Also suspended by:
The characteristic of the M01 function is to stop the cycle upon request, or rather only when the
"Optional Stop" key is pressed.
ALWAYS recalled at program end, and once inside the cycle of each Path, it does not need to be
synchronised and is exploited by the applications to recognise the end of the part program
(Among which Sister Tool and Load Monitor), as well as to issue cycle end alarms.
Whenever the key selection is disabled, M01 limits itself to synchronizing the programs in the active
paths.
In the case in which this function is being executed in a single Path, when "Optional stop" is
selected, the cycle will stop only after terminating the block in which M01 is written.
The cycle stop sequence is as follows:The cycle restart sequence is as follows:

When M01 is completed and the cycle is stopped it's possible to unlock the sliding door.
To continue with program execution press the CYCLE START push button. If the safety conditions
are not observed the cycle will not restart.
NB For a correct operation this function must be programmed alone in the instruction block.
NB For a correct operation of the Load Monitor it cannot be programmed between M650 and M651
1 M03 S1000; M203 S500;
2 M04 S3000; M204 S3000;
3 M8;
4 G4 X5;
5 M01; M01;
6 M99; M99;
7
8
9
10
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
Denomination: M03 S d
c ISO code
Functionality: Main spindle slide 1- CW rotation
Arguments: S
Allowed values: 0...max
c d path 3
c path 4
d
c c all paths
a
d
Referred to: c
a path 1
d d path 2
c d path 3
c path 4
d
d d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
k d modal
c a suspended by cycle stop
d
c
k at block end
k
j d self-cancelling
c a reactivated by cycle stop
d
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c a alarm
d
c and a M04 S*** - M05
d
c - M019 B*** - M014
Also suspended by:
The M03 auxiliary function controls the clockwise rotation of the main spindle in path 1 with the
number of revolutions stated with the S*** code.
It can be programmed from any path and is always refers to the main spindle in path 1.
Function arguments:
[S]: rotation speed expressed in rpm (compulsory)

When programming any spindle rotation function it is compulsory to specify the "S" code followed
by the number of revs in the same function block.
If the "S" code is not specified the cycle is stopped and alarm 1021 appears.
If "S"=0 is specified the spindle torque is set at 0 revs.
The max. number of revs that can be specified depends on the lathe model.
If the spindle is in Cs mode it's not possible to control any other of its functionalities until the
Cs axis mode is disabled. In this case alarm 1020 will appear.
1 M03 S500; M03 S500; M03 S500;
2 G4 X1; G4 X1; G4 X1;
3 M03 S1000; M03 S1000; M03 S1000;
4 M01; M01; M01;
5 M99; M99; M99;
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS
1020 PROGRAMMING ERROR An error was made during function programming
1021 "S" CODE COMPULSORY A rotation function was programmed without the "S" code

Auxiliary functions
Denomination: M03 S P d
c ISO code
Functionality: Spindle selected by means of P address - CW rotation
Arguments: S P
Allowed values: 0 to max n. spindle
c d path 3
c c path 4
d a all paths
d
c
c d path 3
c c path 4
d d path where programmed
c a concerned device
d
c
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
k c modal
a
d c suspended by cycle stop
a
d
k at block end
k
j d self-cancelling
d
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c c alarm
a
d and a M04 S P - M05 P - M19 P M14 P
d
c
Also suspended by:
The M03 S_ P_ function is implemented for machine models with at least 3 paths, which use the
"multi-spindles-TYPE-C"
M03= CLOCKWISE rotation command
Argument description:
[S]=Rotation speed (rpm).
Values allowed: (from 0 to 12000). The maximum speed depends on the type of
spindle and on the machine model. If, for a spindle with a maximum speed of 6,000
(rpm) a greater speed is programmed, the spindle will rotate at its
maximum speed.
Specifying S0, the selected spindle couples and remains stopped.
[P]=Selection of the spindle to command.
Values allowed: (depends on the machine model)
formula: P =[n. spindle (1=main;2=motorized) + n. path to which it pertains * 10]
P11 = main spindle of path 1
P12 = motorized spindles of path 1
Notes:
• The selection of the spindle by means of the argument [P] is modal for each path, so for succes-
sive commands that refer to the same spindle it is not necessary to specify the argument [P]
• Upon starting the detection for each machine model that uses the "multi-spindles-TYPE-C" there is
a default master spindle for each path.
1 M03 S2000 P11; main spindle, path 1, CW rotation 2,000 rpm
4 M03 S1000 P12; motorized spindles, path 1, CW rotation 1,000 rpm
7 M03 S3000; motorized spindles, path 3, CW rotation 3,000 rpm
8 S3000 P11; main spindle, path 1, CW rotation 3,000 rpm
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Functionality: Main spindle slide 1- CCW rotation
Arguments: S
c d path 3
c path 4
d
c c all paths
a
d
Referred to: c
a path 1
d d path 2
c d path 3
c path 4
d
d d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
k d modal
d
c
k at block end
k
j d self-cancelling
d
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c a alarm
d
c and a M03 S*** - M05
d
c - M019 B*** - M014
Also suspended by:
The M04 auxiliary function controls the counter clockwise rotation of the main spindle in path 1 with
the number of revolutions stated with the S*** code.
It can be programmed from any path and is always refers to the main spindle in path 1.
Function arguments:

by the number of revs in the same function block.
If the "S" code is not specified the cycle is stopped and alarm 1021 appears.
If the spindle is in Cs mode it's not possible to control any other of its functionalities until the
1 M04 S500; M04 S500; M04 S500;
2 G4 X1; G4 X1; G4 X1;
3 M04 S1000; M04 S1000; M04 S1000;
4 M01; M01; M01;
5 M99; M99; M99;
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS
1021 "S" CODE COMPULSORY A rotation function has been programmed without the "S" code

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Functionality: Spindle selected by means of P address - CCW rotation
Arguments: S P
Allowed values: 0 to max n. spindle
c d path 3
c c path 4
d a all paths
d
c
c d path 3
c c path 4
d
c
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
k c modal
a
a
d
k at block end
k
j d self-cancelling
d
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c c alarm
a
d and a M03 S P - M05 P - M19 P M14 P
d
c
Also suspended by:
The M04 S_ P_ function is implemented for machine models with at least 3 paths, which
use the "multi-spindles-TYPE-C"
M04= COUNTER-CLOCKWISE rotation command
[S]=Rotation speed (rpm).
Values allowed: (from 0 to 12000). The maximum speed depends on the type of spindle and on the
machine model. If, for a spindle with a maximum speed of 6,000 (rpm) a greater speed is program-
med, the spindle will rotate at its maximum speed.
Specifying S0, the selected spindle couples and remains stopped.
[P]=Selection of the spindle to command.
Notes:
• Upon starting the detection for each machine model that uses the "multi- spindles-TYPE-C" there is
1 M04 S2000 P11; main spindle, path 1, CCW rotation 2,000 rpm
4 M03 S1000 P12; motorized spindles, path 1, CCW rotation 1,000 rpm
7 M03 S3000; motorized spindles, path 3, CCW rotation 3,000 rpm
8 S3000 P11; main spindle, path 1, CCW rotation 3,000 rpm
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
Denomination: M05 P d
c ISO code
Functionality: Spindle selected by means of P address - STOP rotation
Arguments: P
Allowed values: n. spindle
c d path 3
c d path 4
c c all paths
a
d
c d path 3
c d path 4
d a concerned device
d
c
k at block start
j c at CNC start-up
a
k c modal
a
d
k at block end
j a upon pressing RESET button
d
k
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c a alarm
d
c and a M03 S P - M04 S P - M019 B P - M014 P
d
c
Also suspended by:
M05= STOP ROTATION of spindle selected by means of P address
[P]=Selection of the spindle to stop.
Notes:
• Upon starting the detection for each machine model that uses the "multi- spindles-TYPE-C" there is
1 M05 P11; main spindle, path 1, stop rotation
4 M05 P12; motorized spindles, path 1, stop rotation
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
Denomination: M08 d
c ISO code
Functionality: Start standard coolant
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d
c path 3 d
cpath 4 a all paths
d
c
c d
c path 3 d
cpath 4 d path where programmed
c a
d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j d
c at CNC start-up j alone in the block
k d modal
d
c
k at block end
j d
c upon pressing RESET button j
h also with other instr.
k d self-cancelling
d
c
Cancelled by: a reset
c
d a emergency
d
c c alarm
a
d and a M09
d
c
Also suspended by: a cooling button OFF
c
d
Also reactivated by: a cooling button ON
c
d
The M08 auxiliary function enables the start-up of the standard cooling pump.
The functioning of the coolant is also dictated by the inclusion/exclusion buttons situated on the
panel: [coolant ON] and [coolant OFF].
At machine start-up, by default, the selection of the buttons is automatically set to 'on' [coolant
ON].
The pump begins distributing coolant when the following 3 conditions are met:
1 the M08 function is enabled (i.e. when the program block containing it is completed)
2 the coolant is allowed by the push button (coolant ON)
3 the cycle is enabled in MDI or in AUTOMATIC mode
Note: Any cycle stop condition (alarm, stop-cycle button, M1 enabled, etc.) suspends the functioning
of the coolant. When the cycle is active or stopped, upon pressing the RESET button the cycle resets,
including all the M functions, which are cancelled when the RESET button is pressed, including the
M08 function.
NB: If the pump is fitted with a flow control device, in the event that a malfunctioning should occur
during functioning, an alarm is generated and the cycle immediately comes to a halt.
Note for (sprint 65) linear machine model:

The coolant for slide 1 is part of the basic machine equipment (without supplementary system). The
system is provided with a filter: an alarm is generated either at end of cycle or immediately, as
programmed using M596/M595 functions, if the filter is obstructed during operation.
1 M08; M08;
2 G4 X10; G4 X10;
3 M09; M09;
4 G4 X4; G4 X4;
5 M1; M1;
6 M99; M99;
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS
The passage of the coolant is clogged, the tap is closed or the pump does not start when
1045 MAIN COOLANT ALARM
given the command.
1047 DIRTY COOLANT FILTER The channel coolant filter is dirty.

Auxiliary functions
Denomination: M09 d
c ISO code
Functionality: Stop standard coolant
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d
c path 3 path 4
d
c c all paths
a
d
c d
c path 3 path 4
d
d a
d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
a
k d modal
c
k at block end
d
k
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
d reset d emergency
c d alarm
c and a M08
d
c
Also suspended by:
The M09 auxiliary function cancels the setting that enables the start-up of the standard coolant
pump.
Generally, the M09 function is used when you wish to turn the coolant on and off several times during
the course of the program.
1 M08; M08;
2 G4 X10; G4 X10;
3 M09; M09;
4 G4 X4; G4 X4;
5 M1; M1;
6 M99; M99;
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
Denomination: M11 Standard d

c ISO code
Functionality: Stop supplementary optional program
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d path 3
c path 4
d
c a all paths
d
c
c d path 3
c path 4
d
d
c d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
h
k d modal
c
k at block end
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
d reset d emergency
c c alarm
d and a cycle start
d
c
Also suspended by:
The characteristic of the M11 auxiliary function, besides carrying out program synchronisation such
as functions from (M100 to M199), is to stop the cycle only if requested (select using the M1 push
button) and only if the synchronisation with the other paths is completed.
It can be used several times in the same program, on the condition that it is programmed the same
number of times for all the paths.
If the M01 selection is not enabled only synchronisation is carried out.
If the machine operates with a single program enabled, the M11 function stops the cycle as soon as
the block is completed (there is no reason to wait for synchronisation with the other paths).
The cycle stop sequence is as follows: The cycle restart sequence is as follows:
When M11 has been completed and the cycle is stopped it's possible to unlock the sliding door.
To continue with program execution press the CYCLE START push button. If the safety conditions are
not observed the cycle will not restart.
Note:
For a correct operation this function must be programmed alone in the instruction block.
This does not replace the M01 function, which must always conclude the program.
1 M03 S1000; M203 S500;
2 M04 S3000; M204 S3000;
3 M8;
4 G4 X5;
5
6
7 M11; M11;
8 G01 Z-30 F0 3; G01 Z-30 F0 3;
9 M11; M11;
10 M05; M205;
11 M101; M101;
12 M01; M01;
13 M99; M99;
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
Denomination: M14 d
c ISO code
Functionality: Enable Slide 1 "C" axis
Arguments:
Allowed values:
Programmable from: c a path 1
d d path 2
c d
c path 3 d
cpath 4 c all paths
d
Referred to: ca path 1
d d path 2
c d
c path 3 d
cpath 4 c path where programmed
d d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j d
h
k a modal
d
d
c
k at block end
j d
k also with other instr. d self-cancelling
d
c
d
c a emergency
d
c a alarm
d
c and a M015
d
c
Also suspended by: a open door
d
c
The M14 auxiliary function enables the Cs axis mode for the main spindle in path 1.
It must only be programmed in path 1.
When the Cs axis mode is enabled, the spindle is managed like an axis and is programmed in the same
way as the other axes (it's therefore possible to carry out interpolations).
When the spindle is in Cs axis mode it's not possible to program other spindle functionalities (rota-
tion, positioning, tapping). In this case a programming error alarm will appear.
1 M14;
2 G0 C0 Z40 X30;
3 G1 G94 F55 Z20 C390;
4 M15;
5 M01;
6 M99;
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Functionality: Spindle selected by means of P address - Enable C-axis
Arguments: P
c d path 3
c c path 4
d a all paths
d
c
c d path 3
c c path 4
c a
d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
h
k c modal
a
d d suspended by cycle stop
c
k at block end
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c c alarm
a
d and a M15 P
d
c
Also suspended by:
The M14 P_ function is implemented for machine models with at least 3 paths, which use the
M14= Enable C-axis
[P]=Selection of the spindle for which the C-axis mode is to be enabled.
The C axis is optional and may be enabled only for the spindles that are configured at the CNC
level as first spindle of the path.
P32 = motorized spindles of path 3 *1
*1 The motorized spindles of path 3 at the CNC level correspond to the 1st spindle of path 3.
However, since they are motorized, the C-axis function is not allowed.
1 M14 P11; Enable C-axis of main spindle, path 1
2 G28 H0; C1-axis reference at notch 0
3 G1 G94 F500 C120 Z10; Machining with C1 and Z1
4 M15 P11; Disable C-axis of main spindle, path 1
5
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS
3020 PROGRAMMING ERROR An argument or specified value is erroneus, not allowed

Auxiliary functions
Denomination: M15 d
c ISO code
Functionality: Disable Slide 1 "C" axis
Arguments:
Allowed values:
d d path 2
c d
c path 3path 4
d
c c all paths
d
d d path 2
c d
c path 3path 4
d
d d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
a
h
k d modal
c
k at block end
d
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
d reset d emergency
c d alarm
c and a M14
d
c
Also suspended by:
The M15 auxiliary function disables the Cs axis mode for the main spindle in path 1.
1 M14;
2 G0 C0 Z40 X30;
3 G1 G94 F55 Z20 C390;
4 M15;
5 M01;
6 M99;
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
Denomination: M15 P Optional d

c ISO code
Functionality: Spindle selected by means of P address - Disable C-axis
Arguments: P
c d path 3
c c path 4
d a all paths
d
c
c d path 3
c c path 4
c a
d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j d at CNC start-up
a
c j alone in the block
h
k c modal
a
c
k at block end
a
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
d reset d emergency
c c alarm
d and a M14 P
d
c
Also suspended by:
M15= Disable C-axis
[P]=Selection of the spindle for which the C-axis mode is to be disabled.
The C axis is optional and may be enabled only for the spindles that are configured at the CNC
level as first spindle of the path.
*1 The motorized spindles of path 3 at the CNC level correspond to the 1st spindle of path 3.
However, since they are motorized, the C-axis function is not allowed.
2 G28 H0; C1-axis reference at notch 0
3 G1 G94 F500 C120 Z10; Machining with C1 and Z1
4 M15 P11; Disable C-axis of main spindle, path 1
5
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS
3020 PROGRAMMING ERROR An argument or specified value is erroneus, not allowed

Auxiliary functions

c ISO code
Functionality: Parts counter and cycle time
Arguments:
Allowed values:
d d path 2
c d path 3
c path 4
d
c c all paths
d
c d path 3
c path 4
d
d a
d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
h
k d modal
c
k at block end
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
d reset d emergency
c d alarm
c and d ...
c
Also suspended by:
The M18 auxiliary function is used to count the number of parts produced.
If used it must only be programmed in path 1 before the M01 function, which carries out the optional
cycle end stop.
1 M100;
2 M03 S200;
3 G4 X4;
4 M1;
5 M19 B150;
6 G4 X4;
7 M18;
8 M1;
9 M99;
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
Denomination: M19 a
d
c ISO code
Functionality: Main spindle slide 1: angular displacement
Arguments: B
Allowed values: 0... 359,9
c d path 3
c c path 4
d d
c all paths
Referred to: c
d path 1 d path 2
c d path 3
c c path 4
d d
c path where programmed d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j d
c at CNC start-up k alone in the block
j d modal
d
c
k at block end
j d
k d self-cancelling
d
c
c
d a emergency
d
c c alarm
a
d and a M03 S*** - M04
d
c S*** - M05 - M014
Also suspended by: a door open
c
d
The M19 auxiliary function controls the main spindle positioning in path 1
with the number of degrees stated with code B***
It can be programmed from any path and always refers to the main spindle in path 1.
If the spindle is in Cs mode it's not possible to operate any other spindle functionalities until the
Cs mode is disabled (alarm 1020 is generated)
Function arguments:
[B]: positioning angle (compulsory)

The positioning function is absolute, the angle stated with code "B" is the absolute position to
reach in the machine co-ordinate system.
The spindle positioning can be specified with a resolution equal to 0.1 degrees.
If code "B" is not specified the cycle will stop and alarm 1022 will appear.
NB to position itself the spindle rotates in a favourable direction in order to reach the requested
position in the quickest time possible.
1 M03 S500 G4 X2; M03 S500 G4 X2; M03 S500 G4 X2;
2 M19 B120; M19 B120; M19 B120;
3 M19 B180; M19 B180; M19 B180;
4 M19 B90 5; M19 B90 5; M19 B90 5;
5 M19 B30; M19 B30; M19 B30;
6 M1; M1; M1;
7 M99; M99; M99;
8
1 M3S6000; M3S6000; M3S6000;
2 G4X4; G4X4; G4X4;
3 M19B0; M19B0; M19B0;
4 M19B120; M19G120; M19B120;
5 M19B170; M19B170; M19B170;
6 G4X4; G4X4; G4X4;
7 M3S6000; M3S6000; M3S6000;
8 M19B-30; M19B-30; M19B-30;
9 M19B-80; M19B-80; M19B-80;
10 M19B-110; M19B-110; M19B-110;
11 M1 M1 M1
12 M99 M99 M99
ALARMS
1020 PROGRAMMING ERROR An error has been made during function programming
1022 "B" CODE COMPULSORY A function has been programmed without the "B" code

Auxiliary functions
Denomination: M19 B P d
c ISO code
Functionality: Spindle selected by means of P address - Angular position
Arguments: B P
Allowed values: 0... 359,9 n. spindle
c d path 3
c d path 4
c c all paths
a
d
c d path 3
c d path 4
d
c
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
h
k c modal
a
d
k at block end
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c a alarm
d
c and a M03 S P - M04 S P - M05 P
d
c
Also suspended by:
M19= ANGULAR POSITION command
[B]=positioning angle (obligatory)
The positioning function is absolute, the angle stated with code "B" is the absolute position to
reach in the machine co-ordinate system.
If code "B" is not specified the cycle will stop and alarm 1022 will appear.
[P]=Selection of the spindle to command in angular position.

formula: P =[n. spindle (1=main;2=motorized) + n. path to which it pertains x 10]
P11 = main spindle of path 1 P21 = main spindle of path 2
P12 = motorized spindles of path 1 *1 P22 = motorized spindles of path 2 *1
Notes:
• To position itself, the spindle rotates in a favourable direction in order to reach the requested
[*1] The motorized spindles do not have the angular position function.
1 M19 B90 P11; Main spindle, path 1, position at 90°
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS
1020 PROGRAMMING ERROR An error has been made during function programming

Auxiliary functions
Denomination: M24 d
c ISO code
Functionality: Bar change allowed
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d
c path 3 path 4
d
c a all paths
d
c
c d
c path 3 path 4
d
d
c d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
h
k d modal
c
k at block end
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c c alarm
a
d and a by the loaded bar
d
c feeder signal
Also suspended by:
Permission by the loader to change the bar is declared by means of the M24 auxiliary function; the
latter must be programmed before the collet is opened (M36), which initiates the bar change phase.
This programming derives from the IEMCA loader requirement that the lathe <-> loader interface signal
coupled to the M24 function overlap for at least a second the interface signal coupled to the M36
function. In order to avoid an absence of overlapping in these two signals, due to the selection of
the "single block" mode, it will also be necessary to program the #3003 variable so that the latter
disables the single block for that part of the program that includes the M24 and M36 functions.
1 O0001 (PROG.PRINC.)
2 ...
3 N10;
4 IF[#1000EQ0]GOTO
5 M98 P99;
6 O0099(PROG
7 M3S100;
8 M33;
9 #3003=1
10 M24;
11 M36;
12 #3003=0;
13 M37;
14 ...
15 M99;
16 N100;
17 M33;
18 M36;
19 G4U0 5;
20 G0Z0 2;
21 M37;
22 ...
23 M99P10;
24 M30;
25
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
Denomination: M25 d
c ISO code
Functionality: Bar feed stop
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d
c path 3 path 4
d
c c all paths
a
d
c d
c path 3 path 4
d
a
d c concerned device
d
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
h
k d modal
c
k at block end
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c a alarm
d
c and a bar loaded signal
d
c
Also suspended by:
The M25 auxiliary function is used to stop the feed of the bar.
When the bar loader gets the collet open signal, the loader pushes the bar forward.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
Denomination: M29 d
c ISO code
Functionality: Rigid tapping slide 1 (spindles/axes in the same path)
Arguments:
Allowed values:
d d path 2
c d path 3
c c path 4
d d all paths
c
d d path 2
c d path 3
c c path 4
c d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
h
k c modal
c
k at block end
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c c alarm
a
d and a G80
d
c
Also suspended by:
The auxiliary M29 function activates rigid tapping of path 1 and must be programmed on path 1 only.
It is used to inform the CNC which spindle to use for rigid tapping.
Programming:
1 program the direction of rotation of the spindle: the direction of rotation establishes whether
tapping is right (clockwise) or left (counter clockwise)
2 program "M29" (in the next block, without other codes)
3 finally program the FANUC fixed tapping cycle to carry out interpolation between the axis and
spindle with the following instructions:
G88 X** F**, for X axis;
G84 Z** F**, for Z axis;
G188 Y** F**, for Y axis.
The M29 function is cancelled with the FANUC G80 function (complex cycle closure)
Note: When the fixed cycle is being executed, it's not possible to adjust the override. If the over-
ride is equal to "0" the tapping is blocked and the spindle will stop the axis synchronisation.
1 G0 Z80;
2 M3 S500;
3 M29;
4 G84 Z40 F1;
5 G80;
6 M1;
7 M99;
1 M3S500;
2 M29;
3 G84Z80F1;
4 M4S300;
5 G84Z60F3;
6 M3S100;
7 G84Z60F5;
8 G80;
9 G4X4;
10 M1;
11 M99;
1 M73S500;
2 M29;
3 G88X100F1;
4 M74S300;
5 G88X80F3;
6 M73S100;
7 G88X80F5;
8 G80;
9 G4X4;
10 M1;
11 M99;
ALARMS
1020 PROGRAMMING ERROR A function was programmed committing an error

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Functionality: Spindle selected by means of P address - Rigid tapping mode
Arguments: S P
Allowed values: rpm n. spindle
c d path 3
c d path 4
c c all paths
a
d
c d path 3
c d path 4
d a
d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
h
k c modal
a
c
k at block end
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c d alarm
c and a G80
d
c
Also suspended by:
The new feature introduced with the C-type is the possibility to carry out rigid tapping with the
spindle of any path.
M29= Rigid tapping mode
[S]=Speed of rotation of spindle in tapping (rpm).
Values allowed: (from 0 to 1000).
[P]=Selection of the spindle to use in rigid tapping mode.
P11 = main spindle of path 1 P12 = motorized spindles of path 1
P21 = main spindle of path 2 P22 = motorized spindles of path 2
Note: the new implementation entails the use of the new fanuc fixed cycle for tapping (G88.2), with
which it is possible to tap with all the axes (X, Z, Y).
The programming sequence is slightly different and is as follows:
1 select the working plane perpendicular to the axis with which you wish to tap, i.e. G17 (plane
XY), G18 (plane ZX), G19 (plane YZ)
2 program the fixed tapping cycle G88.2 specifying the axis X, Y, Z with which to tap and the feed
F. Naturally, all the other parameters already present with the fixed cycles G84 and G88 are also
valid.
3 close the fixed cycle with G80
Note: the G80 function besides cancelling the fixed fanuc cycle G88.2, also cancels M29 S P and stops
the rotation of the spindle.
Note: before programming the rigid tapping mode (M29 S P), it is necessary to program the spindle
rotation command (M3, M4 S P) with which the type of thread is defined (right with M3, left with M4)
1 M19 B0 P11; Orientation at 0°, main spindle path 1
2 M3 S500 P12; CW rotation command, motorized spindles path 1
3 M29 S500 P12; Enable rigid tapping for motorized spindles path 1
4 G95; mm/rev mode
5 G19; Select plane YZ
6 G88.2 X12 F1 Execute first rigid tapping with X axis
7 M19 B120 P11; Orientation at 120°, main spindle path 1
8 X12; Execute second rigid tapping with X axis
9 G80; Cancel fixed cycle, M29 S P + stop spindle
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
Denomination: M30 d
c ISO code
Functionality: Part program end and return to start
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d path 3
c path 4
d
c a all paths
d
c
c d path 3
c path 4
d
d
c d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
h
k d modal
c
k at block end
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
d reset d emergency
c c alarm
d and d ...
c
Also suspended by:
The M30 auxiliary function terminates the program, returns to the start and stops the cycle.
To restart cycle execution it's necessary to press the Cycle start push button.
It only effects the path in which it is programmed; if several programs are enabled at the same time
wait for synchronisation between the paths before carrying out the program end and return to start.
1 M03 S300; M203 S300; M303 S300;
2 G4 X2; G4X2; G4X2;
3 M05 G4X2; M205 G4X2; M305 G4X2;
4 M04 S200; M204 S200; M304 S200;
5 M30; M30; M30;
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
Denomination: M33 d
c ISO code
Functionality: Enable main spindle rotation with collet open slide 1
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d path 3
c d path 4
c c all paths
a
d
d d path 2
c d path 3
c d path 4
d d concerned device
c
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
k c modal
c
k at block end
k
j a self-cancelling
d
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c a alarm
d
c and a main spindle collet closure path1
d
c
Also suspended by:
The M33 auxiliary function enables the main spindle rotation in path 1 with the collet open.
It also allows the main spindle opening (path 1) even when in rotation.
It can be programmed in any path.
NB: it is self-cancelling: at collet closure it's necessary to again program the function to be able
to reopen the collet with the spindle in rotation.
1 M37; M37; M37;
2 M03 S500 G4 X4; M03 S500 G4 X4; M03 S500 G4 X4;
3 M33; M33; M33;
4 M36; M36; M36;
5 M03 S500 G4 X4; M03 S500 G4 X4; M03 S500 G4 X4;
6 G4 X4; G4 X4; G4 X4;
7 M37; M37; M37;
8 M01; M01; M01;
9 M30; M30; M30;
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
Denomination: M34 d
c ISO code
Functionality: Blocks axes override value at 100% for the feed in progress (G1)
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d path 3
c c path 4
d a all paths
d
c
c d path 3
c c path 4
d a path where programmed
d
c d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
k c modal
a
c
k at block end
k
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c c alarm
a
d and a M35
d
c
Also suspended by:
The M34 auxiliary function blocks the axes override at 100% for the feed in progress (G1).
It only affects the path in which it is programmed.
When the M34 function is enabled, with the override selector in the positions from 1 to 120%, the
feed in progress is forced to 100%; by positioning the selector at 0% the feed is stopped in any
event.
1 G0 Z10; G0 Z10; G0 Z10; Rapid positioning
2 G1 G94 F500 Z40; G1 G94 F500 Z40; G1 G94 F500 Z40; Feed in progress adjustable by the override selector
3 M34; M34; M34; Blocks at 100% the axes override in progress (G1)
4 G1 G94 F500 Z60; G1 G94 F500 Z60; G1 G94 F500 Z60; Feed in progress not adjustable by the override
selector
5 M35; M35; M35; Cancels M34
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
Denomination: M35 d
c ISO code
Functionality: Cancel M34
Arguments:
Allowed values:
Programmable from: c d path 1 d
c path 2 d
c path 3
path 4d
c c all paths
a
d
Referred to: cd path 1 d
c path 2 d
c path 3
path 4d
a
d d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
a
k a modal
d
c
k at block end
d
k
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
d reset d emergency
c d alarm
c and a M34
d
c
Also suspended by:
The M35 auxiliary function cancels the M34 function and re-enables the selector of the axes override
for the feed in progress (G1).
It only affects the path in which it is programmed.
1 G0 Z10; G0 Z10; G0 Z10; Rapid positioning
2 G1 G94 F500 Z40; G1 G94 F500 Z40; G1 G94 F500 Z40; Feed in progress adjustable by the override selector
3 M34; M34; M34; Blocks at 100% the axes override in progress (G1)
4 G1 G94 F500 Z60; G1 G94 F500 Z60; G1 G94 F500 Z60; Feed in progress not adjustable by the override
selector
5 M35; M35; M35; Cancels M34
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
Denomination: M36 d
c ISO code
Functionality: Collet opening of main spindle slide 1
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d path 3
c path 4
d
c a all paths
d
c
d d path 2
c d path 3
c path 4
d
c d path where programmed
c d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
k d modal
c
k at block end
k
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
d reset d emergency
c c alarm
d and d ...
c
Also suspended by:
The M36 auxiliary function controls the collet opening of themain spindle in path 1.
It can be programmed from any path.
NB: the function terminates (or rather the CNC processes the subsequent part program instructions)
when the closed collet microswitch is not intercepted.
1 M37; M37; M37;
2 M03 S500 G4 X4; M03 S500 G4 X4; M03 S500 G4 X4;
3 M33; M33; M33;
4 M36; M36; M36;
5 G4 X4; G4 X4; G4 X4;
6 M37; M37; M37;
7 M01; M01; M01;
8 M99; M99; M99;
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS
This is displayed if the collet is open when entering auto. mode, or spindle rotation has
1040 OPEN COLLET
been programmed without permission.
1041 COLLET OPENING ANOMALY The collet does not open at command or microswitch not intercepted.
The M function must be programmed before the collet can be opened with the spindle in
1043 COLLET OPENING NOT ENABLED
rotation.

Auxiliary functions
Denomination: M37 d
c ISO code
Functionality: Collet closing of main spindle slide 1
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d path 3
c path 4
d
c c all paths
a
d
d d path 2
c d path 3
c path 4
d
d d
c concerned device
k at block start
j c at CNC start-up
k d modal
c
h at block end
k
k
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
d reset d emergency
c d alarm
c and d ...
c
Also suspended by:
The auxiliary M37 function controls the collet closing of the main spindle in path 1.
Note: The function terminates (or rather the CNC processes the subsequent part program instructions)
when the closed collet microswitch is intercepted. (except for Sprint 42 linear)
1 M36; M36; M36;
2 M03 S500 G4 X4; M03 S500 G4 X4; M03 S500 G4 X4;
3 M33; M33; M33;
4 M36; M36; M36;
5 G4 X4; G4 X4; G4 X4;
6 M37; M37; M37;
7 M01; M01; M01;
8 M99; M99; M99;
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS
1042 COLLET CLOSURE ANOMALY The collet does not close at command or microswitch not intercepted

Auxiliary functions
Denomination: M37 B d
c ISO code
Functionality: Collet closing of main spindle path 1 during learning phase
Arguments: B
Allowed values: 1500...2500
c d path 3
c c path 4
d a all paths
d
c
d d path 2
c d path 3
c c path 4
c d
c concerned device
k at block start
j c at CNC start-up
h
k c modal
c
h at block end
k
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
d reset d emergency
c c alarm
d and d ...
c
Also suspended by:
Adjustment procedure
The adjustment of the collet must be carried out every time that the collet is replaced. The sequence
of operations to carry out is as follows:
1 Select the MDI working mode

2 Open the collet
3 Rotate the ring nut until the tooth is positioned on the cylindrical band of the cam
4 Block the dowel
5 Replace the collet (for the collet replacement instructions, see the specific instructions con-
tained in the assembly manual)
6 Close the collet by programming in MDI the function M37 B.... (where the B value indicates the
value of the closing force desired, expressed in daN. This must be between 1,500 and 2,500).
7 View the user settings page of the collet closure system
8 Ascertain that the point indicating the position of collet closed is inside the green area. If
this is not the case, command the collet to open, loosen the dowel and rotate the ring nut in a
clockwise or counter-clockwise direction depending on whether you wish to position the "D" point
more to the left or right of the green area. Close the dowel and repeat operations 6 and 7. Once
the adjustment is finished, it is possible to use the M37 function without the B argument.
For further information, refer to the motorized collet adjustment procedure.
1 M37B1600; M37B1800; M37B2000;
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS
The value of the B parameter programmed for learning the closure level of the motorized
2015 MOTOR TORQUE OPENED COLLET
collet (function M37Bc) is erroneous (not between 1500 and 2500)

Auxiliary functions
Denomination: M44 d
c ISO code
Functionality: Threading with unloading chute
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d path 3
c path 4 c all paths
a
dd
c
c d path 3
c path 4 c path where programmed
a
dd
c d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
k a modal
d
c
k at block end
k
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c a alarm
d
c and a M45
d
c
Also suspended by:
The M44 auxiliary function is used to carry out the thread exit at 90° and in the case in which the
thread ends with an under cut.
This function only effects the path in which it is programmed.
1 G0 Z45 X8 M44; G0 Z45 X8 M44; G0 Z45 X8 M44;
2 G78 Z-15 X7.8 R-0.4; G78 Z-15 X7.8 R-0.4; G78 Z-15 X7.8 R-0.4;
3 X7.7; X7.7; X7.7;
4 X7.6; X7.6; X7.6;
5 X7.5; X7.5; X7.5;
6 X7.4; X7.4; X7.4;
7 G0 X120 Z30; G0 X120 Z30; G0 X120 Z30;
8 M30; M30; M30;
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
Denomination: M45 d
c ISO code
Functionality: Threading without unloading chute
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d path 3
c path 4 a all paths
d
cd
c
c d path 3
c path 4 a path where programmed
d
cd
c d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j d at CNC start-up
a
k a modal
d
c
k at block end
a
k
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
d reset d emergency
c c alarm
d and a M44
d
c
Also suspended by:
The M45 auxiliary function is used to carry out the thread exit at 45° and in the case in which the
thread does not end with an under cut.
NB: this mode is already operational at CNC start-up.
1 G0 Z45 X8 M45; G0 Z45 X8 M45; G0 Z45 X8 M45;
2 G78 Z-15 X7.8 R-0.4; G78 Z-15 X7.8 R-0.4; G78 Z-15 X7.8 R-0.4;
3 X7.7; X7.7; X7.7;
4 X7.6; X7.6; X7.6;
5 X7.5; X7.5; X7.5;
6 X7.4; X7.4; X7.4;
7 G0 X120 Z30; G0 X120 Z30; G0 X120 Z30;
8 M30; M30; M30;
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions

c ISO code
Functionality: Axes accurate stop
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d
c path 3 path 4
d
c c all paths
a
d
c d
c path 3 path 4
d
a
d d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
k a modal
d
c
k at block end
k
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c a alarm
d
c and a M47
d
c
Also suspended by:
The M46 auxiliary function is used to carry out accurate part contour machining.
With this function the CNC waits until the movement block is completed before starting the next one.
1 M3 S3000;
2 T0202 G0 X12 Y0 Z1;
3 G1 G95 F1 Z-20;
4 G0 X20;
5 Z1;
6 T0303 G0 X11 Y0;
7 M46;
8 G1 G95 F0.05 Z-10;
9 X9 Z-12;
10 Z-13;
11 X11 Z-15;
12 X5 Z-20;
13 G0 X20;
14 M47;
15 ...
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
Denomination: M47 d
c ISO code
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c path 2 d
c path 3 path 4
d
c a all paths
d
c
c path 2 d
c path 3 path 4
d
d
c d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
k a modal
d
c
k at block end
k
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
d reset d emergency
c c alarm
d and a M46
d
c
Also suspended by:
The M47 auxiliary function is used to cancel the M46 function.

With this function the CNC resets the standard passage condition between one movement block and the
next.
This function effects the path in which it is programmed.
1 M3 S3000;
2 T0202 G0 X12 Y0 Z1;
3 G1 G95 F1 Z-20;
4 G0 X20;
5 Z1;
6 T0303 G0 X11 Y0;
7 M46;
8 G1 G95 F0.05 Z-10;
9 X9 Z-12;
10 Z-13;
11 X11 Z-15;
12 X5 Z-20;
13 G0 X20;
14 M47;
15 ...
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
Denomination: M50 d ISO code

c
Functionality: Speed and phase synchronism between main spindle of path 1 and main spindle of path 2
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d path 3
c d path 4
c c all paths
a
d
Referred to: cd path 1 a path 2
d
c d path 3
c d path 4
c
h
k
j at block start at CNC start-up
d
c k alone in the block
j c modal
a
d a
d
c suspended by cycle stop
k at block end
j c upon pressing RESET button
d h also with other instr.
k
j d self-cancelling
d
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c c alarm
a
d and a M51
d
c
Also suspended by:
The M50 auxiliary function enables the speed and phase synchronism between the main spindle path 1
and the main spindle path 2.
It can be programmed from all paths but always refers to the 2 spindles indicated.
The main spindle path 2 synchronises with the main spindle path 1 speed with a displacement (in
degrees) that can be set in the user page [SPINDLES ANGULAR DISPLACEMENT].
Always check and correctly set the displacement when using hexagonal bars.
Note: This is a modal function and while enabled it is not possible to operate any other functions
referring to the main spindle path 2 (rotation, stop, positioning, Cs axis mode, tapping).
1 M03 S500 G4 X4; M03 S500 G4 X4; M03 S500 G4 X4;
2 M50; M50; M50;
3 G4 X4; G4 X4; G4 X4;
4 M03 S1000 G4 X4; M03 S1000 G4 X4; M03 S1000 G4 X4;
5 M51; M51; M51;
6 M01; M01; M01;
7 M99; M99; M99;
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS
1020 PROGRAMMING ERROR A function was programmed committing an error

Auxiliary functions
Denomination: M51 d ISO code

c
Functionality: Stop of speed and phase synchronism between main spindle path 1 and main spindle path 2
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d path 3
c c path 4
d a all paths
d
c
d
c d path 3
c c path 4
c d concerned device
c
h
k
j at block start at CNC start-up
a
d
c k alone in the block
j c modal
a
d d
k at block end
a
k
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
d reset d emergency
c c alarm
d and a M50
d
c
Also suspended by:
The auxiliary M51 function disables the speed and phase synchronism function.
It can be programed from all paths but always refers to the counter spindle.
If the main spindle of path 2 was in rotation before being synchronised with M50 function, the pre-
vious status is resumed by programming the M51 function.
Note: This is a modal function and it is enabled at CNC start-up.
1 M03 S500 G4 X4; M03 S500 G4 X4; M03 S500 G4 X4;
2 M50; M50; M50;
3 G4 X4; G4 X4; G4 X4;
4 M03 S1000 G4 X4; M03 S1000 G4 X4; M03 S1000 G4 X4;
5 M51; M51; M51;
6 M01; M01; M01;
7 M99; M99; M99;
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
Denomination: M58 d
c ISO code
Functionality: Disable standard coolant flow control
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d path 3
c path 4
d
c c all paths
a
d
d d path 2
c d path 3
c path 4
d
d d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
k a modal
d
c
k at block end
k
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c a alarm
d
c and a M59
d
c
Also suspended by:
The auxiliary function M58 disables the flowmeter control applied to the standard coolant, or CDS if
the machine flowmeters are used.
This function is used in order to avoid the generation of flowmeter alarms in the event that the coo-
lant exits from tools applied, but with a delivery less than that detectable by the flowmeter.
1 ...
2 M58;
3 M8;
4 G1 G94 F550 Z20;
5 M9;
6 M59;
7 T0101 G0 X20 Z0;
8 ...
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Functionality: Deactivates/reactivates control of configurable flowmeters
Arguments: P
Allowed values: -10c+10
d d path 2
c d path 3
c c path 4
d d all paths
c
c d path 3
c c path 4
c d
c concerned device
k at block start
j c at CNC start-up
h
k c modal
a
c
h at block end
k
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c c alarm
d and d
c
Also suspended by:
macro M58 P[1-10] to deactivate/reactivate control of 10 configurable flow meters.
M58 [P]
[P]= n° of flowmeter to deactivate/reactivate
P1 =flowmeter 1 OFF P-1= flowmeter 1 ON

P3 =flowmeter 3 OFF P-3=flowmeter 3 ON
P10=flowmeter 10 OFF P-10=flowmeter 10 ON
P0=restores control of all flowmeters
Note: M58 without topic P deactivates control of flowmeter 1 standard system (M58/M59)
Note: RESET pushbutton resets control of all flowmeters.
1 …
2 G304 P1 activates cooling utility 1 cds
3 ….
4 G304 P-1 deactivates cooling utility 1 cds
5 M58 P2 deactivates cooling control flowmeter 2
6 G304 P2 activates cooling utility 2 cds
7 …
8 G304 P-2 deactivates cooling utlity 2 cds
9 M58 P-2 reactivates cooling control flowmeter 2
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS
3020 PROGRAMMING ERROR entered subject/value not allowed

Auxiliary functions
Denomination: M59 d
c ISO code
Functionality: Enable standard coolant flow control
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d path 3
c path 4
d
c c all paths
a
d
d d path 2
c d path 3
c path 4
d
d d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
a
k a modal
d
c
k at block end
d
k
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
d reset a emergency
d
c a alarm
d
c and a M58
d
c
Also suspended by:
The M59 auxiliary function resets the flowmeter control applied to the standard coolant, or CDS if
the machine flowmeters are used.
This function is used whenever the flowmeter control has been previously disabled and you wish to
enable it again; otherwise it is not necessary, because at the start-up of the CNC the flow control
is already enabled by default.
1 ...
2 M58;
3 M8;
4 G1 G94 F550 Z20;
5 M9;
6 M59;
7 T0101 G0 X20 Z0;
8 ...
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
Denomination: M60 d
c ISO code
Functionality: Wait for set spindle/s speed
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d path 3
c path 4
d
c a all paths
d
c
Referred to: c
d path 1 d path 2
c d path 3
c path 4
d
d
c d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
k a modal
d
c
k at block end
k
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c c alarm
a
d and a M61
d
c
Also suspended by:
The M60 auxiliary function blocks the feed of the axes in the path until all the spindles in rotation
have reached the programmed speed.
It only effects the path in which it is programmed.
If the feeds in G95 (mm/rev) are referred to a spindle in another path, the M60 function will block
the feed in the path in which it is programmed until the reference spindle reaches the programmed
speed.
1 G0 Z100; Rapid positioning of axis Z1 at the absolute quota Z=100
2 M60; Enable M60 mode: await revs reached
3 M03 S6000; Main spindle path 1 command, CW rotation at 6,000 rpm
4 G1 G94 F5000 Z70; Axes blocked until the main spindle path 1 reaches 6,000 rpm
5 M05; Stop rotation, main spindle path 1
8 M61; Cancel M60
8 M61; Cancel M60
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
Denomination: M61 d
c ISO code
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c path 2 d
c path 3
path 4
d
c c all paths
a
d
c path 2 d
c path 3
path 4
d
a
d d
c concerned device
k at block start
j c at CNC start-up
a
k a modal
d
c
h at block end
k
d
k
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
d reset d emergency
c d alarm
c and a M60
d
c
Also suspended by:
The M61 auxiliary function cancels the M60 function.

Note: If programmed together with other instructions it starts when all the block movements are com-
pleted.
8 M61; Cancel M60
8 M61; Cancel M60
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
Denomination: M62-M63-M64 d
c ISO code
Functionality: Automatic recovery bush controls
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d path 3
c d
cpath 4 a all paths
d
c
c d path 3
c d
c d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
k a modal
d
c
k at block end
k
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
d reset d emergency
c c alarm
d and a one of the other
d
c 2 function of this device
Also suspended by:
M62: Bush opening control (always with high pressure)

M63: Bush closing control (with low pressure)
M64: Bush closing control (with high pressure)
The purpose of this device is to control bush closing so as to maintain the bar under friction when
not perfectly straightened
1 M36; Main spindle collet opening
2 G0 Z40; Quick reload
3 M37; Main spindle collet closing
4 M62; Bush opening (to ease bar quick positioning)
5 G0 Z20; Bar quick positioning in work area
6 M63; Bush low pressure closing (for quick G1 work)
7 T0202 X20 Y0; Roughing
8 M64; Bush high pressure closing (for slow G1 work)
9 T0303 X19.5 Y0; Finishing
10
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
Denomination: M65 d
c ISO code
Functionality: Request bar change (loader with DMG interface)
Arguments:
Allowed values:
d d path 2
c d path 3
c d path 4
c all paths
d
c
d d path 2
c d path 3
c d path 4
c path where programmed
d
c
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
d h alone in the block
k
j a modal
d
c
k at block end
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
d reset d emergency
c a alarm
d
c and a M37 "collet closed signal”
d
c
Also suspended by:
When the bar is terminated (variable CNC #1000=1 - see programming example) by means of this function
a message is sent to the bar loader regarding the need to carry out the bar change cycle. The bar
change operations begin in correspondence with function M69.
The bar change subprogram remains stopped in correspondence with the M69 function ("bar feed
request") until the "bar present" signal is enabled again (contacts closed); then the part program
continues the machining, closes the collet (function M37) and carries out the facing of the bar.
Note: the memory of the M65 function "bar change request" cancels itself after the operation of clo-
sing the collet is concluded.
Pressing the stop cycle key and/or opening the door during the bar change phase will generate an
alarm and interrupt the bar change phase.
1 O0001 (PROG.PRINC.) main program
2 ...
3 N10; start part program label
4 IF[#1000EQ0]GOTO if the bar is not finished, reload
5 M98 P99; the bar Is finished: recall bar change subprogram
6 N100; skip bar change phase label
7 M33; collet opening allowed with spindles in rotation
8 M36; collet opening
9 M69; bar feed
10 G4 U0.5; wait time
11 G0 Z0.2; reload
12 M37; collet closing
13 ... machining
14 M99 P10; skip start part program
15
16 O99(CAMBIO BARRA) bar change subprogram
17 ...
18 M03 S100; main spindle rotation
19 M65; bar change request
22 M69; start of bar change phase, program stopped until end
of bar change
24 ... phase of bar facing
25 M99; end of subprogram
ALARMS
1059 BAR CHANGEOVER INTERRUPTED The bar change phase has been interrupted with the reset key

Auxiliary functions
Denomination: M69 d
c ISO code
Functionality: Bar feed (loader with DMG interface)
Arguments:
Allowed values:
d d path 2
c d path 3
c path 4
d
c d all paths
c
d d path 2
c d path 3
c path 4
d
c d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
h
k a modal
d
d
c
k at block end
j d self-cancelling
d
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c c alarm
d and a collet closed
d
c
Also suspended by:
The M69 function enables the pushing of the bar by the loader.
Pushing by the loader may be enabled only when the collet is open; it is disabled as soon as the ope-
ration of closing the collet finishes.
In the event that this is preceded by the M65 function "bar change request", the M69 function allows
the start-up of the bar change phase by the loader.
Pressing the stop cycle key and the opening of the work area door during a phase other than that of
the bar change causes the suspension of the respective signal for the loader until the work cycle is
started up again.
Pressing the stop cycle key and/or opening the door during the bar change phase will generate an
alarm and interrupt the bar change phase.
1 O0001 (PROG.PRINC.) main program
2 ...
3 N10; start part program label
4 IF[#100EQ0]GOTO if the bar is not finished, reload
5 M98 P99; the bar Is finished: recall bar change subprogram
6 N100; skip bar change phase label
9 M69; bar feed
10 G4 U0.5; wait time
11 G0 Z0.2; reload
13 ... machining
14 M99 P10; skip start part program
15
16 O99(CAMBIO BARRA) bar change subprogram
17 ...
18 M03 S100; main spindle rotation
19 M65; bar change request
22 M69; start of bar change phase, program stopped until end
of bar change
24 ... phase of bar facing
25 M99; end of subprogram
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
Denomination: M73 d
c ISO code
Functionality: Rotating tools path 1 - CW rotation
Arguments: S
c d path 3
c path 4
d
c a all paths
d
c
d d path 2
c d path 3
c path 4
d
c c concerned device
d
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
k d modal
d
c
k at block end
k
j d self-cancelling
d
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c a alarm
d
c and a M74 S*** - M75
d
c
Also suspended by:
"The M73 auxiliary function controls the clockwise rotation of the rotating tools in path 1.
with the number of revs stated using the S*** code.
It can be programmed from any path and always refers to the rotating tools in path 1.
Function arguments:

When programming any spindle rotation function it is compulsory to specify the ""S"" code followed
by the no. of revs in the same function block.
If the ""S"" code is not specified the cycle is stopped and alarm 1021 will appear.
If ""S""=0 is specified the spindle torque is set at 0 revs.
The maximum number of revs that can be specified depends on the lathe model.
Note: The revolutions programmed refer to the motor. The various tools rotate with their own number
of revolutions, which depends on the transmission ratio that links them to the motor."
1 M73 S500; M73 S500; M73 S500;
2 G4 X1; G4 X1; G4 X1;
3 M73 S1000; M73 S1000; M73 S1000;
4 M01; M01; M01;
5 M99; M99; M99;
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
Denomination: M74 d
c ISO code
Functionality: Rotating tools path 1 - CCW rotation
Arguments: S
c d path 3
c path 4
d
c a all paths
d
c
d d path 2
c d path 3
c path 4
d
c c concerned device
d
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
k d modal
d
c
k at block end
k
j d self-cancelling
d
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c c alarm
a
d and a M73 S*** - M75
d
c
Also suspended by:
"The M74 auxiliary function controls the counter clockwise rotation of the rotating tools in path 1.
with the number of revs stated using the S*** code.
Function arguments:

When programming any spindle rotation function it is compulsory to specify the ""S"" code followed
If the ""S"" code is not specified the cycle is stopped and alarm 1021 will appear.
If ""S""=0 is specified the spindle torque is set at 0 revs.
Note: The revolutions programmed refer to the motor. The various tools rotate with their own number
of revolutions, which depends on the transmission ratio that links them to the motor."
1 M74 S500; M74 S500; M74 S500;
2 G4 X1; G4 X1; G4 X1;
3 M74 S1000; M74 S1000; M74 S1000;
4 M01; M01; M01;
5 M99; M99; M99;
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
Denomination: M75 d
c ISO code
Functionality: Rotating tools slide 1 - STOP rotation
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d path 3
c path 4
d
c a all paths
d
c
d d path 2
c d path 3
c path 4
d
c d
c concerned device
k at block start
j c at CNC start-up
a
k d modal
d
c
h at block end
k
d
k
j d self-cancelling
d
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c a alarm
d
c and a M73 S*** - M74
d
c S***
Also suspended by:
The M75 auxiliary function stops rotation of the rotating tools in path 1.
The torque is removed only when the spindle is stopped.
If programmed in a block together with movements it will carry out the stop function when all the
movements programmed in the block are completed.
1 M73 S500; M73 S500; M73 S500;
2 G4 X2; G4 X2; G4 X2;
3 M75; M75; M75;
4 G4 X2; G4 X2; G4 X2;
5 M74 S1000; M74 S1001; M74 S1002;
6 G4 X2; G4 X2; G4 X2;
7 M75; M75; M75;
8 M01; M01; M01;
9 M99; M99; M99;
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
Denomination: M80 d
c ISO code
Functionality: The slide feed, in G95 mode, refers to the master spindle in actual path.
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d path 3
c c path 4
d a all paths
d
c
c d path 3
c c path 4
d
c
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
a
h
k c modal
a
d
k at block end
d
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
d reset d emergency
c c alarm
d and a M81 - M82 - M83 - M84
d
c
Also suspended by:
The M80 auxiliary function must be programmed alone in the block.

If enabled it refers the feeds of the path, in G95, to the revs of the spindle enabled in the path in
which this function is programmed.
Note: Each path is already in M80 mode at CNC start-up.
Note: When both spindles are enabled in the path concerned, i.e. both the main spindle and the spin-
dle for the motorized tools are in rotation, the feeds in G95 always refer to the main spindle.
1 G0 Z20; Rapid positioning Z1 axis at absolute level Z20
2 M03 S800; Main spindle path 1 command CW rotation at 800 rpm
3 M80; Enable mode M80: feed G95 path 1 referred to the ena-
bled spindle of path 1
4 G1 G95 F1 Z60; Machining in G95: advanced speed = 800mm/min
5 Note: The feed refers to the main spindle path 1
6 M73 S500; Motorized tools path 1 command CW rotation at 500 rpm
8 Note: The feed refers to the main spindle path 1 (see
description note)
9 M05; Stop rotation main spindle path 1
11 Note: The feed refers to the motorized tools path 1 (see
description note)
description note)
description note)
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
Denomination: M81 d
c ISO code
Functionality: The slide feed, in G95 mode, refers to the master spindle in path 1
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d path 3
c d path 4
c a all paths
d
c
c d path 3
c d path 4
d
c
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
h
k c modal
a
d
k at block end
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c a alarm
d
c and a M80 - M82 - M83 - M84
d
c
Also suspended by:

If enabled it refers the feeds of the path, in G95, to the revs of the spindle enabled in path 1.
Note: The M81 function programmed in path 1 has the same meaning as the M80 function.
description note)
description note)
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
Denomination: M82 d
c ISO code
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d path 3
c c path 4
d a all paths
d
c
c d path 3
c c path 4
d
c
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
h
k c modal
a
d
k at block end
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c c alarm
a
d and a M80 - M81 - M83 - M84
d
c
Also suspended by:

If enabled it refers the feeds of the path, in G95, to the revs of the spindle enabled in the path 2.
description note)
description note)
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
Denomination: M83 d
c ISO code
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d path 3
c d path 4
c a all paths
d
c
c d path 3
c d path 4
d
c
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
h
k c modal
a
d
k at block end
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c a alarm
d
c and a M80 - M81 - M82 - M84
d
c
Also suspended by:

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
Denomination: M84 d
c ISO code
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d path 3
c c path 4
d a all paths
d
c
c d path 3
c c path 4
d
c
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
h
k c modal
a
d
k at block end
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c c alarm
a
d and a M80 - M81 - M82 - M83
d
c
Also suspended by:

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
Name: M90 d
c ISO code
Function: Part Program: Immediate stop with respective alarm.
Topics:
Admitted values:
Programmable from: c d path 1 c path 2
d d path 3
c d path 4
c c all paths
d
a
Referred to: cd path 1 c path 2
d d path 3
c d path 4
c c programmed path
d
a c
d concerned device
Operative:
Programmable: Operation: Hold & Restart:
h at beginning of
k
j d
c at CNC power-on
after pressing RESET k
j alone in block a
c
d modal c
d suspended after cycle stop
block d
c
h with other instructions
k
j c
d self-clearing c
d resume after cycle start
k at end of block
j
Cancelled by: a
d
c reset a
d
c emergency stop c
d alarm and: c
d ...
Suspended by: d
c
Resumed by: d
c
The M90 auxiliary function immediately stops the cycle and generates the following alarm for the
programmed path:
1032 P.P: STOP NOW
Function M90 belongs to the part program management group (M90-M91-M92).

The part program must be structured so that the function is only run when required and this is
possible by using conditioned goto instruction with variable queries (e.g. IF[#100 EQ 10]GOTO100).
List of variable customs:

#100..#199 => for personal use by customer (cleared when reset is pressed)
#500..#599 => for personal use by customer (not cleared when reset is pressed)
#1011..#1020 => correspond to supplementary inputs from 1 to 10
the state may be 0 or 1
Practical example:
- the machine must be connected to an external device (chiller) to cool the coolant. This devices
communicates its on or off state (0=OFF; 1=ON) using a signal (24V).
The device can be managed in the part program in the following manner by wiring this signal to
supplementary input 1 of the machine.
M95; - stop buffering the following blocks

IF[#1011 EQ1]GOTO20; - se #1011=1 i.e. SUPPLEMENTARY INPUT =1 means that the
M90; device is on, the query is true and
N20; go to line 20; otherwise if it is false #1011=0 does not
go to line 20 thus running block M90 which
immediately stops the cycle with respective alarm.
1 IF[#1011 EQ 1]GOTO2 if supplementary input = 1 go to line 2
2 #100=[#100+1]; otherwise increase #100 by 1
3 N2; line 2
4 IF[#100 NE3]GOTO3; if #100 other than 3 go to line 3
5 M90; otherwise run M90 because for 3 cycles #1011=0
6 N3; line 3
7 ..
8 M1; optional program stop
9 M99; end of program, subprogram
10
11
12
13
14
ALARMS
N. Text Description
1032 P.P.: STOP NOW function M90 was intentionally run from the part program

Auxiliary functions
Name: M91 c
d ISO code
Function: Part Program: stop at end of cycle with respective alarm
Topics:
Admitted values:
Programmable from: d c path 1 c path 2
d d path 3
c d path 4
c a all paths
c
d
Referred to: dc path 1 c path 2
d d path 3
c d path 4
c a programmed path
c
d c
d concerned device
Operative:
h at beginning of
k
j d
c at CNC power-on
j alone in block c
d
a modal c
block d
c
k
j c
d self-clearing c
k at end of block
j
Cancelled by: a
d
c reset a
d
c emergency stop c
d alarm and: c
d ...
Suspended by: d
c
Resumed by: d
c
The M91 auxiliary function stops at end of cycle and generates the following alarm for the programmed
path:
1033 P.P: END OF CYCLE STOP


Practical example:

IF[#1011 EQ1]GOTO20; - se #1011=1 i.e. SUPPLEMENTARY INPUT =1 means that the
go to line 20 thus running block M91 which
immediately stops the cycle with respective alarm.
3 N2; line 2
6 N3; line 3
7 ..
10
11
12
13
14
ALARMS
N. Text Description
1033 P.P.: END OF CYCLE STOP function M91 was intentionally run from the part program

Auxiliary functions
Name: M92 d
c ISO code
Function: Part Program: message/indication on
Topics:
Admitted values:
d d path 3
c c
d path 4 d
a
c all paths
d d path 3
c c
d path 4 d
c programmed path c
d concerned device
Operative:
h at beginning of
k
j d
c at CNC power-on
j alone in block a
c
d modal c
block d
c
k
j c
d self-clearing c
k at end of block
j
Cancelled by: a
d
c reset a
d
c emergency stop c
d alarm and: c
d ...
Suspended by: d
c
Resumed by: d
c
Auxiliary function M92 activates the following message/indication for the operator from any path on
which it is programmed:
2010 P.P: MESSAGES-INDICATION


Practical example:

IF[#1011 EQ1]GOTO20; - se #1011=1 i.e. SUPPLEMENTARY INPUT=1 means that the
go to line 20 thus running block M92 which activates
the respective indication message.
3 N2; line 2
6 N3; line 3
7 ..
10
11
12
13
14
ALARMS
N. Text Description
2010 P.P.: MESSAGE-INDICATION function M92 was intentionally run from the part program

Auxiliary functions
Denomination: M95 d
c ISO code
Functionality: Part Program: stop buffering of next blocks
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d path 3
c c path 4
d all paths
a
d
c
d
c d path 3
c c path 4
d path where programmed
d
c d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
k
j a modal
d
c
k at block end
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c c alarm
d
a and: d .....
c
Also suspended by: c
d
Also reactivated by: c
d
Auxiliary function M95 stops buffering of the next blocks.

Normally the part-program reads and buffers several blocks in advance of the one being executed
(highlighted by the yellow background of the current program block).
Buffering of the next blocks automatically reactivates on execution of the block following M95.
It is important to program this function for example before reading the status of the auxiliary
inputs through the custom macro variables (#1011-#1020).
Practical example:
Supposing we have to control an external spring loaded piece expeller device that has a microswitch
for controlling position reached(output n°1 + input n°1).
M600; CN OUTPUT n°1 -> box forward command)

G4X1; (wait 1 sec before checking micro)
M95; (stop part program buffering)
IF [#1011 EQ1]GOTO20; (read input n°1 -> check micro if=1 ok go to line 20)
M90; (generates immediate cycle stop + alarm)
N20;
M601; (OFF output n°1 -> return box back under spring force)
In the above example, if M95 were not present, block "IF[#1011 EQ1]GOTO20" would be executed at the
moment it was buffered (given that it is not a movement block or M function) with the possibility of
being false if block M60 has not been executed. As a result function M90 would be executed even if in
reality the input (24V) was just about to switch to "1".
With function M95 the input can be controlled correctly.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
Denomination: M98 d
c ISO code
Functionality: Subprogram call
Arguments: P
Allowed values: 1÷7999
c d
c path 3 path 4
d
c a all paths
d
c
c d
c path 3 path 4
d
d
c d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
h
k d modal
c
k at block end
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
d reset d emergency
c d alarm
c and d
c
Also suspended by:
The M98 P*** auxiliary function is used to call a subprogram.

Function arguments:
[P]: subprogram number to be called (compulsory)

Argument "P" defines the subprogram number to be recalled.
1 O1000 O1000 O1000
2 M03 S100; M03 S100; M03 S100;
3 G0 Z50; G0 Z50; G0 Z50;
4 M98 P1001 M98 P1001 M98 P1001
5 O1001 O1001 O1001
6 M05; M05; M05;
7 M73S500; M73S500; M73S500;
8 G1 G94 F1 X20; G1 G94 F1 X20; G1 G94 F1 X20;
9 M99; M99; M99;
10 G0 Z80; G0 Z80; G0 Z80;
11 M01; M01; M01;
12 M99; M99; M99;
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
Denomination: M99 d
c ISO code
Functionality: Subprogram end / undonditional jump to block N specified by P
Arguments: P
Allowed values: 1÷7999
c d path 3
c c path 4
d a all paths
d
c
c d path 3
c c path 4
d
c d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
h
k c modal
c
k at block end
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
d reset d emergency
c c alarm
d and d ...
c
Also suspended by:
The M99 P*** auxiliary function is used at the program/subprogram end to specify the termination of
the program/subprogram itself and to specify, by means of argument P, the N address of the program
block to jump.
Function arguments:
[P]: block number to be jumped (optional)

When the "P" argument is specified this defines the block number, which the program will jump
unconditionally.
When the "P" argument is not specified the auxiliary function defines the duration of a subpro-
gram/program.
This function is useful at the end of the main program (after M01, without specifying the "P" code):
in this case the program will restart from the first block.
1 O1000 O1000 O1000
2 M03 S100; M03 S100; M03 S100;
3 N10 G0 Z50; N10 G0 Z50; N10 G0 Z50;
4 M98 P1001 M98 P1002 M98 P1003
5 O1001 O1001 O1001
6 M05; M05; M05;
7 M73S500; M73S500; M73S500;
8 G1 G94 F1 X20; G1 G94 F1 X20; G1 G94 F1 X20;
9 M99; M99; M99;
10 G0 Z80; G0 Z80; G0 Z80;
11 M01; M01; M01;
12 M99 P10; M99 P10; M99 P10;
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
Denomination: M100...M199 d
c ISO code
Functionality: Functions for synchronisation of paths
Arguments: P
Allowed values:
c d path 3
c path 4 d
c a all paths
d
c
c d path 3
c path 4 d
d
c d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
h
k d modal
c
k at block end
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
d reset d emergency
c d alarm
c and d ...
c
Also suspended by:
The functions from M100 to M199 are dedicated to synchronisation of the paths.
The synchronisation functions take effect when at least two programs are enabled at the same time,
otherwise they are ignored.
When a path reaches an M synchronisation function, it remains blocked and waits until the other path
(or paths) reaches the block containing the same M synchronisation function. Only when all the paths
are found in the same block of the same M synchronisation function, will the program continue to run.
Function arguments:
[P]:definition of the paths to be synchronised (obligatory only for machines with 3 paths)
P3: Synchronisation of path 1 with path 2
P7: Synchronisation of all 3 paths
The P argument is obligatory in the presence of 3 paths because it allows you to carry out the (100..
199) functions for synchronisation of 2 paths leaving one unrestricted, or to synchronise all 3 paths
Note: For machines with 2 paths the P address must never be specified
Note: The M synchronisation functions in a part program must be used with a criterion.
Machines with 2 paths:
• If the M100 function is present in path 1, it must also be present in path 2
Machines with 3 paths:

• the M100 P7 function must be programmed in all 3 paths
• the M100 P3 function must be programmed in path 1, in path 2 and NOT in path 3
Note: Both for machines with 2 paths and with 3 paths, the M functions for synchronisation must
be programmed on their own in the instructions block according to fanuc specifications.
The incorrect use (i.e. together with other arguments) will cause the malfunctioning of the func-
tions.
1 M100; M100;
2 G1 G94 F1000 Z100; G1 G94 F1000 Z100;
3 M101; M101;
4 M03 S500 G1 G95 F1 M203 S500 G1 G95 F1
5 M102; M102;
6 G1 G94 F1000 Z60; G1 G94 F1000 Z60;
7 M103; M103;
8 M05; M205;
9 M01; M01;
10 M99; M99;
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
Denomination: M203 d
c ISO code
Functionality: Main spindle slide 2 - CW rotation
Arguments: S
Allowed values: 0 .... max
c d path 3
c path 4
d
c a all paths
d
c
Referred to: c
d path 1 a path 2
d
c d path 3
c path 4
d
c d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
k d modal
c a
d
k at block end
k
j d self-cancelling
c a
d
c reactivated by cycle stop
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c c alarm
a
d and: a M204 S*** - M205 -
d
c M219 B*** - M214
d
d
no. of revs stated with the S*** code.
Function arguments:

If the "S" code is not specified the cycle is stopped and alarm 1021 will appear.
If the spindle is in Cs mode it's not possible to operate any other of its functionalities until
the the Cs mode is disabled. In this case alarm 1020 will appear.
1 M203 S500; M203 S500; M203 S500;
2 G4 X1; G4 X1; G4 X1;
3 M203 S1000; M203 S1000; M203 S1000;
4 M01; M01; M01;
5 M99; M99; M99;
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Functionality: Main spindle slide 2 - CCW rotation
Arguments: S
Allowed values: 0....max
c d path 3
c path 4
d
c c all paths
a
d
Referred to: c
d path 1 a path 2
d
c d path 3
c path 4
d
d d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
k d modal
c a
d
k at block end
k
j d self-cancelling
c a
d
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c a alarm
d
c and: a M203 S*** - M205 -
d
c M219 B*** - M214
Also suspended by: d
c
Also reactivated by: d
c
The M204 auxiliary function stops the rotation of the main spindle in path 2 with the no. of revs
stated with the S*** code.
Function arguments:

If the spindle is in Cs mode it's not possible to operate any othe rof its functionalities until
the Cs mode is disabled. In this case alarm 1020 will appear.
1 M204 S500; M204 S500; M204 S500;
2 G4 X1; G4 X1; G4 X1;
3 M204 S1000; M204 S1000; M204 S1000;
4 M01; M01; M01;
5 M99; M99; M99;
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Functionality: Main spindle slide 2 - STOP rotation
Arguments: S
Allowed values: 0....max
c d path 3
c path 4
d
c a all paths
d
c
Referred to: c
d path 1 a path 2
d
c d path 3
c path 4
d
c d
c concerned device
k at block start
j d at CNC start-up
a
k d modal
c a
d
h at block end
k
a
k
j d self-cancelling
c a
d
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c c alarm
a
d and: a M203 S*** - M205 -
d
c M219 B*** - M214
d
d
The M205 auxiliary function stops the rotation of the main spindle in path 2.
If programmed in a block together with movements it will carry out the stop function when all the
movements programmed in the block are completed.
If the spindle is in Cs mode it's not possible to operate any other spindle functionality until the
1 M203 S500; M203 S500; M203 S500;
2 G4 X2; G4 X2; G4 X2;
3 M205; M205; M205;
4 G4 X2; G4 X2; G4 X2;
5 M204 S1000; M204 S1001; M204 S1002;
6 G4 X2; G4 X2; G4 X2;
7 M205; M205; M205;
8 M01; M01; M01;
9 M99; M99; M99;
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Functionality: Start additional coolant on path 2
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d path 3
c d
a
d
c d path 3
c d
d a
d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j d
k a modal
d
d
c
k at block end
j d
k d self-cancelling
d
c
d
c a emergency
d
c a alarm
d
c and: a M209
d
c
Also suspended by: a cooling OFF push button
d
c
Also reactivated by: a cooling ON push button
d
c
The M208 auxiliary function enables the predisposition for the start-up of the additional coolant of
path 2.
The functioning of the coolant is also dictated by the inclusion/exclusion buttons situated on the
panel: [coolant ON] and [coolant OFF].
At machine start-up, by default, the selection of the buttons is automatically set to 'on' [coolant
ON].
The pump begins distributing coolant when the following 3 conditions are met:
1 the M208 function is enabled (i.e. when the program block containing it is completed)
2) the coolant is allowed by the push button (coolant ON)
3) the cycle is enabled in MDI or in AUTOMATIC mode
Note: Any cycle stop condition (alarm, stop-cycle button, M1 enabled, etc.) suspends the functioning
of the coolant.
When the cycle is enabled or stopped, upon pressing the RESET button the cycle resets, including all
the M functions, which are cancelled when the RESET button is pressed, including the M208 function.
NB: If the pump is fitted with a flow control device, in the event that a malfunctioning should occur
during functioning, an alarm is generated and the cycle immediately comes to a halt.
Note for (sprint 32/42 linear) CNC FANUC 160i machine models:
The path 2 additional coolant has two branches and selection is connected to the operating mode
""M80"" - ""M81"" - ""M82"" enabled in path 2.
Note for (sprint 32/42 linear) CNC FANUC 310i machine models:
The path 2 additional coolant has two branches and selection is connected to the operating mode
""G308P11" "G308P21" - ""G308P12"" - "G308P22" enabled in path 2.
Note for (SPEED 20 linear and SPRINT 42|10 linear) machine model:
the M208 function does not enable a second pump; it only enables the solenoid valve that opens the
branch of the first pump in order to carry the coolant to path 2 also.
Note for (sprint 65) linear machine model:

The coolant for slide 2 is part of the basic machine equipment (without supplementary system). The
system is provided with a filter: an alarm is generated either at end of cycle or immediately, as
1 M208; enable predispostion for additional coolant path 2
2 ...
3 M209; disable predispostion for additional coolant path 2
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
ALARMS
The passage of coolant is clogged, the tap is closed, a solenoid valve does not work or
1046 AUXILIARY COOLANT ALARM
the pump does not start when requested.

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Functionality: Stop additional coolant path 2
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d path 3
c path 4
d
c a all paths
d
c
c d path 3
c path 4
d
c a
d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j d at CNC start-up
a
k a modal
d
c
k at block end
a
k
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
d reset d emergency
c c alarm
d and: a M208
d
c
d
d
The M209 auxiliary functions cancels the predisposition for the start-up of the coolant, activated
with M208 Function.
Generally, the M209 function is used when you wish to turn the coolant on and off several times
during the course of a program.
1 M208; enable predispostion for additional coolant path 2
2 ...
3 M209; disable predispostion for additional coolant path 2
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Functionality: Enable C-axis slide 2
Arguments:
Allowed values:
Programmable from: c d path 1 a path 2
d
c d
c path 3 path 4
d
c c all paths
d
d
c d
c path 3 path 4
d
d d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j d
h
k a modal
d
d
c
k at block end
j d
k also with other instr. d self-cancelling
d
c
d
c a emergency
d
c a alarm
d
c and: a M215
d
c
d
c
c
The when spindle is in Cs axis mode it's not possible to program other spindle functionalities (rota-
1 M214;
2 G0 C0 Z40 X30;
3 G1 G94 F55 Z20 C390
4 M215;
5 M01;
6 M99;
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Functionality: Disable C-axis slide 2
Arguments:
Allowed values:
d
c d
c path 3 path 4
d
c d all paths
c
d
c d
c path 3 path 4
d
c d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
h
k d modal
c
k at block end
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
d reset d emergency
c c alarm
d and: a M214
d
c
d
d
1 M214;
2 G0 C0 Z40 X30;
3 G1 G94 F55 Z20 C390
4 M215;
5 M01;
6 M99;
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Functionality: Main spindle slide 2 - Angular displacement
Arguments: B
Allowed values: 0 ... 359,9
c d path 3
c d path 4
c a
d
c all paths
Referred to: c
d path 1 a path 2
d
c d path 3
c d path 4
c d
c path where programmed d concerned device
c
h
k
j at block start d
c at CNC start-up d alone in the block
c d modal
d
c
k at block end
j d
c upon pressing RESET button c
a also with other instr.
d d self-cancelling
d
c
d
c a emergency
d
c a alarm
d
c and: a M203 S*** - M204 S*** - M205 - M214
d
c
d
c
c
The M219 auxiliary function controls the positioning of the main spindle in path 2 with the number of
degrees stated with code B***
If the spindle is in Cs mode it's not possible to operate any other spindle functionalities until the
Cs mode is disabled (alarm 1020 is generated)
Function arguments:

The positioning function is absolute type, the angle declared by code "B" is the position to
reach in the machine absolute co-ordinates system.
Spindle positioning can be specified with resolution of up to 0.1 degrees.
If code "B" is not specified, the cycle is stopped and alarm 1022 generated.
NB To position itself the spindle rotates in a favourable direction so as to reach the requested
1 M203 S500 G4 X2; M203 S500 G4 X2; M203 S500 G4 X2;
2 M219 B120; M219 B120; M219 B120;
3 M219 B180; M219 B 180; M219 B180;
4 M219 B90.5; M219 B90.5; M219 B90.5;
5 M219 B30; M219 B30; M219 B30;
6 M1; M1; M1;
7 M99; M99; M99;
1 M203S6000; M203S6000; M203S6000;
2 G4X4; G4X4; G4X4;
3 M219B0; M219B0; M219B0;
4 M219B120; M219B120; M219B120;
5 M219B170; M219B170; M219B170;
6 G4X4; G4X4; G4X4;
7 M203S6000; M203S6000; M203S6000;
8 M219B-30; M219B-30; M219B-30;
9 M219B-80; M219B-80; M219B-80;
10 M219B-110; M219B-110; M219B-110;
11 M1 M1 M1
12 M99 M99 M99
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Functionality: Rigid tapping slide 2 (spindles/axes in the same path)
Arguments:
Allowed values:
d
c d path 3
c c path 4
d d all paths
c
d
c d path 3
c c path 4
c d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
d c alone in the block
a
d c modal
c
k at block end
c d also with other instr.
c d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c c alarm
a
d and: a G80
d
c
d
d
The M229 auxiliary function enables rigid tapping in path 2 and must only be programmed in path 2.
It is used to communicate to the CNC which spindle should be used for rigid tapping.
Programming:
1 program the spindle rotation function: the rotation direction estabilshes whether the tapping is
right (clockwise) or left (counter clockwise)
3 finally program the FANUC tapping fixed cycle to carry out interpolation between the axis and
NB When the fixed cycle is being executed, it's not possible to adjust the override. If the override
is equal to "0" the tapping is blocked and the spindle will stop synchronisation with the axis.
1 G0 Z80;
2 M203 S500;
3 M229;
4 G84 Z40 F1;
5 G80;
6 M1;
7 M99;
1 M203S500;
2 M229;
3 G84Z80F1;
4 M204S300;
5 G84Z60F3;
6 M203S100;
7 G84Z60F5;
8 G80;
9 G4X4;
10 M1;
11 M99;
1 M273S500;
2 M229;
3 G88X100F1;
4 M274S300;
5 G88X80F3;
6 M273S100;
7 G88X80F5;
8 G80;
9 G4X4;
10 M1;
11 M99;
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d path 3
c d path 4
c c all paths
a
d
d
c d path 3
c d path 4
c
h at block start
k
j d
c at CNC start-up c alone in the block
d c modal
c
k at block end
j d
d a self-cancelling
d
c
d
c a emergency
d
c a alarm
d
c and: a counter spindle collet closure path2
d
c
Also suspended by: d cycle stop
c
Also reactivated by: d cycle start
c
The M233 auxiliary function enables the rotation of the main spindle in path 2 with the collet open.
It also allows the main spindle collet opening (in path 2) even when in rotation.
NB: it is a self-cancelling function: at collet closure it's necessary to again program the function
to be able to reopen the collet with the spindle in rotation.
1 M237; M237; M237;
2 M203 S500 G4 X4; M203 S500 G4 X4; M203 S500 G4 X4;
3 M233; M233; M233;
4 M236; M236; M236;
5 M203 S500 G4 X4; M203 S500 G4 X4; M203 S500 G4 X4;
6 G4 X4; G4 X4; G4 X4;
7 M237; M237; M237;
8 M01; M01; M01;
9 M99; M99; M99;
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions

c ISO code
Functionality: Open clamp main spindle saddle 2
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d path 3
c path 4
d
c a all paths
d
c
Referred to: c
d path 1 a path 2
d
c d path 3
c path 4
d
c d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j d
d d modal
c
k at block end
j d
d d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: d reset
c d emergency
c c alarm
d and:
c
c
The M236 auxiliary function controls the collet opening of the main spindle in path 2.
NB: The function terminates (or rather the CNC continues to process the subsequent part program
instructions) when the closed collet microswitch is not intercepted
1 M237; M237; M237;
2 M203 S500 G4 X4; M203 S500 G4 X4; M203 S500 G4 X4;
3 M233; M233; M233;
4 M236; M236; M236;
5 G4 X4; G4 X4; G4 X4;
6 M237; M237; M237;
7 M01; M01; M01;
8 M99; M99; M99;
9
10
ALARMS
1040 OPEN COLLET
rotation. For the SPRINT42 LINEAR and SPEED20 LINEAR 9A machine models the col-
let cannot be opened if the part expeller is on the beat and the cycle is not in operation in
automatic mode.

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Functionality: Close clamp main spindle saddle 2
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d path 3
c path 4
d
c c all paths
a
d
d
c d path 3
c path 4
d
d d
c concerned device
k at block start
j d
d d modal
c
h at block end
k
j d
d d self-cancelling
c
c d emergency
c d alarm
c and:
c
c
The M237 auxiliary function controls the collet closing of the main spindle in path 2.
NB: The function terminates (or rather the CNc continues to process the subsequent part program
instructions) when the closed collet microswitch is intercepted.
1 M237; M237; M237;
2 M203 S500 G4 X4; M203 S500 G4 X4; M203 S500 G4 X4;
3 M233; M233; M233;
4 M236; M236; M236;
5 G4 X4; G4 X4; G4 X4;
6 M237; M237; M237;
7 M01; M01; M01;
8 M99; M99; M99;
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Functionality: Control inhibition of part ejected from main spindle path 2
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d path 3
c c path 4
d a all paths
d
c
d
c d path 3
c c path 4
c
h at block start
k
j d
a
d c modal
c
k at block end
j d
d also with other instr. a self-cancelling
d
c
c
d a emergency
d
c c alarm
a
d and: a counter spindle collet closure path 2
d
c
c
c
The M238 auxiliary function is used in the case in which the spindle in path 2 is equipped with a
spring ejector and if you wish to manually close the part in the spindle collet.
Normally, if the ejected part control is enabled from a user page, at each opening of the counter
spindle collet the ejector is enabled to eject the part.
When the ejector reaches the end of the stroke, the air jet is automatically started which is used to
clean the counter spindle and the part conveyor belt (the cleaning time is set in the user pages).
If however the ejector does not complete its forward movement (microswitch not intercepted), the part
not ejected alarm will appear and the cycle will stop.
When you wish to manually load the part in the collet (and therefore do not wish the ejector to be
operated) it is necessary to first program the M238 function, then the M236 collet opening function,
then carry out the operation.
The M238 function not only inhibits the ejected part control but also the enabling of the air jet
used to clean the counter spindle and the part conveyor belt.
NB Function M238 is self-cancelling, or rather when the collet is closed the function is automati-
cally cancelled. It's therefore necessary to re-program this function for each reloading.
1 M237; M237; M237;
2 M203 S500 G4 X4; M203 S500 G4 X4; M203 S500 G4 X4;
3 M233; M233; M233;
4 M238; M238; M238;
5 M236; M236; M236;
6 G4 X4; G4 X4; G4 X4;
7 M205; M205; M205;
8 M237; M237; M237;
9 G1 G94 F900 Z100; G1 G94 F900 Z100; G1 G94 F900 Z100;
10 M236; M236; M236;
11 G4 X4; G4 X4; G4 X4;
12 M237; M237; M237;
13 M01; M01; M01;
14 M99; M99; M99;
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Functionality: Flow control inhibition for additional coolant path 2
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d path 3
c d path 4
c all paths
a
d
c
d
c d path 3
c d path 4
d
c d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j d
c a modal
d
c
k at block end
j d
d d self-cancelling
c
d
c a emergency
d
c a alarm
d
c and: a M259
d
c
c
c
The M258 auxiliary function disables the flowmeter control applied to the additional coolant path 2,
or CDS if the machine flowmeters are used.
This function is used to prevent generating a flow meter alarm in the case in which coolant flows
from the tools fitted but at a rate lower than that detectable by the flow meter.
1 ...
2 M258;
3 M208;
4 G1 G94 F550 Z20;
5 M209;
6 M259;
7 T0101 G0 X20 Z0;
8 ...
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Functionality: Flow control activation for additional coolant path 2
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d path 3
c c path 4
d all paths
a
d
c
d
c d path 3
c c path 4
d
c d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j a
d
c a modal
d
c
k at block end
j a
d
d d self-cancelling
c
c a emergency
d
c c alarm
d and: a M258
d
c
c
c
The M259 auxiliary function resets the flowmeter control applied to the additional coolant path 2, or
CDS if the machine flowmeters are used.
This function is used if flow meter control has been previously deactivated and has to be reinstated,
otherwise it is not necessary because on switching on the cnc flow control is enabled by default.
1 ...
2 M258;
3 M208;
4 G1 G94 F550 Z20;
5 M209;
6 M259;
7 T0101 G0 X20 Z0;
8 ...
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Functionality: Rotating tools slide 2 - CW rotation
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d path 3
c d
a
d
d
c d path 3
c d
c
h
k
j at block start d
d a modal
d
d
c
k at block end
j d
d d self-cancelling
d
c
d
c a emergency
d
c a alarm
d
c and: a M274 S*** - M275
d
c
c
c
The M273 auxiliary function controls the clockwise rotation of the rotating tools in path 2 with the
number of revs stated with code S***.
Function arguments:

When programming any spindle rotation function it's compulsory to specify the "S" code followed
bythe no. of revs in the same function block.
NB: The revs programmed refer to the motor. The various tools rotate at their own number of revs,
depending on the transmission ratio that links them to the motor.
1 M273 S500; M273 S500; M273 S500;
2 G4 X1; G4 X1; G3 X1;
3 M273 S1000; M273 S1000; M273 S1000;
4 M01; M01; M01;
5 M99; M99; M99;
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Functionality: Rotating tools slide 2 - CCW rotation
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d path 3
c d
cpath 4 a all paths
d
c
d
c d path 3
c d
c
h
k
j at block start d
d d modal
d
c
k at block end
j d
d d self-cancelling
d
c
c
d a emergency
d
c c alarm
a
d and: a M273 S*** - M275
d
c
c
c
The M274 auxiliary function controls the clockwise rotation of the rotating tools in path 2 with the
number of revs. stated with code S***.
Functon arguments:

NB: The revs programmed refer to the motor. The various tools rotate at their own number of revs,
depending on the transmission ratio that links them to the motor.
1 M274 S500; M274 S500; M274 S500;
2 G4 X1; G4 X1; G3 X1;
3 M274 S1000; M274 S1000; M274 S1000;
4 M01; M01; M01;
5 M99; M99; M99;
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d path 3
c path 4
d
c c all paths
a
d
d
c d path 3
c path 4
d
c
k
j at block start a
d
d d modal
d
c
h at block end
k
j a
d
d d self-cancelling
d
c
d
c a emergency
d
c a alarm
d
c and: a M273 S*** - M274 S***
d
c
c
c
If programmed in a block together with movements it carries out the stop function when all the move-
ments programmed in the block are completed.
1 M273 S500; M273 S500; M273 S500;
2 G4 X2; G4 X2; G4 X2;
3 M275; M275; M275;
4 G4 X2; G4 X2; G4 X2;
5 M274 S1000; M274 S1001; M274 S1002;
6 G4 X2; G4 X2; G4 X2;
7 M275; M275; M275;
8 M01; M01; M01;
9 M99; M99; M99;
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Functionality: Main spindle slide 3 - CW rotation
Arguments: S
Allowed values: 0 ... max
c d path 3
c d
d
c
Referred to: c
d path 1 d path 2
c a path 3
d
c d
c path 4 d path where programmed
c d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j d
d d modal
c a
d
k at block end
j d
d d self-cancelling
c a
d
c
d a emergency
d
c c alarm
a
d and: a M304 S*** - M305 -
d
c M319 B*** - M314
c
c
no. of revs stated with code S***.
Function arguments:

When programming any spindle rotation function it's compulsory to specify the "S" code followed by
the no. of revs in teh same function block.
If the "S" is not specified the cycle is stopped and alarm 1021 will appear.
If the spindle is in Cs it's not possiblet o control any other of its functionalities until the Cs
axis mode is disabled. In this case alarm 1020 will appear.
1 M303 S500; M303 S500; M303 S500;
2 G4 X1; G4 X1; G4 X1;
3 M303 S1000; M303 S1000; M303 S1000;
4 M01; M01; M01;
5 M99; M99; M99;
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Functionality: Main spindle slide 3 - CCW rotation
Arguments: S
c d path 3
c d
a
d
Referred to: c
d path 1 d path 2
c d path 3
c a
d
d d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j d
d d modal
c a
d
k at block end
j d
d d self-cancelling
c a
d
d
c a emergency
d
c a alarm
d
c and: a M303 S*** - M305 -
d
c M319 B*** - M314
c
c
The M304 auxiliary function controls the counter clockwise rotation of the main spindle in path 3
with the no. of revs stated with code S***.
Function arguments:

When programming any spindle rotation function it's compulsory to specify the "S" code followed by
the no. of revs in the same function block.
If the spindle is in Cs mode it's not possible to control any other spindle functionalities until
the Cs axis mode is disabled. In this case alarm 1020 will appear.
1 M304 S500; M304 S500; M304 S500;
2 G4 X1; G4 X1; G4 X1;
3 M304 S1000; M304 S1000; M304 S1000;
4 M01; M01; M01;
5 M99; M99; M99;
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Functionality: Main spindle slide 3 - STOP rotation
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d path 3
c d
d
c
Referred to: c
d path 1 d path 2
c d path 3
c a
d
c path 4 d path where programmed
c
k
j at block start a
d
d d modal
d
c
h at block end
k
j a
d
d d self-cancelling
d
c
c
d a emergency
d
c c alarm
a
d and: a M303 S*** - M304 S*** - M319 B*** - M314
d
c
c
c
The M305 auxiliary function stops rotation of the main spindle in path 3.
If the spindle is in Cs it's not possible to control any other of its functionalities until the Cs
axis mode is disabled. In this case alarm 1020 will appear.
1 M303 S500; M303 S500; M303 S500;
2 G4 X2; G4 X2; G4 X2;
3 M305; M305; M305;
4 G4 X2; G4 X2; G4 X2;
5 M304 S1000; M304 S1001; M304 S1002;
6 G4 X2; G4 X2; G4 X2;
7 M305; M305; M305;
8 M01; M01; M01;
9 M99; M99; M99;
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Functionality: Start additional coolant on slide 3
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d path 3
c d
a
d
c d path 3
c d
d a
d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j d
d d modal
d
c
k at block end
j d
d d self-cancelling
d
c
d
c a emergency
d
c a alarm
d
c and: a M309
d
c
Also suspended by: a coolant OFF push button
d
c
Also reactivated by: a coolant ON push button
d
c
The M308 auxiliary function enables the start-up of the additional coolant pump on slide 3.
The status of the [coolant ON] and [coolant OFF] push buttons operate the coolant.
At machine start-up the coolant push button selection is ON and the Led will blink.
When M308 is enabled, the cycle is executed and when the coolant ON push button is pressed coolant is
enabled (note that the Led of the [coolant ON] push button is permanently lit).
If the coolant ON push button has been pressed, but M08 is not enabled or the cycle is stopped, the
LED of the
[coolant ON] push button will blink: this means that coolant delivery has been suspended.
When the [coolant OFF] push button is selected the corresponding Led is permanently lit.
NOTE: For Sprint 65 linear - The coolant for slide 3 is part of the basic machine equipment (without
supplementary system). The system is provided with a filter: an alarm is generated either at end of
cycle or immediately, as programmed using M596/M595 functions, if the filter is obstructed during
operation.
NOTE: An alarm is generated and the cycle is immediately stopped if the pump is equipped with a flow
control device and a fault occurs during operation.
NOTE: For machines other than Sprint 65 linear - Slide 3 supplementary coolant has two branches which
are selected according to the "M80" - "M81" - "M82" operating mode activated in path 3.
NOTE: For machine with valve for slide 3 Example SPRINT 42|10 linear
The auxiliary function M308 activate the predisposition for slide 3 cooling start.
For correct working it needs pump=ON (Example M8, M208).
1 M308; M308; M80;
2 G4 X10; G4 X10; M308;
3 M309; M309; G4 X4;
4 G4 X4; G4 X4; M81;
5 M01; M01; G4 X4;
6 M99; M99; M309;
7 M01;
8 M99;
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Functionality: Stop additional coolant on slide 3
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d path 3
c path 4
d
c a all paths
d
c
c d path 3
c path 4
d
c a
d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j d at CNC start-up
a
c c alone in the block
d d modal
d
c
k at block end
a
c a also with other instr.
d
c d self-cancelling
d
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c c alarm
a
d and: a M308
d
c
d
d
The M309 auxiliary functions cancels the predisposition for the start-up of the coolant, activated
with M308 Function.
Generally, the M309 function is used when you wish to turn the coolant on and off several times
during the course of a program.
1 M308; M308; M80;
2 G4 X10; G4 X10; M308;
3 M309; M309; G4 X4;
4 G4 X4; G4 X4; M81;
5 M01; M01; G4 X4;
6 M99; M99; M309;
7 M01;
8 M99;
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Functionality: Enable C-axis Slide 3
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c a
d
c path 3 path 4
d
c c all paths
a
d
c a
d
c path 3 path 4
d
d a
d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j d
a
d a modal
d
d
c
k at block end
j d
d also with other instr. d self-cancelling
d
c
d
c a emergency
d
c a alarm
d
c and: a M315
d
c
d
c
c
When the Cs axis mode is enabled, the spindle is managed like an axis and is programed in the same
When the spindle is in Cs axis mode it's not possible to control any other spindle functionlaities
(rotation, positioning, tapping). In this case a programming error alarm will appear.
1 M314;
2 G0 C0 Z40 X30;
3 G1 G94 F55 Z20 C390;
4 M315;
5 M01;
6 M99;
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Functionality: Disable C-axis Slide 3
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c a
d
c path 3 path 4
d
c d all paths
c
c a
d
c path 3 path 4
d
c d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j d at CNC start-up
a
c c alone in the block
a
d d modal
c
k at block end
a
c d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c c alarm
a
d and: a M314
d
c
d
d
When the spindle is in Cs axis mode it's not possible to control any other spindle functionlaities
(rotation, positioning, tapping). In this case a programming error alarm will appear.
1 M314;
2 G0 C0 Z40 X30;
3 G1 G94 F55 Z20 C390;
4 M315;
5 M01;
6 M99;
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Functionality: Main spindle slide 3 - Angular displacement
Arguments: B
Allowed values: 0 ... 359,9
c d path 3
c d path 4
c a
d
call paths
Referred to: c
d path 1 d path 2
c d path 3
c a path 4
d
c d
cpath where programmed d concerned device
c
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
d d alone in the block
c d modal
c
k at block end
d
c d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c a alarm
d
c and: a M303 S*** - M304 S*** - M305 - M314
d
c
c
c
The M319 auxiliary function controls the main spindle positioning in path 3 with the no. of degrees
stated with code B***
If the spindle is in Cs mode it's not possible to control any other spindle functionality until the
Cs axis mode is disabled (alarm 1020 is generated)
Function arguments:

this is an absolute positioning function, the angle stated with code "B" is the absolute position
to be reached in the machine co-ordination system.
If code "B" is not specified the cycle is stopped and alarm 1022 appears.
NB To position itself the spindle rotates in a favourable direction in order to reach the requested
positionin the quickest time possible.
1 M303 S500 G4 X2; M303 S500 G4 X2; M303 S500 G4 X2;
2 M319 B120; M319 B120; M319 B120;
3 M319 B180; M319 B180; M319 B180;
4 M319 B90.5; M319 B90.5; M319 B90.5;
5 M319 B30; M319 B30; M319 B30;
6 M01; M01; M01;
7 M99; M99; M99;
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Functionality: Rigid tapping slide 3 (spindle/axes in the same path)
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c a path 3
d
c c path 4
d d all paths
c
c a path 3
d
c c path 4
c d
c concerned device
k at block start
j c at CNC start-up
d c modal
c
h at block end
k
d
c d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c c alarm
a
d and: a G80
d
c
d
d
The M329 auxiliary function enables the rigid tapping in path 3 and must only be programmed in path
3.
It is used to communicate to the CNC which spindle should be used for rigid tapping.
Programming:
1 program the spindle rotation function: the rotation direction establishes whether the tapping is
right (clockwise direction) or left (counter clockwise direction)
3 finally program the FANUC fixed tapping cycle to carry out interpolation between the axis and
NB when the fixed cycle is being executed, it's not possible to adjust the override. If the override
is equal to "0" the tapping is locked and the spindle will stop maintaining synchronisation with the
axis.
1 G0 Z80;
2 M303 S500;
3 M329;
4 G84 Z40 F1;
5 G80;
6 M01;
7 M99;
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d path 3
c d path 4
c c all paths
a
d
c a path 3
d
c d path 4
c
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
d c modal
c
k at block end
d
c a self-cancelling
d
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c a alarm
d
c and: a counter spindle collet closure path3
d
c
c
c
The M333 auxiliary function enables rotation of the main spindle in path 3 with the collet open.
It also allows the opening of the main spindle collet (in path 3) even when in rotation.
NB: This is a self-cancelling function: at collet closure its necessary to again program the function
to be able to re-open the collet with the spindle in rotation.
1 M337; M337; M337;
2 M303 S500 G4 X4; M303 S500 G4 X4; M303 S500 G4 X4;
3 M333; M333; M333;
4 M336; M336; M336;
5 M303 S500 G4 X4; M303 S500 G4 X4; M303 S500 G4 X4;
6 G4 X4; G4 X4; G4 X4;
7 M337; M337; M337;
8 M01; M01; M01;
9 M99; M99; M99;
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Functionality: Collet opening of main spindle slide 3
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d path 3
c path 4
d
c a all paths
d
c
c a path 3
d
c path 4
d
c d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
d d modal
c
k at block end
d
c a self-cancelling
d
c
Cancelled by: c
d reset d emergency
c c alarm
d and:
d
d
The M336 auxiliary function controls the opening of the counter spindle collet in path 3.
NB the function is completed when the closed collet microswitch is not intercepted.
1 M337; M337; M337;
2 M303 S500 G4 X4; M303 S500 G4 X4; M303 S500 G4 X4;
3 M333; M333; M333;
4 M336; M336; M336;
5 M303 S500 G4 X4; M303 S500 G4 X4; M303 S500 G4 X4;
6 G4 X4; G4 X4; G4 X4;
7 M337; M337; M337;
8 M01; M01; M01;
9 M99; M99; M99;
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS
1040 OPEN COLLET
rotation.

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Functionality: Collet closing of main spindle slide 3
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d path 3
c path 4
d
c c all paths
a
d
c a path 3
d
c path 4
d
d d
c concerned device
k at block start
j c at CNC start-up
d d modal
c
h at block end
k
d
c d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
d reset d emergency
c d alarm
c and:
c
c
The M337 auxiliary function controls the collet closing of the counter spindle in path 3.
Can be programmed from any path.
NB The function is completed when the closed collet microswitch is intercepted.
1 M337; M337; M337;
2 M303 S500 G4 X4; M303 S500 G4 X4; M303 S500 G4 X4;
3 M333; M333; M333;
4 M336; M336; M336;
5 M303 S500 G4 X4; M303 S500 G4 X4; M303 S500 G4 X4;
6 G4 X4; G4 X4; G4 X4;
7 M337; M337; M337;
8 M01; M01; M01;
9 M99; M99; M99;
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Functionality: Control inhibition of part ejected from main spindle path 3
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d path 3
c c path 4
d a all paths
d
c
c a path 3
d
c c path 4
c
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
a
d c modal
c
k at block end
c a self-cancelling
d
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c c alarm
a
d and: a counter spindle collet closing path3
d
c
d
d
The M338 auxiliary function is used in the case in which the spindle in path 3 is equipped with a
spring ejector and you wish to manually close the part in the spindle collet.
Normally, if the ejected part control is enabled from a user page, at each opening of the
counter spindle collet the ejector is enabled to eject the part.
When the ejector reaches the end of its stroke, the air jet is automatically started, which is used
to clean the counter spindle and part conveyor belt (cleaning time is set in the user pages).
If however the ejector does not complete its forward movement (microswitch not intercepted), the part
not ejected alarm will appear and the cycle will stop.
When you want to manually load the part in the collet (and therefore do not want the ejector to be
operated) it's necessary to first program the M338 function, then the M336 collet opening function,
then carry out the operation.
The M338 function not only inhibits the ejected part control but also the enabling of the air jet
used to clean the counter spindle and part conveyor belt.
NB the M338 function is self-cancelling, or rather when the collet is closed it is automatically can-
celled. It's necessary therefore to program the function for each reloading.
1 M337; M337; M337;
2 M303 S500 G4 X4; M303 S500 G4 X4; M303 S500 G4 X4;
3 M333; M333; M333;
4 M338; M338; M338;
5 M336; M336; M336;
6 G4 X4; G4 X4; G4 X4;
7 M305; M305; M305;
8 M337; M337; M337;
9 G1 G94 F900 Z100; G1 G94 F900 Z100; G1 G94 F900 Z100;
10 M336; M336; M336;
11 G4 X4; G4 X4; G4 X4;
12 M337; M337; M337;
13 M01; M01; M01;
14 M99; M99; M99;
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Functionality: Flow control inhibition for additional coolant path 3
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d path 3
c d path 4
c all paths
a
d
c
c a path 3
d
c d path 4
d
c d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
d a alone in the block
d
c a modal
d
c
k at block end
c d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c d alarm
c and: a M359
d
c
c
c
The M358 auxiliary function disables the flowmeter control applied to the additional coolant path 3.
This function is used to prevent generating flow meter alarm in the case coolant flows from the tools
fitted but at a rate lower than that detectable by the flow meter.
1 ...
2 M358;
3 M308;
4 G1 G94 F550 Z20;
5 M309;
6 M359;
7 T0101 G0 X20 Z0;
8 ...
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Functionality: Flow control abilitation for additional coolant path 3
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d path 3
c c path 4
d all paths
a
d
c
c a path 3
d
c c path 4
d
c d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j d at CNC start-up
a
c d alone in the block
c a modal
d
c
k at block end
a
d
c d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
d reset a emergency
d
c c alarm
d and: a M358
d
c
d
d
The M358 auxiliary function enables the flowmeter control applied to the additional coolant path 3.
This function is used if flow meter control has been previously deactivated and has to be reinstated,
otherwise it is not necessary because on switching on the cnc flow control is enabled by default.
1 ...
2 M358;
3 M308;
4 G1 G94 F550 Z20;
5 M309;
6 M359;
7 T0101 G0 X20 Z0;
8 ...
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Functionality: Rotating tools slide 3 - CW rotation
Arguments: S
c d path 3
c path 4
d
c c all paths
a
d
c a path 3
d
c path 4
d
c
j at block start
h
k c at CNC start-up
d d modal
d
c
k at block end
d
c d self-cancelling
d
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c a alarm
d
c and: a M374 S*** - M375
d
c
c
c
The M373 auxiliary function controls the clockwise rotation of the rotating tools in path 3
with the number of revs stated with code S***.
Function arguments:

1 M373 S500; M373 S500; M373 S500;
2 G4 X1; G4 X1; G4 X1;
3 M373 S1000; M373 S1000; M373 S1000;
4 M01; M01; M01;
5 M99; M99; M99;
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Functionality: Rotating tools slide 3 - CCW rotation
Arguments: S
c d path 3
c path 4
d
c a all paths
d
c
c a path 3
d
c path 4
d
c
j at block start
h
k c at CNC start-up
d d modal
d
c
k at block end
d
c d self-cancelling
d
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c c alarm
a
d and: a M373 S*** - M375
d
c
d
d
The M374 auxiliary function controls the counterclockwise rotation of the rotating tools in path 3
with the number of revs stated with code S***.
Function arguments:

1 M374 S500; M374 S500; M374 S500;
2 G4 X1; G4 X1; G4 X1;
3 M374 S1000; M374 S1000; M374 S1000;
4 M01; M01; M01;
5 M99; M99; M99;
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Arguments: S
c d path 3
c path 4
d
c c all paths
a
d
c a path 3
d
c path 4
d
c
k at block start
j c at CNC start-up
a
d d modal
d
c
h at block end
k
d
d
c d self-cancelling
d
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c a alarm
d
c and: a M373 S*** - M374 S***
d
c
c
c
1 M373 S500; M373 S500; M373 S500;
2 G4 X2; G4 X2; G4 X2;
3 M375; M375; M375;
4 G4 X2; G4 X2; G4 X2;
5 M374 S1000; M374 S1001; M374 S1002;
6 G4 X2; G4 X2; G4 X2;
7 M375; M375; M375;
8 M01; M01; M01;
9 M99; M99; M99;
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Functionality: Start part conveyor belt
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d
c path 3path 4
d
c a all paths
d
c
c d
c path 3path 4
d
c a
d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
k d modal
d
c
k at block end
k
j d self-cancelling
d
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c c alarm
a
d and: a M501
d
c
Also suspended by:
The M500 auxiliary function enables the part conveyor belt movement.
It can be programmed from any path and always refers to the part conveyor belt.
1 M500; M500; M500;
2 G4 X7; G4 X7; G4 X7;
3 M501; M501; M501;
4 G4 X2; G4 X2; G4 X2;
5 M01; M01; M01;
6 M99; M99; M99;
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Functionality: Stop part conveyor belt
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d
c path 3 path 4
d
c c all paths
a
d
c d
c path 3 path 4
d
d a
d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
a
k d modal
c
k at block end
d
k
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
d reset d emergency
c d alarm
c and: a M500
d
c
c
c
The M500 auxiliary function stops the part conveyor belt movement.
It can be programmed from any path and always refers to the part conveyor belt.
1 M500; M500; M500;
2 G4 X7; G4 X7; G4 X7;
3 M501; M501; M501;
4 G4 X2; G4 X2; G4 X2;
5 M01; M01; M01;
6 M99; M99; M99;
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Functionality: Start main spindle collet cleaning jet
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d path 3
c path 4
d
c a all paths
d
c
c d path 3
c path 4
d
c a
d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
k d modal
d
c
k at block end
k
j d self-cancelling
d
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c c alarm
a
d and: a M503
d
c
d
d
The M502 auxiliary function enables the air jet to clean the main spindle collet in path 1.
To stop the jet when enabled, program M503 or press the reset or cycle stop push button.
1 M502; M502; M502;
2 G4 X7; G4 X7; G4 X7;
3 M503; M503; M503;
4 G4 X2; G4 X2; G4 X2;
5 M01; M01; M01;
6 M99; M99; M99;
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Functionality: Stop main spindle collet cleaning jet
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d path 3
c path 4
d
c c all paths
a
d
c d path 3
c path 4
d
d a
d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
a
k d modal
c
k at block end
d
k
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c a alarm
d
c and: a M502
d
c
c
c
The M503 auxiliary function disables the air jet used to clean the main spindle collet in path 1.
It's possible to disable the air jet also by pressing the reset push button.
1 M502; M502; M502;
2 G4 X7; G4 X7; G4 X7;
3 M503; M503; M503;
4 G4 X2; G4 X2; G4 X2;
5 M01; M01; M01;
6 M99; M99; M99;
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
Name: M504 / M505 d

c ISO code
Function: Path 2 main spindle collet cleaning activation/deactivation
Topics:
Admitted values:
c d path 3
c c path 4
d a all paths
d
c
c d path 3
c c path 4
d d programmed path
c a
d
c concerned device
Operative: Programmable: Operation: Hold & Restart:
h at beginning of block
k
j c at CNC power-on
d j alone in block
k c modal
a
d a suspended after cycle stop
d
c
j at end of block
k d after RESET
c h with other instructions
k
j a self-deleting
d
c a resumed after cycle start
d
c
Cancelled by: c a reset
d a emergency
d
c c alarm
a
d and: a M505
d
c
Suspended by: c
d
Resumed by: c
d
Function M504=activate / M505=deactivate controls path 2 main spindle collet cleaning.
In automatic mode collet cleaning starts automatically after expulsion of the part, and runs for the
time set on the user programming page. If the time set is =0 cleaning is not commanded automatically.
When collet cleaning is set to automatic it is still possible to stop the function using M505 without
awaiting completion of the set time.
Path 2 main spindle collet cleaning with M504/M505 can be:

1)= by air-jet (default for all machines)
2)= by coolant (in place of air-jet)
IMPORTANT:
To function, cleaning with coolant requires that the connected coolant pump is enabled, e.g.(M8,
M208).
1 M504; activates back-spindle collet cleaning
2 G4 X2; wait 2 seconds
3 M505; deactivates back-spindle collet cleaning
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
Name: M506 / M507 d

c ISO code
Function: Path 2 main spindle collet 2nd cleaning activation/deactivation
Topics:
Admitted values:
c d path 3
c d path 4
c c all paths
a
d
c d path 3
c d path 4
c c programmed path
d a
d
c concerned device
k
j c at CNC power-on
d j alone in block
k c modal
a
d a suspended after cycle stop
d
c
j at end of block
k d after RESET
c h with other instructions
k
j a self-deleting
d
c a resumed after cycle start
d
c
d a emergency
d
c a alarm
d
c and: a M507
d
c
Suspended by: d
c
Resumed by: d
c
Function M506=activate / M507=deactivate controls path 2 main spindle collet 2nd cleaning.
This pair of functions is optional and supplementary to the basic pair M504/M505 path 2 main spindle
collet cleaning activation/deactivation.
When both types of cleaning are required (AIR + COOLANT)

The 1st collet cleaning M504/M505 will be by AIR (default and
the 2nd collet cleaning M506/M507 will be by COOLANT.
Therefore both types of collet cleaning (air and coolant) can be commanded together.
As opposed to the first, the 2nd collet cleaning is not automatically activated after part expulsion
and must always be activated by the corresponding function M506.
IMPORTANT:
To function, cleaning with coolant requires that the connected coolant pump is enabled, e.g.(M8,
M208).
1 M506; activates back-spindle collet cleaning coolant jet
2 G4 X2; wait 2 seconds
3 M507; deactivates back-spindle collet cleaning coolant jet
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
Name: M508 c
d ISO code
Function: Start coolant from outlets over spindles
Topics:
Admitted values:
d d path 3
c d path 4
c c
d
a all paths
d d path 3
c d path 4
c c
d programmed path c
d concerned device
Operative:
h at beginning of
k
j d
c at CNC power-on
j alone in block c
d
a modal c
d
a suspended after cycle stop
block d
c
k
j c
d self-clearing c
d
a resume after cycle start
k at end of block
j
Cancelled by: a
d
c reset a
d
c emergency stop a
c
d alarm and: c
d
a M509
Suspended by: a
d
c coolant OFF button
Resumed by: a
d
c coolant ON button
Auxiliary function M508 activates set-up to start coolant pump for cleaning telescopic rods (from
“flutes”).
Coolant operation also depends on the on/off buttons located on the panel [coolant ON] and [coolant
OFF].
The button is automatically set by default to [coolant ON] when the machine is started.
The pump starts outputting coolant when the following three conditions are respected:
1) Function M508 is active (i.e. the program block containing the function is complete);
2) the coolant is allowed by the button (coolant ON)
3) the cycle is enabled in MDI or in AUTOMATIC mode
4) no bar charge is in progress.
Note: Any cycle stop condition (alarm, cycle stop button, M1 on, etc.) will stop coolant operation.
When the cycle is on or stopped, it can be reset by pressing the RESET button. This resets all
M functions deleted by pressing RESET, including function M508.
1 M508 G4 X5 G4 X5 activate coolant from outlets over spindles 1 and 2.
2 G4 X10 G4 X5 G4 X5 coolant over telescopic rods is activated with
3 M509 G4 X5 G4 X5 possible delay due to machining operations of
4 M1 M1 M1 slide 2 and 3; the delay is determined by
5 M99 M99 M99 channel synchronisation.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
ALARMS
N. Text Description

Auxiliary functions
Name: M509 d
c ISO code
Function: Stop coolant from outlets over spindles
Topics:
Admitted values:
d d path 3
c d path 4
c d
a
c all paths
d d path 3
c d path 4
c d
c programmed path c
d concerned device
Operative:
h at beginning of
k
j a
d
c at CNC power-on
j alone in block a
c
d modal c
block a
d
c
k
j c
d self-clearing c
k at end of block
j
Cancelled by: d
c reset d
c emergency stop c
d alarm and: c
d
a M508
Suspended by: d
c
Resumed by: d
c
Auxiliary function M509 cancels set-up to start coolant pump for cleaning telescopic rods (from
“flutes”).
Generally, function M509 is used to turn the coolant on and off several times during the program.
1 M508 G4 X5 G4 X5
2 G4 X10 G4 X5 G4 X5
3 M509 G4 X5 G4 X5 Deactivate coolant from outlets over spindles 1 and 2.
4 M1 M1 M1 Coolant over telescopic rods is deactivated with
5 M99 M99 M99 possible delay due to machining operations of
6 slide 2 and 3, this delay is determined by
7 channel synchronisation.
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
ALARMS
N. Text Description

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Functionality: Part ejector forward command
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d path 3
c path 4
d
c a all paths
d
c
c d path 3
c path 4
d
c a
d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
k d modal
c
k at block end
k
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c c alarm
a
d and: a M511
d
c
d
d
The M510 auxiliary function controls the part ejector forward command.
MDI Operation:
- When the M510 function is programmed in MDI the part ejector moves forward and remains in the for-
ward position until M511 is programmed or the reset push button is pressed.
AUTOMATIC OPERATION:
- When the M510 function is programmed in AUTOMATIC the part ejector moves forward.
The following operation depends on the collet open or closed condition.
A - If the collet is open this means that the part is being unloaded; if the ejector completes
its entire stroke and intercepts the "part ejector forward" microswitch it will automatically
move backward, the counter spindle collet cleaning jet is enabled as well as the conveyor
belt for the times set in the user pages. If the "part ejector forward" microswitch is not
intercepted and the ejected part control from the user page is enabled the ycle will stop and
the part not ejected alarm will be displayed.
B - If however the collet is closed this means that the part ejector will stop against the part
to avoid the intrusion of chips when the part has a through hole. In this case if the micro
switch is intercepted this means that the part ejector has not carried out the "plugging"
function and therefore the part not present in counter spindle message will be displayed.The
air jet used to clean the counter spindle collet and conveyor belt is never enabled when the
collet is closed.
NOTE: For the SPRINT 42 LINEAR and SPEED 20 LINEAR 9 AXES machine models:
• When the ejector is on the stroke (collet main spindle path 2 closed with part blocked + part
ejector is commanded forward) it is possible to open the collet only with a program with the M236
function and only if the machine is in automatic mode with cycle in operation.
• The part ejector is commanded by two independent solenoid valves by means of two signals (forward,
backward). When it is commanded forward to go on the stroke, after 0.5 sec the solenoid valve is
automatically commanded backwards in order to decrease the pressure on the part for 3 sec. After
that, it is again de-energized resetting the normal stroke pressure, thereby preventing any pos-
sible intrusions of chips into the main spindle of path 2 during the machining.
The signal for ejected part (X5.2) is transferred to the CNC #1008 variable, so that it may
be used by the part program.
1 M237; close main spindle collet path 2
2 M510; command piece expeller forward against part
3 ...
4 M511; command piece expeller back
5 ...
6 M236; open main spindle collet path 2
7 M511; piece expeller forward (piece expelled and automatic
return when micro trips)
8
9
10
11
12
13
ALARMS
The part is blocked in the counter spindle or the part ejector forward microswitch has not
1048 PART NOT EJECTED!
been intercepet.
When operating the part ejector forward with the collet closed to plug the part, the part
1049 PART NOT PRESENT
ejector forward microswitch was intercepted all the same.

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Functionality: Part ejector backward command
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d path 3
c d
cpath 4 c all paths
a
d
c d path 3
c d
cpath 4 c path where programmed
d a
d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
a
k a modal
d
c
k at block end
d
k
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
d reset d emergency
c d alarm
c and: a M510
d
c
c
c
The M511 auxiliary function controls the part ejector backward command.
1 M237; close main spindle collet path 2
2 M510; command piece expeller forward to limit
3 ...
4 M511; command piece expeller back
5 ...
6 M236; open main spindle collet path 2
7 M511; piece expeller forward (piece expelled and automatic
return when micro trips)
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Functionality: Data block during part unloading (M520, M521)
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d path 3
c c path 4
d a
d
c all paths
c d path 3
c c path 4
d d
c path where programmed a
d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
d k alone in the block
j d modal
c
k at block end
k
j a self-cancelling
d
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c c alarm
a
d and:
d
d
The M519 auxiliary function when programmed before the part unloading functions ensures, for each
program block containing one of these functions that the movement is completed (this corresponds to
the interception of the control switch) before carrying out the next block.
When the M functions, which carry out the part unloading sequence are terminated the M519 function is
automatically cancelled.
1 M519; M519; M519;
2 M520; M520; M520;
3 M521; M521; M521;
4 M01; M01; M01;
5 M99; M99; M99;
6
1 M519; M519; M519;
2 M522; M522; M522;
3 M523; M523; M523;
4 M524; M524; M524;
5 M525; M525; M525;
6 M01; M01; M01;
7 M99; M99; M99;
8
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Functionality: Part unloader forward command
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d path 3
c path 4
d
c c all paths
a
d
c d path 3
c path 4
d
d a
d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
k d modal
c
k at block end
k
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
d reset d emergency
c d alarm
c and: a M521
d
c
c
c
The M520 auxiliary function controls the part unloader forward command.
If the part unloader does not intercept the "part unloader forward" microswitch within the preset
time, the machine will stop and the relevant part unloader not forward alarm will be displayed.
When the part unloader reaches the forward position, the only possibility to take it backward is to
program the M521 function.
1 M520; M520; M520;
2 G4 X10; G4 X10; G4 X10;
3 M521; M521; M521;
4 G4 X10; G4 X10; G4 X10;
5 M01; M01; M01;
6 M99; M99; M99;
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS
1051 PART UNLOADER ANOMALY Part unloading has not reached the requested position

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Functionality: Part unloader backward command
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d path 3
c path 4
d
c a all paths
d
c
c d path 3
c path 4
d
c a
d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
k d modal
c
k at block end
k
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
d reset d emergency
c c alarm
d and: a M520
d
c
d
d
The M521 auxiliary command controls the part unloader backward command.
If the part unloader does not intercept the "part unloader backward" microswitch within the preset
time, the machine will stop and the relevant part unloader not backward alarm will be displayed.
When the part unloader reaches the backward position, the only possibility to take it forward is by
programming the M520 function.
1 M520; M520; M520;
2 G4 X10; G4 X10; G4 X10;
3 M521; M521; M521;
4 G4 X10; G4 X10; G4 X10;
5 M01; M01; M01;
6 M99; M99; M99;
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS
1051 PART UNLOADER ANOMALY Part unloading has not reached the requested position

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Functionality: Part unloader arm forward command
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d path 3
c path 4
d
c c all paths
a
d
c d path 3
c path 4
d
d a
d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
k d modal
c
k at block end
k
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
d reset d emergency
c d alarm
c and: a M523
d
c
c
c
The M522 auxiliary command controls the part unloader arm forward command.
If the part unloader arm does not intercept the "part unloader arm forward" microswitch within the
preset time, the machine will stop and the relevant part arm unloader not forward alarm will be dis-
played.
When the part unloader arm reaches the forward position, the only possibility to take it backward is
by programming the M523 function.
1 M522; M522; M522;
2 G4 X10; G4 X10; G4 X10;
3 M523; M523; M523;
4 G4 X10; G4 X10; G4 X10;
5 M01; M01; M01;
6 M99; M99; M99;
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS
1051 UNLOADER ARM ANOMALY Part unloading arm has not reached the requested position

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Functionality: Part unloader arm backward command
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d path 3
c c path 4
d all paths
a
d
c
c d path 3
c c path 4
d
c a
d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
j d modal
c
k at block end
k
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
d reset d emergency
c c alarm
d and: a M522
d
c
d
d
The M523 auxiliary function controls the part unloader arm backward command.
If the part unloader arm does not intercept the "part unloader arm backward" microswitch within the
preset time, the machine will stop and the relevant part unloader arm not backward alarm will be dis-
played.
When the part unloader arm reaches the backward position, the only possibility to take it forward is
by programming the M522 function.
1 M522; M522; M522;
2 G4 X10; G4 X10; G4 X10;
3 M523; M523; M523;
4 G4 X10; G4 X10; G4 X10;
5 M01; M01; M01;
6 M99; M99; M99;
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS
1051 UNLOADER ARM ANOMALY Part unloading arm has not reached the requested position

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Functionality: Part collector collet opening command
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d path 3
c path 4
d
c c all paths
a
d
c d path 3
c path 4
d
d a
d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
k d modal
c
k at block end
k
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d d emergency
c d alarm
c and: a M525
d
c
c
c
The M524 auxiliary function controls the part collector collet opening command
If the collet does not intercept the "open collet" microswitch within the preset time, the machine
will stop and the relevant part collector collet not open alarm will be displayed.
Sprint 65 linear is not provided with an open clamp proximity switch (and consequently no fault is
indicated). A 0.5 second stop is performed after the command.
1 M522; M522; M522;
2 G4 X10; G4 X10; G4 X10;
3 M523; M523; M523;
4 G4 X10; G4 X10; G4 X10;
5 M524; M524; M524;
6 G4 X10; G4 X10; G4 X10;
7 M525; M525; M525;
8 G4 X10; G4 X10; G4 X10;
9 M01; M01; M01;
10 M99; M99; M99;
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS
1053 PART COLLECTOR COLLET ANOMALY The part collector collet has not reached the requested position

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Functionality: Part collector collet closing command
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d path 3
c path 4
d
c a all paths
d
c
c d path 3
c path 4
d
c a
d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j d at CNC start-up
a
k d modal
c
k at block end
a
k
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d d emergency
c c alarm
d and: a M524
d
c
d
d
The M525 auxiliary function controls the part collector collet closing command
If the collet does not intercept the "closed collet" microswitch within the preset time, the machine
will stop and the relevant part collector collet not closed alarm will be displayed.
Sprint 65 linear is not provided with an open clamp proximity switch (and consequently no fault is
indicated). A 0.5 second stop is performed after the command.
1 M522; M522; M522;
2 G4 X10; G4 X10; G4 X10;
3 M523; M523; M523;
4 G4 X10; G4 X10; G4 X10;
5 M524; M524; M524;
6 G4 X10; G4 X10; G4 X10;
7 M525; M525; M525;
8 G4 X10; G4 X10; G4 X10;
9 M01; M01; M01;
10 M99; M99; M99;
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS
1053 PART COLLECTOR COLLET ANOMALY The part collector collet has not reached the requested position

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Functionality: Enable machining with differential feeding between Z1 and Z2
Arguments:
Allowed values:
d a path 2
d
c d path 3
c d path 4
c dc all paths
d
c d path 3
c d path 4
c dc path where programmed d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
h
k c modal
c
k at block end
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c a alarm
d
c and:
c
c
The M530 auxiliary function enables machining with differential feed between axes Z1 and Z2.
This type of machining is denominated "superimposed".
Axis Z2 is "superimposed" to axis Z1, or rather by operating only axis Z1, Z2 will carry out exactly
the samemovement. However by operating Z2 (always with the function enabled), the movement of Z2
is "superimposed" (= added) to the movement of Z1.
This function must be programmed from both path 1 and path 2 (in this way the programs will synchro-
nise).
NOTE: If one of the 2 paths concerned is excluded, the M530 function of the enabled path is automat-
ically and immediately terminated, thereby avoiding synchronisation with the other path and the
enabling of its operation.
When the path of the superimposed axis is excluded, the program continues without variations.
When the path of the master axis is excluded, the program of the other path no longer takes into con-
sideration the feed superimposed with subsequent danger of collisions or undesired overrunning.
1 G0 Z80; G0 Z60; fast positioning axes Z1 and Z2
2 M530; M530; enable machining with differential feeding between Z1 and
Z2
3 G1 G94 F1000 Z40; G1 G94 F500 Z20; feeding Z2=feeding Z2+feeding Z1
4 M531; M531; disable machining with differential feeding between Z1
and Z2
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Functionality: Disable machining with differential feeding between Z1 and Z2
Arguments:
Allowed values:
d a path 2
d
c d path 3
c c path 4
d d all paths
c
d
c d path 3
c c path 4
c d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j d at CNC start-up
a
h
k c modal
a
c
k at block end
a
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
d reset d emergency
c c alarm
d and:
d
d
The M531 auxiliary function disables the machining with differential feeding between axes Z1 and Z2.
nise).
ically and immediately terminated, thereby avoiding synchronisation with the other path.
Z2
and Z2
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Arguments:
Allowed values:
d d path 2
c a path 3
d
c d path 4
c dc all paths
c a path 3
d
c d path 4
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
h
k c modal
a
c
k at block end
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c a alarm
d
c and:
c
c
the samemovement. However by operating Z3 (always with the function enabled), the movement of Z3
is "superimposed" (= added) to the movement of Z1.
nise).
Note for Sprint 65 linear: not to be programmed with Z2 on Z3 superimposed mode active (M536/M537).
Z3
and Z3
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS
226

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Arguments:
Allowed values:
d d path 2
c a path 3
d
c c path 4
d d all paths
c
c a 3 3
d
c c path 4
c d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j d at CNC start-up
a
h
k c modal
a
c
k at block end
a
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
d reset d emergency
c c alarm
d and:
d
d
The M533 auxiliary function disables the machining with differential feeding between axes Z1 and Z3.
nise).
Z3
and Z3
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS
226

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Arguments:
Allowed values:
d
c a path 3
d
c d path 4
c dc all paths
d
c d path 3
c d path 4
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
h
k c modal
a
c
k at block end
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c a alarm
d
c and:
c
c
the same movement. However by operating Z2 (always with the function enabled), the movement of Z3 is
"superimposed" (=added) to the movement of Z2.
nise).
Z2
and Z2
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS
226

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Arguments:
Allowed values:
d
c a path 3
d
c c path 4
d d all paths
c
d
c d path 3
c c path 4
c d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j d at CNC start-up
a
h
k c modal
a
c
k at block end
a
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
d reset d emergency
c c alarm
d and:
Also suspended by:
The M535 auxiliary function disables the machining with differential feed between axes Z3 and Z2.
This function must be programmed both from path 2 and path 3 (in this way the programs synchronise).
Z2
and Z2
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS
226

Auxiliary functions
Name: M536 d
c ISO code
Function: Activation of machining with differential feed between Z2 and Z3
Topics:
Admitted values:
d
c a path 3
d
c d path 4
c c all paths
d
c a path 3
d
c d path 4
c c programmed path
d d
c concerned device
k
j c at CNC power-on
d j alone in block
h
k c modal
a
d d suspended after cycle stop
c
j at end of block
k d after RESET
c k with other instructions
j d self-deleting
c d resumed after cycle start
c
d a emergency
d
c a alarm
d
c and: d
c
Suspended by: d
c
Resumed by: d
c
Auxiliary function M536 activates machining with differential speed between axes Z2 and Z3.
This type of machining is defined and “superimposed”.
Axis Z3 is “superimposed on axis Z3, i.e. commanding only axis Z2, Z3 follows its movements exactly.
Instead, commanding Z3 (with the function enabled), the movement of Z3 is “superimposed (=added) to
the movement of Z2.active
This function must be programmed from both path 2 and path 3 (to synchronise the programs).
NOTE: if one of the 2 paths involved is switched off, the path M536 function automatically stops
immediately, disabling synchronisation with the other path and its operation.
When the path of the axis under superimposed control is excluded, the program proceeds without
variations.
When the path of the master axis is excluded, the program for the other path no longer consid-
ers superimposed feed with the risk of accidental collision or overrun.
1 G0 Z80; G0 Z60; axis Z2 and Z3 rapid positioning
2 M536; M536; differential feed machining activation. Z2-Z3
3 G1 G94 F500 Z40; G1 G94 F500 Z20; Z3 feed = Z3 feed + Z2 feed
4 M537; M537; differential feed machining deactivation. Z2-Z3
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
ALARMS
226

Auxiliary functions
Name: M537 d
c ISO code
Function: Deactivation of machining with differential feed between Z2 and Z3
Topics:
Admitted values:
d
c a path 3
d
c c path 4
d d all paths
c
c a path 3
d
c c path 4
d d programmed path
c d
c concerned device
k
j d at CNC power-on
a
c j alone in block
h
k c modal
a
d d suspended after cycle stop
c
j at end of block
h
k d after RESET
a
c k with other instructions
j d self-deleting
c d resumed after cycle start
c
Cancelled by: c d reset d emergency
c c alarm
d and: d
c
Suspended by: c
d
Resumed by: c
d
Auxiliary function M537 deactivates machining with differential speed between axes Z2 and Z3.
This function must be programmed from both path 2 and path 3 (to synchronise the programs).
NOTE: if one of the 2 paths involved is switched off, the path M537 function automatically stops
immediately, disabling synchronisation with the other path and its operation.
1 G0 Z80; G0 Z60; axis Z2 and Z3 rapid positioning
2 M536; M536; differential feed machining activation. Z2-Z3
3 G1 G94 F1000 Z40; G1 G94 F500 Z20; Z3 feed = Z3 feed + Z2 feed
4 M537; M537; differential feed machining deactivation. Z2-Z3
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
ALARMS
226

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Functionality: Enable synchronisation between Z1 and Z2
Arguments:
Allowed values:
d
c d path 3
c d path 4
c d
c all paths
d
c d path 3
c d path 4
c d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
k
j a modal
d
c
k at block end
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c a alarm
d
c and: d
c
c
c
The M540 auxiliary function enables synchronised machining between axes Z1 and Z2.
This type of machining is denominated "synchronisation".
Axis Z2 is "synchronised" to axis Z1, or rather by operating only axis Z1, Z2 will carry out exactly
the same movement. However by operating Z2 (always with the function enabled), the Z2 axis does not
move and the following CNC alarm is generated:
226 MOVEMENT OF SYNCHRONISED AXIS.
nise).
1 G0 Z80; G0 Z60; rapid positioning of axes Z1 and Z2
2 M540; M540; enable synchronisation Z1-Z2
3 G1 G94 F1000 Z40; feed Z2 = feed Z1
4 M541; M541; disable synchronisation Z1-Z2
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS
226 SYNCHRONOUS AXIS MOVEMENT The Z2 axis cannot be commanded during synchronization.

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Functionality: Disable synchronisation between Z1 and Z2
Arguments:
Allowed values:
d a path 2
d
c d path 3
c c path 4
d d
c all paths
d
c d path 3
c c path 4
d d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j d at CNC start-up
a
c h alone in the block
k
j a modal
d
c
k at block end
a
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
d reset d emergency
c c alarm
d and:
d
d
The M541 auxiliary function disables the synchronised machining between axes Z1 and Z2.
This function must be programmed both from path 1 and path 2 (in this way the programs synchronise).
1 G0 Z80; G0 Z60; rapid positioning of axes Z1 and Z2
2 M530; M530; enable synchronisation Z1-Z2
3 G1 G94 F1000 Z40; G1 G94 F500 Z20; feed Z2 = feed Z1
4 M531; M531; disable synchronisation Z1-Z2
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS
226 SYNCHRONOUS AXIS MOVEMENT The Z2 axis cannot be commanded during synchronization.

Auxiliary functions
Name: M558 d
c ISO code
Function: Start coolant from outlets over spindles
Topics:
Admitted values:
d d path 3
c d path 4
c d
a
c all paths
d d path 3
c d path 4
c d
c programmed path c
d concerned device
Operative:
h at beginning of
k
j d
c at CNC power-on
j alone in block a
c
d modal c
d
a suspended after cycle stop
block d
c
k
j c
d self-clearing c
d
a resume after cycle start
k at end of block
j
Cancelled by: a
d
c reset a
d
c emergency stop c
d
a alarm and: c
d
a M559
Suspended by: a
d
c coolant OFF button
Resumed by: a
d
c coolant ON button
Auxiliary function M558 activates set-up to start coolant pump of outlets over the spindles.
Coolant operation also depends on the on/off buttons located on the panel [coolant ON] and [coolant
OFF].
The button is automatically set to [coolant ON] when the machine is started by default.
The pump starts outputting coolant when the following four conditions are respected:
1) M558 function is active (i.e. the program block containing the function is complete);
2) coolant is switch on by the button (coolant ON);
3) MDI or AUTOMATIC mode is on;
4) no bar charge is in progress.
Note: Any cycle stop condition (alarm, cycle stop button, M1 on, etc.) will stop coolant operation.
When the cycle is on or stopped, the cycle is reset by pressing the RESET button. This includes
all M functions which are deleted by pressing the RESET button, including M558.
1 M558 G4 X5 G4 X5 activate coolant from outlets over spindles 1 and 2.
2 G4 X10 G4 X5 G4 X5 coolant over spindle 2 is activated with
6
7
8
9
10
11
ALARMS
N. Text Description

Auxiliary functions
Name: M559 c
d ISO code
Function: Stop coolant from outlets over spindles
Topics:
Admitted values:
d d path 3
c d path 4
c c
d
a all paths
d d path 3
c d path 4
c c
d programmed path c
d concerned device
Operative:
h at beginning of
k
j a
d
c at CNC power-on
j alone in block c
d
a modal c
block a
d
c
k
j c
d self-clearing c
k at end of block
j
Cancelled by: d
c reset d
c emergency stop c
d alarm and: c
d
a M558
Suspended by: d
c
Resumed by: d
c
Auxiliary function M559 cancels set-up to start coolant pump of outlets over the spindles.
Generally, the M559 function is used to turn the coolant on and off several times during the program.
1 M558 G4 X5 G4 X5 deactivate coolant from outlets over spindles 1 and 2.
2 G4 X10 G4 X5 G4 X5 coolant over spindle 2 is deactivated with
6
7
8
9
10
11
ALARMS
N. Text Description

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Functionality: Axis migration function
Arguments:
Allowed values:
d a path 2
d
c d
c path 3 path 4
d
c c all paths
d
c d
c path 3 path 4
d
d
c
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
h
k a modal
d
c
k at block end
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
d reset d emergency
c d alarm
c and: a M560 programmed on both paths concerned
d
c
c
c
Using the appropriate arguments, the M560 function allows the axis of one path to be migrated onto
another path and consequently allows the migrated axis to be programmed and to be used intermittently
in the new path.
This operation swops the place of two axes of different paths.
[X,Z,Y,C]= Name of the axis to migrate
Values allowed: the specified value of one of these arguments identifies the path of the
axis to be migrated; it therefore must be an axis that already exists and that can be
migrated.
[P]= Number of the path onto which the axis is to be migrated.
Values allowed: the number of a path that already exists and onto which the axis can be migra-
ted.
The operation must be programmed from both paths concerned so as to enable and disable the migration
by carrying out the synchronisation between the two paths. For example, in order to migrate axis X2
onto path 1, it is necessary to program M560 X2 P1 in path 1 and path 2. In order to cancel the oper-
ation, it is necessary to program M560 without arguments.
The migrated axis changes place with the corresponding axis in the path to which it migrates; in the
example above, X2 goes onto path 1 and X1 goes onto path 2. The X2 axis that must be used to inter-
polate is graphically displayed as X2 in path 1. The X1 axis must not be used to interpolate with the
axes of path 2, therefore it is neither enabled nor displayed in path 2.
Note, during the phase of enabled migration:

• If there is a CNC emergency, it is necessary to turn the CNC off and then turn it back on.
• If an alarm is generated or 'reset' is pressed, it is necessary to program the M560 function in
MDI on both paths, which cancels the migration operation and therefore graphically resets the
axes. If the operation is not cancelled, alarm 1030 will continue to be generated in automatic
mode.
1 M560 X2 P1; M560 X2 P1; enable migration of axis X2 onto path 1
2 ... machinings on path 1 with migrated axis X2
3 M560; M560; cancel migration
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS
1030 PROGRAM M560 During the migration RESET was pressed or an alarm was generated
1031 TURN OFF AND TURN ON IN CNC During the migration a CNC EMERGENCY occurred
3020 PROGRAMMING ERROR Incorrect/not allowed argument or value

Auxiliary functions
Name: M595 c
d ISO code
Function: Immediate stop due to dirty coolant filter
Topics:
Admitted values:
d d path 3
c d path 4
c c
d
a all paths
d d path 3
c d path 4
c c
d programmed path c
d
a concerned device
Operative:
h at beginning of
k
j d
c at CNC power-on
j alone in block c
d
a modal c
block d
c
h
k
j with other instructions c
d self-clearing c
k at end of block
j
Cancelled by: a
d
c reset d
c emergency stop c
d alarm and: c
d
Suspended by: d
c
Resumed by: d
c
For Sprint 65 linear, filters with pressure switch are arranged downstream of the standard coolant
pumps. The machine will stop at end of cycle if one of the filters is obstructed. Otherwise, to
immediately stop the machine, program M595 function at the beginning of the part program.
1 M595 M208 M308 immediate stop for coolant filters 1 on
2 M8 G4 X5 G4 X5 after first cycle start, immediate stop due to
3 G4 X10 G4 X5 G4 X5 obstruction of filters 2 and 3 is activated with possible
4 M9 M209 M309 delay determined by channel synchronisation.
5 M1 M1 M1
6 M99 M99 M99
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
ALARMS
N. Text Description

Auxiliary functions
Name: M596 d
c ISO code
Function: Reset stop at end of cycle due to dirty coolant filter
Topics:
Admitted values:
d d path 3
c d path 4
c d
a
c all paths
d d path 3
c d path 4
c d
c programmed path c
d
a concerned device
Operative:
h at beginning of
k
j a
d
c at CNC power-on
j alone in block a
c
d modal c
block a
d
c
h
k
j with other instructions c
d self-clearing c
k at end of block
j
Cancelled by: d
c reset d
c emergency stop c
d alarm and: c
d
Suspended by: d
c
Resumed by: d
c
For Sprint 65 linear, filters with pressure switch are arranged downstream of the standard coolant
pumps. The machine will stop at end of cycle if one of the filters is obstructed. Otherwise, to stop
the machine immediately, program the M595 function at the beginning of the part program. Stop at end
of cycle will be restored by programming the M596 function.
Generally, the M595 function is used to turn the immediate stop due to the coolant filter on and off
several times during the program.
1 M595 M208 M308 immediate stop for coolant filters on.
2 M8 G4 X5 G4 X5
3 G4 X10 G4 X5 G4 X5
4 M596 G4 X5 G4 X5 reset stop at end of cycle for coolant filters.
5 G4 X10 G4 X5 G4 X5
6 M9 M209 M309
7 M1 M1 M1 After first cycle start, stop (immediate or at end of cycle)
8 M99 M99 M99 due to obstruction of filters 2 and 3 is activated with
9 possible delay determined by channel
10 synchronisation.
11
12
13
14
ALARMS
N. Text Description

Auxiliary functions
Denomination: M600 ÷ M619 d

c ISO code
Functionality: Supplementary output 01 - ON
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d path 3
c d
cpath 4 a all paths
d
c
c d path 3
c d
c a
d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
k a modal
d
c
k at block end
k
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c c alarm
d and: d ...
c
Also suspended by:
Functions M600 to M619 manage customer auxiliary outputs from n°1 to n°10.
Each auxiliary output has a corresponding auxiliary input.
The auxiliary inputs are backed by the custom macro variables (#1011 - #1020) and can be managed by
the part program.
Note: #1011-#1020 can read but not write; they can have status 0 or 1 just like the auxiliary inputs.
Function M95 has to be programmed in the block prior to the reading of #1011-#1020, which disables
program buffering. This way the variable is read precisely in the block in which it is programmed and
not beforehand.
The following table summarises the auxiliary OUTPUTS AND INPUTS (basic and optional).
[ON] [OFF] [TIPO] [CUST.MACRO VAR.] [TIPO]
OUTPUT N°01 M600 M601 BASIC INPUT N°01 #1011 BASIC
OUTPUT N°02 M602 M603 BASIC INPUT N°02 #1012 BASIC
OUTPUT N°03 M604 M605 OPTIONAL INPUT N°03 #1013 OPTIONAL
Practical example:
Supposing we have to control an external spring loaded piece expeller device that has a microswitch
for controlling position reached(output n°1 + input n°1).
M600; (ON output n°1 -> box forward command)
G4X1; (wait 1 sec before checking micro)
M95; (stop part program buffering)
IF[#1011 EQ1]GOTO20; (read input n°1 -> check micro if=1 ok go to line 20)
M90; (generates immediate cycle stop + alarm)
N20;
M601; (OFF output n°1 -> return box back under spring force)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Functionality: Centre control 1
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d
c path 3 path 4
d
c c all paths
a
d
c d
c path 3 path 4
d
d
c
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
h
k d modal
c
k at block end
j a self-cancelling
d
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c a alarm
d
c and: a Control completed
d
c
Also suspended by:
The M621 auxiliary function enables the head of the control device of centre no.1.
It can be programmed from any path and always refers to the application concerned.
When the function is programmed the system checks the status of the centre:
• if the centre is broken the cycle will immediately stop and the centre broken alarm is displayed.
• if the centre is present the function is automatically cancelled.
1 M100; M100; M100;
2 G0 Z80 X60 Y40; G0 Z80 X60 Y40; G0 Z80 X60 Y40;
3 M621; M621; M621;
4 M03 S500; M03 S500; M03 S500;
5 G1 G94 F500 Z70; G1 G94 F500 Z70; G1 G94 F500 Z70;
6 M01; M01; M01;
7 M99; M99; M99;
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS
1060 CENTRE 1: BROKEN The centre is broken or the device is not correctly adjusted
1061 CENTRE 1: CONTROL ANOMALY The device is incorrectly adjusted and is broken

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d
c path 3 path 4
d
c a all paths
d
c
c d
c path 3 path 4
d
d
c
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
h
k d modal
c
k at block end
j a self-cancelling
d
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c c alarm
a
d and: a Control completed
d
c
Also suspended by:
1 M100; M100; M100;
2 G0 Z80 X60 Y40; G0 Z80 X60 Y40; G0 Z80 X60 Y40;
3 M622; M622; M622;
4 M03 S500; M03 S500; M03 S500;
5 G1 G94 F500 Z70; G1 G94 F500 Z70; G1 G94 F500 Z70;
6 M01; M01; M01;
7 M99; M99; M99;
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d
c path 3 path 4
d
c c all paths
a
d
c d
c path 3 path 4
d
d
c
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
h
k d modal
c
k at block end
j a self-cancelling
d
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c a alarm
d
c and: a Control completed
d
c
Also suspended by:
1 M100; M100; M100;
2 G0 Z80 X60 Y40; G0 Z80 X60 Y40; G0 Z80 X60 Y40;
3 M623; M623; M623;
4 M03 S500; M03 S500; M03 S500;
5 G1 G94 F500 Z70; G1 G94 F500 Z70; G1 G94 F500 Z70;
6 M01; M01; M01;
7 M99; M99; M99;
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d
c path 3 path 4
d
c a all paths
d
c
c d
c path 3 path 4
d
d
c
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
h
k d modal
c
k at block end
j a self-cancelling
d
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c c alarm
a
d and: a Control completed
d
c
Also suspended by:
1 M100; M100; M100;
2 G0 Z80 X60 Y40; G0 Z80 X60 Y40; G0 Z80 X60 Y40;
3 M624; M624; M624;
4 M03 S500; M03 S500; M03 S500;
5 G1 G94 F500 Z70; G1 G94 F500 Z70; G1 G94 F500 Z70;
6 M01; M01; M01;
7 M99; M99; M99;
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Functionality: Pneumatic spindle 1 ON
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d
c path 3 path 4
d
c c all paths
a
d
c d
c path 3 path 4
d
d a
d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
k a modal
d
d
c
k at block end
k
j d self-cancelling
d
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c a alarm
d
c and: a M631
d
c
Also suspended by:
The M630 auxiliary function enables additional spindle no.1 (pneumatic or electric)
With the stopping and restart of the cycle, the additional spindles which are enabled, will stop and
restart with the same sequence of the standard serial spindles.
1 M630; M630; M630;
2 G4 X4; G4 X4; G4 X4;
3 M631; M631; M631;
4 G4 X4; G4 X4; G4 X4;
5 M01; M01; M01;
6 M99; M99; M99;
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Functionality: Pneumatic spindle 1 OFF
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d
c path 3 path 4
d
c a all paths
d
c
c d
c path 3 path 4
d
c a
d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j d at CNC start-up
a
k a modal
d
d
c
k at block end
a
k
j d self-cancelling
d
c
Cancelled by: c
d reset d emergency
c c alarm
d and: a M630
d
c
Also suspended by:
The M631 auxiliary function disables additional spindle no.1 (pneumatic or electric)
1 M630; M630; M630;
2 G4 X4; G4 X4; G4 X4;
3 M631; M631; M631;
4 G4 X4; G4 X4; G4 X4;
5 M01; M01; M01;
6 M99; M99; M99;
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d
c path 3 path 4
d
c c all paths
a
d
c d
c path 3 path 4
d
d a
d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
k a modal
d
d
c
k at block end
k
j d self-cancelling
d
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c a alarm
d
c and: a M633
d
c
Also suspended by:
1 M632; M632; M632;
2 G4 X4; G4 X4; G4 X4;
3 M633; M633; M633;
4 G4 X4; G4 X4; G4 X4;
5 M01; M01; M01;
6 M99; M99; M99;
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d
c path 3 path 4
d
c a all paths
d
c
c d
c path 3 path 4
d
c a
d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j d at CNC start-up
a
k a modal
d
d
c
k at block end
a
k
j d self-cancelling
d
c
Cancelled by: c
d reset d emergency
c c alarm
d and: a M632
d
c
Also suspended by:
1 M632; M632; M632;
2 G4 X4; G4 X4; G4 X4;
3 M633; M633; M633;
4 G4 X4; G4 X4; G4 X4;
5 M01; M01; M01;
6 M99; M99; M99;
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d
c path 3 path 4
d
c c all paths
a
d
c d
c path 3 path 4
d
d a
d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
k a modal
d
d
c
k at block end
k
j d self-cancelling
d
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c a alarm
d
c and: a M635
d
c
Also suspended by:
1 M634; M634; M634;
2 G4 X4; G4 X4; G4 X4;
3 M635; M635; M635;
4 G4 X4; G4 X4; G4 X4;
5 M01; M01; M01;
6 M99; M99; M99;
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d
c path 3 path 4
d
c a all paths
d
c
c d
c path 3 path 4
d
c a
d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j d at CNC start-up
a
k a modal
d
d
c
k at block end
a
k
j d self-cancelling
d
c
Cancelled by: c
d reset d emergency
c c alarm
d and: a M634
d
c
Also suspended by:
1 M634; M634; M634;
2 G4 X4; G4 X4; G4 X4;
3 M635; M635; M635;
4 G4 X4; G4 X4; G4 X4;
5 M01; M01; M01;
6 M99; M99; M99;
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d
c path 3 path 4
d
c c all paths
a
d
c d
c path 3 path 4
d
d a
d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
k a modal
d
d
c
k at block end
k
j d self-cancelling
d
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c a alarm
d
c and: a M637
d
c
Also suspended by:
1 M636; M636; M636;
2 G4 X4; G4 X4; G4 X4;
3 M637; M637; M637;
4 G4 X4; G4 X4; G4 X4;
5 M01; M01; M01;
6 M99; M99; M99;
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d
c path 3 path 4
d
c a all paths
d
c
c d
c path 3 path 4
d
c a
d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j d at CNC start-up
a
k a modal
d
d
c
k at block end
a
k
j d self-cancelling
d
c
Cancelled by: c
d reset d emergency
c c alarm
d and: a M636
d
c
Also suspended by:
1 M636; M636; M636;
2 G4 X4; G4 X4; G4 X4;
3 M637; M637; M637;
4 G4 X4; G4 X4; G4 X4;
5 M01; M01; M01;
6 M99; M99; M99;
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d
c path 3 path 4
d
c c all paths
a
d
c d
c path 3 path 4
d
d a
d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
k a modal
d
d
c
k at block end
k
j d self-cancelling
d
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c a alarm
d
c and: a M639
d
c
Also suspended by:
1 M638; M638; M638;
2 G4 X4; G4 X4; G4 X4;
3 M639; M639; M639;
4 G4 X4; G4 X4; G4 X4;
5 M01; M01; M01;
6 M99; M99; M99;
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d
c path 3 path 4
d
c a all paths
d
c
c d
c path 3 path 4
d
c a
d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j d at CNC start-up
a
k a modal
d
d
c
k at block end
a
k
j d self-cancelling
d
c
Cancelled by: c
d reset d emergency
c c alarm
d and: a M638
d
c
Also suspended by:
1 M638; M638; M638;
2 G4 X4; G4 X4; G4 X4;
3 M639; M639; M639;
4 G4 X4; G4 X4; G4 X4;
5 M01; M01; M01;
6 M99; M99; M99;
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Functionality: Load Monitor ON
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d
c path 3 path 4
d
c c all paths
a
d
c d
c path 3 path 4
d
a
d d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
h
k a modal
d
c
k at block end
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c a alarm
d
c and: a M651
d
c
Also suspended by:
The M650 auxiliary function enables the tool stress control application.
(LOAD MONITOR: optional application).
This function is operational in the path in which it is programmed.
1 M650; M650; M650;
2 G0 Z100; G0 Z100; G0 Z100;
3 M03 S500; M03 S500; M03 S500;
4 G1 G94 F500 Z80; G1 G94 F500 Z80; G1 G94 F500 Z80;
5 M651; M651; M651;
6 M01; M01; M01;
7 M99; M99; M99;
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Functionality: Load Monitor OFF
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d
c path 3 path 4
d
c a all paths
d
c
c d
c path 3 path 4
d
d
c d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j d at CNC start-up
a
h
k a modal
d
c
k at block end
a
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
d reset d emergency
c c alarm
d and: a M650
d
c
Also suspended by:
The M651 auxiliary function disables the tool stress control application
(LOAD MONITOR: optional application).
This function is operational in the path in which it is programmed.
1 M650; M650; M650;
2 G0 Z100; G0 Z100; G0 Z100;
3 M03 S500; M03 S500; M03 S500;
4 G1 G94 F500 Z80; G1 G94 F500 Z80; G1 G94 F500 Z80;
5 M651; M651; M651;
6 M01; M01; M01;
7 M99; M99; M99;
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
Name: M654 d
c ISO code
Function: Device 1 Marposs - ON
Topics:
Admitted values:
d c
d path 3 c
d path 4 d
a
c all paths
d c
d path 3 c
d path 4 d
c programmed path c
d
a concerned device
Operative:
h at beginning of
k
j d
c at CNC power-on
after pressing RESET h
k
j alone in block a
c
d modal c
block d
c
k with other instructions
j c
d self-clearing c
k at end of block
j
Cancelled by: a
d
c reset d
c emergency stop c
d alarm and: c
d
Suspended by: d
c
Resumed by: d
c
Function M654 activates the Marposs measuring device.
1 M654 device on
2 ...
3 M655 device off
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
ALARMS
N. Text Description

Auxiliary functions
Name: M655 c
d ISO code
Function: Device 1 Marposs - OFF
Topics:
Admitted values:
d d
c path 3 c
d path 4 c
d
a all paths
d d
c path 3 c
d path 4 c
d programmed path c
d
a concerned device
Operative:
h at beginning of
k
j d
c at CNC power-on
after pressing RESET h
k
j alone in block c
d
a modal c
block d
c
k with other instructions
j c
d self-clearing c
k at end of block
j
Cancelled by: a
d
c reset d
c emergency stop c
d alarm and: c
d
Suspended by: d
c
Resumed by: d
c
Function M655 deactivates the Marposs measuring device.
1 M654 device on
2 ...
3 M655 device off
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
ALARMS
N. Text Description

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Functionality: Arm rotation to part pick-up position instruction
Arguments:
Allowed values:
d
c d path 3
c d path 4
c all paths
d
c
c d path 3
c d path 4
d
c a
d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
j d modal
c
k at block end
k
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
d reset d emergency
c d alarm
c and: a M862
d
c
Also suspended by:
Commands arm rotation to part pick-up position, at end of movement, arm is near frontal spindle.
Fuction to be programmed after confirmation of unloader in part pick-up and before arm lowering
instruction.
1 M865; (unloader in part pick-up position instruction)
2 G4 X…; (unloader in position standby )
3 M861; (arm rotation in part pick-up position instruction)
4 M863. (arm lowering to part pick-up position instruction)
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
ALARMS
1051 Part unload fault The part unloader is not in the instructed position or does not reach it in the time allowed.

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Functionality: Arm rotation in part evacuation position
Arguments:
Allowed values:
d
c d path 3
c c path 4
d all paths
d
c
c d path 3
c c path 4
d
c a
d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
j d modal
c
k at block end
k
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
d reset d emergency
c c alarm
d and: a M861
d
c
Also suspended by:
Arm rotation to part evacuation position instruction, after movement the arm will be near unloading
chute.
Function to be programmed after confirmation that unloader is in part evacuation position and before
arm lowering instruction.
1 M866; (unloader in part evacuation position)
2 G4 X…; (unloader in position standby )
3 M862; (arm rotation to part evacuation position instruction)
4 M863. (arm lowering to part pick-up position)
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Functionality: Arm lowering in part pick-up or evacuation position instruction
Arguments:
Allowed values:
d
c d path 3
c d path 4
c c all paths
d
c d path 3
c d path 4
d a
d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
k c modal
c
k at block end
k
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
d reset d emergency
c d alarm
c and: a M864
d
c
Also suspended by:
Commands arm movement from disengagement position to part pick-up or evacuation position, at end of
movement , the part collection box will be near the frontal spindle gripper or the unloading chute.
During part pick-up,the function is to be programmed after confirmation of arm rotated in part pick-
up position and before opening of gripper related to frontal spindle; in evacuation phase, the func-
tion has to be programmed after confirmation that unloader is in part evacuation position and before
opening of part unloader box.
1 (PART PICK-UP)
3 G4 X…; (unloader in position standby)
5 M863; (arm lowering to part pick-up position instruction)
6 G0 Z…; (frontal spindle approach)
7 M236; (gripper opening)
8 (PART EJECTION)
9 G0 Z…; (frontal spindle disengagement)
10 M864; (arm return to disengagement position)
12 M866; (unloader in part evacuation position instruction)
13 M863; (arm lowering to part evacuation position instruction)
14 M867; (parts unloader box opening)
15 M864; (arm return to disengagement position instruction)
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Functionality: Arm return to disengagement position instruction
Arguments:
Allowed values:
d
c d path 3
c c path 4
d all paths
d
c
c d path 3
c c path 4
d
c a
d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
j d modal
c
k at block end
k
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
d reset d emergency
c c alarm
d and: a M863
d
c
Also suspended by:
Arm return to disengagement position, at end of movement, the arm will be in a position that does not
interfere with movements of frontal spindle.
Function to be programmed after part ejection from frontal spindle and before command to rotate arm
to part evacuation position, while in the case of evacuation after opening of part unloader box.
1 (PART PICK-UP)
6 G0 Z…; (frontal spindle approach)
7 M236; (gripper opening)
8 M510; (part ejection)
9 (PART EVACUATION)
10 G0 Z…; (frontal spindle disengagement)
15 M867; (parts unloader box opening)
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Functionality: Unloader in part pick-up position instruction
Arguments:
Allowed values:
d
c d path 3
c d path 4
c all paths
d
c
c d path 3
c d path 4
d
c a
d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
j d modal
c
k at block end
k
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
d reset d emergency
c d alarm
c and: a M866
d
c
Also suspended by:
Commands part unloader to part pick-up position, at end of movement, the device will be in line with
frontal spindle.
After confirmation of unloader in position, the instruction follows for arm rotation in
part pick-up position.
1 M869; (data block during unloader movement)
3 M861; (arm rotation to part pick-up position instruction)
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Functionality: Unloader in part evacuation position instruction
Arguments:
Allowed values:
d
c d path 3
c c path 4
d all paths
d
c
c d path 3
c c path 4
d
c a
d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
j d modal
c
k at block end
k
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
d reset d emergency
c c alarm
d and: a M865
d
c
Also suspended by:
Commands part unloader to part pick-up position, at end of movement the device will be in line with
part unloading chute .
Function to be programmed after confirmation of arm rotation to part evacuation position and
before arm lowering instruction.
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Functionality: Parts unloader box opening instruction
Arguments:
Allowed values:
d
c d path 3
c path 4
d
c c all paths
d
c d path 3
c path 4
d
d a
d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
k d modal
c
k at block end
k
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
d reset d emergency
c d alarm
c and: a M868
d
c
Also suspended by:
Commands opening of box related to part unloading; used in phase concluding part evacuation sequence.
Function to be programmed after confirmation of arm lowering to part evacuation position and
before arm return to disengagement position instruction.
If unloader is fitted with grippers it will be necessary to program opening also before part pick-up.
2 M867; (parts unloader box opening instruction)
3 G4 X…; (standby for part evacuation)
4 M868; (parts unloader box closing instruction)
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Functionality: Parts unloader box closing instruction
Arguments:
Allowed values:
d
c d path 3
c path 4
d
c d all paths
c
c d path 3
c path 4
d
c a
d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
k d modal
c
k at block end
k
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
d reset d emergency
c c alarm
d and: a M867
d
c
Also suspended by:
Commands closing of box related to part unloading; used in phase concluding part pick-up sequence.
Function to be programmed after part evacuation.
2 M867; (parts unloader box opening instruction)
3 G4 X…; (standby for part evacuation)
4 M868; (parts unloader box closing instruction)
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Functionality: Data block during part unloading functions
Arguments:
Allowed values:
d
c d path 3
c d path 4
c all paths
d
c
c d path 3
c d path 4
d
c a
d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
j d modal
c
k at block end
k
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c a alarm
d
c and: a M865, M866
d
c
Also suspended by:
Programmed before part unload function instructions (in our case M865 and M866) so that for each
program block concerned, there is a standby until move is completed (corresponding to control micro
activation) before executing the next block.
After execution of single M function related to unloader movement, M519 self-deletes.
Functions from M861 to M864, are completed at end of movement, also without use of function M519,
that is not applicable to M867 and M868.
1 M869; (data block during unloader movement)
3 M861; (arm rotation to part pick-up position instruction)
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Functionality: Part evacuation cycle
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d
c path 3 path 4
d
c a all paths
d
c
c d
c path 3 path 4
d
c a
d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
k d modal
c
k at block end
k
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
d reset a emergency
d
c c alarm
a
d and: d
c
Also suspended by:
With unloader in part pick-up position (M865) and vertical arm disengaged (M864),rxecuted in
sequence the M functions
M862 (Tilting rotation in disengagement position);

M866 (unloader translation in part evacuation position);
M863 (Vertical arm lowering);
M867 (Part holder box opening);
pause of 2 seconds;
M868 (Part holder box closing);
M864 (Vertical arm return).
With only exception of function M862, lthe sequence takes place in masked time (without block of
part program).
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
ALARMS
1051 Part unload fault The part unloader is not in the instructed position or does not reach it in the time allowed
1054 Part unloader collision hazard Function M870 has been programmed with vertical arm lowered in part ejection zone

Auxiliary functions
11.2 G macros
This section describes the detailed specifications of use of the machine tool G
macro functions.
Type ISO-code
Description from to
FANUC G functions modified by GITAL G macro G00 G88
GITAL G macro G300 G899
CUSTOM G macro G900 G999
Macro G availability
S Standard
O Optional
Macro G
SPRINT 42|10 linear

Function
Description
FANUC G functions modified by GITAL G macro (from G00 to G88)

GITAL G macros (G188, from G300 to G899)
G10 MACRO to block the FANUC function (G10 L50) for parameter writing S
G80 Cancellation of fixed cycles S
G84 Enable fixed cycle for rigid tapping with Z axis S
G88 Enable fixed cycle for rigid tapping with X axis S
G188 Enable fixed cycle for rigid tapping with Y axis S
G300 Axes torque reduction/reset S
G301 Position control for the axis/axes in torque reduction S
G302 Stop control of Z2 axis S
G303 Reload Z1 axis in masked time + part cutting S
G304 CDS user points ON/OFF (high pressure system) O
G305 Polygon milling between spindles with possibility to report polygon milling unit S
G306 Automatic survey of part origin S
G307 Automatic survey of part origin for counter-spindle machinings with path 3
G308 Master encoder path spindle selection (multi-spindle-type-c) S
G309 Apply thermal dilation compensation to declared axes S
G310 Supplementary spindle command (electrical nsk - pneumatic) O
G315 Await synchrony reached in polygon milling S
G330 Turbothreader start-up, speed control and shut-down O

Auxiliary functions
Denomination: G10
Functionality: MACRO to block the FANUC function (G10 L50) for parameter writing
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d path 3
c c path 4
d a all paths
d
c
Referred to: c
d path 1 d path 2
c d path 3
c c path 4
d
c d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
h
k c modal
c
k at block end
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
d reset d emergency
c c alarm
d and: a G11
d
c
Also suspended by:
The G10 macro has been created to prevent the modification of CNC parameters with FANUC function
G10 L50
When the G10 macro is programmed with argument L=50 the following alarm is generated:
3028 ILLEGAL G CODE
This restriction is necessary to prevent the modification of CNC parameters, which could compromise
the functionality and safety of the lathe.
If G10 is used for its other functionalities as foreseen by FANUC there is no limitation.
path 1 path 2 path 3 path 4 Description
1 G10 L50 P1320 N20; Parameter writing 1320 path1 =20
2 (blocked by macro with AL3028)
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS
3028 ILLEGAL G CODE The G10 L50 command is blocked by GITAL

Auxiliary functions
Denomination: G80
Functionality: Cancellation of fixed cycles
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d path 3
c path 4
d
c c all paths
a
d
c d path 3
c path 4
d
a
d d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
a
h
k d modal
c
k at block end
d
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
d reset d emergency
c d alarm
c and: a activation of one
d
c of the FANUC fixed cycles
Also suspended by:
The G80 macro cancels the FANUC fixed cycles previously enabled.
It is effective in the path in which it is programmed.
1 T0101 G0 Z-20 X30 Y0; tool (male) rapid positioning
2 G1 G95; feed speed in mm/rev
3 M19 B0; angular orientation at 0°, main spindle path 1
4 M73 S500; clockwise rotation command, motorized spindle path 1
5 M29; enabling of rigid tapping
6 G88 X20 F1; fixed tapping cycle in X male input and output)
7 G80; cancellation of fixed cycle
8 …
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
Denomination: G84
Functionality: Enable fixed cycle for rigid tapping with Z axis
Arguments: Z W F
Allowed values: absolute incremental positive
c d path 3
c d path 4
c all paths
a
d
c
c d path 3
c d path 4
a
d
c d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
k
j c modal
a
d a suspended by cycle stop
d
c
k at block end
j c self-cancelling
d a reactivated by cycle stop
d
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c c alarm
d and: a G80
d
c
Also suspended by:
The G84 macro enables the fixed tapping cycle for the Z axis.
[Z]=Final point of thread.
Values allowed: any, provided the specified absolute coordinate remains within the range of the
physical stops of the axis.
[W]=Incremental distance from the start point to the final point of thread.
Values allowed: any, provided the final point of thread remainswithin the range of the physical
stops of the axis.
W is used as a replacement for Z; it is not possible and serves no purpose to use both in the same
block.
[F]=Feed speed of the Z axis linked to the G94 or G95 work mode.
If the spindle used has a ratio of 1:1 (motor:spindle) in G95 F corresponds to the thread pitch.
Values allowed: positive and coherent values.
Note: Rigid tapping is an interpolation between a spindle and an axis.

It is enabled in the following way:
1) Enable the spindle to use for tapping. The direction of the spindle defines
the type of thread (clockwise=right; counter clockwise=left)
2) Enable the rigidity of the spindle (rigid masking mode M29; M229; ...)
3) Enable the fixed tapping cycle (execution of the tapping)
The fixed cycle commands the axis and the spindle carrying out the thread; once the final point
has been reached, it inverts the movement of the two allowing the male to exit; when the point of
departure has been reached, the movement of the spindle is stopped.
4) Cancellation of the fixed cycle with G80 (end fixed cycle + cancellation of rigidity)
Note: During the execution of the rigid tapping fixed cycle the axes feed of the path is blocked at
100%. However, with the axes override selector switch at the '0' position, machining is stopped and
synchronisation between the axis and the spindle is maintained. Move the selector switch from the '0'
position to continue machining.
1 T0707 G0 Z3 Y0 X0; tool (male) rapid positioning
2 G1 G95; work feed mode mm/rev
3 M3 S500; main spindle path 1 command for right thread
4 M29; enable rigid tapping mode path 1
5 G84 Z-10 F1; fixed cycle (M1 thread execution)
6 G80; cancel fixed cycle and M29
7 …
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS
3010 INCORRECT OR MISSING FEED The F parameter (pitch) is incorrect or has not been specified
3011 Z AXIS NOT PROGRAMMED Neither the Z arrival value nor the W increment have been programmed

Auxiliary functions
Denomination: G88
Functionality: Enable fixed cycle for rigid tapping with X axis
Arguments: X U F
c d path 3
c d path 4
c all paths
a
d
c
c d path 3
c d path 4
a
d
c d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
k
j a modal
d
d
c
k at block end
j d self-cancelling
d
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c d alarm
c and: d G80
c
Also suspended by:
The G88 macro enables the fixed tapping cycle for the X axis.
[X]=Final point of thread.
[U]=Incremental distance from the start point to the final point of thread.
Values allowed: any, provided the final point of thread remains within the range of the physical
stops of the axis.
U is used as a replacement for X; it is not possible and serves no purpose to use both in the same
block.
[F]=Feed speed of the X axis linked to the G94 or G95 work mode.

1) Enable the spindle to use for tapping. The direction of the spindle defines the type of thread
(clockwise=right; counter clockwise=left)
2) Enable the rigidity of the spindle (rigid masking mode M29; M229; ...)
3) Enable the fixed tapping cycle (execution of the tapping)
4) Cancellation of the fixed cycle with G80 (end fixed cycle + cancellation of rigidity)
1 T0707 G0 Z20 Y0 tool (male) rapid positioning
X20;
3 M19 B0; main spindle path 1 orientation at 0°
4 M73 S500; motorized spindles path 1 command for right thread
6 G88 X5 F1; fixed cycle (M1 thread execution)
8 …
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS
3012 X AXIS NOT PROGRAMMED Neither the X arrival value nor the U increment have been programmed

Auxiliary functions
Denomination: G188
Functionality: Enable fixed cycle for rigid tapping with Y axis
Arguments: Y V F
c d path 3
c c path 4
d all paths
a
d
c
c d path 3
c c path 4
a
d
c d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
k
j a modal
d
d
c
k at block end
j d self-cancelling
d
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c c alarm
d and: d G80
c
Also suspended by:
The G188 macro enables the fixed tapping cycle for the Y axis.
[Y]=Final point of thread.
[V]=Incremental distance from the start point to the final point of thread.
Values allowed: any, provided the final point of thread remains within the range of the physical
stops of the axis.
V is used as a replacement for Y; it is not possible and serves no purpose to use both in the same
block.
[F]=Feed speed of the X axis linked to the G94 or G95 work mode.

1 Enable the spindle to use for tapping. The direction of the spindle defines the type of thread
(clockwise=right; counter clockwise=left)
2 Enable the rigidity of the spindle (rigid masking mode M29; M229; ...)
3 Enable the fixed tapping cycle (execution of the tapping)
4 Cancellation of the fixed cycle with G80 (end fixed cycle + cancellation of rigidity)
Note: During the execution of the G188 fixed cycle, the absolute quotas displayed for the X and Y
axes are not effective.
1 T1212 GO Y5 X0 Z-20; tool (male) rapid positioning
3 M219 B0; main spindle path 2 orientation at 0°
4 M273 S500; motorized spindles path 2 command for right thread
6 G188 Y-5 F1; fixed cycle (M1 thread execution)
8 ...
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS
3013 Y AXIS NOT PROGRAMMED Neither the Y arrival value nor the V increment have been programmed

Auxiliary functions
Denomination: G300
Functionality: Axes torque reduction / reset
Arguments: X Z Y
Allowed values: 5÷100 5÷100 5÷100
c c path 3
d path 4
d
c a all paths
d
c
c c path 3
d path 4
d
d
c
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
h
k a modal
d
c
k at block end
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c d alarm
c and: a G300 without arguments resets all axes to 100%
d
c
Also suspended by:
The G300 macro is used to reduce and reset the torque of the axes.
[X][Z][Y]= Are the axes to which a torque reduction is to be applied.
Values allowed: integer numbers from 5 to 100
The specified value corresponds to the % torque to be applied to the axis.
Note: It is not allowed to reduce the torque of vertical axes.

If you try to reduce this torque, the following alarm is generated:
3004 ATTENTION VERTICAL AXIS
Note: The torque of the axes must not be lower than 5% or higher than 100%.
If a torque that is not allowed is programmed, the respective alarms are generated:
3001 TORQUE REDUCTION X INCORRECT
3002 TORQUE REDUCTION Z INCORRECT
3003 TORQUE REDUCTION Y INCORRECT
Note: The tracking error is controlled for axes in torque reduction.

If an axis accumulates a tracking error greater than 2500 micron, it is immediately blocked and the
respective alarm is generated:
3036 TRACKING ERROR X AXIS
3037 TRACKING ERROR Z AXIS
3038 TRACKING ERROR Y AXIS
When low torques are used, an axis may not be able to move or may begin to move but may not reach the
final position because of a variation in friction (e.g. bar, chips, etc.).
By pressing the RESET push-button in any condition the torque of all the axes is reset to 100%. The
tracking error (if higher than 10 micron or 5 micron for Sprint 65 linear) is cancelled and the true
position is displayed on the screen.
Cancellation of a tracking error is carried out to make sure that the axis does not move during the
torque resetting (therefore all possible collisions are avoided).
1 G300 Z10; Axis torque Z1=10%
5 G300 Z10 Y20; Axes torque Z1=10% Y1=20%
6 G300; Reset axes torque path 1 to 100%
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS
3001/2/3 TORQUE REDUCTION <X,Z,Y> INCORRECT The torque % specified is not a permitted value
3036/7/8 TRACKING ERROR (X,Z,Y) AXIS The X axis tracking error is higher than 2500 micron
3004 ATTENTION VERTICAL AXIS It is not possible to reduce the torque of the vertical axes

Auxiliary functions
Denomination: G301
Functionality: Position control for the axis/axes in torque reduction
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d path 3
c c path 4
d a all paths
d
c
c d path 3
c c path 4
d
c d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
h
k c modal
c
k at block end
j a self-cancelling
d
c
Cancelled by: c
d reset d emergency
c c alarm
d and:
Also suspended by:
The G301 macro enables the position control for the axes with torque reduction.
This function is used to check that the axis in reduction has reached the programmed value with a
tolerance of 20 micron (5 micron for Sprint 65 linear).
No arguments are required since the position control is carried out for all the axes with torque
reduction.
The programming sequence is as follows:

1 Reduce the torque of the axis concerned (G300 Z10;)
2 Position the axis at the desired value (G1 G94 F700 Z32;)
3 Program the macro for the position control (G301;)
At this point if the Z axis is in position the G301 block is completed and the program continues the
execution of the subsequent blocks, otherwise the axis not in position alarm is generated.
The alarms for the X, Z, Y axes are:

3006 X AXIS NOT IN POSITION
3007 Z AXIS NOT IN POSITION
3008 Y AXIS NOT IN POSITION
The axis in position control can be used in different circumstances:
example 1: Checking the part cutting.

The counter spindle rotates synchronised to the main spindle, which supports the part while it is
being cut. Normally upon termination of the cutting, the main spindle collet opens and the counter
spindle continues to machine the part in path 2.
To check whether the part has been cut correctly before opening the collet of the counter spindle it
is necessary to reduce the Z2 axis torque by between 5% and 10%; move away by 2.5 mm max. and program
G301. If the part has not been cut, the Z2 axis, in reduced torque, has accumulated a tracking error
and alarm 3007 is generated.
example 2: Checking the correct part clamping with the counter spindle.
After having reduced the Z2 axis torque and having fit over the part with the counter spindle, pro-
gram G301. If the Z2 axis is not in position alarm 3007 is generated, if it is in position then the
program can continue closing the collet and the subsequent machinings.
1 M236; path 2: open collet main spindle path 2
2 G300 Z8; path 2: Z2 torque reduction to 8%
3 G1 G94 F800 Z-10; path 2: spindle fits over the part
4 G301; path 2: Z2 position control (part fitted over)
5 M237; path 2: open collet main spindle path 2
6 G300; path 2: reset Z2 torque to 100%
7 G1 G95 X-1; path 1: part cutting
8 G300 Z8; path 2: Z2 torque reduction to 8%
9 W2; path 2: Z2 moves away by di 2mm
10 G301; path 2: Z2 position control (part cut)
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS
3006 X AXIS NOT IN POSITION The X axis has not reached the position programmed
3007 Z AXIS NOT IN POSITION The Z axis has not reached the position programmed
3008 Y AXIS NOT IN POSITION The Y axis has not reached the position programmed

Auxiliary functions
Denomination: G302
Functionality: Stop control of Z2 axis
Arguments:
Allowed values:
d
c d
c path 3 path 4
d
c c all paths
d
c d
c path 3 path 4
d
a
d d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
h
k d modal
d
c
k at block end
j a self-cancelling
d
d
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c d alarm
c and:
Also suspended by:
The G302 macro enables the stop control of the Z2 axis (spindle collet rear in stop against part).
This function is used to accurately lock the part with the counter spindle collet.

1 Reduce the torque of the axis concerned (G300 Z10;)
2 Program the Z axis so that the spindle goes from rear to stop at the part and the value is 1 mm
beyond the stop point (G1 G94 F700 Z-11;)
3 Program the macro for the stop control (G302)
At this point, if the Z axis is correctly stopped, i.e. its tracking error is 1 mm (tolerance + or -
0.2 mm), the macro commands Z in the opposite direction until the tracking error has been zeroed out,
otherwise the relevant alarm is generated:
3009 Z AXIS NOT STOPPED
1 G300 Z6; Z2 axis torque reduction to 6%
2 G1 G94 F600 Z-11; Z2 positioning 1 mm beyond the stop (Z-10)
3 G302; Z2 stop control and cancellation of tracking error
4 ...
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS
3009 Z AXIS NOT STOPPED Z axis is not stopped against the part or within the tolerance threshold

Auxiliary functions
Denomination: G303
Functionality: Reload Z1 axis in masked time + part cutting
Arguments: A B W G F X P
Allowed values: 0;1;2 0-10000 see desc. 1 see desc. see desc. positive
d d path 2
c d path 3
c c path 4
d all paths
d
c
d d path 2
c d path 3
c c path 4
d
c d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
k
j d modal
d
c
k at block end
j a self-cancelling
d
d
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c c alarm
d and:
Also suspended by:
The G303 macro carries out the reloading of the Z1 axis in masked time during part cutting at the
safety diameter.
Description of function arguments:
[A]=Feed type for the axis controlled in masked time (COMPULSORY).
Values allowed: 0=rapid (G0); 1=work mm/min (G1 G94); 2=work mm/rev (G1 G95)
[B]=Feed speed for axis controlled in masked time (COMPULSORY for A=1 A=2).
Values allowed: for A=1(1-10000) for A=2(1-1000).
[W]=Incremental movement of the axis controlled in masked time (COMPULSORY).
Values allowed: real with max 3 decimal digits for measures in mm, 4 digits for measures in inches.
[G]=Feed type for the X axis controlled by the CNC (COMPULSORY).
Values allowed: 1=work.
[F]=Feed speed for cutting in X (COMPULSORY).
Values allowed: positive values with max 3 decimal figures.
[X]=X co-ordinated to cut the part up to the safety diameter (COMPULSORY).
Values allowed: real with max 3 decimal digits for measures in mm, 4 digits for measures in inches.
[P]=Waiting time in millisecs of Z1-loader desynchronisation before carrying out the movement in W.
Values allowed: positive integers.
1 Synchronise the counter spindle with the main spindle and carry out the rear machining of the
part.
2 Set the constant cutting speed, ex:G95 G96 S20;
3 Program the G303 macro to carry out the Z1 axis reloading and cutting at the X1 safety diameter in
the desired way. Ex: G303 A1 B6000 W35 G1 F1.3 X10 P500;
The following operations are carried out in this block:
A - the main spindle collet opens and the X1 axis starts cutting at the safety diameter at the set
speed (G1 F1.3 X10)
B - when the waiting time in milliseconds (P500) has elapsed for disabling the "loader-Z1 axis"
synchronism the Z1 axis reloading at the set speed (A1 B6000 W35) starts; in the meantime the
X1 axis continues to cut.
C - When Z1 has reached the programmed reloading position and is found exactly in position
(tracking error=0 micron) the main spindle collet closes.
D - The macro block finishes when either the reloading in Z1 or the cutting in X1 are completed.
Note: If the cutting reaches the programmed position before reloading is completed cutting auto-
matically moves backward by 0.2mm to prevent tool wear.
4 Program the completion of part cutting. Ex: X-1;
NOTE: If [P] is not specified then the value specified in the loader graphic page is taken as the
stand-by time (in milliseconds).
1 T0101 G0 Y0 X22; cuttong tool rapid positioning
2 G95 G96 S30; feed mm/rev + constant cutting speed of 30 m/min
3 G303 A0 W24 G1 F1.3 Z1 reload + cutting at safety diameter
X8 P500;
4 G1 X-1; part cutting completion
5 M5; main spindle stop path 1
6
7
8
9
10
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
Denomination: G304
Functionality: CDS user points ON / OFF (high pressure system)
Arguments: P Q
Allowed values: defined defined
c d path 3
c d path 4
c a
d
call paths
c d path 3
c d path 4
c d
cpath where programmed a
d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
k
j a modal
d
d
c
k at block end
j d self-cancelling
d
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c c alarm
a
d and: a G304 P0
d
c
Also suspended by:
Macro G304 enables and disables the high pressure system user points with the standard GITAL inter-
face for the CDS (cooling delivery system).

[P]: Number of CDS user points to enable or disable (COMPULSORY).
Positive values enable, negative values disable. 0 disables all the user points.
The CDS interface has 4 standard user points + another 4 additional user points in place of the
variable flow rate. In addition, there is the possibility to use the solenoid valves of the stan-
dard cooling system of the machine, if present and if the standard pumps are no longer used. User
points numbers 9 and 10 will have to be declared.
Values allowed:
1= enable user point n.1 -1= disable user point n.1 0= disable all user points
2= enable user point n.2 -2= disable user point n.2
10=enable user point n.10 -10= disable user point n.10
[Q]: Flow rate selection of user point 1 (OPTIONAL)

Values permitted: from 0 to 15. Generally the external device, if equipped with variable flow
rate, allows its correspondence to be configured.
Note: For a more detailed description of the CDS system configuration, refer to the programming
manual (user page).
1 G304 P1 Q10; user point n. 1 on + flow rate selection
2 G304 P2; user point n. 2 on
3 G304 P-1; user point n.1 off
5 G304 P3; user point n.3 on
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS
3029 CDS OPTIONAL NOT ENABLED The CDS system has not been enabled from user page (configure mach.)
3030 CDS CONFIGURATION ERROR Check user point configuration and pumps in appropriate user page

Auxiliary functions
Denomination: G305
Functionality: Polygon milling between spindles with possibility to report polygon milling unit
Arguments: M S P Q K B H
Allowed values: see below see below n. spindle n. spindle integer 0-360 1
c d path 3
c c path 4
d a all paths
d
c
c d path 3
c c path 4
d
c
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
h
k c modal
a
c
k at block end
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c c alarm
a
d and: d G305 without specifying arguments
c
Also suspended by:
Macro G305 has been created to carry out polygon milling using the chosen spindles (N.B. the standard
rotating tools cannot be used since they do not have an encoder with a 0 notch).
It's possible to carry out orientated polygon milling with those machine models, which have an exter-
nal microswitch fitted to the support of counter spindle tools with different transmission ratios.
Programming differences between multi-spindle type "B" & "C"
Type-B
The M S arguments are used to control the master spindle (P must not be used in the macro)
Type-C
The M S P arguments are used to control the master spindle
Description of the function arguments:
[M](Type-B)master spindle definition and rotation direction (COMPULSORY)
3 = spindle 1 path 1 CW rotation 203 =spindle 1 path 2 CW rotation
4 = spindle 1 path 1 CCW rotation 204 =spindle 1 path 2 CCW rotation
73= rotating tools path 1 CW rotation 273 =rotating tools path 2 CW rotation
74= rotating tools path 1 CCW 274 =rotating tools path 2 CCW rotation
(Type-C)definition of master spindle rotation direction(COMPULSORY)
3 =master spindle CW direction
4 =masterspindle CCW direction
[S]master spindle speed(COMPULSORY)
[P](Type-C)definition of master spindle (COMPULSORY FOR TYPE-C)
11=main spindle path 1 21=main spindle path 2
12=rotating tools path 1 22=rotating tools path 2
[Q]definition of slave spindle (polygon milling unit)(COMPULSORY)
11=main spindle path 1 21=main spindle path 2
12=rotating tools path 1 22=rotating tools path 2
[K]speed ratio of slave spindle as regards the master and rotation direction(COMPULSORY)
for positive values the slave spindle rotates clockwise
for negative values the slave spindle rotates counter clockwise
Ex. M3 S1000 Q21 Q-3
spindle 1 path 1 (master) rotates clockwise at 1000 rpm
spindle 1 path 2 (slave) rotates counter clockwise at 3000 rpm
[B]Slave spindle angular displacement(OPTIONAL)
from 0 to 360 degrees
[H]=1= Enabling of orientated polygon milling with external micro (OPTIONAL)
1 T0606 G0 X20 Z20; polygon milling tool rapid positioning
2 G305 M3 S800 Q21 K-4; polygon milling macro activation
3 G315; polygon milling synchrony reached stand-by macro
4 G305; polygon milling deactivation
5
6
8 G305 M3 S800 Q21 K-4 H1; referred polygon milling macro activation
9 ...
10 G305; polygon milling deactivation
11
ALARMS
1019 STOP CYCLE POLYGON MILLING Pressing ’Stop cycle’ in polygon milling ruins the part and may break cutter

Auxiliary functions
Denomination: G306
Functionality: Automatic survey of part origin
Arguments:
Allowed values:
d
c a path 3
d
c path 4
d
c c all paths
d
c d path 3
c path 4
d
a
d d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
h
k a modal
d
c
k at block end
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c d alarm
c and: a G52 Z ...
d
c
Also suspended by:
The G306 macro is used to automatically carry out the shift of the origin (G52 Z...) in the path in
which it is programmed. The origin shift is calculated in such a way that in the subsequent block by
programming the absolute value Z=0, the Z axis, with the corrector enabled, positions itself at the
edge of the part supported by the main spindle of path 1.
The shift value applied to the Z axis by means of the G52 Z... command is calculated
in the macro with the following formula:
Shift=-[(geometry + Z1 wear of the T corrector enabled on path 1)+(value of the absolute coordinate
of Z1)]
The G306 macro must be carried out when the Z1 axis is not in movement, otherwise the calculation of
the shift will not be correct. In addition, for each movement of the Z1 axis it is necessary to
reprogram G306 in order to recalculate the correct shift value to apply.
Note: The use of the G306 macro means the operator need not modify the shift value of the Z axis with
G52 whenever the corrector (geometry or wear) of the enabled tool is modified on path 1.
Note: The recall of another system of co-ordinates (G54;G55;G56;G57;G58;G59) does not cancel the
shift value applied with the macro and may be deduced from the fact that the macro applies the G52
function. Therefore upon recalling another system of co-ordinates it is necessary to recall the G52
function with the appropriate shift value in Z.
1 G52 Z50; path 1: origin of Z for machining start
2 T0101 X20 Y0 Z-20; path 1: tools rapid positioning
3 M100; M100; synchronisation of paths
4 G306; path 2: automatic calculation of origin Z2 axis
5 G0 Z2; path 2: positioning of tool at 2mm from part
6 ... …machining
8 T0202 X15 Y0 Z-30; path 1: tools rapid positioning
10 G306; path 2: calculation of Z2 origin for new Z1 position
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
Denomination: G307
Functionality: Automatic survey of part origin for counter-spindle machinings with path 3
Arguments: Z
Allowed values: see below
c d path 3
c c path 4
a
d d all paths
c
c d path 3
c c path 4
a
c d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
h
k c modal
a
c
k at block end
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c c alarm
d and: a G52 Z ...
d
c
Also suspended by:
The G307 macro is used to automatically carry out the shift of the origin (G52 Z...) in path 3. The
origin shift is calculated in such a way that in the subsequent block by programming the absolute
value Z=0, the Z3 axis, with the corrector enabled, positions itself at the edge of the part sup-
ported by the main spindle of path 2.
Note: The Z3 absolute value displayed after the automatic calculation is negative. This means that in
order to be able to machine the counter spindle part it is necessary to program (for path 3) the val-
ues in positive as opposed to in negative.
The shift value applied to the Z3 axis by means of the G52 Z.... command is calculated in the macro
with the following formula:
Shift=[(co-ordinated machine Z2 -32 -Z argument value of the G307 macro)-(value of co-ordinated
machine Z3 +90)]
The G307 macro must be carried out when the Z2 axis is not in movement, otherwise the calculation of
the shift will be incorrect.

[Z]: Value of shift enabled in path 2 and which must be recalled in the G307 macro
in order to carry out the calculation correctly (COMPULSORY).
Note: The G307 Z... macro is used in the tooling phase to zero set the geometries of the machining
tools on the main spindle path 2.
Note: The recall of another system of co-ordinates (G54;G55;G56;G57;G58;G59) does not cancel the
shift value applied with the macro and may be deduced from the fact that the macro applies the G52
function. Therefore upon recalling another system of co-ordinates it is necessary to recall the G52
function with the appropriate shift value in Z.
1 G52 Z20; path 2: origin of Z (part projecting)
2 T3232 Z200 X -30; path 2: fixed positioning main spindle path 2
4 G307 Z20; path 3: automatic origin calculation path 3
5 T1313 G0 Z-2 X0 Y0; path 3: rapid tool positioning at 2 mm from part
6 supported in the main spindle path 3
7 G1 G94 F500 Z10; path 3: 10mm entry into the part (positive for G307)
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
Denomination: G308
Functionality: Master encoder path spindle selection (multi-spindle-type-c)
Arguments: P
c d path 3
c d path 4
c c all paths
a
d
Referred to: c
d path 1 d path 2
c d path 3
c d path 4
a
d d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
h
k c modal
a
c
k at block end
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c d alarm
c and:
Also suspended by:
The G308 macro is present in machines with 3 paths (and subsequent models), which implement the
multi-spindle-type-c operations.
Macro G308, by means of the P argument, allows you to select the encoder of any spindle present in
the machine to be used as reference for the path in which it is programmed. This means that the feeds
in G95 (mm/rev) in the path are referred to the revs of the spindle declared with the G308 macro.

[P]: Number of reference spindle for the feeds of the path (COMPULSORY).
Values allowed: any, provided that the specified number corresponds to an existing spindle.
11= main spindle path 1 21= main spindle path 2
12= motorised spindles path 1 22= motorised spindles path 2
32= motorised spindles path 3
1 M03 S100 P11; M03 S200 P21; M03 S310 P32; Spindle rotation command for the various paths
2 M03 S110 P12; M03 S210 P22; Spindle rotation command for the various paths
3 G308 P12; Motorised spindles encoder selection path 1 for path 1
4 G1 G95 F1 Z20; path 1: feed speed = 110 mm/min
5 G308 P11; Main spindle encoder selection path 1 for path 2
7 G308 P32; Motorised spindles encoder selection path 3 for path 1
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
Denomination: G309 d
c ISO code
Functionality: Apply thermal dilation compensation to declared axes
Arguments: X Y Z
Allowed values: da -1 a +1 da -1 a +1 da -1 a +1
c d path 3
c d path 4
c a all paths
d
c
d
c d path 3
c d path 4
c d
c concerned device
h at block start
j
k c at CNC start-up
h
k c modal
a
c
k at block end
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c a alarm
d
c and: d .....
c
c
c
G309 permits compensation of the axis that causes dimensional variations in the part being milled due
to temperature.
G309 called out at the top of the program, at the start of each piece, moves the origin dimension of
the declared axis/es, according to the value given by the "THERMAL COMPENSATION COEFFICIENT" vari-
able.
The "THERMAL COMPENSATION COEFFICIENT" variable follows the progress of temperature over time,
according to the specifications defined in the dedicated user page.
1 Program start Operations only carried out at program start
2 N100 .....
3 N200 .....
4 G309 X0,04 Z0,02 Compensates X dimension by 0.4 mm with machine cold
5 Z dimension is 0.02 mm
6 Piece execution Continues piece milling
7 Piece execution
8 Piece execution
9 M99 P200
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS
3020 PROGRAMMING ERROR argument or specified value incorrect or not allowed

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Functionality: Supplementary spindle command (electrical nsk - pneumatic)
Arguments: M P
c d path 3
c d path 4
c c all paths
a
d
c d path 3
c d path 4
d a
d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
h
k c modal
a
d a suspended by cycle stop
d
c
k at block end
j d self-cancelling
d
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c a alarm
d
c and: d .....
c
c
c
Macro G310 manages commands (clockwise/anti-clockwise rotation; stop) for

supplementary spindles.
Supplementary spindles are optional and come in various different models.
Description of topics:
[M]:Command type (OBLIGATORY)
Permitted values:
M3= enabling (ON) / rotation command (clockwise)
M4= enabling + inversion of direction (anti-clockwise)
M5= disabling (OFF) / chuck shutdown (stop)
note: There are different models of supplementary spindles.

-pneumatic: with 2 modes (ON/OFF)=(M3/M5)
-electric: with up to 3 modes (ON-CW/ON-CCW/OFF)=(M3/M4/M5)
[P]:Spindle no. to command (OBLIGATORY)

Permitted values: [1÷n] n=number of optional spindles enabled
P1= spindle no. 1
P2= spindle no. 2
P3= spindle no. 3
for example:
G310 M3 P1 supplementary spindle 1 clockwise rotation
G310 M3 P2 supplementary spindle 2 clockwise rotation
G310 M4 P2 supplementary spindle 2 anti-clockwise rotation
G310 M5 P1 supplementary spindle 1 clockwise stop
note: The hold and reset conditions of standard spindles also apply to
supplementary spindles. For instance, when the machine stops at the end of the cycle
(block M1) spindle rotation is suspended (hold), and resumed
when the cycle starts again
1 G310 M3 P1 supplementary spindle 1 (ON/clockwise rotation
command)
2 G1 G94 F500 X10; operation
3 G0 X40; rapid withdrawal
4 G310 M5 P1 supplementary spindle 1 (OFF/stop rotation)
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS
3020 PROGRAMMING ERROR One of the topics or the value specified is wrong, not permitted
3039 OPTION NOT ENABLED The supplementary spindle option commanded with [P] is not enabled

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Functionality: Await synchrony reached in polygon milling
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d path 3
c c path 4
d a
d
c all paths
d
c d path 3
c c path 4
d d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
k
j a modal
d
c
k at block end
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c c alarm
d
a and: d .....
c
d
d
Macro G314 executes the data lock until spindle speed synchrony is reached in polygon milling.
For machine models with dcs, it may happen that if the working area door is opened, polygon milling
does not function correctly on restarting the cycle, meaning that the spindles do not achieve speed
synchrony.
To stop milling if this problem arises, macro G315 has to be programmed before the polygon milling
block. This prevents the tool from breaking.
1 G305 M3 S500 Q21 K-1 polygon milling activation macro
3 G315; polygon milling synchrony reached stand-by macro
4 G1 G95 F0.3 X10; polygon milling
5 G0 X40; rapid back stroke
6 G305; polygon milling cancellation macro
7 ...
8 M1;
9 M99;
10
11
12
13
14
15
ALARMS
3020 PROGRAMMING ERROR macro G315 must be programmed without argument

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Functionality: Bush-spindle phase displacement monitoring re-centring
Arguments:
Allowed values:
c d path 3
c d path 4
c c all paths
a
d
c d path 3
c d path 4
d a
d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
h
k c modal
a
c
h at block end
k
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
d reset d emergency
c d alarm
c and: d ....
c
c
c
Function G320 is for bush phasing, that takes place during bar machining preliminary operations from
GITAL page “SPINDLES ANGULAR PHASING”.
G320 function can be programmed in MDI mode or in AUTOMATIC mode and requires the following
conditions:
- after CNC power-on and execution of the search for encoder zeroes using the specific button
(message 2009 BUSH REFERENCE EXECUTION REQUEST);
- from GITAL page the SECTION BARS MACHINING is activated;
- there is no message 2017 BAR-BUSH COLLISION HAZARD;
- the difference as to the old supervision reference point is less than 1.75 degrees.
If any of these conditions are missing, the function is executed without effect.
1 Main program In main program
2 …
3 M5 P11 bush-spindle synchronising deactivation
4 G91 incremental mode for axes control
5 /M36 collet opening
6 Z1… workpiece reloading
7 G90 absolute mode for axes control
8 M37 collet closure
9 G4 P300 pause of 300 ms
10 /G320 phase control centre correction is not executed with
slashed block active because there is no material reload,
and in any case it would be run with no physical spindle-
bush link
12 …
13 M3 S… P11 bush-spindle synchronising reactivation
14
15
16 Bar change In bar change sub-program
sub-program
17 M3 S50 P11 power to spindle, bush synchronising activation
18 …
19 M69 waiting for new bar insertion
20 M37 collet closure
21 G91 incremental mode for axes control
22 #3003=1 single block disable
23 Z… new bar insertion in bush
24 G90 absolute mode for axes control
26 G320 phase control centre correction
28 M5 P11 spindle and bush power disable
29 #3003=0 single block re-enable
30
31
32
ALARMS

Auxiliary functions
c ISO code
Functionality: Turbothreader start-up, speed control and shut-down
Arguments: M S
c d path 3
c c path 4
d a all paths
d
c
c d path 3
c c path 4
c a
d
c concerned device
h at block start
k
j c at CNC start-up
h
k c modal
a
c
k at block end
j d self-cancelling
c
Cancelled by: c
a reset
d a emergency
d
c c alarm
a
d and: d .....
c
d
d
Macro G330 is used to command clockwise and anti-clockwise rotation and shutdown of the
turbothreader.
The permitted topics are:
[M]:direction of rotation or shutdown (OBLIGATORY)

3= clockwise
4= anti-clockwise
5= stop rotation
[S]:turbothreader rotation speed in rpm (OBLIGATORY)

the maximum setting is 4000 rpm.
Note: to prevent the turbothreader from overheating, it may be necessary to

command water cooling.
1 M8 start machine cooling with offtake to turbothreader
2 G330 M3 S2000 start turbothreader at 2000 rpm
3 … thread operations
4 G330 M5 turbothreader shutdown
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
ALARMS
1201 PHASE DRIVE HIGH TEMPERATURE possible problem caused by the failed cooling of the motor with coolant.
1202 FAULT DUE TO SPEED ERROR TFDD speed does not fall within the set tolerance
indicates absence of communication between the CNC and the drive that controls the
3020 PROGRAMMING ERROR
turbothreader

Alarms and Messages
12 Alarms and Messages
alarm 1001 assigned ■ Operator, □ Maintainer

text EMERGENCY ENABLED
Alarm with immediate and controlled stop, opening of HW authorisation to axes/spindles feeder and CNC
effect
in emergency.
cause Indicates that the “mushroom” push button has been pressed.
intervention Release the push button and press the machine start push button.

text MACHINE OFF
effect Alarm with immediate and controlled stop, opening of HW authorisation to axes/spindles feeder.
cause Indicates that the power circuits are not enabled, in this situation themachine cannot operate in any way.
intervention Press the machine start push button.

text SLIDING DOOR OPEN
effect Alarm with immediate and controlled stop, opening of HW authorisation to axes/spindles feeder.
cause The sliding door is open at cycle start.
intervention Check that the door is in a condition allowed.

text SLIDING DOOR UNLOCKED
effect Alarm with immediate and controlled stop.
cause At cycle start the sliding door is not in the safety condition
intervention Release the door unlocking push button before operating cycle start.

text SIDE GUARDS OPEN
effect Alarm with immediate and controlled stop, opening of HW authorisation to axes/spindles feeder
cause The side guards are open
intervention Check that the side guards are closed, check the locks.
Allarmi e messaggi Fanuc 310 en rev.2012-08 Page 12-1

Alarms and Messages

text BARS AUTOMATIC LOADER SIDE GUARDS OPEN
effect Alarm with immediate controlled stop, HW open consent to spindle axes feeder
cause Bars Automatic Loader side guards are open, causing a hazard for the operator
intervention Check closure of side guards, check interlocks.
alarm 1008 assigned □ Operator, ■ Maintainer

text CYCLE END THERMOMAGNETIC SWITCHES
effect Alarm with cycle end stop
cause A thermal protection of the auxiliary motors has intervened with low priority
intervention Check and restart the switches and/or thermomagnetic switches;

text IMMEDIATE THERMOMAGNETIC SWITCHES
cause A thermal protection of the auxiliary motors has intervened with high priority.
intervention Check and restart the switches and/or thermomagnetic switches;

text LOW COOLANT FLOW
effect Alarm with cycle end stop.
cause Insufficient quantity of coolant in the linear motor cooling circuit.
intervention Check the coolant level in the cooling circuit.

text HIGH REFRIGERATOR TEMPERATURE
effect Alarm with cycle end stop.
cause The refrigerator is unable to lower the temperature of the linear motor.
intervention Check the good operation of the refrigerator compressor.

text PSM FEEDER ANOMALY
effect Alarm with immediate and controlled stop, HW authorisation disabled from axes/spindles feeder.
cause axes and spindle hardware problems
Note the error code of the feeder marked A2831 and refer to the
intervention maintenance manual of the CNC Fanuc for further information.
Page 12-2 Allarmi e messaggi Fanuc 310 en rev.2012-08

Alarms and Messages

text CONDITIONER ANOMALY E.S.
effect Alarm stops with the end of the cycle, excluding the restart of the cycle until resolution of the problem
cause Hardware problems regarding electric system conditioner
intervention Clean the filters. If the alarm persists, contact Service

text BOX OVERHEATING
The thermostat is not correctly adjusted, the fan or air conditioner
cause
are not operational, the electric box is too hot.
intervention Check the thermostat, fan or air conditioner;

text LOW PRESSURE
The pressure of the pneumatic system is not sufficient for normal machine operation, or the line pressure
cause
gauge is not correctly adjusted.
intervention Check the line pressure and calibration of the pressure gauge;

text STOP CYCLE IN TRAVERSING
Cycle Stop or Reset has been pressed during traverse working with risk of tool breakage. Speed
cause
synchronising between tool and workpiece is not guaranteed during acceleration and deceleration.
intervention Check traversing inserts, press Reset and restart cycle from beginning.

text PROGRAMMING ERROR
effect alarm causing immediate and controlled stop
An attempt has been made to execute a program block containing a M function, in one of the following
incorrect situations:
• spindle rotation when the contouring function is enabled;
• spindle orientation when the rigid tapping or spindles synchronism function is enabled;
cause • spindle contouring mode when the rigid tapping or spindles synchronism function is enabled;
• spindle rotation when the rigid tapping function is enabled;
• spindles synchronism when the rigid tapping or spindles orientation function is enabled;
• rigid tapping when the spindles synchronism function is enabled
• contouring mode enabling from a channel different from that belonging to the spindle
intervention Modify the program in order to prevent incorrect situations.

Alarms and Messages

text S” CODE COMPULSORY
An attempt has been made to execute a program block including the M functions for spindle rotation
cause
without indicating the speed “S” argument (M3 Ppp, M4 Ppp).
intervention Correct the program in order to include the “S” argument.

text B” CODE COMPULSORY
An attempt has been made to execute a program block including the M functions for spindle orientation
cause
without indicating the “B” argument of the positioning angle.
intervention Correct the program in order to include the “B” argument.

text DIFFERENT SADDLE PROGRAM N.
cause At the start of cycle execution it results that the program no. selected in the channels is different.
Check the program numbers or should it be necessary carry out different programs, disable the control
intervention using the “SLIDES MANAGEMENT” user page

text PROGRAM NOT REWOUND
cause Upon pressing the reset key or when selecting automatic mode the programs are not rewound correctly.
intervention Press the reset key and check that the programs start from the first phrase.

text SUCTION FILTER CLOGGED
effect Stop at the end of the cycle
cause The electrical filter of the oil mist suction unit indicates that the filter is clogged.
intervention Clean or replace the filter as indicated by the device manufacturer.

Alarms and Messages

text PROGRAM M560
effect Alarm with immediate and controlled stop
Reset was pressed while the axis X2 had migrated to channel 1; in this circumstance, the axis is retrieved
cause
on channel 2 without the prior reset of the tool offsets
intervention Program the function M560 on both channels to restore the proper functioning of the function T

text RESTART THE CNC
effect Alarm with immediate and controlled stop
The emergency was pressed while the axis X2 had migrated to channel 1, or the signal of current migra-
cause
tion has been dropped unexpectedly.
intervention Restart the CNC to restore the normal functioning

text WORK PIECE PROGRAM: IMMEDIATE STOP
effect Immediate stop
cause Function M90 run from the work piece program
intervention Perform the corrective action recommended by the developer of the work piece program.

text WORK PIECE PROGRAM: STOP AT THE END OF THE CYCLE
effect Stop at the end of the cycle
cause Function M91 run by the work piece program

text X AXIS BRAKE LOCKED
cause Air pressure insufficient for pneumatic unlocking of the X1 axis, whose movement is inhibited.
intervention Check the line pressure and calibration of the pressure gauge

text MOTOR X1 OVERHEATING
cause the heat probe has detect hot motor temperature linear X1
intervention check motor draw, correct operation of motor cooling system (where applicable), call for assistance

Alarms and Messages

text MOTOR X3 OVERHEATING
cause the heat probe has detect hot linear X3 motor temperature
intervention check motor draw, correct operation of motor cooling system (where applicable), call for assistance

text SPINDLE ORIENTATION ANOMALY
After programming the orientation, the main spindle has not reached the specified position within the time
cause
limit of 1 second.t
Check possible mechanical resistance to spindle rotation, note the error code of the drive marked with
A2721 and refer to the maintenance manual of the Fanuc, for main spindle.
intervention If the alarm is displayed on path2, this is the counterspindle, control the drive signed A3021.

text COLLET OPEN
one of the following operations was performed with the collet open:
• AUTOMATIC mode selected from another mode
cause
• cycle RESET in AUTOMATIC mode
the alarm will appear on Path 1 for the main spindle and on path 2 for the frontal spindle
intervention Exit automatic mode and close the collet.

text COLLET OPENING ANOMALY
At opening command, the collet has not opened within the time limit of 5 seconds.
cause
For motorized collet, this indicates that the maximum collet opening time was exceeded.
Check possible mechanical resistance, in the case when the collet
is not open despite the alarm check the registration of the micro
switch.
For motorized collets, the motor position is considered instead of the proximity switch is considered to
establish whether the collet is open. The alarm can be reset only by closing the collet using the respective
intervention button (in mode other than AUTOMATIC). Check for motor alarm (1074).

Alarms and Messages

text COLLET CLOSURE ANOMALY
At closure command, the collet has not opened within the time limit of 5 seconds.
cause
For motorized collet, this indicates that the maximum collet closing time was exceeded.
Check possible mechanical resistance, in the case when the collet is not closed despite the alarm check
the registration of the micro switch
For motorized collets, the motor position is considered instead of the proximity switch is considered to
establish whether the collet is closed.
Check whether bar is present in collet (message 2013) during closing position learning stage (M37B...
function programming). Check on the respective page the position reached by the motor and change the
position of the ring if needed (N.B. the ring position must only be modified during this stage). The alarm
can only be reset when the collet is opened using the respective button (in other than AUTOMATIC
intervention mode). Check for motor alarm (1074).

text COLLET OPEN NOT ENABLED
effect Alarm with immediate and controlled stop..
collet opening conditions are not present, e.g. spindle not still or open collet rotation function not
programmed (M33 Path 1 and M233 Path2)
Note only for Sprint42linear and Speed20-11linear:
when part ejector is in contact (collet closed with part clamped + ejector forward) and open the main
cause
spindle collet on path 2 in the following conditions:
1) machine not in automatic mode
2) machine in automatic mode + cycle on hold
3) machine in automatic mode + cycle reset
intervention make sure that the spindle is still or that the M33 function is present in the program

text COLLET WIRING ERROR
At opening command the micro switch signalled collet closure or at closure command the micro switch
cause
did not signal the collet opening.
intervention Check the wiring or the pneumatic connections.

text MAIN COOLANT ALARM
cause The flow control device does not signal the presence of coolant, after programming function M08.
intervention Check the presence of coolant, the hydraulic connections, pump M1171

Alarms and Messages

text AUXILIARY COOLANT ALARM n (with n=1,2,3)
The device that controls the coolant flow has not detected any coolant for the service indicated in the
alarm number.
cause On standard systems, this number corresponds for example to the CNC that controls the axes. On CDS
(Coolant delivery system) systems , this corresponds to the service number displayed in the correspon-
ding page.
Verify that the coolant is present and inspect the hydraulic connections. If the flow is restricted due to the
passage of a tool (gun tip), it may be advisable to use function M to disable the control (M58, M258,
M358, M670, M672, M674 etc.) and enable it once more once the machining operation has been comple-
intervention ted (M59, M259, M359, M671, M673, M675 etc.).

text PART NOT EJECTED
cause The part has not been ejected from the counter spindle after collet opening.
Pull out the part by hand from the counterspindle, in case this is not stuck.
REMARK:
In the case of rear ejection of the part disable the control using the “MACHINE MANAGE-
intervention MENT” user page.

text PART NOT PRESENT
In machines equipped with controlled ejection, it is issued when the
cause collet is closed and the part is present, when the part ejection micro
switch is intercepted.
intervention Check the clamping elements, in the case the part is present

text WORK PIECE EJECTOR NOT FULLY RETRACTED
On machines with a proximity switch that controls the retraction of the work piece ejector, this proximity
cause
switch is not detected when the ejector is moved backwards.

Alarms and Messages

text PART UNLOADER ANOMALY
cause The part unloader is not in the commanded position or it does not reach the position in the time allowed.
Check that the unloader is not mechanically held, if the part unloader reaches the commanded position,
intervention but the alarm persists this means that the CNC does not receive signals from the position micro switch.

text PART UNLOADER FORWARD
cause An attempt has been made to start the cycle with the part unloader in forward position.
intervention Bring the part unloader backward using function M521.

text PART UNLOADER NOT IN HOME POSITION
A start cycle instruction has been given, while part unloader is in part pick-up position, with consequent
cause
collision hazard between machine components.
Restore home position conditions, programming following M function in CNC MDI mode:
M864: Arm return to disengagement position;
M862: Arm rotation in part evacuation position
M866: Unloader in part evacuation position;
intervention M868: Parts unloader box closure

text PART UNLOADER COLLISION HAZARD
collision hazard between unloader components, in case of programming functions M861, M862, M865
cause
and M866
in case of:
function M861, it is necessary to program M864 and M865;
function M862, it is necessary to program M864;
function M865, it is necessary to program M864 and M862;
intervention function M866, it is necessary to program M864 and M862;

text AXES Z2-Y2 IN COLLISION AREA
cause The command set for the axes mentioned makes them collide into each other.
intervention Manually move the axes away from the collision area and cancel the alarm.

Alarms and Messages

text BAR CHANGE STOPPED
cause the cycle was stopped during automatic bar change
intervention reset machine and loader

text BAR FEEDER ANOMALY
cause The bar feeder is OFF or does not transmit the ready signal to the machine’s CNC.
intervention Check the connections, refer to the bar feeder documentation for details of the anomaly.

text CENTRE 1: BREAK
cause The tool no.1 detector has detected a break in the centre.
intervention Replace the tool, if the tool is not broken check the setting of the tool detector.

text CENTRE 1: DETECTOR ANOMALY
cause Tool no.1 detector is not operational.
Check the stroke of the feeler pin, the connections, refer to the tool detector documentation for details of
intervention the anomaly.

cause Tool no.2 detector has detected a break in the centre.


Alarms and Messages

intervention Replace the tool, if the tool is not broken check the setting of the tool detector.n




text MACHINE TANK MAXIMUM LEVEL
cause the coolant in the machine tank has reached maximum level 15 and may spill out
check and adjust amount of coolant in the machine tank and in the CDS unit so that the levels are
intervention balanced; check the maximum level float

Alarms and Messages

text CDS: IMMEDIATE STOP
cause The external cooling system (CDS) has a problem that prevents it from continuing to operate.
Check the anomaly on the CDS operation panel and refer to the documentation, if there is no warning
intervention check the connections with the lathe.

text CDS: END OF CYCLE STOP
cause The external cooling system (CDS) has a problem that does not require an immediate intervention.
Check the anomaly on the CDS operation panel and refer to the documentation, if there is no warning
intervention check the connections with the lathe..

text CDS: WAITING FOR EXCESSIVE FEED
The external cooling system (CDS) is delayed for more than one minute during the enabling of the axes
cause
feed authorisation; in this circumstance it is necessary to stop the work cycle.
intervention Check the anomaly on the CDS operation panel and refer to the documentation.

text TANK OVERFLOW LEVEL
the coolant contained in the sliver tank has reached the maximum level and cannot be poured to the filte-
cause
ring tank.
intervention verify the coolant level, the operation of the pouring pump, the level gauge, or modify the program.

text SISTER TOOL : STOP AT CYCLE END
effect At cycle end (M01), stop the automatic execution of the program.
The sister tool management program has found that the number of parts set for one or more tools is ter-
cause
minated..
Check, in the SISTER TOOL page, the expired tool, replace the insert and reload the defined number of
intervention parts.

Alarms and Messages

text LOAD MONITOR: FEED DIFFERENT FROM 100%
effect Alarms or messages with stop at cycle end.
The tool monitoring system Load Monitor has found that the trimmer
cause of the feed speed is set at a percentage different from 100%, causing a current absorption different from
the nominal rate.
intervention Adjust the override to 100% and repeat the cycle.

text LOAD MONITOR: IMMEDIATE STOP
cause The tool monitoring system Load Monitor has detected a broken tool.
Replace the tool, or in the case it is not broken, check the settings of the system as described in the appli-
intervention cation documentation.

text LOAD MONITOR: CYCLE END STOP
cause The tool monitoring system Load Monitor has detected a worn tool
Replace the tool or in the case of insufficient wear, check the settings of the system as described in the
intervention application documentation.

text LOAD MONITOR: BLOCK END STOP
effect Alarm with stop at block end.
cause The tool monitoring system Load Monitor has detected a missing tool.
Mount the tool or, if a tool is present, check the settings of the system as described in the application
intervention documentation.

text AUTOMATIC SWITCH OFF IN PROGRESS
The set hour, the set production has been reached or the lathe is in an alarm condition with automatic
cause switch off enabled; when the time specified in the user page has elapsed, which is relevant to the auto-
matic switch off, the electric supply to the lathe is disconnected.
In the case you wish to interrupt the switch off sequence press RESET and disable the switch off pro-
intervention grammed from the user page

Alarms and Messages

text COMPULSORY MAINTENANCE
cause One or more hour counters regarding maintenance have expired therefore the cycle cannot continue.
Carry out maintenance for the applications concerned and confirm the operation using the “MAINTE-
intervention NANCE” user page, at this point it is possible to restart the cycle.

text DEVICE 1 STOP AT END OF CYCLE
effect alarm with end of cycle stop
This alarm is generated when an optional input is assigned to an external device applied to the machine
cause
by a user
intervention Check the external device which generated the alarm

text DEVICE 2 STOP AT END OF CYCLE
cause
by a user

text DEVICE 1 STOP NOW
effect alarm with immediate stop
cause
by a user

text Check the external device which generated the alarm
effect alarm with immediate stop
cause
by a user

Alarms and Messages

text REVOLVER UNLOCKING FAILURE
effect alarm with immediate and controlled stop
When the revolver unlocking is commanded, one of the following conditions occurs:
cause • the signal from the pressure of the hydraulic line for the blocking of revolver brake (X5.5) is equal to
+24 V.
Check the correct operation of the pneumatic-hydraulic pressure multipler.
Check for air presence in the line of pneumatic pressure multipler.
intervention Check the electrical signal of the pressure of the hydraulic line.

text REVOLVER LOCKING FAILURE
When the revolver locking is commanded, one of the following conditions occurs:
0 V.
Check for air presence in the line of pneumatic pressure multipler.
Check for any air bubbles in the hydraulic line to activate the brake revolver.
intervention Check the electrical signal of the pressure of the hydraulic line.

text REVOLVER MECHANICAL JOINT FAILURE
When the revolver locking is commanded, one of the following conditions occurs:
+24 V.
Check the electrical signal of the pressure of the hydraulic line.
intervention Check for air presence in the line of pneumatic pressure multipler.

text REMOVE THE TAP ADAPTER KEY
effect Immediate and controlled stop
When the key for the adjustment of the tap adapter clamping force is inserted and one of the following
conditions occur:
cause • The CNC is set to MDI or Automatic mode
• Axis Z1 is close to the tap adapter (height below the programmed value)
• When the rotation of the main spindle is started using the corresponding key in MANUAL CNC mode
To run blocks of the work piece program in CNC MDI or AUTOMATIC mode, it is necessary to remove the
clamping force adjustment key from the tap adapter.
To reset the alarm when the CNC is in manual mode, it is sometimes necessary to distance axis Z1 from
the tap adapter area.
intervention Note: the alarm must always be acknowledged with button RESET.

Alarms and Messages

text DIRECTION OF ROTATION OF THE PATH 3 MOTOR-DRIVEN TOOLS INVERTED: PROGRAM T0000
After programming a tool ranging from T11xx to T18xx, the directions of rotation of motor-driven tools
cause
along path 3 are inverted as compared to those at machine start-up.
intervention Program T0000 in MDI to restore the correct directions of rotation after the machine start.

text REMOVE BUSHING FROM BAR LOADER
effect alarm with immediate controlled stop
Although the lathe is in rotary bushing mode (cfr. ”swiss type” field on “Machine Configuration” page),
cause
the bushing in the bar loader has not been removed
intervention Remove the loader bushing; after removing the alarm, it will be possible to move axis Z1

text INSTALL BAR LOADER BUSHING
effect alarm with immediate controlled stop
Although the lathe is in fixed head mode (cfr. ”lathe” field on “Machine Configuration” page), the bar loa-
cause
der bushing is not installed correctly
intervention Install the loader bushing; after removing the alarm, it will be possible to move axis Z1
alarm 1211 assigned ■ Operator, □ Maintenance

text REFRIGERANT FILTER M504 DIRTY
When the counter spindle claw cleaning is ordered by the M504 function, the pressure gauge coupled
cause
with the refrigerator filter shows that the filter itself is clogged.
intervention Check the filter status and eventually replace it.
alarm 1212 assigned ■ Operator, □ Maintenance

text REFRIGERANT M504 FLOW ABNORMALITY
When the counter spindle claw cleaning is ordered by the M504 function, the pressure gauge shows a
cause
lack of flow.
intervention Check the correct pump activation and correct refrigerant flow; check the status of the refrigerant filter.

Alarms and Messages

text EXHAUSTED CNC BATTERY
effect read-only message
cause The battery that powers the CNC memory when the machine is switched off is exhausted
intervention replace the battery with the machine on as not to lose the stored data

text MACHINE IN TOOLING MODE
cause tooling mode is selected
the axes can be displaced both with the door closed and open, with
intervention the two hand command

text PWM SPINDLES NOT DEACTIVATED WITH DOOR OPEN
the working area door is open and one of the contactors for deactivating power to the spindles is still
cause
energised (stuck)
intervention Check spindle power cut-off contactors and PLC input signal related to this state (X5.7)

text LOW VOLTAGE AXIS MOTOR ENCODER BATTERY
cause the voltage of one of the axis drive encoder batteries is low
replace all axis batteries with new batteries as soon as possible. Refer to the maintenance manual for
intervention details on the replacement procedure.

text AXIS MOTOR ENCODER BATTERY FLAT
cause one of the axis motor drive encoder batteries is flat
replace all axis batteries with new batteries as soon as possible without switching off the CNC to prevent
loss of referencing data associated to the flat battery
intervention Refer to the maintenance manual for replacement details.

Alarms and Messages

text TAP ADAPTER REFERENCING
This message prevents the operator from running blocks of the work piece program in AUTOMATIC and
MDI mode.
effect
If the clamp of the main spindle is closed, message 2009 stops the movement of axis Z1 in negative
direction.
Message 2009 displays when the CNC is started if the function that controls the lag between the spindle
cause and tap adapter has been activated in row “MACHINING OF SHAPED BARS” on page GITAL “ANGU-
LAR TIMING OF SPINDLES”.
To reset the message, it is first necessary to search the zero positions of the encoders of the spindle and
tap adapter motors by performing the following procedure:
• Reset all the alarms
• Close the clamp of the main spindle
• Select Channel 1 (Path1) of the CNC
• Select the CNC JOG mode
• Press the corresponding button on the control panel
During the search of the zero position of the encoders, the following events occur:
• The main spindle is rotated for 3 revolutions
• The procedure is paused for 2 seconds
intervention • The tap adapter is rotated for 3 revolutions

text DANGER OF COLLISION BETWEEN THE SHAPED BAR AND TAP ADAPTER
effect Message 2017 causes the immediate stop of the machine (cycle stop) and of the movements of axis Z1.
This message is generated by the function that controls the lag between the spindle and tap adapter
when the following conditions occur:
cause • When the supervision function has been activated by means of row “MACHINING OF THE SHAPED
BARS” on page GITAL “ANGULAR TIMING OF SPINDLES”.
• The alignment error detected by the supervision function is above 1.3 degrees.
To reset the message, it is first necessary to realign the tap adapter and spindle, for example by pressing
the dedicated button on the control panel after selecting Channel 1, the CNC JOG mode and verified that
there are no active alarms.
If the bar does not allow the alignment operation to be carried out with button JOG (the tap adapter
moves along with the bar and spindle), it is necessary to redefine the centre for the control of the lag
between the spindle and tap adapter by means of row “TAP ADAPTER TIMING” on page GITAL “ANGU-
intervention LAR TIMING OF SPINDLES”.

text LOW LEVEL OF TOTAL LOSS LUBRICATION
cause signals that the lubrication oil level is below the minimum
Add oil, if this is not sufficient
intervention (0: level below minimum, 1: level higher than minimum)

Alarms and Messages

text TOTAL LOSS LUBRICATION PRESSURE NOT REACHED
effect Message displayed only.
Signals that the pressure has not been reset in the lubrication system,which must be produced between
cause
one oil pulse and another.
intervention Check the pump operation or possible defects of the pressure gauge.

text CHIP CONVEYOR OVERLOAD
cause Excessive machining residue prevents operation of the chip conveyor.
intervention Remove the material from the chip removal area.

text CHIP CONVEYOR BLOCKED
Despite attempts, carried out in automatic by the conveyor, to unblock the belt or endless screw from the
cause
obstruction, the problem persists.
intervention Find the cause blocking the belt or endless screw and eliminate it.

text OVERLOAD CONTROL DEVICE FAULT
The behaviour of the “chip conveyor overload control device” is abnormal, for this reason the logic system
cause
thinks it has a failure.
intervention Make sure that this device operates correctly.

text PART UNLOADER CHUTE FULL
effect messages with stop at end of cycle
cause one of the part collection chute photocells has detect that the chute is full
intervention empty the chute

Alarms and Messages

text FEEDER: BAR CHANGE PHASE
Warns the operator that the machining cycle is suspended waiting
cause
for completion of the bar change.
intervention At completion of the bar change, the message is automatically cancelled.

text FEEDER: BAR MAGAZINE EMPTY
cause Warns the operator that the loader’s bar magazine is almost empty.
intervention Add new bars in the magazine.

text CDS: MESSAGE WARNING OR ADVANCE WARNING
cause The exterior cooling system (CDS) requires maintenance but not immediate.
Check that the type of maintenance requested on the CDS operation panel and refer to the documenta-
intervention tion, if there is no warning check the connections with the lathe.

text CDS: WAITING FOR FEED ENABLE
The message indicates that upon expiry of the timer that masks the stop of the axes feed, the lathe is still
cause
waiting for permission from the external cooling system (CDS)
intervention When permission is received from the CDS, the message is automatically cancelled.

text AUTOMATIC SWITCH OFF: SET HOUR REACHED
The machine switch off hour has been reached, if the condition persists the programs will be stopped to
cause
coincide with function M01 and the switch off phase will be started (alarm no. 1083).
It is possible to interrupt the switch off phase by changing the switch
intervention off hour in the user page.

Alarms and Messages

text SET PRODUCTION REACHED
The quantity of parts set in the “PRODUCTION DATA” page has been reached, if the condition persists
cause the programs will be stopped to coincide with function M01 and the switch off phase will be started (alarm
no. 1083)
It is possible to interrupt the switch off phase by changing the number of parts requested in the appro-
intervention priate user page.

text AUTOMATIC SWITCH OFF: MACHINE IN ALARM
The AUTOMATIC SWITCH OFF function has been enabled from the relevant user page, the set hour has
cause
been reached, or an alarm has intervened, therefore the machine stopping process has started..
intervention Wait until the main switch has tripped, after which reset it and switch on the machine.

text MAINTENANCE ADVANCE WARNING
cause Warns that some maintenance parameters will be exhausted shortly.
intervention Check in the “MAINTENANCE” user page which item among those listed requires an intervention.

INCOHERENT INPUT [X5.0 D12.0]
text
(MAC ON BUTTON)
DCS secure inputs reserved for double safety control (X5.0 input I/O link & DI3 .1 input FSSB) different
cause
machine on button state
intervention check state and wiring on the wiring diagram of the respective inputs

text
(MAC SLIDING DOOR)
DCS secure inputs reserved for double safety control (X5.1 input I/O link & DI2 .1 input FSSB) different
cause
working area sliding door state

Alarms and Messages

text
(MAC SIDE GUARDS)
DCS secure inputs reserved for double safety control
cause (X5.2 input I/O link & DI2 0.2 input FSSB)
different machine side guard state

text
(TOOLING KEY)
DCS secure inputs reserved for double safety control (X5.3 input I/O link & DI2 0.3 input FSSB) different
cause
tooling mode selection key state

text
(JOG BUTTON)
DCS secure inputs reserved for double safety control
cause (X5.4 input I/O link & DI2 0.4 input FSSB)
different jog button state

INCOHERENT INPUT [X5.5 DI2.5]
text
(CAB SIDE GUARDS)
DCS secure inputs reserved for double safety control (X5.5 input I/O link & DI2 .5 input FSSB)
cause
different bar loader side guard state

text
(OPEN DOOR BUTTON)
cause
open door request button state

Alarms and Messages

text
(SPINDLE PWM OFF)
cause
power contactor state

text
(EMERGENCY STOP)
DCS secure inputs reserved for double safety control (X8.4 input I/O link & DI3.0 input FSSB)
cause
different machine emergency stop state

INCOHERENT INPUT [SDI3.1]
text
(SPINDLE1 # 1 ACTIVE)
DCS secure inputs reserved for double safety control (G335.1 software signal & DI3.1 input Input FSSB)
cause
different spindle 1 slide 1 power

text
(SPINDLE 2 # 1 ACTIVE)
cause
Note: the G335.2 signal is managed only on software level; check state and wiring referring to the wiring
intervention diagram of the respective FSSB input

text
cause

Alarms and Messages

text
DCS secure inputs reserved for double safety control (G335.4 software signal & DI3.4 input FSSB)
cause

text
DCS secure inputs reserved for double safety control (G335.5 software signal & DI3.5 input FSSB)
cause

text MAINTENANCE NEEDED ELAPSED TIME (H):
when the reminder function application is enabled,
cause
this message appears every 250 hours to remind the user that maintenance is required
intervention perform machine maintenance as specified in the operator manual

text TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE NEEDED ELAPSED TIME (H):
when the reminder function application is enabled, this message appears every 2000 hours to remind the
cause
user to contact assistance for complex maintenance operations
intervention contact assistance to define the intervention and order spare parts
alarm from 3001 to 3003 assigned ■ Operator, □ Maintainer

text TORQUE REDUCTION < X, Z, Y > INCORRECT
effect Alarm with program interruption, axes and spindles stop.
The torque reduction requested for the indicated axis is outside the
cause
allowed limits.
intervention Change the programmed reduction value.

Alarms and Messages

text ATTENTION VERTICAL AXIS
cause Torque reduction is requested for a vertical axis, this is not permitted.
intervention Change the program.

text AXIS NOT PRESENT
cause Torque reduction is requested for an axis not present in the Path.
intervention Change the program.
alarm 3006 - 3008 assigned ■ Operator, □ Maintainer

text AXIS < X, Z, Y > NOT IN POSITION
The axis subject to torque reduction has NOT reached the programmed position due to the presence of
cause
an obstacle in its path.
intervention Check process and remove obstacle.

text AXES < X, Z, Y > NOT STOPPED AGAINST
The axis subject to torque reduction has reached the position, it has
cause
NO tracking error, therefore it cannot be stopped against the part..
intervention Check the machining, check the program.

text INCORRECT OR MISSING FEED
G84, G88, G188 have been programmed without the F parameter, which indicates the feed, or it has
cause
been stated using an incorrect value.
intervention Check the program and modify the instruction.

Alarms and Messages

text AXIS < X, Z, Y > NOT PROGRAMMED
effect Alarm with program interruption, axes and spindles stop..
During programming of one the G88, G84, G188 functions, the
cause
respective parameter X, Z or Y has been omitted.
intervention Check the program and modify the instruction.

text POLYGON MILLING MICRO SWITCH NOT OK
Function G305 of polygon milling with timing, has searched unsuccessfully for the reference micro switch
cause
therefore it has stopped.
intervention Check the correct operation of the polygon milling reference micro switch.

text PROGRAMMING ERROR
cause
intervention

text T CORRECTOR NOT ENABLED
cause
intervention

text INVALID G CODE
cause The programming of function G10 L50 is not permitted.
intervention Cancel this function from the program.

text CDS OPTION NOT ENABLED
cause Function G304 has not been enabled from the user page.
intervention Enable the CDS device from the user page.

Alarms and Messages

text CDS CONFIGURATION ERROR
cause The high pressure unit has not been correctly configured from the user page.
intervention Configure the CDS device from the user page.

text SLIDE <1, 2, 3, 4> DISABLED
effect Alarm causing program, axis and spindle stop.
Function G303 of reloading in masked time cannot operate if slide 2
cause
has been disabled from the user page.
intervention Enable slide 2 from the user page.

text OPTIONS 9000 NOT ENABLED
cause Function G188 has been programmed on a machine model which does not have the Y2 axis.
intervention Cancel function G188 from the program.

text AXIS <X, Z, Y> TRACKING ERROR
cause With function G300 the torque has reduced so much that the axis cannot reach the requested value.
intervention Increase the torque to the indicated axis.

Alarms and Messages

ERROR: invalidrestore
OFFENDING COMMAND: restore
STACK:
-savelevel-
-savelevel-
/Action
[0 0 0 ]
/Border
[589 2803 4652 2672 ]
/Rect
-mark-
/Action
[0 0 0 ]
/Border
[589 2530 4652 2430 ]
/Rect
-mark-
/Action
[0 0 0 ]
/Border
[589 2372 4652 2272 ]
/Rect
-mark-
/Action
[0 0 0 ]
/Border
[589 2186 4652 2055 ]
/Rect
-mark-
/Action
[0 0 0 ]
/Border
[589 1913 4652 1813 ]
/Rect
-mark-
/Action
[0 0 0 ]
/Border
[589 1788 4652 1688 ]
/Rect
-mark-
/Action
[0 0 0 ]
/Border
[589 1663 4652 1563 ]
/Rect
-mark-
/Action
[0 0 0 ]
/Border
[589 1538 4652 1438 ]
/Rect
-mark-
/Action
[0 0 0 ]
/Border
[589 1413 4652 1313 ]
/Rect
-mark-
/Action
[0 0 0 ]
/Border
[589 1288 4652 1188 ]
/Rect
-mark-
/Action
[0 0 0 ]
/Border
[589 1163 4652 1063 ]
/Rect
-mark-

SPRINT42-10linear-FA-BA-v4.0-en

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SPRINT42-10linear-FA-BA-v4.0-en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SPRINT 42|10 linear

CNC FANUC 310

Gildemeister Italiana S.p.A.

These instructions contain information about:

use tooling and tuning the machine

machine programming activities maintenance

Manufacturer’s identification data

Name Gildemeister Italiana S.p.A.

_ Planá _ Milano _ Finland

DMG / MORI SEIKI Europe AG

DMG MORI Deutschland

DMG MORI Austria DMG MORI Schweiz

DMG / MORI SEIKI Deutschland GmbH

Worldwide at your service

Hexi District, Tianjin 300203 Tel.: +65 66 60 66 88

DMG MORI Korea

DMG MORI USA

DMG MORI CINCINNATI DMG MORI HOUSTON DMG MORI SEATTLE

PRO.D6076/0114US D6136/0314AD7 Subject to modification.

DMG MORI USA

2 Description of the basic machine

4 Technical machine data

5 Toolholders and accessories

7 Starting and using the machine

9 Transport and installation

12 Alarms and Messages

Name CNC turning centre

Model SPRINT 42|10 linear

Serial Number see plate on board machine

General view of the lathe

Identification plate example

SPRINT42|10linear-FA-BA-v4.0-en Page 1-1

1.2 EC Declaration of Conformity

Declaration of Conformity example

Directive 2006/95/CE Low Voltage Directive

Directive 2004/108/CE Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive

EN ISO 23125:2010 Machine tools - Safety - Lathes

EN 61000-6-4:2007 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)

EN 60204-1: 2006 Safety of machinery - Electrical equipment of machines - Part 1: General

Page 1-2 SPRINT42|10linear-FA-BA-v4.0-en

1.4 Machine equipment

The machine is provided with:

Set of service keys for routine and supplementary maintenance.

1.5 Property Information

This manual contains copyrighted information

1.5.1 Customer prohibitions

SPRINT42|10linear-FA-BA-v4.0-en Page 1-3

1.5.2 Software license

1.5.3 Intellectual property rights and confidentiality

1.7 After-sale assistance service

Page 1-4 SPRINT42|10linear-FA-BA-v4.0-en

2 Description of the basic machine

SPRINT42|10linear-FA-BA-v4.0-en Page 2-1

2.1 Control axes configuration

Page 2-2 SPRINT42|10linear-FA-BA-v4.0-en

2.1.1 Main spindle

Fig. 2-2 Main spindle

SPRINT42|10linear-FA-BA-v4.0-en Page 2-3

2.1.2 Main spindle block with Rotating bush (optional)

Without Rotating bush Standard configuration Turning short pieces

Fig. 2-3 Main spindle and rotating bush

Page 2-4 SPRINT42|10linear-FA-BA-v4.0-en

2.1.3 Slide X2-Z2 and counterspindle

Fig. 2-4 Slide X2 - Z2 and counterspindle